2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owners Manual

Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-8 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Performance and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-31
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-42
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-50 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-58 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-67
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-72
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Conversions and
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-36
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-15
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Recommended Fluids, Vehicle Data Recording and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-8 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-12 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-104 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this
For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your
substitute the name “General dealer or from:
Motors of Canada Limited” for
The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, it appears in this manual. ce guide en français auprès du
and vehicle body designs appearing concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not If the vehicle has the Duramax® suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo, diesel engine, see the Duramax
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET diesel supplement for additional and Helm, Incorporated
Emblem, SILVERADO, and Z71 specific information on this engine. P.O. Box 07130
are trademarks and/or service Detroit, MI 48207
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
marks of General Motors LLC, its hybrid supplement for more 1-800-551-4123
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. information. Numéro de poste 6438 de
This manual describes features that langue française
Keep this manual in the vehicle for www.helminc.com
may or may not be on your specific quick reference.
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25965913 C Third Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and
about the vehicle, use the Index These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
in the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number information relating to a specific
where it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual
the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury safety symbol which means “Do
or death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart " : Charging System : : Oil Pressure

Here are some additional symbols I : Cruise Control g : Outside Power Foldaway
that may be found on the vehicle Mirrors
and what they mean. For more B : Engine Coolant Temperature
information on the symbol, refer to O : Exterior Lamps } : Power
the Index.
# : Fog Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
0 : Adjustable Pedals . : Fuel Gauge > : Safety Belt Reminders
9 : Airbag Readiness Light + : Fuses 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
# : Air Conditioning 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam _ : Tow/Haul Mode
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer F : Traction Control
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls j : LATCH System Child M : Windshield Washer Fluid
or OnStar® Restraints
$: Brake System Warning Light *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Sensing System for

Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Rear Vision
Steering Wheel Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-30
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Throttle and Brake Pedal Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Universal Remote System . . . 1-31
Instrument Panel (Premium Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-19 Performance and Maintenance
Initial Drive Information StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-8 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-33
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-33
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-34
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Vehicle Features Driving for Better Fuel
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Roadside Assistance
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-26 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-27
Head Restraint Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version)
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑10. F. Shift Lever. See Automatic I. Integrated Trailer Brake
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Transmission on page 9‑42. Controller (If Equipped). See
See Turn and Lane-Change Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Trailer Towing on page 9‑89.
Signals on page 6‑6. Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode J. Exterior Lamp Controls on
Windshield Wiper/Washer on on page 9‑46. page 6‑1.
page 5‑4. Range Selection Mode (Allison K. Data Link Connector (DLC)
C. Driver Information Center (DIC) Transmission and Hydra-Matic® (Out of View). See Malfunction
Buttons. See Driver Information 6‐Speed Button) (If Equipped). Indicator Lamp on page 5‑24.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑32. See Manual Mode on L. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 9‑45. page 10‑5.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑5 (Out of View). G. Infotainment on page 7‑1. M. Parking Brake on page 9‑64.
E. Instrument Cluster on H. Instrument Panel Storage on N. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8.
page 5‑12. page 4‑1.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑6
(If Equipped).
1-4 In Brief
O. Cruise Control on page 9‑69. U. StabiliTrak® System on W. Climate Control Systems (with
P. Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 9‑67 (If Equipped). Air Conditioning) on page 8‑1 or
page 5‑2. Ultrasonic Parking Assist on Climate Control Systems (with
page 9‑72 (If Equipped). Heater Only) on page 8‑4 (If
Q. Horn on page 5‑4. Equipped).
R. Steering Wheel Controls on Pedal Adjust Button (If
Equipped). See Adjustable Dual Automatic Climate Control
page 5‑2 (If Equipped). System on page 8‑5 (If
Throttle and Brake Pedal on
S. Automatic Transfer Case page 9‑31. Equipped).
Control (If Equipped). See X. Power Take Off (PTO) Control
Four-Wheel Drive on Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).
See “Brakes” in the Duramax (If Equipped). See Power Take
page 10‑34. Off (PTO) in the Duramax diesel
diesel supplement.
T. Ashtray (If Equipped). See supplement.
Ashtrays on page 5‑11 and V. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
Y. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If
Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑10. Equipped). See Airbag On-Off
Switch on page 3‑37.
In Brief 1-5
2 NOTES
1-6 In Brief
Instrument Panel (Premium Version)

In Brief 1-7
A. Air Vents on page 8‑10. J. Integrated Trailer Brake Dual Automatic Climate Control
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Controller (If Equipped). See System on page 8‑5
See Turn and Lane-Change Trailer Towing on page 9‑89. (If Equipped).
Signals on page 6‑6. K. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8. U. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
Windshield Wiper/Washer on L. Automatic Transfer Case Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped).
page 5‑4. Control (If Equipped). See See Ashtrays on page 5‑11 and
Four-Wheel Drive on Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑10.
C. Instrument Cluster on page 10‑34.
page 5‑12. M. Data Link Connector (DLC) V. StabiliTrak® System on
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on (Out of View). See Malfunction page 9‑67 (If Equipped).
page 6‑5 (Out of View). Indicator Lamp on page 5‑24. Pedal Adjust Button (If
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic N. Hood Release. See Hood on Equipped). See Adjustable
Transmission on page 9‑42. page 10‑5. Throttle and Brake Pedal on
page 9‑31.
Range Selection Mode O. Parking Brake on page 9‑64.
(If Equipped). See Manual Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
P. Cruise Control on page 9‑69. page 9‑72 (If Equipped).
Mode on page 9‑45.
Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).
F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑46 page 5‑2.
(If Equipped). See “Brakes” in the Duramax
R. Horn on page 5‑4. diesel supplement.
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) S. Steering Wheel Controls on
Buttons. See Driver Information W. Passenger Airbag Off Control
page 5‑2. (If Equipped). See Airbag
Center (DIC) on page 5‑32. T. Climate Control Systems (with
On-Off Switch on page 3‑37.
H. Infotainment on page 7‑1. Air Conditioning) on page 8‑1 or
Climate Control Systems (with
I. Exterior Lamp Controls on Heater Only) on page 8‑4 (If
page 6‑1. Equipped).
1-8 In Brief
Initial Drive See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Information Operation on page 2‑3.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the Remote Vehicle Start
important features that may or may With this feature the engine can be
not be on your specific vehicle. started from outside of the vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer Starting the Vehicle
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry 2. Press Q.
(RKE) System K: Press to unlock the driver door.
3. Immediately after completing
The RKE transmitter is used to Press K again within three seconds
Step 2, press and hold / until
remotely lock and unlock the doors to unlock all remaining doors.
the turn signal lamps flash.
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Q: Press to lock all doors. Lock
When the vehicle starts, the parking
the vehicle. and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle lamps will turn on and remain on as
Personalization (with DIC Buttons) long as the engine is running. The
on page 5‑50. doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
L : Press and release to locate
the vehicle. Press L and hold for
more than two seconds to sound
the panic alarm. Press L again to
cancel the panic alarm.
In Brief 1-9
The engine will continue to run for Door Locks Windows

10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote There are several ways to lock and Turn the hand crank on each door
start can be extended only once. unlock the vehicle. to manually raise or lower the
From outside, use the Remote manual windows.
Canceling a Remote Start
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or Power Windows
To cancel a remote start: the key in the driver door. From
. Aim the RKE transmitter at inside, use the power door locks or
the vehicle and press and the manual door locks. To lock or
unlock the door with the manual
hold / until the parking locks, push down or pull up on the
lamps turn off. manual lock knob.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. Power Door Locks
. Turn the ignition on and then If available, these switches are on
back off. the front doors.
See Remote Vehicle Start on K: Press to unlock the doors.

page 2‑5. Q: Press to lock the doors.
See Door Locks on page 2‑7. Crew Cab Shown
If available, the power window
switches are located on each of the
side doors in the front and rear.
1-10 In Brief
The driver door has a switch for the Power Sliding Rear Window Seat Adjustment
passenger window and rear
windows. Manual Seats
Push the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
For more information, see:
. Windows on page 2‑18.
. Power Windows on page 2‑18.
On vehicles with a power sliding

rear window, the switch is located in
the overhead console. See Rear To adjust the seat:
Windows on page 2‑19.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
The power sliding rear window
cannot be operated manually. 2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
. Push to open the window.
3. Try to move the seat back and
. Pull to close the window. forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
for more information.
In Brief 1-11
Power Seats
. If available, raise or lower the Power Lumbar
entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑5 for more information.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
. On vehicles with two-way
forward or rearward. lumbar, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control to
. If available, raise or lower the increase or decrease lumbar
front or rear part of the seat support.
cushion by moving the front or
If equipped, increase or decrease
rear of the control up or down.
manual lumbar support by turning
the knob forward or rearward.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
1-12 In Brief
. On vehicles with four-way Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright
lumbar, press and hold the front position:
or rear of the control to increase Manual Reclining Seatbacks
or decrease lumbar support. To 1. Lift the lever fully without
raise or lower the height of the applying pressure to the
support, press and hold the top seatback, and the seatback will
or bottom of the control. return to the upright position.
See Lumbar Adjustment on 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
page 3‑7 for more information. make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback
to make sure it is locked.
In Brief 1-13
Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat and
seatback recliner, both outside
mirrors, and the throttle and
brake pedals, if equipped.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑15
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑31 for
more information.
Not all mirrors and adjustable
throttle and brake pedals will
have the ability to save and
To adjust a power seatback, recall their positions.
if equipped: On vehicles with the memory
feature, the controls on the driver 2. Press and hold “1” until
. Tilt the top of the control door are used to program and recall two beeps sound.
rearward to recline. memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the adjustable 3. Repeat for a second driver
. Tilt the top of the control forward position using “2.”
to raise. throttle and brake pedals,
if equipped. To recall, press and release “1”
See Reclining Seatbacks on or “2.” The vehicle must be in
page 3‑8 for more information. P (Park). A single beep will sound.
The seat, outside mirrors, and
adjustable throttle and brake pedals,
if equipped, will move to the position
previously stored for the identified
driver.
1-14 In Brief
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Heated Seats Head Restraint

Pedals” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑5 and Vehicle
Adjustment
Personalization (with DIC Buttons) Do not drive until the head restraints
on page 5‑50 for more information. for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
To achieve a comfortable seating
This feature can move the seat
position, change the seatback
rearward to allow extra room to exit
recline angle as little as necessary
the vehicle.
while keeping the seat and the head
B : Press to recall the easy exit restraint height in the proper
seat position. The vehicle must be position.
in P (Park).
For more information see Head
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Pedals” under Power Seat If available, the controls are on the Adjustment on page 3‑3.
Adjustment on page 3‑5 and Vehicle driver and passenger doors.
Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑50 for more information.
I : Press to heat the
seatback only.
J: Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑10.
In Brief 1-15
Safety Belts Sensing System for The passenger airbag status

indicator will be visible on the
Passenger Airbag overhead console when the vehicle
The passenger sensing system, is started.
if equipped, turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. The driver
airbags, seat‐mounted side impact
airbags and roof‐rail airbags are not
affected by this.
If the vehicle has one of the United States
indicators pictured in the following
illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position unless
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use there is an airbag off switch located
in the glove box.
safety belts properly.
If there is an airbag off switch, the
. Safety Belts on page 3‑12. Canada and Mexico
vehicle does not have a passenger
. How to Wear Safety Belts sensing system. See Airbag On-Off See Passenger Sensing System on
Properly on page 3‑16. Switch on page 3‑37 for more page 3‑40 for important information.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑22. information.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑56.
1-16 In Brief
Mirror Adjustment See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑14 or Interior Mirror

Power Mirrors on page 2‑15.
Exterior Mirrors Vehicles with a manual rearview
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, mirror can be adjusted to see clearly
they can be adjusted for a clearer behind the vehicle. Hold the mirror
view of the objects behind you. in the center to move it up or
Manually pull out the mirror head to down and side to side. To reduce
extend it for better visibility when headlamp glare during nighttime
towing a trailer. See Trailer-Tow use, push the tab forward for
Mirrors on page 2‑14. daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Power Foldaway Mirrors
Vehicles with the automatic dimming
To fold the mirrors:
feature will automatically reduce
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out the glare of lights from behind the
to the driving position. vehicle. The dimming feature comes
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to on and the indicator light illuminates
Vehicles with outside power mirrors the folded position. each time the vehicle is started.
and foldaway mirrors have controls See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
located on the driver door. Mirror on page 2‑17 for more
Manually fold the mirrors inward information.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
to prevent damage when going
driver or passenger side mirror.
through an automatic car wash.
2. Press the arrows on the control To fold, pull the mirror toward the
pad to move the mirror up, vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
down, right, or left. to return to its original position.
3. Press either (A) or (B) again to See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑15.
deselect the mirror.
In Brief 1-17
Steering Wheel 3. Release the lever to lock the Press the bottom of the control to
wheel in place. move the pedals closer to your
Adjustment body. Press the top of the control to
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. move the pedals away.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Throttle and Brake Pedal Pedal on page 9‑31.
Adjustment
Interior Lighting
On vehicles with this feature, you
can change the position of the Dome Lamps
throttle and brake pedals. The dome lamps are located in the
overhead console.
They come on when any door is
opened and turn off after all the
doors are closed.
The tilt lever is located on the lower Turn the instrument panel
left side of the steering column. brightness knob located below the
To adjust the steering wheel: The control used to adjust the dome lamp override button,
pedals is located on the instrument clockwise to the farthest position to
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull manually turn on the dome lamps.
the lever. panel below the climate control
system. The dome lamps remain on until the
2. Move the steering wheel up knob is turned counterclockwise.
or down.
1-18 In Brief
Dome Lamp Override Reading Lamps Exterior Lighting

The dome lamp override button is For vehicles with reading lamps in
located next to the exterior lamps the overhead console, press the
control. button located next to the lamp to
turn it on or off.
The vehicle may also have reading
lamps in other locations. To turn the
lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.
For more information about interior
lamps, see: The exterior lamps control is located
. Dome Lamps on page 6‑8. on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
. Reading Lamps on page 6‑9.
O : Turns off the automatic
. Instrument Panel Illumination headlamps and Daytime Running
Control on page 6‑8. Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
k : Press the button in and the turn the automatic headlamps or
dome lamps remain off when a door DRL back on.
is opened. Press the button again to
return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when
a door is opened.
In Brief 1-19
For vehicles first sold in Canada, 5 : Turns on the headlamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer
the off position will only work when parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). panel lights, roof marker lamps (if
AUTO: Automatically turns on the equipped) and license plate lamps.
headlamps, parking lamps, For more information, see:
taillamps, instrument panel lights,
roof marker lamps (if equipped) and
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
license plate lamps. page 6‑1.
;: Turns on the parking lamps,
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
taillamps, instrument panel lights, on page 6‑3. 8: Single wipe, turn to 8, then
roof marker lamps (if equipped) and . Fog Lamps on page 6‑6. release. Several wipes, hold the
license plate lamps. band on 8 longer.
9 : Turns the windshield
wipers off.
1-20 In Brief
6: Turn the band up for more Climate Controls

frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes. These systems control the heating, cooling, and ventilation.
6 : Slow wipes. Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning)
? : Fast wipes.
L : Push the paddle at the top of
the lever to spray washer fluid on
the windshield.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
A. Fan Control E. Outside Air

B. Temperature Control F. Air Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Conditioning
In Brief 1-21
Climate Control System (With Heater Only)
A. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems (with

B. Temperature Control Air Conditioning) on page 8‑1 or
Climate Control Systems (with
C. Air Delivery Mode Control Heater Only) on page 8‑4.
1-22 In Brief
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Range Selection Mode
The Range Selection Mode switch,

if equipped, is located on the shift
lever. To enable the Range
Selection feature, move the column
shift lever to the M (Manual)
A. Driver and Passenger H. Display position. The current range will
Temperature Controls I. Power Button appear next to the M. This is the
B. Fan Control highest attainable range with all
J. Rear Window Defogger
lower gears accessible. As an
C. AUTO K. Air Conditioning example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
D. Defrost L. PASS (Passenger) selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)
E. Air Recirculation gears are available.
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
F. Outside Air System on page 8‑5.
G. Air Delivery Mode Control
In Brief 1-23
Press the plus/minus buttons, Four-Wheel Drive Manual Transfer Case

located on the steering column shift
lever, to select the desired range of If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,
gears for current driving conditions. you can send the engine's driving
See Manual Mode on page 9‑45. power to all four wheels for extra
traction.
While using Range Selection Mode,
cruise control and the Tow/Haul Transfer Case Buttons
mode can be used. The vehicle will have one of these
Grade Braking is not available when three styles of transfer case
Range Selection Mode is active. controls. Use these controls to shift
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑46. into and out of the different
Four-Wheel Drive modes.
This transfer case shift lever is on

the floor to the right of the driver.
1-24 In Brief
Electronic Transfer Case Automatic Transfer Case AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel

Drive): This setting is ideal for
use when road surface traction
conditions are variable.
4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use the
Four-Wheel-Drive High position
when extra traction is needed, such
as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations.
N (Neutral): Shift the transfer case
to Neutral only when towing the
vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle
Towing on page 10‑99 or Trailer
This transfer case knob is located This transfer case knob is located Towing on page 9‑89.
next to the steering column. next to the steering column.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This
Each transfer case design offers setting sends maximum power to all
different drive options. The list four wheels. You might choose
below describes the different drive Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are
options that may be available. driving off-road in deep sand, deep
mud, deep snow, and while climbing
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This
or descending steep hills.
setting is used for driving in most
street and highway situations. See Four-Wheel Drive on
page 9‑50.
In Brief 1-25
Vehicle Features 4: Press to switch the display

between the radio station frequency
Radio(s) and the time. While the ignition is
off, press this button to display the
time. Press to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,
or WMA song. If information is
available during XM, CD, MP3,
or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line
of the display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑2.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat
Entertainment System (RSE) and
Rear Seat Audio System (RSA), see
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑36 and Rear
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between Seat Audio (RSA) System on
and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped. page 7‑46 for more information.
decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
1-26 In Brief
Storing Radio Stations 2. Press H to display HR, MIN, For more information, refer to:
A maximum of 36 stations can be MM, DD, and YYYY (hour, . www.xmradio.com or call
stored as favorites using the six minute, month, day, and year). 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
softkeys located below the radio 3. Press the softkey located under . www.xmradio.ca or call
station frequency tabs and by using any one of the labels to be 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
the radio FAV button. Press FAV changed.
to go through up to six pages of See Satellite Radio on page 7‑10.
favorites, each having six favorite 4. To increase or decrease the time
stations available per page. Each or date, turn f clockwise or Portable Audio Devices
page of favorites can contain any counter‐clockwise.
This vehicle may have an auxiliary
combination of AM, FM, or XM For detailed instructions on setting input located on the radio faceplate
stations. the clock for the vehicle's specific and a USB port located in the center
For more information, see “Storing audio system, see Clock on console or on the dashboard.
Radio Stations” in AM-FM Radio on page 5‑7. External devices such as an iPod®,
page 7‑8. laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
Setting the Clock
Satellite Radio changer, or USB storage device can
be connected to the auxiliary port
XM is a satellite radio service using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable
To set the time and date:
based in the 48 contiguous United or the USB port depending on the
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ States and 10 Canadian provinces. audio system.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then XM satellite radio has a wide
press O, to turn the radio on. variety of programming and See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”
commercial-free music, coast to and “Using the USB Port” in
coast, and in digital-quality sound. Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑31.
A fee is required to receive the
XM service.
In Brief 1-27
Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls b g : Press to silence the vehicle

speakers only. Press again to turn
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
the sound on. Press and hold longer
system, it allows users with a
than two seconds to interact with
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,
make and receive hands-free calls
if equipped.
using the vehicle’s audio system
and controls. + e − e : Press to increase or
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone decrease volume.
must be paired with the Bluetooth c x : Press to reject an
system before it can be used in the incoming call, or to end a call.
vehicle. Not all phones will support
all functions. For more information, SRCE: Press to switch between
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth. the radio and CD, and for equipped
vehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,
For more information, see Bluetooth If available, some audio controls and rear auxiliary.
on page 7‑48. can be adjusted at the steering ¨ : Press to seek the next radio
wheel. station, the next track or chapter
w/cx: Press to select preset while sourced to the CD or DVD
or favorite radio stations, select slot, or to select tracks and folders
tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate on an iPod or USB device.
an iPod or USB device. For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
1-28 In Brief
Cruise Control SET − : Press to set the speed and The navigation system provides
activate cruise control or make the detailed maps of most major
vehicle decelerate. freeways and roads. After a
[ : Press to disengage cruise destination has been set, the
control without erasing the set system provides turn-by-turn
speed from memory. instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system
See Cruise Control on page 9‑69. can help locate a variety of points of
interest (POIs), such as banks,
Navigation System airports, restaurants, and more.
If the vehicle has a navigation See the navigation system manual
system, there is a separate for more information.
navigation system manual that
includes information on the radio, Driver Information
The cruise control buttons are audio players, and navigation Center (DIC)
located on the left side of the system.
The DIC display is located at the
steering wheel.
bottom of the instrument panel
T : Press to turn the system on cluster. It shows the status of
or off. The indicator light is on when many vehicle systems and enables
cruise control is on and turns off access to the personalization menu.
when cruise control is off.
+ RES : Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to
accelerate.
In Brief 1-29
The compass and outside air Vehicle Customization

temperature will also be shown in
Some vehicle features can be
the display. The temperature will be
programmed by using the DIC
shown in °C or °F depending on the
buttons next to the steering wheel.
units selected.
These features include:
T: Press to display the oil life, . Language
units, tire pressure readings for
vehicles with the Tire Pressure . Door Lock and Unlock Settings
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer . RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback
brake gain and output information
for vehicles with the Integrated . Lighting
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, . Chime Volume
The DIC buttons are located on the engine hours, compass zone
instrument panel, next to the setting, and compass recalibration.
. Memory Features
steering wheel. See Vehicle Personalization (with
U: Press to customize the feature
Some vehicles do not have the settings on your vehicle. See DIC Buttons) on page 5‑50.
buttons shown, however some of Vehicle Personalization (with DIC
the menus can be viewed by using Buttons) on page 5‑50 for more
the trip odometer reset stem. information.
3 : Press to display the V : Press to set or reset certain
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, functions and to turn off or
average economy, fuel used, timer, acknowledge messages on the DIC.
instantaneous economy and Active
For more information, see Driver
Fuel Management™ indicator,
Information Center (DIC) on
and transmission temperature.
page 5‑32.
1-30 In Brief
Rear Vision Ultrasonic Parking Assist Power Outlets

Camera (RVC) If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking Accessory power outlets can be
If available, the rear vision camera Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the used to plug in electrical equipment,
displays a view of the area behind rear bumper to detect objects while such as a cell phone, MP3
the vehicle when the vehicle is parking the vehicle. URPA comes player, etc.
shifted into R (Reverse). This is on automatically when the shift lever The vehicle may have two
displayed on the inside rearview is moved into R (Reverse) and accessory power outlets located
mirror or the navigation screen, operates at speeds less than 8 km/h below the climate control system,
if equipped. (5 mph). URPA uses audio beeps to or may have one accessory power
provide distance and system outlet and one cigarette lighter. The
To clean the camera lens, located in information.
the bezel for the tailgate handle, cigarette lighter is designed to fit
rinse it with water and wipe it with a Keep the sensors on the vehicle's only in the receptacle closest to the
soft cloth. rear bumper clean to ensure proper driver.
operation. There may be another accessory
For more information, see Rear
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑74. The system can be disabled by power outlet in the rear cargo area.
pressing the rear park aid disable If the vehicle has a floor console,
button located next to the radio. there is an accessory power outlet
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on inside the storage bin and one on
page 9‑72 for more information. the rear of the floor console.
The accessory power outlets are
powered, even when the ignition is
in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use
power outlets while the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle's
battery to run down.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
In Brief 1-31
Universal Remote System Sunroof Open: From the vent position,

press and hold the rear of the switch
Extended Cab to open the sunroof.
Close: Press and hold the front of
the switch to close the sunroof.
The sunroof also has a roller
sunshade that can be used to block
the rays of the sun. To open the
This system provides a way to sunshade, press and unlatch it, and
replace up to three remote control roll it back. To close, pull it forward
transmitters used to activate and latch it into the closed position.
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the The sunroof switch is located on the
transmitter. Because of the steps headliner above the rearview mirror.
involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist with Vent: From the closed position,
programming the transmitter. press and hold the rear of the switch
to vent the sunroof.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑58.
1-32 In Brief
Crew Cab Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To Performance and

open the sunroof, press and hold
the rear of the driver side switch Maintenance
(A) until the sunroof reaches the
desired position. Press and hold the StabiliTrak® System
front of the driver side switch to
close it. If equipped, the vehicle has a
traction control system that limits
Express-Open/Express-Close: wheel spin and the StabiliTrak
To express-open the sunroof, fully system that assists with directional
press and release the rear of the control of the vehicle in difficult
driver side switch (B) until the driving conditions. Both systems
sunroof reaches the desired turn on automatically every time the
position. To express-close the vehicle is started.
sunroof, fully press and release the
A. Open or Close front of the driver side switch. Press
. To turn off traction control, press
the switch again to stop it. and release 5 on the instrument
B. Vent
The sunroof also has a sunshade panel. F illuminates and the
There are two sunroof switches appropriate DIC message
located in the overhead console that you can pull forward to block
the rays of the sun. The sunshade displays. See Ride Control
above the rearview mirror. System Messages on page 5‑46.
must be opened and closed
Vent: From the closed position, manually.
press the rear of the passenger side
switch (B) to vent the sunroof. See Sunroof (Extended Cab) on
page 2‑20 or Sunroof (Crew Cab)
on page 2‑21.
In Brief 1-33
. To turn off both traction control
and StabiliTrak, press and hold
warning light comes on, stop as Engine Oil Life System
soon as possible and inflate the
5 until F illuminates and the tires to the recommended pressure The engine oil life system calculates
appropriate DIC message shown on the Tire and Loading engine oil life based on vehicle use
displays. See Ride Control Information label. See Vehicle Load and, on most vehicles, displays a
System Messages on page 5‑46. Limits on page 9‑22. The warning DIC message when it is necessary
light will remain on until the tire to change the engine oil and filter.
. Press and release 5 again to The oil life system should be reset
pressure is corrected.
turn on both systems. to 100% only following an oil
During cooler conditions, the low tire change.
For more information, see
pressure warning light may appear
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑67. Resetting the Oil Life System
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early To reset the Engine Oil Life System
Tire Pressure Monitor indicator that the tire pressures are on most vehicles:
This vehicle may have a Tire getting low and the tires need to be
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). inflated to the proper pressure. 1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. If the vehicle does
The TPMS does not replace normal not have DIC buttons, the
monthly tire maintenance. It is the vehicle must be in P (Park) to
driver’s responsibility to maintain access this display.
correct tire pressures.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
See Tire Pressure Monitor System button on the DIC, or the trip
on page 10‑65. odometer reset stem if the
The TPMS warning light alerts you vehicle does not have DIC
to a significant loss in pressure of buttons, for more than
one of the vehicle's tires. If the five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
1-34 In Brief
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
System can be reset as follows:
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with near the size.
the engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips . Follow recommended scheduled
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal to get the best fuel economy maintenance.
slowly three times within possible.
five seconds. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING smoothly. Program
on the DIC. If the display shows
100%, the system is reset.
. Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
abrupt stops.
See Engine Oil Life System on TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438
page 10‑12.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time. Canada: 1-800-268-6800
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . When road and weather Mexico: 01-800-466-0800
conditions are appropriate, use As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge cruise control. you are automatically enrolled in the
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
. Always follow posted speed Roadside Assistance program.
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). limits or drive more slowly when See Roadside Assistance Program
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on conditions require. (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
page 9‑81. For all other vehicles, . Keep vehicle tires properly Roadside Assistance Program
use only the unleaded gasoline inflated. (Mexico) on page 13‑9 for more
described under Recommended information.
Fuel on page 9‑79.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
In Brief 1-35
Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

(U.S. and Canada)
Q : Push this blue button to
If you have an active OnStar connect to a specially trained
subscription, press the Q button OnStar Advisor to verify your
and the current GPS location will be account information and to answer
sent to an OnStar advisor who will questions.
assess your problem, contact ] : Push this red emergency
Roadside Assistance, and relay button to get priority help from
your exact location to get the help For vehicles with an active OnStar specially trained OnStar Emergency
you need. subscription, OnStar uses several Advisors.
Online Owner Center innovative technologies and live X : Push this button for hands‐free,
(U.S. and Canada) Advisors to provide a wide range of voice‐activated calling and to give
safety, security, navigation, voice commands for Hands‐Free
The Online Owner Center is a diagnostics, and calling services.
complimentary service that includes Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
online service reminders, vehicle Automatic Crash Response Navigation.
maintenance tips, online owner In a crash, built‐in sensors
manual, special privileges, automatically alert an OnStar
and more. Advisor who is immediately
Sign up today at: connected to the vehicle to see if
www.chevyownercenter.com you need help.
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-36 In Brief
Automatic Crash Response, OnStar service requires wireless OnStar service may not work if the
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, communication networks and the OnStar equipment is not properly
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Global Positioning System (GPS) installed or you have not maintained
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, satellite network. Not all OnStar it even if the vehicle is in good
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn services are available everywhere working order and in compliance
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling or on all vehicles at all times. with all government regulations.
are available on most vehicles. Not OnStar service cannot work unless If you try to add, connect, or modify
all OnStar services are available on the vehicle is in a place where any equipment or software in the
all vehicles. For more information, OnStar has an agreement with a vehicle, OnStar service may not
see the OnStar Owner's Guide; wireless service provider for service work. Other problems beyond
visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or in that area, and the wireless OnStar's control may prevent
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact service provider has coverage, service to you, such as hills, tall
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR network capacity, reception, and buildings, tunnels, weather,
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY technology compatible with OnStar electrical system design and
1‐877‐248‐2080; or push service. Service involving location architecture of the vehicle, damage
the Q button to speak with an information about the vehicle cannot to important parts of the vehicle in a
OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day, work unless GPS signals are crash, or wireless phone network
seven days a week. available, unobstructed, and congestion or jamming.
For a full description of OnStar compatible with the OnStar See Radio Frequency Statement on
services and system limitations, hardware. The vehicle must have page 13‑18 for information
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in a working electrical system and regarding Part 15 of the Federal
the glove box. adequate battery power for the Communications Commission (FCC)
OnStar equipment to operate. rules and Industry Canada
OnStar service is subject to the Standards RSS-210/220/310.
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
In Brief 1-37
OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Controls Increase the volume of the radio if
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute the OnStar Advisor cannot be
button that can be used to interact heard.
with OnStar Hands-Free calling. If the light next to the OnStar
See Steering Wheel Controls on buttons is red, the system may
page 5‑2 for more information. not be functioning properly.
On some vehicles, the Talk button Push Q and request a vehicle
can be used to dial numbers into diagnostic check. If the light
voice mail systems, or to dial phone appears clear (no light appears),
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's your OnStar subscription has
Guide for more information. expired and all services have been
deactivated. Push Q to confirm that
the OnStar equipment is active.
1-38 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Rear Doors
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Windows (Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle Security Windows
Keys and Locks Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-11 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12 Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Roof
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Sunroof (Extended Cab) . . . . . 2-20
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Sunroof (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle,

call the Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance
Keys Program (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
{ WARNING Program (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Leaving children in a vehicle with Remote Keyless Entry

the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
(RKE) System
could be badly injured or even See Radio Frequency Statement on
killed. They could operate the page 13‑18 for information
power windows or other controls regarding Part 15 of the Federal
The key is used for the ignition and Communications Commission (FCC)
or even make the vehicle move.
all door locks. rules and Industry Canada
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag Standards RSS-210/220/310.
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith If there is a decrease in the RKE
if caught in the path of a closing can use to make new keys. Store operating range:
window. Do not leave the keys in this information in a safe place, not
in the vehicle. . Check the distance. The
a vehicle with children. transmitter may be too far from
See your dealer if a replacement the vehicle.
key or additional key is needed.
. Check the location. Other
Notice: If the keys get locked in vehicles or objects may be
the vehicle, it may have to be blocking the signal.
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.

. Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the
doors.
in this section.
If enabled through the Driver
. If the transmitter is still not
Information Center (DIC), the turn
working correctly, see your
signal lamps flash once to indicate
dealer or a qualified technician
locking has occurred. If enabled
for service.
through the DIC, the horn chirps
Remote Keyless Entry when Q is pressed again within
three seconds. See Vehicle
(RKE) System Operation Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on page 5‑50 for additional
transmitter functions work up to With Remote Start (without information.
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. Remote Start Similar) Pressing Q arms the content theft‐
There are other conditions which / (Remote Vehicle Start): For deterrent system. See Anti-theft
can affect the performance of the Alarm System on page 2‑11.
vehicles with this feature, press /
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. to start the engine from outside the K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. only the driver door. If K is pressed
See Remote Vehicle Start on again within three seconds, all
page 2‑5 for additional information. remaining doors unlock. The interior
lamps may come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn Press and hold L for more than When the replacement transmitter
signal lamps flash twice to indicate two seconds to activate the panic is programmed to this vehicle, all
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle alarm. The turn signal lamps flash remaining transmitters must also be
Personalization (with DIC Buttons) and the horn sounds repeatedly for reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
on page 5‑50. If enabled through the 30 seconds. The alarm turns off transmitters will no longer work
DIC, the exterior lights may turn on. when the ignition is moved to once the new transmitter is
See “Approach Lighting” under programmed. Each vehicle can
ON/RUN or L is pressed again.
Vehicle Personalization (with DIC have up to eight transmitters
Buttons) on page 5‑50. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF programmed to it. See your dealer
for the panic alarm to work. for transmitter programming.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the content theft‐deterrent
Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement
system. See Anti-theft Alarm the Vehicle
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
System on page 2‑11. Only RKE transmitters programmed BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic to this vehicle will work. If a message displays in the DIC.
Alarm): Press and release to transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and Notice: When replacing the
locate the vehicle. The turn signal battery, do not touch any of the
lamps flash and the horn sounds programmed through your dealer.
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
three times. from your body could damage the
transmitter.
3. Insert the new battery, positive During a remote start, if the vehicle
side facing down. Replace with a has an automatic climate control
CR2032 or equivalent battery. system and heated seats, the
4. Snap the transmitter back heated seats will turn on during
together. colder outside temperatures and will
shut off when the key is turned to
ON/RUN. If the vehicle does not
Remote Vehicle Start have an automatic climate control
If available, this feature allows you system, during remote start,
to start the engine from outside of manually turn the heated seats on
the vehicle. It may also start up the and off. See Heated Front Seats on
vehicle's heating or air conditioning page 3‑10 for additional information.
systems and rear window defogger. Laws in some communities may
To replace the battery:
Normal operation of the system will restrict the use of remote starters.
1. Separate the transmitter with a return after the key is turned to the For example, some laws may
flat, thin object, such as a flat ON/RUN position. require a person using the remote
head screwdriver. start to have the vehicle in view
If the vehicle has an automatic
. Carefully insert the tool into climate control system, the climate when doing so. Check local
the notch located along the control system will default to a regulations for any requirements on
parting line of the heating or cooling mode depending remote starting of vehicles.
transmitter. Do not insert on the outside temperatures. If the Do not use the remote start feature
the tool too far. Stop as vehicle does not have an automatic if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
soon as resistance is felt. climate control system, the system vehicle may run out of fuel.
. Twist the tool until the will turn on at the setting the vehicle
transmitter is separated. was set to when the vehicle was
last turned off.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
If the vehicle has the remote start 3. Immediately press and hold / To cancel a remote start:
feature, the RKE transmitter until the turn signal lamps flash. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
functions will have an increased If you cannot see the vehicle's
range of operation. However, the vehicle and press and hold /
lamps, press and hold / for until the parking lamps turn off.
range may be less while the vehicle
is running. two to four seconds. . Turn on the hazard warning
There are other conditions which When the vehicle starts, the flashers.
can affect the performance of the parking lamps will turn on and
remain on while the vehicle is
. Turn the ignition on and then
transmitter. See Remote Keyless back off.
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for running. The doors will be
additional information. locked and the climate control The vehicle can be remote started
system may come on. two separate times between driving
/ (Remote Start): This button will
The engine will continue to run sequences. The engine will run for
be on the RKE transmitter if the 10 minutes after each remote start.
vehicle has remote start. for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
for a 10-minute time extension. Or, you can extend the engine run
To start the vehicle using the remote Remote start can be extended time by another 10 minutes within
start feature: only once. the first 10 minute remote start time
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the After entering the vehicle during a frame, and before the engine stops.
vehicle. remote start, insert and turn the key For example, if Q and then / are
to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
2. Press Q. pressed again after the vehicle has
been running for 5 minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing the
engine to run for 15 minutes.
The additional 10 minutes are
considered a second remote vehicle
start.
Once two remote starts, or a single Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

remote start with one time extension
has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key. After the key { WARNING injuries or even death from
is removed from the ignition, the heat stroke. Always lock the
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
vehicle can be remote started again.
dangerous.
The vehicle cannot be remote
. Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
started if the key is in the ignition,
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
the hood is not closed, or if there
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
is an emission control system
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
malfunction and the check engine
locked, the handle will not happening.
light is on.
open it. The chance of being
Also, the engine will turn off during a thrown out of the vehicle in a
remote vehicle start if the coolant crash is increased if the There are several ways to lock and
temperature gets too high or if the doors are not locked. So, all unlock the vehicle.
oil pressure gets low. passengers should wear From outside, use the Remote
safety belts properly and the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
Remote Start Ready doors should be locked the key in the driver door.
If the vehicle does not have the whenever the vehicle is From inside, use the power door
remote vehicle start feature, it may driven. locks or manual door locks. To lock
have the remote start ready feature. . Young children who get into or unlock the door with the manual
This feature allows your dealer to unlocked vehicles may be locks, push down or pull up on the
add the manufacturer's remote unable to get out. A child can manual lock knob.
vehicle start feature. be overcome by extreme heat
See your dealer to add the and can suffer permanent
manufacturer's remote vehicle (Continued)
start feature to the vehicle.
Power Door Locks and a door is open, the doors will Lockout Protection
lock five seconds after the last door
With power door locks, the switches is closed. You will hear three chimes If the driver side power door lock
on the front doors can be used to to signal that the delayed locking switch is pressed when the driver
lock and unlock the vehicle. feature is in use. door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and
Pressing the power lock switch then the driver door will unlock.
twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock If the passenger side power door
all the doors. lock switch is pressed when the
front passenger door is open and
This feature will not operate if the the key is in the ignition, all of the
key is in the ignition. doors will lock and then the front
This feature can be programmed passenger door will unlock.
using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “Delay Door Safety Locks
Lock” under Vehicle Personalization
The vehicle has rear door security
(with DIC Buttons) on page 5‑50.
locks to prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the
Automatic Door Locks inside.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors. The vehicle may have an automatic
lock/unlock feature. This feature can
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. be programmed using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Delayed Locking Vehicle Personalization (with DIC
The vehicle may have the delayed Buttons) on page 5‑50 for more
locking feature. When locking the information on DIC programming.
doors with the power lock switch
Doors The rear access door must be

closed before the front door can
close.
Rear Doors
(Extended Cab)
Open the rear doors to access the

security locks on the inside edge of
each door.
To set the locks, insert a key into
the slot and turn it to the horizontal To open a rear access door from the
position. The door can only be inside, first open the front door.
opened from the outside with the To open a rear access door from the Then, use the handle located on the
door unlocked. To return the door to outside, first open the front door. inside of the rear access door
normal operation, turn the slot to the Then, use the handle located on the to open.
vertical position. front edge of the rear access door to
open it.
Tailgate Open the tailgate by lifting up on its To remove the tailgate:

handle while pulling the tailgate
toward you.
{ WARNING To shut the tailgate, firmly push it
It is extremely dangerous to ride upward until it latches.
on the tailgate, even when the After you put the tailgate back up,
vehicle is operated at low speeds. pull it back towards you to be sure it
People riding on the tailgate latches securely.
can easily lose their balance
and fall in response to vehicle Tailgate Removal
maneuvers. Falling from a moving The tailgate can be removed to
vehicle may result in serious allow for different loading situations.
injuries or death. Do not allow Someone may need to assist with
people to ride on the tailgate. Be removal to avoid damage to the
sure everyone in your vehicle is in vehicle. 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and
a seat and using a safety belt release both retaining cable
On vehicles with a Rear Vision clips. To release the retaining
properly. Camera, it must be disconnected cable clips, lift the cable so it
before removing the tailgate. See points straight out. Lift the clip
On vehicles with a lock on the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on over the bolt, and push the cable
tailgate, use the key to lock or page 9‑74 for more information. forward then rotate down.
unlock the tailgate.
2. With the tailgate about halfway Vehicle Security If the delayed locking feature is
open, lift the right edge of the active, the alarm will not be
tailgate from the lower pivot. This vehicle has theft-deterrent activated until all doors are
features; however, they do not make closed and the security light
On vehicles with the tailgate
it impossible to steal. goes off.
assist feature, raise the tailgate
nearly all the way to the closed 3. Close all doors. The security
position prior to removing the Anti-theft Alarm System light will stop flashing and go off
left edge. This vehicle may have a content after approximately 30 seconds.
3. Move the tailgate to the right to theft-deterrent alarm system. The system is armed when the
release the left edge. security light goes off.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall If a locked driver door is opened

the tailgate. Make sure the tailgate without using the RKE transmitter, a
is secure. 10 second pre-alarm will occur. The
horn will chirp and the lights will
flash. If the key is not placed in the
ignition and turned to START or the
This is the security light. door is not unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the RKE
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
transmitter during the 10 second
1. Open the door. pre-alarm, the alarm will go off.
2. Lock the door with the Remote The vehicle's headlamps will flash
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. and the horn will sound for about
The security light should flash. 30 seconds, then will turn off to save
the battery power.
The theft-deterrent system will not Testing the Alarm Immobilizer

activate if the doors are locked with
To test the alarm: See Radio Frequency Statement on
the key or the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use the 1. Lower the driver window and page 13‑18 for information
power door lock switch or the RKE open the driver door. regarding Part 15 of the Federal
transmitter. The vehicle can be Communications Commission (FCC)
2. Press lock on the RKE rules and Industry Canada
started with the correct key if the transmitter.
alarm is set off. Standards RSS-210/220/310.
3. Close the door and wait for the
To avoid setting off the alarm by security light to go out. Immobilizer Operation
accident:
4. Reach in through the window, This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
. If you do not want to activate unlock the door with the manual (Personalized Automotive Security
the theft-deterrent system, the door lock, and open the door. System) theft-deterrent system.
vehicle should be locked with This should set off the alarm. PASS-Key III+ is a passive
the door key after the doors are
If the alarm does not sound when it theft-deterrent system.
closed.
.
should but the headlamps flash, The system is automatically armed
Always unlock a door with the check to see if the horn works. The when the key is removed from the
RKE transmitter. horn fuse may be blown. To replace ignition.
If the alarm is set off, press unlock the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑48. The system is automatically
on the RKE transmitter or place the
disarmed when the key is turned to
key in the ignition and turn it to If the alarm does not sound or the ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
START. headlamps do not flash, see your or START from the LOCK/OFF
dealer for service. position.
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
The security light will come on if If the engine still does not start, and See your dealer or a locksmith who
there is a problem with arming or the key appears to be undamaged, can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
disarming the theft-deterrent try another ignition key. At this time, new key blank cut exactly as the
system. you may also want to check the ignition key that operates the
When the PASS-Key III+ system fuse. See Fuses and Circuit system.
senses that someone is using the Breakers on page 10‑48. If the To program the new additional key:
wrong key, it prevents the vehicle engine still does not start with the
other key, the vehicle needs service. 1. Verify that the new key has
from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the If the vehicle does start, the first key a 1 stamped on it.
vehicle will be discouraged because may be faulty. See your dealer who
can service the PASS-Key III+ to 2. Insert the original, already
of the high number of electrical key programmed key in the ignition
codes. have a new key made.
and start the engine. If the
If the engine does not start and the It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ engine will not start, see your
security light on the instrument decoder to learn the transponder dealer for service.
panel cluster comes on when trying value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed 3. After the engine has started, turn
to start the vehicle, there may be a the key to LOCK/OFF, and
problem with the theft-deterrent for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming remove the key.
system. Turn the ignition off and try
again. additional keys only. If all the
currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see
your dealer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the
system.
4. Insert the new key to be Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors

programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within Adjust the outside mirrors for a
five seconds of turning the Convex Mirrors clearer view.
ignition to the LOCK/OFF Using hood-mounted air deflectors
position in Step 3. { WARNING and add-on convex mirror
The security light will turn attachments could decrease
A convex mirror can make things, mirror performance.
off once the key has been like other vehicles, look farther
programmed.
away than they really are. If you Trailer-Tow Mirrors
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if cut too sharply into the right lane,
additional keys are to be you could hit a vehicle on the
programmed. right. Check the inside mirror or
If you lose or damage your glance over your shoulder before
PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer changing lanes.
or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key III+ to have a new The passenger side mirror is convex
key made. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
Do not leave the key or device curved so more can be seen from
that disarms or deactivates the the driver seat.
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. If the vehicle has towing mirrors,
they can be adjusted for a clearer
view of the objects behind you.
Manually pull out the mirror head to Power Mirrors 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that
extend it for better visibility when the side of the vehicle and the
towing a trailer. area behind are seen.
The lower portion of the mirror is 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
convex. A convex mirror's surface is deselect the mirror.
curved to see more from the driver
seat. The convex mirror can be Folding Mirrors
adjusted manually to the driver
preferred position for better vision.
The mirror may have a turn signal
arrow that flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors

have controls located on the
driver door.
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
Vehicles with outside power
2. Press the arrows on the control foldaway mirrors have controls on
pad to move the mirror up, the driver door.
down, right, or left.
Power Foldaway Manual Foldaway Heated Mirrors

1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors out Manually fold the mirrors inward to For vehicles with heated mirrors:
to the driving position. prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash. 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in to Press to heat the mirrors. If the
the folded position. To fold, pull the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to vehicle has a towing mirror, only the
Resetting the Power Foldaway return to its original position. upper glass of the mirror is heated.
Mirrors The lower convex part of the towing
Automatic Dimming mirror is not heated.
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
If equipped with an automatic Depending on the vehicle's features,
. The mirrors are accidentally dimming mirror, the driver outside see “Rear Window Defogger” under
obstructed while folding. mirror adjusts for the glare of the Climate Control Systems (with Air
. They are accidentally manually headlamps behind you. See Conditioning) on page 8‑1 or
folded/unfolded. Automatic Dimming Rearview Climate Control Systems (with
Mirror on page 2‑17. Heater Only) on page 8‑4 or Dual
. The mirrors will not stay in the Automatic Climate Control System
unfolded position. Turn Signal Indicator on page 8‑5 for more information.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal The vehicle may also have a turn
driving speeds. signal indicator on the mirror. An
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time arrow on the mirror flashes in the
using the mirror controls to reset direction of the turn or lane change.
them to their normal position.
A popping noise may be heard
during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound is
normal after a manual folding
operation.
Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors The vehicle may also have a Rear
Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
If the vehicle has the memory Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑74
package, the passenger and/or Manual Rearview Mirror for more information.
driver mirror tilts to a preselected Hold the mirror in the center to
position when the vehicle is in If the vehicle has RVC, the O button
move it for a clearer view of behind
R (Reverse). This feature lets the your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to for turning the dimming feature on or
driver view the curb when parallel avoid glare from the headlamps off will not be available.
parking. The mirror(s) return to the behind you. Push the tab at the Vehicles with OnStar have three
original position when the vehicle is bottom of the mirror forward for additional control buttons for the
shifted out of R (Reverse), or the daytime use and pull it for OnStar system. See your dealer for
ignition is turned off or to nighttime use. more information about OnStar and
OFF/LOCK. how to subscribe to it. See the
Turn this feature on or off through Automatic Dimming OnStar Owner Guide for more
the Driver Information Center (DIC). information about the services
See Vehicle Personalization (with
Rearview Mirror OnStar provides.
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑50 for more The vehicle may have an automatic
information. dimming inside rearview mirror. Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic dimming reduces the Do not spray glass cleaner directly
glare from the headlamps of the on the mirror. Use a soft towel
vehicle behind you. The dimming dampened with water.
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
ignition is turned to start.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with
or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many
windows closed is dangerous. reasons. Children or others could
They can be overcome by the be badly injured or even killed.
extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power
permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or even
from heat stroke. Never leave a make the vehicle move. The
child, a helpless adult, or a pet windows will function and they
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are could be seriously injured or killed
designed to improve fuel economy if caught in the path of a closing
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a window. Do not leave keys in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear vehicle with children.
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the When there are children in the
sound, open either a front window rear seat use the window lockout
or the sunroof (if equipped). button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door
to manually raise or lower the
manual windows.
Express-down Windows Rear Windows

Vehicles with the express-down Power Sliding Rear Window
feature allow the driver and front
passenger windows to be lowered
without holding the switch. Push
the switch down to the second
detent, then release, to activate
the express-down mode. The
express-down mode can be
canceled at any time by pulling up
on the front of the switch. To open
the window partway, push the switch
Crew Cab Shown down to the first detent until the
If the vehicle has power windows, window is at the desired position.
controls are located on each door. Window Lockout
The driver door has a switch for the o (Window Lockout): If a crew On vehicles with a power sliding
passenger and rear windows as cab or extended cab vehicle has rear window, the switch is located in
well. The power windows will work power windows, the driver door the overhead console.
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or power window switch has a lockout
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when The power sliding rear window
feature. This feature prevents the works when the ignition has been
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is rear windows from operating, except
active. See Retained Accessory turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or
from the driver position. Press the ON/RUN, or when Retained
Power (RAP) on page 9‑36. switch to engage or disengage the Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Push the switch down to lower the lockout feature. An indicator light on See Retained Accessory Power
window, and pull up the front of the the switch will come on when the (RAP) on page 9‑36 for more
switch to raise the window. lockout feature is engaged, and will information.
go off when disengaged.
The power sliding rear window Roof The sunroof only operates when the
cannot be operated manually. ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN or the Retained
. Push to open the window. Sunroof (Extended Cab) Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
. Pull to close the window. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑36 for more
Sun Visors information.
Vent: From the closed position,
press and hold the rear of the
switch (B) to vent the sunroof. To
close the sunroof, press and hold
the front of the switch.
Open: From the vent position,
the sunroof can be fully opened
either manually or by using the
express-open feature. To open
manually, press the rear of the
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switch (A) to the first detent and
sunroof switch is located on the
hold until the sunroof has reached
headliner above the rearview mirror.
the desired position. To open using
Pull the sun visor down to block express-open, press the rear of the
glare. Detach the sun visor from the switch to the second detent and
center mount to pivot to the side release. The sunroof will move to
window, or to extend along the rod, the full open position. To stop the
if available. sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time.
Close: From the vent, or open Sunroof (Crew Cab)

position, press and hold the front of
the switch (A) to close the sunroof.
The sunroof also has a roller
sunshade that can be used to
block the rays of the sun. The roller
sunshade can be manually operated
with the sunroof in an open or
closed position. To open the
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunshade, press and unlatch it, and
sunroof seal or in the track. This
roll it back. To close, pull it forward
could cause an issue with sunroof
and latch it into the closed position.
operation, noise, or plugging the
When the sunroof is opened, an air water drainage system. Periodically
deflector will automatically raise. open the sunroof and remove any
The air deflector will retract when obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the A. Open or Close
the sunroof is closed. sunroof seal and roof sealing area B. Vent
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from On vehicles with a sunroof, there
the sunroof. are two sunroof switches located in
the overhead console above the
rearview mirror.
The sunroof only operates when the
ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN or the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑36 for more
information.
To open or close the sunroof, press To automatically vent or close the

the open or close switch (A) to the sunroof, press the vent open or
first detent position. close switch (B).
To express open or close the When the sunroof is opened, an air
sunroof, press the open or close deflector will automatically raise.
switch (A) to the second detent The air deflector will retract when
position and release. To stop the the sunroof is closed.
movement, press the switch again. The sunroof also has a sunshade
The sunroof has a comfort stop which can be pulled forward to block Dirt and debris may collect on the
feature which stops the sunroof from sun rays. The sunshade must be sunroof seal or in the track. This
opening to the full-open position. opened and closed manually. could cause an issue with sunroof
From the comfort stop position, If an object is in the path of the operation, noise, or plugging the
press the open or close switch (A) a sunroof while it is closing, the water drainage system. Periodically
second time to open the sunroof to anti-pinch feature will detect the open the sunroof and remove any
the full-open position. object and stop the sunroof. obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
the sunroof.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap Belt (Crew and

Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Restraints Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
3-28
3-28
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-52
Head Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-54
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
Front Seats Airbag System System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Replacing LATCH System
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-31 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-65
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 (Center Front Seat
How Does an Airbag Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Rear Seats Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats (Extended Cab What Will You See after an (Right Front Seat
Full Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Rear Seats (All Split Bench Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-37
and Hybrid Full Bench) . . . . . 3-12 Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-45
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-46
Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same To lower the head restraint, press
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's the button, located on the top of the
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the seatback, and push the
chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
The rear seat has headrests that
can be adjusted up and down.
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a Split Bench or Bucket Seat Bench Seat
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when To adjust the seat: To adjust the seat:
the vehicle is not moving. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 1. Move the lever to the right to
2. Slide the seat to the desired unlock the seat.
position and release the bar. 2. Slide the seat to the desired
3. Try to move the seat back and position and release the lever.
forth to be sure the seat is 3. Try to move the seat back and
locked in place. forth to make sure it is locked
Some vehicles have a folding front into place.
bench seat.
Folding the Bench Seat 4. Release the lever.

WARNING (Continued)
To fold the bench seat: Do not try to release the
1. Push back on the front of the seatback before pulling the rear seatback, always check to be
seatback. release levers or the release sure that the safety belts are
system can be damaged. properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it Reverse the steps to raise the
could move forward in a sudden seatback. Push and pull on the
stop or crash. That could cause seatback to make sure the seatback
injury to the person sitting there. is locked in the upright position
before driving. Make sure the safety
Always push and pull on the
belts are not twisted or caught in the
seatbacks to be sure they are
seatback.
locked.
Center Seat
If equipped, the center front
2. Pull one of the release levers, at { WARNING seatback doubles as an armrest and
each end of the seat on the cupholder/storage area for the driver
lower rear of the seatback, A safety belt that is improperly
and passenger when the center
completely out. routed, not properly attached, front seat is not used. Do not use it
3. While holding the lever out, fold or twisted will not provide the as a seating position when the
the seatback forward until it protection needed in a crash. The seatback is folded down.
rests on the seat. person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
(Continued)
Power Seat Adjustment To adjust the seatback, see “Power Storing Memory Positions
Reclining Seatbacks” under To save into memory:
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑8.
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and recliner, both outside mirrors,
Pedals and the throttle and brake
pedals, if equipped.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑15
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑31 for
more information.
Not all mirrors and adjustable
throttle and brake pedals will
have the ability to save and
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: recall their positions.
. Move the seat forward or 2. Press and hold “1” until
rearward by sliding the control two beeps sound.
forward or rearward. 3. Repeat for a second driver
. If equipped, raise or lower the On vehicles with the memory position using “2.”
front or rear part of the seat feature, the controls on the driver
door are used to program and recall To recall, press and release “1” or
cushion by moving the front or “2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).
rear of the control up or down. memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the adjustable A single beep will sound. The seat,
. If equipped, raise or lower the throttle and brake pedals, outside mirrors, and adjustable
entire seat by moving the entire if equipped. throttle and brake pedals will move
control up or down. to the position previously stored for
the identified driver.
Memory Remote Recall If something has blocked the driver A single beep sounds. The driver
The memory feature can recall the seat and/or the adjustable pedals seat moves back approximately
driver seat, outside mirrors, and while recalling a memory position, 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
pedals, if equipped, to stored the recall may stop. Remove the farther, press the easy exit seat
positions when entering the vehicle. obstruction; then press and hold the button again until the seat is all the
appropriate manual control for the way back.
To activate, unlock the driver memory item that is not recalling
door with the Remote Keyless If something has blocked the driver
for two seconds. Try recalling the seat while recalling the exit position,
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver memory position again by pressing
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable the recall may stop. Remove the
the appropriate memory button. obstruction; then press and hold the
pedals, if equipped, will move to the If the memory position is still not
memory position associated with the power seat control rearward for
recalling, see your dealer for two seconds. Try recalling the exit
transmitter used to unlock the service.
vehicle. position again. If the exit position is
Easy Exit Driver Seat still not recalling, see your dealer for
This feature can be turned on or off service.
using the vehicle personalization This feature can move the seat
menu. See “Memory Seat Recall” rearward to allow extra room to exit See “Easy Exit Recall” and
under Vehicle Personalization (with the vehicle. “Easy Exit Setup” under Vehicle
Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑50 for more B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press on page 5‑50 for more information.
information. to recall the easy exit seat position.
To stop recall movement, press one The vehicle must be in P (Park).
of the power seat controls, memory If the easy exit seat feature is
buttons, or power mirror buttons, programmed on in the vehicle
or the adjustable pedal switch. personalization menu, automatic
seat movement occurs when the
ignition key is removed.

. On vehicles with four-way
Lumbar Adjustment Power Lumbar
lumbar, press and hold the front
Manual Lumbar or rear of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support. To
raise or lower the height of the
support, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control.
To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
If equipped, increase or decrease
manual lumbar support by turning
. On vehicles with two-way
the knob forward or rearward. lumbar, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control to
increase or decrease lumbar
support.
Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued)

Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING For proper protection when the { WARNING

vehicle is in motion, have the
Sitting in a reclined position when You can lose control of the
seatback upright. Then sit well
the vehicle is in motion can be vehicle if you try to adjust a
back in the seat and wear the
dangerous. Even when buckled manual driver seat while the
safety belt properly.
up, the safety belts cannot do vehicle is moving. The sudden
their job when reclined like this. movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
The shoulder belt cannot do its pedal when you do not want to.
job because it will not be against Adjust the driver seat only when
your body. Instead, it will be in the vehicle is not moving.
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job { WARNING
either. In a crash, the belt could If either seatback is not locked, it
go up over your abdomen. The could move forward in a sudden
belt forces would be there, not at stop or crash. That could cause
your pelvic bones. This could injury to the person sitting there.
cause serious internal injuries. Do not have a seatback reclined if Always push and pull on the
(Continued) the vehicle is moving. seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
2. To recline, move the seatback Power Reclining Seatbacks

rearward to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
To adjust a manual seatback: return to the upright position.
1. Lift the lever. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked. To recline a power seatback,
The seatback will automatically if equipped:
fold forward.
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
Heated Front Seats The passenger seat may take

longer to heat up.
{ WARNING The heated seats will be canceled
10 seconds after the ignition is
If you cannot feel temperature turned off.
change or pain to the skin, the
Remote Start Heated Seats
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To When it is cold outside, the heated
reduce the risk of burns, people seats may turn on automatically
with such a condition should use during a remote vehicle start. The
care when using the seat heater, heated seats will be canceled when
especially for long periods of the ignition is turned on. Press the
time. Do not place anything on If available, the buttons are on the desired button to use the heated
the seat that insulates against front doors. seats after the vehicle is started.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, I (Heated Seatback): Press to The lights on the heated seat
cover, or similar item. This heat the seatback only. buttons do not turn on during a
may cause the seat heater to remote start.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
overheat. An overheated seat Press to heat the seat and The temperature performance of an
heater may cause a burn or may seatback. unoccupied seat may be reduced.
damage the seat. This is normal.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of See Remote Vehicle Start on
the button, the heated seat will page 2‑5 for more information.
change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
lights indicate three for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
Rear Seats To unfold the seat:

1. Push the seat cushion rearward
Rear Seats (Extended while pulling the release strap
under the seat cushion. Pull
Cab Full Bench) the seat cushion down until it
Folding the Rear Seat latches.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with 2. Pull up on the seat cushion to
the safety belts still fastened may make sure it is locked in place.
cause damage to the seat or the Make sure the safety belts are
safety belts. Always unbuckle the not twisted or caught in the seat
safety belts and return them to cushion.
their normal stowed position
To fold the seat:
before folding a rear seat.
1. Pull up on the front of the seat { WARNING
cushion while pulling down on A safety belt that is improperly
the release strap under the seat routed, not properly attached,
cushion.
or twisted will not provide the
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it protection needed in a crash. The
latches with the seatback. person wearing the belt could be
3. Pull forward on the seat cushion seriously injured. After raising the
to make sure it is locked in rear seatback, always check to
place. be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
Rear Seats (All Split To return the seat to the normal Safety Belts
seating position, slowly pull the
Bench and Hybrid Full seat cushion down. This section of the manual
Bench) Make sure the safety belts are
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
Folding Rear Seat not twisted or caught in the seat
things not to do with safety belts.
cushion.
Either side of the rear seat can be
folded for added cargo space.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may Do not let anyone ride where
A safety belt that is improperly
cause damage to the seat or the a safety belt cannot be worn
routed, not properly attached,
safety belts. Always unbuckle the properly. In a crash, if you or your
or twisted will not provide the
safety belts and return them to passenger(s) are not wearing
protection needed in a crash. The
their normal stowed position safety belts, the injuries can be
person wearing the belt could be
before folding a rear seat. much worse. You can hit things
seriously injured. After raising the
inside the vehicle harder or be
Make sure that nothing is on rear seatback, always check to
ejected from the vehicle. You
the seat. be sure that the safety belts are
and your passenger(s) can be
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat properly routed and attached,
seriously injured or killed. In the
cushion up. and are not twisted.
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a Why Safety Belts Work

{ WARNING reminder to buckle the safety belts.
When you ride in or on anything,
See Safety Belt Reminders on
People riding on the tailgate (if you go as fast as it goes.
page 5‑20 for additional information.
equipped) can easily lose their
balance and fall even when the In most states and in all Canadian
vehicle is operated at low speeds. provinces, the law requires wearing
Falling from a moving vehicle may safety belts. Here is why:
result in serious injuries or death. You never know if you will be
in a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING A few crashes are mild, and some
It is extremely dangerous to ride crashes can be so serious that even
in a cargo area, inside or outside buckled up, a person would not
of a vehicle. In a collision, people survive. But most crashes are in
riding in these areas are more between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
likely to be seriously injured or
sometimes walk away. Without it is just a seat on wheels.
killed. Do not allow people to ride
safety belts they could have been
in any area of your vehicle that is
badly hurt or killed.
not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in After more than 40 years of safety
the vehicle is in a seat and using belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
a safety belt properly. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until
vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
belt, even if you are
With safety belts, you slow down upside down.
as the vehicle does. You get more
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
time to stop. You stop over more
should I have to wear safety
distance, and your strongest bones
belts?
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense. A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your
never drive far from home, passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
why should I wear safety
Properly there is important information you
belts? This section is only for people of should know.
A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size.
but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special
one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts
and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different
hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and
not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in the
beyond your control, such as vehicle, see Older Children on
bad drivers. page 3‑47 or Infants and Young
Most accidents occur within Children on page 3‑50. Follow those
40 km (25 miles) of home. And rules for everyone's protection.
the greatest number of serious It is very important for all occupants
injuries and deaths occur at to buckle up. Statistics show that
speeds of less than unbelted people are hurt more often
65 km/h (40 mph). in crashes than those who are Sit up straight and always keep your
Safety belts are for everyone. wearing safety belts. feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
Occupants who are not buckled up low and snug on the hips, just
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a touching the thighs. In a crash, this
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
applies force to the strong pelvic Q: What is wrong with this?

bones and you would be less likely { WARNING
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force You can be seriously hurt if the
on your abdomen. This could cause shoulder belt is too loose. In a
serious or even fatal injuries. The crash, you would move forward
shoulder belt should go over the too much, which could increase
shoulder and across the chest. injury. The shoulder belt should fit
These parts of the body are best snugly against your body.
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.

It will not give as much
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
not give nearly as much buckle.
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the You can be seriously injured if the
belt is buckled in the wrong place belt goes over an armrest like
like this. In a crash, the belt would this. The belt would be much too
go up over your abdomen. The high. In a crash, you can slide
belt forces would be there, not on under the belt. The belt force
the pelvic bones. This could would then be applied on the
cause serious internal injuries. abdomen, not on the pelvic
Always buckle the belt into the bones, and that could cause
buckle nearest you. serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body.
the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the
the shoulder at all times. chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured by You can be seriously injured by a
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt twisted belt. In a crash, you would
properly. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
not be restrained by the shoulder to spread impact forces. If a belt
belt. Your body could move too is twisted, make it straight so it
far forward increasing the chance can work properly, or ask your
of head and neck injury. You dealer to fix it.
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across the body.
the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
If the vehicle is a regular cab, then get twisted.
all seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt. If the The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
vehicle is a crew or extended cab, you pull the belt across you very
then all seating positions in the quickly. If this happens, let the
vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt go back slightly to unlock it.
belt except for the center front Then pull the belt across you
passenger position (if equipped), more slowly.
which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt If the shoulder portion of a
(Crew and Extended Cab) on passenger belt is pulled out
page 3‑27 for more information. all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. If the belt stops before it reaches
The following instructions explain the buckle, when using the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again. lap-shoulder belt in a rear center
properly. seating position of a crew-cab,
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Engaging the child restraint tilt the latch plate and keep
adjustable, so you can sit up locking feature may affect the pulling the safety belt until it
straight. To see how, see “Seats” passenger sensing system, can be buckled.
in the Index. if equipped. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑40
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section.
3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should
Pull up on the latch plate to return to its stowed position.
make sure it is secure. If the belt Before a door is closed, be sure the
is not long enough, see Safety safety belt is out of the way. If a
Belt Extender on page 3‑28. door is slammed against a safety
5. To make the lap part tight, pull belt, damage can occur to both the
If the latch plate will not go fully up on the shoulder belt.
into the buckle, check if the safety belt and the vehicle.
correct buckle is being used. It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
Position the release button on through the latch plate to fully
the buckle so that the safety belt tighten the lap belt on smaller
could be quickly unbuckled if occupants.
necessary.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How Regular and Crew Cab Extended Cab
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑16. To move the adjuster down for the On the extended cab, push down on
regular and crew cabs, squeeze the release button (A) and move the
the buttons (A) on the sides of the height adjuster to the desired
height adjuster and move the height position.
adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just
by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide.
After you move the adjuster to
where you want it, try to move it
down, without squeezing the buttons
for the regular and crew cabs,
or without pushing the release
button for extended cabs, to make
sure it has locked into position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort

This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder
occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are
pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer. The
are part of the safety belt assembly. guides may provide added safety
They can help tighten the safety belt comfort for older children who
belts during the early stages of a have outgrown booster seats and
moderate to severe frontal, near for some adults. When installed and
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold properly adjusted, the comfort guide
conditions for pretensioner positions the belt away from the
activation are met. And, if your neck and head.
vehicle has side impact airbags, 2. Place the guide over the belt
Here is how to install a comfort
safety belt pretensioners can help and insert the two edges of the
guide to the shoulder belt:
tighten the safety belts in a side belt into the slots of the guide.
crash or a rollover event. 1. Remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
after a Crash on page 3‑29.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release
twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide onto the storage clip.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt (Crew and

Extended Cab)
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on plate and pull it along the belt.
page 3‑22. Buckle, position, and release it the
Your vehicle may have a center same way as the lap part of a
seating position. When you sit in the lap-shoulder belt.
center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no
retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑20 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the Keep safety belts clean and dry.
seat it is made to fit. The extender See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑28.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the belt is snug. has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To Safety Belt Care
If the belt is not long enough, see wear it, attach it to the regular safety Keep belts clean and dry.
Safety Belt Extender on page 3‑28. belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would the extender. { WARNING
be able to unbuckle the safety belt Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
quickly if necessary. Safety System Check It may severely weaken them. In
Now and then, check that the safety a crash, they might not be able to
belt reminder light, safety belts, provide adequate protection.
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and Clean safety belts only with mild
anchorages are working properly. soap and lukewarm water.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System

safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the right front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be The vehicle may have the following
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt airbags:
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A seat‐mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. airbag for the driver.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners . A seat‐mounted side impact
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the right front
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light passenger.
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑20. and the passenger seated
possible. directly behind the driver.
. A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the person
seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things
have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: { WARNING
in the trim or on an attached label
Because airbags inflate with great
near the deployment opening. { WARNING force and faster than the blink
For frontal airbags, the word of an eye, anyone who is up
AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to any
part of the steering wheel for the airbag when it inflates can be
driver and on the instrument panel wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not
for the right front passenger.
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any
With seat‐mounted side impact airbag, as you would be if sitting
belts, but do not replace them.
airbags, the word AIRBAG will on the edge of the seat or leaning
Also, airbags are not designed to
appear on the side of the seatback forward. Safety belts help keep
closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only you in position before and during
With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an a crash. Always wear a safety
AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33. belt, even with airbags. The driver
headliner or trim. should sit as far back as possible
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of
Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance
the protection provided by safety the vehicle.
of hitting things inside the vehicle
belts. Even though today's airbags Occupants should not lean on or
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are also designed to help reduce sleep against the door or side
the risk of injury from the force of an are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate seat-mounted side impact airbags
very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?

{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
for adults and older children, but
which shows the airbag symbol.
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle safety belt The system checks the airbag
system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 5‑20 for
system can provide. Always more information. The driver airbag is in the middle of
secure children properly in the the steering wheel.
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑47 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑50.
The right front passenger airbag is Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger
in the instrument panel on the Side Similar Side Similar
passenger side. If the vehicle has seat‐mounted side If the vehicle has roof-rail
impact airbags for the driver and airbags for the driver, right front
right front passenger, they are in the passenger, and second row
side of the seatbacks closest to outboard passengers, they are in
the door. the ceiling above the side windows.
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at

{ WARNING Inflate? different crash speeds. For
example:
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to
occupant and an airbag, the
. If the vehicle hits a stationary
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate
airbag might not inflate properly or near-frontal crashes to help
or it might force the object into at a different crash speed than if
reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object.
that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or right
or even death. The path of an front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that
inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed to deforms, the airbags could
clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
between an occupant and an predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object
airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform.
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall).
seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object
fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could
Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight
by routing a rope or tie‐down quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object.
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of Thresholds can also vary with
an inflating roof-rail airbag will be specific vehicle design.
blocked.
Frontal airbags are not intended to less than full deployment. For the system's designed threshold
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear more severe frontal impacts, full level. The threshold level can vary
impacts, or in many side impacts. deployment occurs. with specific vehicle design.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Vehicles with dual stage airbags Roof-rail airbags are not
Rating) of your vehicle is 3 855 kg also have seat position sensors intended to inflate in rear impacts.
(8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle has which enable the sensing system to A seat‐mounted side impact airbag
single stage airbags. If the GVWR is monitor the position of the driver is intended to deploy on the side of
below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the seat (all models), and on crew cab the vehicle that is struck. Both
vehicle has dual stage airbags. and extended cab models the right roof-rail airbags will deploy when
Vehicles with a full bench seat are front passenger seat on light duty either side of the vehicle is struck,
equipped with single state airbags. models only. The seat position or if the sensing system predicts
You can find the GVWR on the sensor provides information that is that the vehicle is about to roll over,
certification label on the rear edge used to determine if the airbags or in a severe frontal impact.
of the driver door. See Vehicle Load should deploy at a reduced level or In any particular crash, no one can
Limits on page 9‑22 for more at full deployment. say whether an airbag should have
information. The vehicle may or may not have inflated simply because of the
The vehicle may have dual‐stage seat‐mounted side impact and damage to a vehicle or because
frontal airbags. Dual-stage airbags roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System of what the repair costs were.
adjust the restraint according to on page 3‑29. Seat‐mounted side For frontal airbags, inflation is
crash severity. The vehicle has impact and roof-rail airbags are determined by what the vehicle hits,
electronic frontal sensors, which intended to inflate in moderate to the angle of the impact, and how
help the sensing system distinguish severe side crashes. In addition, quickly the vehicle slows down.
between a moderate frontal impact these roof-rail airbags are intended For seat‐mounted side impact and
and a more severe frontal impact. to inflate during a rollover or in a roof-rail airbags, deployment is
For moderate frontal impacts, severe frontal impact. Seat‐mounted determined by the location and
dual-stage airbags inflate at a level side impact and roof-rail airbags will severity of the side impact.
inflate if the crash severity is above
In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag How Does an Airbag risk of full or partial ejection in
deployment is determined by the rollover events, although no system
direction of the roll.
Restrain? can prevent all such ejections.
In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in many
What Makes an Airbag near frontal collisions, even belted types of collisions, primarily
Inflate? occupants can contact the steering because the occupant's motion is
wheel or the instrument panel. In not toward those airbags. See When
In a deployment event, the sensing moderate to severe side collisions, Should an Airbag Inflate? on
system sends an electrical signal even belted occupants can contact page 3‑33 for more information.
triggering a release of gas from the the inside of the vehicle.
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the Airbags should never be regarded
Airbags supplement the protection as anything more than a supplement
airbag causing the bag to break out
provided by safety belts. Frontal to safety belts.
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
airbags distribute the force of
the airbag, and related hardware are
the impact more evenly over the
all part of the airbag module.
occupant's upper body, stopping
What Will You See after
Frontal airbag modules are located the occupant more gradually. an Airbag Inflates?
inside the steering wheel and Seat‐mounted side impact and After the frontal airbags and
instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags distribute the force seat-mounted side impact airbags
seat‐mounted side impact airbags, of the impact more evenly over the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
there are airbags modules in the occupant's upper body. quickly that some people may not
side of the front seatbacks closest even realize an airbag inflated.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
to the door. For vehicles with Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
are designed to help contain the
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag partially inflated for some time after
head and chest of occupants in the
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, they deploy. Some components of
outboard seating positions in the
near the side windows that have the airbag module may be hot for
first and second rows. The rollover
occupant seating positions. several minutes. For location of the
capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑35.
The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming If you experience breathing appears to be drivable after a
from the vents in the deflated problems following an airbag moderate crash, there may be
airbags. Airbag inflation does not deployment, you should seek concealed damage that could
prevent the driver from seeing out of medical attention. make it difficult to safely operate
the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle.
the vehicle, nor does it prevent Use caution if you should attempt
people from leaving the vehicle. The vehicle may have a feature that
may automatically unlock the doors, to restart the engine after a crash
turn on the interior lamps and has occurred.
{ WARNING hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags In many crashes severe enough to
When an airbag inflates, there
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn inflate the airbag, windshields are
may be dust in the air. This dust off the interior lamps and hazard
could cause breathing problems broken by vehicle deformation.
warning flashers by using the Additional windshield breakage may
for people with a history of controls for those features.
asthma or other breathing trouble. also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
{ WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate
it is safe to do so. If you have A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag
breathing problems but cannot the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some new
get out of the vehicle after an parts for the airbag system.
damaged important functions
airbag inflates, then get fresh air If you do not get them, the
in the vehicle, such as the fuel
by opening a window or a door. airbag system will not be there
system, brake and steering to help protect you in another
(Continued) systems, etc. Even if the vehicle crash. A new system will include
(Continued) airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual If the vehicle does not have an
for your vehicle covers the need airbag off switch, it may have a
to replace other parts. passenger sensing system. See
. The vehicle has a crash sensing Passenger Sensing System on
and diagnostic module which page 3‑40.
records information after a This switch should only be turned to
crash. See Vehicle Data the off position if the person in the
Recording and Privacy on right front passenger position is a
page 13‑16 and Event Data member of a passenger risk group
Recorders on page 13‑16. identified by the national
. Let only qualified technicians government as follows:
work on the airbag systems. Infant. An infant (less than
United States
Improper service can mean that 1 year old) must ride in the
an airbag system will not work front seat because:
properly. See your dealer for . My vehicle has no rear seat;
service.
. My vehicle has a rear seat too
Airbag On-Off Switch small to accommodate a
rear-facing infant seat; or
If one of the switches pictured in the
following illustrations is located in
. The infant has a medical
the glove box, the vehicle has an condition which, according to the
airbag on-off switch that you can infant's physician, makes it
use to manually turn on or off the necessary for the infant to ride in
right front passenger airbag. the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the
Canada and Mexico child's condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child

. Makes the potential harm from
age 1 to 12 must ride in the the passenger airbag in a crash
front seat because: greater than the potential harm
from turning off the airbag and
. My vehicle has no rear seat; allowing the passenger, even if
. Although children ages 1 to 12 belted, to hit the dashboard or
ride in the rear seat(s) whenever windshield in a crash.
possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in
{ WARNING
the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or If the right front passenger airbag
. The child has a medical is turned off for a person who is
condition which, according to not in a risk group identified by United States
the child's physician, makes it the national government, that
necessary for the child to ride in person will not have the extra
the front seat so that the driver protection of an airbag. In a
can constantly monitor the crash, the airbag will not be able
child's condition. to inflate and help protect the
person sitting there. Do not turn
Medical Condition. A passenger
off the passenger airbag unless
has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician: the person sitting there is in a risk
group.
. Causes the passenger airbag to
pose a special risk for the
passenger; and
Canada and Mexico

To turn off the right front passenger

airbag, insert the ignition key into WARNING (Continued)
the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the off position. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have the vehicle serviced
The word OFF or the off symbol will right away. See Airbag Readiness
come on in the passenger airbag Light on page 5‑20 for more
status indicator located in the information, including important
overhead console to let you know safety information.
that the right front passenger airbag
is off, after the system check is
completed. The airbag off light will
come on and stay on to let you
know that the right front passenger's Canada and Mexico
airbag is off. See Airbag On-Off To turn the right front passenger
Light on page 5‑21. airbag on again, insert the ignition
key into the switch, push in, and
{ WARNING move the switch to the on position.
If the airbag readiness light ever The right front passenger frontal
comes on and stays on, it means airbag is now enabled (may inflate).
that something may be wrong See Airbag On-Off Light on
with the airbag system. For
example, the right front United States
passenger airbag could inflate
even though the airbag on-off
switch is turned off.
(Continued)
Passenger Sensing The passenger sensing system will

turn off the right front passenger
System frontal airbag under certain
If the vehicle has one of the conditions. The driver airbag,
indicators pictured in the following seat‐mounted side impact airbags
illustrations, then the vehicle has a (if equipped), and the roof-rail
passenger sensing system for the United States airbags (if equipped) are not
right front passenger position, affected by the passenger sensing
unless there is an airbag off switch system.
located in the glove box. If there is The passenger sensing system
an airbag off switch, the vehicle works with sensors that are part
does not have a passenger sensing of the right front passenger seat
system. See Airbag On-Off Switch and safety belt. The sensors are
on page 3‑37 for more information. designed to detect the presence
The passenger airbag status Canada and Mexico of a properly-seated occupant
indicator will be visible on the The words ON and OFF, or the and determine if the right front
overhead console when the symbol for on and off, will be visible passenger frontal airbag should
vehicle is started. during the system check. If you be enabled (may inflate) or not.
In addition, if the vehicle has a are using remote start to start the According to accident statistics,
passenger sensing system for the vehicle from a distance, if equipped, children are safer when properly
right front passenger position, the you may not see the system secured in a rear seat in the correct
label on the vehicle's sun visors check. When the system check is child restraint for their weight
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”. complete, either the word ON or and size.
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑23.
We recommend that children be If the vehicle does not have a rear

secured in a rear seat, including: WARNING (Continued) seat that will accommodate a
an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint, a
rear-facing child restraint; a child injured or killed if the right front rear-facing child restraint should
riding in a forward-facing child seat; passenger airbag inflates and the not be installed in the vehicle, even
an older child riding in a booster passenger seat is in a forward if the airbag is off.
seat; and children, who are large position. The passenger sensing system is
enough, using safety belts. designed to turn off the right front
Even if the passenger sensing
A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right passenger frontal airbag if:
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no . The right front passenger seat is
the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can unoccupied.
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not
if the airbag deploys. . The system determines an infant
deploy under some unusual
is present in a child restraint.
circumstance, even though the
{ WARNING airbag is turned off. . A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child a period of time.
restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
. Or, if there is a critical problem
injured or killed if the right front
forward-facing child restraint in with the airbag system or the
passenger airbag inflates.
the right front seat, always move passenger sensing system.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far When the passenger sensing
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to system has turned off the right front
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a passenger frontal airbag, the off
child restraint can be seriously rear seat. indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
(Continued) See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑23.
The passenger sensing system is 3. Remove any additional items

designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING from the seat such as blankets,
right front passenger frontal airbag cushions, seat covers, seat
anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever heaters, or seat massagers.
person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong 4. Reinstall the child restraint
properly in the right front following the directions
passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, provided by the child restraint
When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right manufacturer and refer to
system has allowed the airbag to be Securing Child Restraints (Rear
away. See Airbag Readiness
enabled, the on indicator will light Seat Position) on page 3‑65 or
Light on page 5‑20 for more
and stay lit to remind you that the Securing Child Restraints
airbag is active. information, including important (Center Front Seat Position) on
safety information. page 3‑67 or Securing Child
For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for Restraints (Right Front Seat
very small adults, the passenger If the On Indicator is Lit for a Position) on page 3‑67.
sensing system may or may not Child Restraint 5. If, after reinstalling the child
turn off the right front passenger If a child restraint has been installed restraint and restarting the
frontal airbag, depending upon the and the on indicator is lit: vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
person's seating posture and body turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
build. Everyone in your vehicle 1. Turn the vehicle off. recline the vehicle seatback
who has outgrown child restraints 2. Remove the child restraint from and adjust the seat cushion,
should wear a safety belt the vehicle. if adjustable, to make sure that
properly — whether or not there the vehicle seatback is not
is an airbag for that person. pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an use the following steps to allow the
restraint is not trapped under the Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and
vehicle head restraint. If this enable the right front passenger
happens, adjust the head frontal airbag:
restraint. See Head Restraints 1. Turn the vehicle off.
on page 3‑2.
2. Remove any additional material
6. Restart the vehicle. from the seat, such as blankets,
The passenger sensing system cushions, seat covers, seat
may or may not turn off the heaters, or seat massagers.
airbag for a child in a child 3. Place the seatback in the fully
restraint depending upon the upright position.
child’s seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the 4. Have the person sit upright in
child restraint in a rear seat. the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended.
the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for
because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on
properly in the seat. If this happens, indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting A thick layer of additional material,

System Operation such as a blanket or cushion, { WARNING
or aftermarket equipment such as
Safety belts help keep the seat covers, seat heaters, and seat Stowing of articles under the
passenger in position on the seat massagers can affect how well passenger seat or between the
during vehicle maneuvers and the passenger sensing system passenger seat cushion and
braking, which helps the passenger operates. We recommend that seatback may interfere with the
sensing system maintain the you not use seat covers or other proper operation of the passenger
passenger airbag status. See aftermarket equipment except when sensing system.
“Safety Belts” and “Child approved by GM for your specific
Restraints” in the Index for vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
additional information about the the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on Servicing the
importance of proper restraint use. page 3‑45 for more information Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
If the shoulder portion of the belt is about modifications that can affect Airbags affect how the vehicle
pulled out all the way, the child how the system operates. should be serviced. There are parts
restraint locking feature will be The on indicator may be lit if an of the airbag system in several
engaged. This may unintentionally object, such as a briefcase, places around the vehicle. Your
cause the passenger sensing handbag, grocery bag, laptop or dealer and the service manual have
system to turn the airbag off for other electronic device, is put on information about servicing the
some adult size occupants. If this an unoccupied seat. If this is not vehicle and the airbag system. To
happens, let the belt go back all the desired, remove the object from purchase a service manual, see
way and start again. the seat. Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑14.
keep the airbag system from device, installed under or on top

{ WARNING working properly. Changing or of the seat fabric, could also
moving any parts of the front interfere with the operation of
For up to 10 seconds after the seats, safety belts, the airbag the passenger sensing system.
ignition is turned off and the sensing and diagnostic module, This could either prevent proper
battery is disconnected, an airbag steering wheel, instrument deployment of the passenger
can still inflate during improper panel, roof-rail airbag modules, airbag(s) or prevent the
service. You can be injured if you ceiling headliner or pillar garnish passenger sensing system
are close to an airbag when it trim, overhead console, front from properly turning off the
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. sensors, side impact sensors, passenger airbag(s). See
They are probably part of the or airbag wiring can affect the Passenger Sensing System on
airbag system. Be sure to follow operation of the airbag system. page 3‑40.
proper service procedures, and In addition, the vehicle may have If you have any questions about
make sure the person performing a passenger sensing system for this, you should contact
work for you is qualified to do so. the right front passenger's Customer Assistance before you
position, which includes sensors modify your vehicle. The phone
that are part of the passenger's numbers and addresses for
Adding Equipment to the seat. The passenger sensing Customer Assistance are in
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system may not operate properly Step Two of the Customer
Q: Is there anything I might add if the original seat trim is Satisfaction Procedure in this
to or change about the vehicle replaced with non-GM covers, manual. See Customer
that could keep the airbags upholstery or trim, or with GM Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
from working properly? covers, upholstery or trim Canada) on page 13‑1 or
designed for a different vehicle. Customer Satisfaction
A: Yes. If you add things that Any object, such as an Procedure (Mexico) on
change your vehicle's frame, aftermarket seat heater or a page 13‑3.
bumper system, height, front end comfort enhancing pad or
or side sheet metal, they may
If the vehicle has rollover Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check
roof-rail airbags, see Different I have to get my vehicle
Size Tires and Wheels on modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need
page 10‑75 for additional whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance or
important information. airbag system? replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Q: What if I added a snow plow? A: If you have questions, call Airbag Readiness Light on
Will it keep the airbags from Customer Assistance. The page 5‑20 for more information.
working properly? phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Notice: If an airbag covering is
A: We have designed our airbag damaged, opened, or broken, the
systems to work properly under Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this airbag may not work properly. Do
a wide range of conditions, not open or break the airbag
including snow plowing with manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and coverings. If there are any
vehicles that have the optional opened or broken airbag covers,
Snow Plow Prep Package Canada) on page 13‑1 or
Customer Satisfaction have the airbag covering and/or
(RPO VYU). But do not change airbag module replaced. For the
or defeat the snow plow's Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑3. location of the airbag modules,
“tripping mechanism.” If you do, see What Makes an Airbag
it can damage your snow plow In addition, your dealer and the Inflate? on page 3‑35. See your
and your vehicle, and it may service manual have information dealer for service.
cause an airbag inflation. about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag
airbag systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
not work properly and may
not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics,
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the children and infants are safer
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, when properly restrained in a child
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. restraint system or infant restraint
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to system secured in a rear seating
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts? position.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a In a crash, children who are not
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the buckled up can strike other people
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder who are buckled up, or can be
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or children need to use safety belts
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit properly.
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
page 3‑22 for more information. abdomen, which could cause
If the shoulder belt still does not severe or even fatal internal
rest on the shoulder, then return injuries in a crash.
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑22.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
{ WARNING { WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. Never do this. That could cause serious or fatal
Never allow two children to wear Never allow a child to wear the injuries. The shoulder belt should
the same safety belt. The safety safety belt with the shoulder belt go over the shoulder and across
belt cannot properly spread the behind their back. A child can be the chest.
impact forces. In a crash, the two seriously injured by not wearing
children can be crushed together the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
and seriously injured. A safety crash, the child would not be
belt must be used by only one restrained by the shoulder belt.
person at a time. The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's infant will suddenly become a
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every arms. An infant should be
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride secured in an appropriate
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the restraint.
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
(Continued)
For most basic types of child

{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available. When
Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against, sure it is designed to be used in
or very close to, any airbag when a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints?
child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it owner, are available in four basic
will go. types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
The restraint manufacturer's Child Restraint Systems

instructions that come with the { WARNING
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still
child restraint. In addition, there so small that the vehicle's regular
are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on
available for children with the hip bones, as it should.
special needs. Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
{ WARNING the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
need complete support. This is injuries. To reduce the risk of
because an infant's neck is not serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
fully developed and its head crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
weighs so much compared with always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
the rest of its body. In a crash, child restraints. surface against the back of the
an infant in a rear-facing child infant.
restraint settles into the restraint, The harness system holds the infant
so the crash forces can be in place and, in a crash, acts to
distributed across the strongest keep the infant positioned in the
part of an infant's body, the back restraint.
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of injury,
child to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for In some areas of the United Where to Put the
Children (LATCH System) on States and Canada, Certified
page 3‑56 for more information. Child Passenger Safety Technicians
Restraint
Children can be endangered in a (CPSTs) are available to inspect According to accident statistics,
crash if the child restraint is not and demonstrate how to correctly children and infants are safer
properly secured in the vehicle. use and install child restraints. In when properly restrained in a child
When securing an add-on child the U.S., refer to the National restraint system or infant restraint
restraint, refer to the instructions Highway Traffic Safety system secured in a rear seating
that come with the restraint which Administration (NHTSA) website to position.
may be on the restraint itself or in a locate the nearest child safety seat
We recommend that children and
booklet, or both, and to this manual. inspection station. For CPST
child restraints be secured in a rear
The child restraint instructions are availability in Canada, check with
seat, including: an infant or a child
important, so if they are not Transport Canada or the Provincial
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
available, obtain a replacement Ministry of Transportation office.
a child riding in a forward-facing
copy from the manufacturer. Securing the Child Within the child seat; an older child riding in a
Keep in mind that an unsecured Child Restraint booster seat; and children, who are
child restraint can move around in a large enough, using safety belts.
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
{ WARNING If a child restraint is secured in the
right front passenger seat, and the
properly secure any child restraint A child can be seriously injured or vehicle has a switch in the glove
in the vehicle — even when no child killed in a crash if the child is not box to manually turn off the right
is in it. properly secured in the child front passenger airbag, see Airbag
restraint. Secure the child On-Off Switch on page 3‑37 and
properly following the instructions Securing Child Restraints (Rear
that came with that child restraint. Seat Position) on page 3‑65 or
Securing Child Restraints (Center
Front Seat Position) on page 3‑67
or Securing Child Restraints (Right

for more information, including WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing A child in a child restraint in the
A label on the sun visor says, system or airbag switch has center front seat can be badly
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in turned off the right front injured or killed by the frontal
the front.” This is because the risk to passenger frontal airbag, no airbags if they inflate. Never
the rear-facing child is so great, system is fail-safe. No one can secure a child restraint in the
if the airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will not center front seat. It is always
deploy under some unusual better to secure a child restraint in
{ WARNING circumstance, even though it is a rear seat.
turned off.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not use child restraints in the
injured or killed if the right front in a rear seat, even if the center front seat position.
passenger airbag inflates. airbag is off. If you secure a When securing a child restraint in a
This is because the back of the forward-facing child restraint in rear seating position, study the
rear-facing child restraint would the right front seat, always move instructions that came with your
be very close to the inflating the front passenger seat as far child restraint to make sure it is
airbag. A child in a forward-facing back as it will go. It is better to compatible with this vehicle.
child restraint can be seriously secure the child restraint in a
Child restraints and booster seats
injured or killed if the right front rear seat. vary considerably in size, and some
passenger airbag inflates and the may fit in certain seating positions
passenger seat is in a forward better than others. Always make
position. sure the child restraint is properly
(Continued) secured.
Depending on where you place the Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with
child restraint and the size of the a top tether, you must also use
child restraint, you may not be able
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system
child restraint prevents access to or The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a
interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that has LATCH
safety belt. child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
If the vehicle does not have a with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with
rear seat that will accommodate Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the child
a rear-facing child restraint, a child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The
rear-facing child restraint should using the anchors, or use the following explains how to attach a
not be installed in the vehicle, vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these
even if the airbag is off. restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
installed, be sure to secure the also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
child restraint properly. and attachments or top tether
Keep in mind that an unsecured anchors and attachments.
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the top forward-facing child restraints have
built into the vehicle. There are of the child restraint to the vehicle. a top tether, and that the tether be
two lower anchors for each A top tether anchor is built into attached. Be sure to read and follow
LATCH seating position that will the vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
Regular Cab — Three-Passenger Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat

Front Seat i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
Regular Cab — Two-Passenger i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors.
Front Seat positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating
Do not install a child restraint in the positions with two lower anchors.
center front seat position. See For crew and extended cab models,
Securing Child Restraints (Rear the rear outboard seating positions
Seat Position) on page 3‑65 or have exposed metal lower anchors
Securing Child Restraints (Center located in the crease between the
Front Seat Position) on page 3‑67 seatback and the seat cushion.
or Securing Child Restraints (Right
Child Restraints (Center Front Seat

Position) on page 3‑67 or Securing
Child Restraints (Right Front Seat
Position) on page 3‑67 for more
information.
For regular cab models, the top
For regular cab models, there is an tether anchors are located under
anchor symbol on the covers to covers on the back panel behind the
assist you in locating the top tether passenger seat. Remove the trim
anchors. plug to access the anchor. Be sure
to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab
restraint will be placed. Similar
For crew and extended cab models,
the top tether anchors are the loops
located near the top of the seatback
for each rear seating position.
These loops will be used to route
the top tether through, as well as, to
secure the top tether in the vehicle.
Be sure to use an anchor (loop)
Regular Cab located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
Do not install a child restraint in the where the child restraint will be
center seat position. See Securing placed.
Child Restraints (Rear Seat
Position) on page 3‑65 or Securing
Be sure to read the instructions Securing a Child Restraint

following to properly install a child Designed for the LATCH { WARNING
restraint using these loops. System Do not attach more than one child
Do not secure a child restraint in a restraint to a single anchor,
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
{ WARNING except for the center top tether
anchors in the crew and extended
that the top tether be attached, or if If a LATCH-type child restraint is cabs. Attaching more than one
the instructions that come with the not attached to anchors, the child child restraint to a single anchor
child restraint say that the top tether restraint will not be able to protect could cause the anchor or
must be attached. the child correctly. In a crash, the attachment to come loose or even
According to accident statistics, child could be seriously injured or break during a crash. A child or
children and infants are safer when killed. Install a LATCH-type child others could be injured. To reduce
properly restrained in a child restraint properly using the the risk of serious or fatal injuries
restraint system or infant restraint anchors, or use the vehicle safety during a crash, attach only one
system secured in a rear seating belts to secure the restraint, child restraint per anchor.
position. See Where to Put the following the instructions that
Restraint on page 3‑54 for came with the child restraint and
additional information. the instructions in this manual.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused
safety belts behind the child
(Continued)
Regular Cab Models 1.4. Route, attach, and tighten

WARNING (Continued) the top tether according to
1. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether your child restraint
restraint so children cannot reach instructions and the
them. Pull the shoulder belt all the be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether following instructions:
way out of the retractor to set the
lock, if the vehicle has one, after anchor, if your vehicle has one.
the child restraint has been Refer to the child restraint
installed. instructions and the following
steps:
1.1. Pull the passenger
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
seatback forward by pulling
attachments rub against the
the recliner handle upward
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
to access the top tether
damage these parts. If necessary,
anchor. See Reclining
move buckled safety belts to
Seatbacks on page 3‑8 for If the position you are using
avoid rubbing the LATCH
additional information. has an adjustable headrest
attachments.
1.2. Find the top tether anchor. or head restraint and you
Do not fold the empty rear seat are using a dual tether,
with a safety belt buckled. This 1.3. Remove the cover to
route the tether around the
could damage the safety belt or expose the anchor.
headrest or head restraint.
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
2. See Securing Child Restraints Crew and Extended Cab Models

(Rear Seat Position) on 1. Attach and tighten the lower
page 3‑65 or Securing Child attachments to the lower
Restraints (Center Front Seat anchors. If the child restraint
Position) on page 3‑67 or does not have lower
Securing Child Restraints (Right attachments or the desired
Front Seat Position) on seating position does not have
page 3‑67 for instructions on lower anchors, secure the child
installing the child restraint using restraint with the top tether and
If the position you are using the safety belts. the safety belts. Refer to your
has an adjustable headrest 3. Before placing a child in the child restraint manufacturer
or head restraint and you child restraint, make sure it is instructions and the instructions
are using a single tether, securely held in place. To check, in this manual.
raise the headrest or head grasp the child restraint at the
restraint and route the 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
LATCH path and attempt to the desired seating
tether under the headrest or move it side‐to‐side and
head restraint and in position.
back‐and‐forth. There should be
between the headrest or no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of 1.2. Put the child restraint on
head restraint posts. movement for proper installation. the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer behind the inboard

recommends that the top tether headrest or head
be attached, attach and tighten restraint post, and
the top tether to the top tether under the center
anchor (loop), if your vehicle has shoulder belt (C).
one. Refer to the child restraint C. Attach the top
instructions and the following tether (B) to the
steps: top tether
anchor (loop) (D)
at the center rear
seating position.
2.2. When using a child restraint
Example — Rear Driver Side
with a top tether in the rear
Position center position:
2.1. When using a child restraint A. Route the top
with a top tether in the rear tether (B) through
driver side position: the center loop (D),
A. Raise the headrest and behind the
or head restraint. inboard passenger
Example — Rear Driver Side side headrest or
B. Route the top
head restraint post.
Position tether (B) between
the headrest or head B. Attach the top
restraint posts, tether (B) to the top
through the loop (A), tether anchor (loop)
at the rear
passenger side
seating position.
2.3. When using a child restraint 2.4. Tighten the top tether Replacing LATCH System
with a top tether in the rear when and as the child
passenger position: restraint manufacturer's
Parts After a Crash
A. Raise the headrest instructions say.
or head restraint. When the top tether is
{ WARNING
B. Route the top tightened, the anchor (loop) A crash can damage the LATCH
tether (B) between may bend. This is normal system in the vehicle. A damaged
the headrest or head and will not damage the LATCH system may not properly
restraint posts, vehicle.
secure the child restraint,
through the loop on 3. Before placing a child in the resulting in serious injury or even
the passenger side child restraint, make sure it is death in a crash. To help make
and behind the securely held in place. To check, sure the LATCH system is
inboard headrest or grasp the child restraint at the working properly after a crash,
head restraint post. LATCH path and attempt to see your dealer to have the
C. Attach the top move it side‐to‐side and system inspected and any
tether (B) to the back‐and‐forth. There should be necessary replacements made as
top tether no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of soon as possible.
anchor (loop) (D) at movement for proper installation.
the center rear
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
seating position.
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat Position) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 3‑56 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint For crew cab second row
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear seatings positions, tilt the latch
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put plate to adjust the belt if needed.
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑54.
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
page 3‑56 for top tether anchor the seat.
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints Securing Child Restraints
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Center Front Seat (Right Front Seat
regarding the use of the top Position) Position)
tether. See Lower Anchors and
With Passenger Sensing
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑56 for more
{ WARNING System
information. A child in a child restraint in the This vehicle has airbags. A rear
7. Before placing a child in the center front seat can be badly seat is a safer place to secure a
child restraint, make sure it is injured or killed by the frontal forward-facing child restraint. See
securely held in place. To check, airbags if they inflate. Never Where to Put the Restraint on
grasp the child restraint at the secure a child restraint in the page 3‑54.
safety belt path and attempt to center front seat. It is always In addition, the vehicle may have a
move it side‐to‐side and better to secure a child restraint passenger sensing system which is
back‐and‐forth. When the child in a rear seat. designed to turn off the right front
restraint is properly installed, passenger frontal airbag under
there should be no more than certain conditions. See Passenger
Do not use child restraints in the
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. Sensing System on page 3‑40 and
center front seat position.
To remove the child restraint, Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and on page 5‑23 for more information
let it return to the stowed position. on this, including important safety
If the top tether is attached to a top information.
tether anchor, disconnect it.
A label on the sun visor says, If the vehicle does not have a rear
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) seat that will accommodate a
the front.” This is because the risk to rear-facing child restraint, a
the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing rear-facing child restraint should
if the airbag deploys. system, if equipped, has turned not be installed in the vehicle, even
off the right front passenger if the airbag is off.
frontal airbag, no system is
{ WARNING fail-safe. No one can guarantee If the child restraint has the LATCH
that an airbag will not deploy system, see Lower Anchors and
A child in a rear-facing child Tethers for Children (LATCH
restraint can be seriously under some unusual
System) on page 3‑56 for how and
injured or killed if the right front circumstance, even though
where to install the child restraint
passenger airbag inflates. This it is turned off. using LATCH. If you secure a child
is because the back of the Secure rear-facing child restraint using a safety belt and it
rear-facing child restraint would restraints in a rear seat, even if uses a top tether, see Lower
be very close to the inflating the airbag is off. If you secure a Anchors and Tethers for Children
airbag. A child in a forward-facing forward-facing child restraint in (LATCH System) on page 3‑56 for
child restraint can be seriously the right front seat, always move top tether anchor locations.
injured or killed if the right front the front passenger seat as far Do not secure a child seat in a
passenger airbag inflates and the back as it will go. It is better to position without a top tether anchor
passenger seat is in a forward secure the child restraint in a if a national or local law requires
position. rear seat. that the top tether be anchored, or if
The vehicle may have a the instructions that come with the
See Passenger Sensing System
passenger sensing system which child restraint say that the top strap
on page 3‑40 for additional must be anchored.
is designed to turn off the right information.
front passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions.
(Continued)
In Canada, the law requires that 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
forward-facing child restraints have the lap and shoulder portions of
a top tether, and that the tether be the vehicle's safety belt through
attached. or around the restraint. The child
You will be using the lap-shoulder restraint instructions will show
belt to secure the child restraint in you how.
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
system, if equipped, has turned out of the retractor to set the
off the right front passenger lock. When the retractor lock is
frontal airbag, the off indicator set, the belt can be tightened but
in the passenger airbag status not pulled out of the retractor.
indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status 4. Push the latch plate into the
Indicator on page 5‑23. buckle until it clicks.
2. Put the child restraint on Position the release button so
the seat. that the safety belt could be
quickly unbuckled if necessary.
7. If the vehicle does not have a If a child restraint has been installed
rear seat and the child restraint and the on indicator is lit, see “If
has a top tether, follow the the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
child restraint manufacturer's Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
instructions regarding the use System on page 3‑40 for more
of the top tether. See Lower information.
Anchors and Tethers for To remove the child restraint,
Children (LATCH System) on unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
page 3‑56 for more information. let it return to the stowed position.
8. Before placing a child in the If the top tether is attached to a top
child restraint, make sure it is tether anchor, disconnect it.
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the With Airbag Off Switch
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to This vehicle has airbags. A rear
shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back seat is a safer place to secure a
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child forward-facing child restraint. See
and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed, Where to Put the Restraint on
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than page 3‑54.
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
There may be a switch in the glove
may be helpful to use your knee If the vehicle is equipped with a box that you can use to turn off the
to push down on the child passenger sensing system, and right front passenger frontal airbag.
restraint as you tighten the belt. when the passenger sensing system See Airbag On-Off Switch on
Try to pull the belt out of the has turned off the right front page 3‑37 for more information,
retractor to make sure the passenger frontal airbag, the off including important safety
retractor is locked. If the indicator in the passenger airbag information.
retractor is not locked, repeat status indicator should light and stay
Steps 5 and 6. lit when you start the vehicle.
A label on the sun visor says,

“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
the front unless airbag is off.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing guarantee that an airbag will not If the airbag readiness light ever
child is so great, if the airbag deploy under some unusual comes on and stays on, it means
deploys. circumstance, even though it is that something may be wrong
turned off. with the airbag system. For
example, the right front
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child
passenger airbag could inflate
restraints in a rear seat, even if
A child in a rear-facing child the airbag is off. If you secure a even though the airbag on-off
restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in switch is turned off.
or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move To help avoid injury to yourself or
passenger airbag inflates. This is the front passenger seat as far others, have the vehicle serviced
because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to right away. See Airbag Readiness
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a Light on page 5‑20 for more
be very close to the inflating rear seat. information, including important
airbag. A child in a forward-facing safety information.
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat that will accommodate a
passenger seat is in a forward
rear-facing child restraint, a
position.
rear-facing child restraint should
Even if the airbag switch has not be installed in the vehicle, even
turned off the right front if the airbag is off.
passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
(Continued)
If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in the lap and shoulder portions of
Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions the vehicle's safety belt through
System) on page 3‑56 for how and that came with the child restraint. or around the restraint. The child
where to install the child restraint 1. Move the seat as far back as it restraint instructions will show
using LATCH. If a child restraint is will go before securing the you how.
secured using a safety belt and it forward-facing child restraint.
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children If you have no other choice but
(LATCH System) on page 3‑56 for to install a rear-facing child
top tether anchor locations. restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child
Do not secure a child restraint in a restraint has been installed.
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires When the airbag off switch
that the top tether be anchored, or if has turned off the right front
the instructions that come with the passenger frontal airbag, the off
child restraint say that the top strap indicator in the airbag off light
must be anchored. should light and stay lit when
you start the vehicle. See Airbag
In Canada, the law requires that On-Off Light on page 5‑21.
forward-facing child restraints have 4. Push the latch plate into the
a top tether, and that the tether be 2. Put the child restraint on buckle until it clicks.
attached. the seat. Position the release button so
that the safety belt could be
quickly unbuckled if necessary.
7. If your vehicle does not have a

rear seat and your child restraint
has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's
instructions regarding the use
of the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑56.
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee To remove the child restraint,
to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the top tether is attached to a top
retractor to make sure the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
If you turned the airbag off with Never put a rear-facing child If the child restraint has the LATCH
the switch, turn on the right front restraint in the right front passenger system, see Lower Anchors and
passenger airbag when you remove seat. Here is why: Tethers for Children (LATCH
the child restraint from the vehicle System) on page 3‑56 for how and
unless the person who will be sitting
there is a member of a passenger
{ WARNING where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child
airbag risk group. See Airbag A child in a rear-facing child restraint using a safety belt and it
On-Off Switch on page 3‑37 for restraint can be seriously uses a top tether, see Lower
more information, including injured or killed if the right front Anchors and Tethers for Children
important safety information. passenger's airbag inflates. This (LATCH System) on page 3‑56 for
is because the back of the top tether anchor locations.
Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only
rear-facing child restraint would Do not secure a child seat in a
This vehicle has airbags. A rear be very close to the inflating position without a top tether anchor
seat is a safer place to secure a airbag. Always secure a if a national or local law requires
forward-facing child restraint. See rear-facing child restraint in a that the top tether be anchored, or if
Where to Put the Restraint on the instructions that come with the
rear seat.
page 3‑54. child restraint say that the top strap
A label on the sun visor says, must be anchored.
If the vehicle does not have a
“Never put a rear-facing child seat In Canada, the law requires that
rear seat that will accommodate a
in the front.” This is because the risk forward-facing child restraints have
rear-facing child restraint, a
to the rear-facing child is so great, a top tether, and that the tether be
rear-facing child restraint should
if the airbag deploys. attached.
not be installed in the vehicle, even
if the airbag is off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
or around the restraint. The child buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
restraint instructions will show lock. When the retractor lock is
you how. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able set, the belt can be tightened but
to unbuckle the safety belt not pulled out of the retractor.
quickly if necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of the 8. Before placing a child in the
retractor to make sure the child restraint, make sure it is
retractor is locked. If the securely held in place. To check,
retractor is not locked, repeat grasp the child restraint at the
Steps 5 and 6. safety belt path and attempt to
7. If your child restraint has a top move it side to side and back
tether, follow the child restraint and forth. When the child
manufacturer's instructions restraint is properly installed,
regarding the use of the top there should be no more than
tether. See Lower Anchors and 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
Tethers for Children (LATCH To remove the child restraint,
System) on page 3‑56 for more unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
6. To tighten the belt, push down information. let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the If the top tether is attached to a top
shoulder portion of the belt to tether anchor, disconnect it.
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Glove Box

Compartments Lift up on the glove box lever to
open it.
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Cupholders
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 For vehicles equipped with an
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 instrument panel storage area, it is Vehicles with cupholders have
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 located above the glove box. them located on and behind the
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 center console and in the rear seat
armrest. Pull the loop down on the
rear seat armrest to access the
cupholders.
Pull downward on the cover to
access the cupholders behind the
center console.
Armrest Storage
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest
have two cupholders. Pull the
armrest down from the rear
seatback to access the cupholders.
Access the storage area by
pressing and holding in the driver
side of the handle and pull out on
the exposed portion of the handle.
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage

Vehicles with an upper and lower
center console storage area have
cupholders included.
Pull the lever (A) up to access the

upper storage area. Raise the upper
storage bin, then pull the lever (B)
up to access the lower storage area.
Use the key to lock and unlock the
lower storage area.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Engine Oil Pressure
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-32
Controls Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Engine Coolant Temperature
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Information Displays

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Driver Information
Controls Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-20
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-20 Vehicle Messages
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Passenger Airbag Status Battery Voltage and Charging
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-24 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-41
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Malfunction Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Engine Cooling System
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Brake System Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-44
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-45
Indicators Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-45
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-29 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-45
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-29 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-30 Object Detection System
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-31 Ride Control System
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-31 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-47 Controls 3. Release the lever to lock the
Anti-theft Alarm System wheel in place.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Starting the Vehicle Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 Adjustment
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-49 Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-50
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization (with
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-58
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
The tilt lever is located on the lower
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
left side of the steering column.
If equipped, some audio controls
To adjust the steering wheel: can be adjusted at the steering
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull wheel.
the lever. w / c x (Next/Previous): Press
2. Move the steering wheel up to select preset or favorite radio
or down. stations, select tracks on a CD/
DVD, or navigate an iPod or USB
device.
Radio Navigating Folders on an iPod or Navigating an iPod or USB Device

To select preset or favorite radio USB Device (Vehicles without a on the Main Audio Screen
stations: Navigation System): (Vehicles with a Navigation
System)
1. Press and hold w or c x
Press and release w or c x to
while listening to a song until the 1. Press and release w or c x
go to the next or previous radio
contents of the current folder to select the next or previous
station stored as a preset or
display on the radio display. track within the selected
favorite.
category.
CD/DVD 2. Press and hold c x to go
back to the previous folder list. 2. Press and hold w or c x to
To select tracks on a CD/DVD: move quickly through the tracks.
3. Press and release w or c x
Press and release w or c x to to scroll up or down the list. 3. Press and release ¨ to move up
go to the next or previous track. one track within the selected
. To select a folder, press
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or category.
and hold w, or press ¨
USB Device (Vehicles without a Navigating an iPod or USB Device
when the folder is
Navigation System) on the Music Navigator Screen
highlighted.
1. Press and hold w or c x (Vehicles with a Navigation
. To go back further in System)
while listening to a song until the the folder list, press
contents of the current folder and hold c x. 1. Press and release w or c x
display on the radio display. to select the next or previous
2. Press and release w or c x track within the selected
category.
to scroll up or down the list, then
press and hold w, or press ¨ to 2. Press and hold w or c x to
play the highlighted track. move quickly through the tracks
within the selected category.
3. Press and release ¨ to move up ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the + e − e (Volume): Press to

one track within the selected next radio station while in AM, increase or to decrease the volume.
category. FM, or XM™.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to For vehicles with or without a Horn
silence the vehicle speakers only. navigation system: To sound the horn, press the center
Press again to turn the sound on. pad on the steering wheel.
Press ¨ to go to the next track or
For vehicles with Bluetooth or chapter while sourced to the CD or
OnStar systems, press and hold for DVD slot. Windshield Wiper/Washer
longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See Bluetooth Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
on page 7‑48 and the OnStar when navigating folders on an iPod
Owner's Guide for more information. or USB device.
c x (End): Press to reject an For vehicles with a navigation
incoming call, or end a current call. system:
SRCE (Source/Voice 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is
Recognition): Press to switch Turn the band with the wiper symbol
heard, to place the radio into
between the radio and CD, and for SCAN mode. A station will play to control the windshield wipers.
equipped vehicles, the DVD, front for five seconds before moving 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8,
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. to the next station. then release. Several wipes, hold
For vehicles with the navigation 2. To stop the SCAN function, the band on 8 longer.
system, press and hold this button
press ¨ again. 9 (Off): Turns the windshield
for longer than one second to
wipers off.
initiate voice recognition. See While listening to a CD/DVD, press
“Voice Recognition” in the and hold ¨ to quickly move forward
Navigation System manual for through the tracks. Release to stop
more information. on the desired track.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): L (Washer Fluid): Push the Compass variance is the difference
Turn the band up for more frequent paddle marked with the windshield between the earth's magnetic north
wipes or down for less frequent washer symbol at the top of the and true geographic north. If the
wipes. multifunction lever, to spray washer compass is not set to the zone
fluid on the windshield. The wipers where you live, the compass may
6 (Low Speed): Slow
clear the window and then either give false readings. The compass
wipes. must be set to the variance zone in
stop or return to the preset speed.
? (High Speed): Fast wipes. which the vehicle is traveling.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper Compass To adjust for compass variance, use
blades before using them. If frozen The vehicle may have a compass in the following procedure:
to the windshield, carefully loosen or the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone)
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
Compass Zone Procedure
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10‑40. The zone is set to zone eight upon 1. Do not set the compass zone
leaving the factory. Your dealer will when the vehicle is moving.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
Only set it when the vehicle is in
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will set the correct zone for your
location. P (Park).
stop the motor until it cools down.
Under certain circumstances, Press the vehicle information
Windshield Washer button until PRESS V TO
such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip or moving to a CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
{ WARNING new state or province, it will be displays. Or, if the vehicle does
necessary to compensate for not have DIC buttons, press the
In freezing weather, do not use trip odometer reset stem until
compass variance by resetting the
the washer until the windshield CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
zone through the DIC if the zone is
is warmed. Otherwise the displays.
not set correctly.
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
two seconds to select the next strong magnetic field interfering

available variance zone. Repeat with the compass. Such interference
this step until the appropriate may be caused by a magnetic CB
variance zone is displayed. or cell phone antenna mount, a
5. If calibration is necessary, magnetic emergency light, magnetic
calibrate the compass. See note pad holder, or any other
“Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
Procedure” following. move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
Compass Calibration compass.
The compass can be manually To calibrate the compass, use the
calibrated. Only calibrate the following procedure:
2. Find the vehicle's current compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open Compass Calibration Procedure
location and variance zone
number on the map. parking lot, where driving the 1. Before calibrating the compass,
vehicle in circles is not a danger. make sure the compass zone is
Zones 1 through 15 are It is suggested to calibrate away set to the variance zone in which
available. from tall buildings, utility wires, the vehicle is located. See
3. Press the set/reset button to manhole covers, or other industrial “Compass Variance (Zone)
scroll through and select the structures, if possible. Procedure” earlier in this
appropriate variance zone. If CAL should ever appear in the section.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until DIC display, the compass should be Do not operate any switches
the vehicle heading, for calibrated. such as window, sunroof,
example, N for North, is If the DIC display does not show a climate controls, or seats during
displayed in the DIC. Or, if the heading, for example, N for North, the calibration procedure.
vehicle does not have DIC or the heading does not change
buttons, press and hold the trip after making turns, there may be a
odometer reset stem for
2. Press the vehicle information Clock 5. Press the H button again until
button until PRESS V TO the clock display stops flashing
CALIBRATE COMPASS AM-FM Radio and AM‐FM to set the currently displayed
displays. Or, if the vehicle does Radio with CD Player time, or wait until the flashing
not have DIC buttons, press the To set the clock: stops after five seconds and the
trip odometer reset stem until current time displayed
CALIBRATE COMPASS 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ automatically sets.
displays. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press the O button to turn the MP3 Radios with a Single CD
3. Press the set/reset button to or a Single CD and DVD Player
radio on.
start the compass calibration.
Or, if the vehicle does not have 2. Press the H button until the hour To adjust the time and date:
DIC buttons, press and hold numbers begin to flash, then 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
the trip odometer reset stem ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
turn the f knob to increase or
for two seconds to start the press the O button to turn the
decrease the hour.
compass calibration.
radio on.
4. The DIC will display 3. Press the H button until the
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN minute numbers begin to flash, 2. Press the H button to display
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle then turn the f knob to increase HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
in tight circles at less than or decrease the minutes. minute, month, day, and year).
8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the 3. Press the softkey located under
calibration. The DIC will display 4. Press the H button until the any one of the tabs to change
CALIBRATION COMPLETE 12HR or 24HR time format that setting.
for a few seconds when the begins to flash, then turn
calibration is complete. The DIC the f knob to change the time
display will then return to the format.
previous menu.
4. To increase the time or date, do To change the time default setting MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc
one of the following: from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change CD Player
. Press the softkey below the the date default setting from month/
day/year to day/month/year: To set the time and date:
selected tab.
1. Turn the ignition key to
. Press the ¨ SEEK button. 1. Press the H button and then ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
the softkey located below the
then press the O button to turn
. Press the \ FWD button. forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the
date MM/DD (month and day), the radio on.
. Turn the f knob clockwise. and DD/MM (day and month) 2. Press the MENU button and
5. To decrease the time or date, do displays. then the softkey under the H tab
one of the following: 2. Press the softkey located below to display HR, MIN, MM, DD,
the desired option. YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,
. Press the © SEEK button. and year).
3. Press the H button again to
. Press the s REV button. 3. Press the softkey located under
apply the desired option, or let
the screen time out. any one of the tabs to change
. Turn the f knob that setting.
counterclockwise.
4. To increase the time or date, do To change the time default setting Power Outlets
one of the following: from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change
the date default setting from month/ Accessory power outlets can be
. Press the softkey below the used to plug in electrical equipment,
selected tab. day to day/month:
such as a cell phone, MP3
1. Press the MENU button and player, etc.
. Press the ¨ SEEK button. then the softkey under the
H tab. The vehicle may have two
. Press the \ FWD button. accessory power outlets located
2. Press the softkey located below below the climate control system,
. Turn the f knob clockwise. the forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, or may have one accessory power
5. To decrease the time or date, do the date MM/DD (month and outlet and one cigarette lighter. The
one of the following: day), and DD/MM (day and cigarette lighter is designed to fit
month) displays. only in the receptacle closest to the
. Press the © SEEK button. 3. Press the softkey located below driver.
. Press the s REV button. the desired option. There may be another accessory
4. Press the MENU button again to power outlet in the rear cargo area.
. Turn the f knob If the vehicle has a floor console,
apply the desired option, or let
counterclockwise. there is an accessory power outlet
the screen time out.
inside the storage bin and one on
the rear of the floor console.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
The accessory power outlets are Certain power accessory plugs may Cigarette Lighter
powered, even when the ignition is not be compatible to the accessory
in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use power outlet and could overload To use the cigarette lighter, push it
power outlets while the ignition is in vehicle or adapter fuses. If a in all the way, and let go. When it is
LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle's problem is experienced, see your ready for use, the lighter pops
battery to run down. dealer. back out.
When adding electrical equipment, Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
{ WARNING be sure to follow the proper in while it is heating does not let
installation instructions included with the lighter back away from the
Power is always supplied to the the equipment. See Add-On heating element when it is hot.
outlets. Do not leave electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9‑117. Damage from overheating can
equipment plugged in when the occur to the lighter or heating
vehicle is not in use because the Notice: Hanging heavy element, or a fuse could be
equipment from the power outlet blown. Do not hold a cigarette
vehicle could catch fire and cause
can cause damage not covered lighter in while it is heating.
injury or death.
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
Notice: Leaving electrical accessory power plugs only, such
equipment plugged in for an as cell phone charge cords.
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
The vehicle may have a front Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
ashtray located near the center of lights work together to indicate a
the instrument panel. Pull on the Indicators problem with the vehicle.
door to open it. The ashtray may Warning lights and gauges can
have a cigarette lighter. When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
Notice: If papers, pins, or other before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
flammable items are put in the to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
smoking materials could ignite warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
them and possibly damage the prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
vehicle. Never put flammable Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
items in the ashtray. could be a problem with a vehicle
To remove the ashtray, open the function. Some warning lights come
door and pull the ashtray bin toward on briefly when the engine is started
you. To replace the ashtray, insert to indicate they are working.
the ashtray bin inside the ashtray
door and press down until it
engages.
Instrument Cluster
English Light Duty Premium Shown. Metric, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Similar.
Automatic Transmsission Cluster-Mexico Only

Manual Transmission Cluster-Mexico Only

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, The hour meter displays for up to To display the odometer reading
see the Duramax diesel supplement 30 seconds, or until the ignition is with the ignition off, press the reset
for more information. turned on. See Driver Information button.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Center (DIC) on page 5‑32 for more See Driver Information Center (DIC)
hybrid supplement for more information. on page 5‑32 for more information.
information.
Trip Odometer Tachometer
Speedometer The trip odometer shows how far The tachometer displays the engine
The speedometer shows the vehicle the vehicle has been driven since speed in revolutions per minute
speed in both kilometers per hour the trip odometer was last set (rpm). For a description of how
(km/h) and miles per hour (mph). to zero. Grade Braking affects vehicle
Press the reset button, located on speed while the Tow/Haul Mode is
Odometer the instrument panel cluster next to activated, see Tow/Haul Mode on
the voltmeter, to toggle between page 9‑46 for more information.
The odometer shows how far the the trip odometer and the regular
vehicle has been driven, in either If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
odometer. Holding the reset button hybrid supplement for more
kilometers or miles. for approximately one second while information.
Engine Hour Meter Display the trip odometer is displayed will
reset it.
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
can also display the number of
hours the engine has run. To display
the engine hours, turn the ignition
off, then press and hold the reset
button for at least four seconds.

. It takes a little more or less fuel
Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
gauge shows about how much fuel
is left in the fuel tank. indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
An arrow on the fuel gauge tank was half full, but it actually
indicates the side of the vehicle took a little more or less than
the fuel door is on. half the fuel tank's capacity to
The gauge will first indicate empty fill it.
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but . The gauge goes back to empty
the vehicle's fuel tank should be when the ignition is turned off.
filled soon.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL see the Duramax diesel supplement
LEVEL LOW message appears. for more information.
See Fuel System Messages on
Metric page 5‑45 for more information. If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
Here are some situations owners information.
can experience with the fuel gauge.
None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gauge.
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
English
Engine Oil Pressure Oil pressure can vary with engine

speed, outside temperature and oil
Gauge viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil
pressure light comes on. See
Engine Oil Pressure Light on
A reading outside the normal
operating range can be caused
by a dangerously low oil level
or some other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check the
English vehicle's oil as soon as possible.
For vehicles with an engine oil
pressure gauge, it shows the engine
Metric
oil pressure in kPa (kilopascals)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running.
See “OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP Engine Coolant

ENGINE” under Engine Oil
Messages on page 5‑44 and Engine
Temperature Gauge
Oil on page 10‑8.
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced. English
This gauge shows the engine
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil coolant temperature.
Metric
maintenance can damage the It also provides an indicator of how
engine. The repairs would not be hard the vehicle is working. During a
covered by the vehicle warranty. majority of the operation, the gauge
Always follow the maintenance reads 100°C (210°F) or less.
schedule for changing engine oil. If pulling a load or going up hills, it
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, is normal for the temperature to
see the Duramax diesel supplement fluctuate and go over the 113°C
for more information. (235°F) mark. If the gauge reaches
the 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working
beyond its capacity.
information.
See Engine Overheating on When the ignition is on, this gauge This condition is normal since the
page 10‑26. indicates the battery voltage. charging system is not able to
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the When the engine is running, this provide full power at engine idle.
hybrid supplement for more gauge shows the condition of the As engine speeds are increased,
information. charging system. The gauge can this condition should correct itself
transition from a higher to lower as higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum
Voltmeter Gauge or a lower to higher reading. This is
power.
normal. If the vehicle is operating
outside the normal operating range, The vehicle can only be driven for a
the charging system light comes on. short time with the readings outside
See Charging System Light on the normal operating range. If the
page 5‑24 for more information. vehicle must be driven, turn off all
The voltmeter gauge may also read accessories, such as the radio and
lower when in fuel economy mode. air conditioner.
This is normal. Readings outside the normal
Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a possible
operating range can also occur problem in the electrical system.
when a large number of electrical Have the vehicle serviced as soon
accessories are operating in the as possible.
vehicle and the engine is left
For vehicles with a voltmeter gauge, idling for an extended period.
this gauge indicates the battery
voltage when the ignition is
turned on.
Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on
Driver Safety Belt Reminder if an object is put on the seat such
Light For vehicles equipped with the as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
passenger safety belt reminder light, bag, laptop, or other electronic
When the engine is started, a chime several seconds after the engine is device. To turn off the warning light
sounds for several seconds, on started, a chime sounds for several and/or chime, remove the object
vehicles equipped with a radio, to seconds to remind the front from the seat or buckle the
remind the driver to fasten the passenger to buckle their safety safety belt.
safety belt, unless the driver safety belt. The passenger safety belt light,
belt is already buckled. located on the overhead console,
flashes for several more seconds
Airbag Readiness Light
and then comes on solid for The system checks the airbag's
several more. electrical system for possible
malfunctions. If the light stays on
it indicates there is an electrical
problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the
The safety belt light flashes for pretensioners, the airbag modules,
several seconds, then comes on the wiring, and the crash sensing
solid for several more. and diagnostic module. For more
This chime and light are repeated if information on the airbag system,
This chime and light sequence are see Airbag System on page 3‑29.
repeated if the driver remains the passenger remains unbuckled
unbuckled and the vehicle is in and the vehicle is in motion.
motion. If the driver safety belt is If the passenger safety belt is
already buckled, neither the chime buckled, neither the chime nor
nor the light comes on. the light comes on.
If there is a problem with the airbag

system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message can also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
The airbag readiness light comes on Airbag On-Off Light Canada and Mexico
solid for a few seconds when the If the vehicle has an airbag on-off When the vehicle is started, the
engine is started. If the light does switch, it also has a passenger passenger airbag status indicator
not come on then, have it fixed airbag status indicator located in the will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
immediately. overhead console. for on and off, will light for several
seconds as a system check. Then,
{ WARNING after several more seconds, the
status indicator ON or OFF, or either
If the airbag readiness light stays the on or off symbol, will light to let
on after the vehicle is started or you know the status of the right front
comes on while driving, it means passenger frontal airbag.
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in United States When the right front passenger
the vehicle might not inflate in a airbag is manually turned off
using the airbag on-off switch
crash, or they could even inflate
in the glove box, the indicator
without a crash. To help avoid
light OFF or the off symbol will
injury, have the vehicle serviced come on and stay on as a reminder
right away. that the airbag has been turned off.
This light will go off when the airbag

has been turned on. See Airbag WARNING (Continued)
On-Off Switch on page 3‑37 for
more information, including Do not turn off the passenger
important safety information. airbag unless the person sitting
there is in a risk group identified
by the national government.
See Airbag On-Off Switch on
page 3‑37 for more on this,
including important safety
information.
Canada and Mexico

{ WARNING
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light
If the right front passenger airbag ever comes on and stays on, it
United States is turned off for a person who is means that something may be
not in a risk group identified by wrong with the airbag system.
the national government, that For example, the right front
person will not have the extra passenger airbag could inflate
protection of an airbag. In a even though the airbag on-off
crash, the airbag will not be able switch is turned off.
to inflate and help protect the (Continued)
person sitting there.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
To help avoid injury to yourself or If the vehicle has one of the
others, have the vehicle serviced indicators pictured in the following
right away. See Airbag Readiness illustrations, then the vehicle has a
Light on page 5‑20 for more passenger sensing system for the
information, including important United States
right front passenger position unless
safety information. there is an airbag off switch located
in the glove box. If there is an
If the word ON or the on symbol is airbag off switch, the vehicle does
lit, it means that the right front not have a passenger system
passenger frontal airbag is enabled system. See Airbag On-Off Switch
(may inflate). See Airbag On-Off on page 3‑37.
Switch on page 3‑37 for more The passenger airbag status Canada and Mexico
information, including important indicator is on the overhead When the vehicle is started, the
safety information. console. See Passenger Sensing passenger airbag status indicator
If, after several seconds, both status System on page 3‑40 for important will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
indicator lights remain on, or if there safety information. for on and off, for several seconds
are no lights at all, there may be a In addition, if the vehicle has a as a system check. Then, after
problem with the lights or the airbag passenger sensing system for the several more seconds, the status
on-off switch. See your dealer for right front passenger position, the indicator will light either ON or OFF,
service. label on the vehicle's sun visor or either the on or off symbol to let
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”. you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is Information Center (DIC) can also

lit on the passenger airbag status WARNING (Continued) appear. See Battery Voltage and
indicator, it means that the right Charging Messages on page 5‑41
front passenger frontal airbag is Light on page 5‑20 for more for more information. This light could
enabled (may inflate). information, including important indicate that there are problems with
safety information. a generator drive belt, or that there
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the airbag status indicator, it is an electrical problem. Have it
means that the passenger sensing Charging System Light checked right away. If the vehicle
system has turned off the right front must be driven a short distance with
passenger frontal airbag. the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
If, after several seconds, both status conditioner.
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
problem with the lights or the hybrid supplement for more
passenger sensing system. See information.
your dealer for service. This light comes on briefly when
the ignition key is turned to START, Malfunction
{ WARNING but the engine is not running, as a Indicator Lamp
check to show it is working.
A computer system called OBD II
If the airbag readiness light ever If it does not, have the vehicle (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
comes on and stays on, it means serviced by your dealer. Generation) monitors operation of
that something may be wrong the fuel, ignition, and emission
with the airbag system. To help The light should go out once
the engine starts. If it stays on, control systems. It ensures that
avoid injury to yourself or others, emissions are at acceptable levels
or comes on while driving, there
have the vehicle serviced right for the life of the vehicle, helping to
could be a problem with the
away. See Airbag Readiness produce a cleaner environment.
charging system. A charging
(Continued) system message in the Driver
Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a

continually driven with this malfunction in one of two ways:
light on, the emission controls Light Flashing: A misfire condition
might not work as well, the has been detected. A misfire
vehicle fuel economy might not increases vehicle emissions and
be as good, and the engine might could damage the emission control
This light should come on when the not run as smoothly. This could system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
ignition is on, but the engine is not lead to costly repairs that might and service might be required.
running, as a check to show it is not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. To prevent more serious damage to
working. If it does not, have the
the vehicle:
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Notice: Modifications made to
the engine, transmission, . Reduce vehicle speed.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on and stays on while the exhaust, intake, or fuel system . Avoid hard accelerations.
engine is running, this indicates that of the vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required. than those of the same Tire . If towing a trailer, reduce the
Performance Criteria (TPC) can amount of cargo being hauled as
Malfunctions often are indicated by affect the vehicle's emission soon as it is possible.
the system before any problem is controls and can cause this light
apparent. Being aware of the light to come on. Modifications to If the light continues to flash, when
can prevent more serious damage these systems could lead to it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
to the vehicle. This system assists costly repairs not covered by Find a safe place to park the
the service technician in correctly the vehicle warranty. This could vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
diagnosing any malfunction. also result in a failure to pass a least 10 seconds, and restart the
required Emission Inspection/ engine. If the light is still flashing,
Maintenance test. See follow the previous steps and see
Accessories and Modifications on your dealer for service as soon as
page 10‑3. possible.
Light On Steady: An emission

. Check that the electrical system If one or more of these conditions
control system malfunction has is not wet. The system could be occurs, change the fuel brand used.
been detected on the vehicle. wet if the vehicle was driven It will require at least one full tank of
Diagnosis and service might be through a deep puddle of water. the proper fuel to turn the light off.
required. The condition is usually
corrected when the electrical See Recommended Fuel on
The following may correct an system dries out. A few driving page 9‑79.
emissions system malfunction: trips should turn the light off. If none of the above have made the
. Check that the fuel cap is fully . Check that good quality fuel is light turn off, your dealer can check
installed. See Filling the Tank on used. Poor fuel quality causes the vehicle. The dealer has the
page 9‑83. The diagnostic the engine not to run as proper test equipment and
system can determine if efficiently as designed and can diagnostic tools to fix any
the fuel cap has been left off or cause: stalling after start-up, mechanical or electrical problems
improperly installed. A loose or stalling when the vehicle is that might have developed.
missing fuel cap allows fuel to changed into gear, misfiring,
evaporate into the atmosphere. hesitation on acceleration,
A few driving trips with the cap or stumbling on acceleration.
properly installed should turn the These conditions might go away
light off. once the engine is warmed up.
Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs inspection if:
Light
Some state/provincial and local . The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if With the ignition on, the brake
governments may have programs system warning light comes on
to inspect the on-vehicle emission the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN when the parking brake is set. If the
control equipment. For the vehicle is driven with the parking
inspection, the emission system while the engine is off.
brake engaged, a chime sounds
test equipment is connected . The critical emission control when the vehicle speed is greater
to the vehicle’s Data Link systems have not been than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed by the
system. This can happen if the The vehicle brake system consists
battery has recently been of two hydraulic circuits. If one
replaced or if the battery has circuit is not working, the remaining
run down. The diagnostic system circuit can still work to stop the
evaluates critical emission vehicle. For normal braking
control systems during normal performance, both circuits need to
driving. This can take be working
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving. If the warning light comes on and a
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the chime sounds there could be a
wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the brake problem. Have the brake
is needed. inspection, your dealer can system inspected right away.
prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
This light can also come on due to Antilock Brake System

low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on { WARNING (ABS) Warning Light
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
Metric English the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped, For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
This light comes on briefly when the have the vehicle towed for System (ABS), this light comes on
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. service. briefly when the engine is started.
If it does not come on then, have it
If it does not, have the vehicle
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is
If the light comes on while driving, serviced by your dealer. If the
a problem.
pull off the road and stop carefully. system is working normally the
The pedal might be harder to push indicator light then goes off.
or might go closer to the floor. It can If the ABS light stays on, turn the
take longer to stop. If the light is ignition off. If the light comes on
still on, have the vehicle towed for while driving, stop as soon as it is
service. See Towing the Vehicle on safely possible and turn the ignition
page 10‑99. off. Then start the engine again to
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the reset the system. If the ABS light
hybrid supplement for more stays on, or comes on again while
information. driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning Four-Wheel-Drive Light Tow/Haul Mode Light
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑27.
For vehicles equipped with the For vehicles with the Tow/Haul
For vehicles with a Driver four-wheel-drive light, it comes on Mode feature, this light comes on
Information Center (DIC), see when a vehicle with a manual when the Tow/Haul Mode has been
Brake System Messages on transfer case is shifted into activated.
page 5‑41 for all brake‐related four-wheel drive and the front
DIC messages. For more information, see Tow/Haul
axle engages. Mode on page 9‑46.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Some delay between the shifting
hybrid supplement for more and the light coming on is normal.
information.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 9‑50
StabiliTrak® Indicator The light flashes if the system is When the Light Is On Steady
active and is working to assist the
Light driver with directional control of the
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. underinflated.
See StabiliTrak® System on A tire pressure message can
page 9‑67 for more information. accompany the light. See Tire
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Messages on page 5‑48 for more
hybrid supplement for more information. Stop as soon as
information. possible, and inflate the tires to the
For vehicles with the StabiliTrak pressure value shown on the Tire
system, this light comes on briefly Tire Pressure Light and Loading Information label. See
while starting the engine. Tire Pressure on page 10‑63 for
more information.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the When the Light Flashes First and
system is working normally the Then Is On Steady
indicator light then goes off. This indicates that there may be a
If the light comes on and stays on problem with the TPMS. The light
while driving, there could be a flashes for about a minute and stays
problem with the StabiliTrak system For vehicles with the Tire Pressure on steady for the remainder of the
and the vehicle might need service. Monitor System (TPMS), this light ignition cycle. This sequence
When this warning light is on, the comes on briefly when the engine is repeats with every ignition cycle.
StabiliTrak system is off and does started. It provides information See Tire Pressure Monitor
not limit wheel spin. about tire pressures and the TPMS. Operation on page 10‑66 for
more information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light This light comes on briefly while This light and a chime, if the vehicle
starting the engine. If it does not, is equipped with a radio, comes on
have the vehicle serviced by your when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
dealer. If the system is working The Driver Information Center also
normally the indicator light then displays a FUEL LEVEL LOW
goes off. message. See Fuel System
If the light comes on and stays on, it Messages on page 5‑45 for more
means that oil is not flowing through information. When fuel is added this
the engine properly. The vehicle light and message should go off. If it
{ WARNING could be low on oil and it might does not, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
have some other system problem.
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Security Light
become so hot that it catches fire. hybrid supplement for more
Someone could be burned. Check information.
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced. Low Fuel Warning Light
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil

maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be For information regarding this light
covered by the vehicle warranty. and the vehicle's security system,
Always follow the maintenance see Anti-theft Alarm System on
schedule for changing engine oil. page 2‑11.
This light, under the fuel gauge,
comes on briefly while the engine is
being started.
High-Beam On Light The light goes out when the fog Information Displays
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑6 for more
information. Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Cruise Control Light The vehicle has a Driver Information
Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information about
This light comes on when the this vehicle. It also displays warning
high-beam headlamps are in use. messages if a system problem is
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam detected.
Changer on page 6‑3 for more All messages will appear in the
information. DIC display located below the
For vehicles equipped with cruise
control, this light comes on tachometer in the instrument panel
Front Fog Lamp Light whenever the cruise control is set. cluster.
The light goes out when the cruise The DIC comes on when the ignition
control is turned off. See Cruise is on. After a short delay, the DIC
Control on page 9‑69 for more will display the information that was
information. last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
For vehicles equipped with fog

lamps, this light comes on when the
fog lamps are in use.
The DIC has different displays DIC Buttons The temperature will be shown
which can be accessed by pressing in °C or °F depending on the units
the DIC buttons located on the selected.
instrument panel, next to the T (Vehicle Information): Press
steering wheel. If the vehicle does this button to display the oil life,
not have DIC buttons, the trip units, tire pressure readings for
odometer reset stem can be used to vehicles with the Tire Pressure
access some of the menu items. Monitor System (TPMS), trailer
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and brake gain and output information
vehicle system information, and for vehicles with the Integrated
warning messages if a system Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
problem is detected. engine hours, compass zone
The DIC also allows some features setting, and compass recalibration.
to be customized. See Vehicle U (Customization): Press this
Personalization (with DIC Buttons) The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle button to customize the feature
on page 5‑50 for more information. information, customization, and set/ settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle
reset buttons. The button functions Personalization (with DIC Buttons)
If the vehicle has a diesel are detailed in the following pages.
engine, see the Duramax® diesel on page 5‑50 for more information.
supplement for more information. 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
to display the odometer, trip set or reset certain functions and to
odometer, fuel range, average turn off or acknowledge messages
economy, fuel used, timer, on the DIC.
transmission temperature, and
instantaneous economy and Active
Fuel Management™ indicator. The
compass and outside temperature
will also be shown in the display.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer can be reset to activated, the display will show 8 km
(with DIC Buttons) zero by pressing the set/reset (5 miles). As the vehicle begins
button while the trip odometer is moving, the display will then
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button displayed. You can also reset the increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),
to scroll through the following menu trip odometer while it is displayed by 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
items: pressing and holding the trip
odometer reset stem. Fuel Range
Odometer
The trip odometer has a feature Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays. This display
ODOMETER displays. This display called the retro-active reset. This
can be used to set the trip odometer shows the approximate number of
shows the distance the vehicle has remaining kilometers (km) or miles
been driven in either kilometers (km) to the number of miles (kilometers)
driven since the ignition was last the vehicle can be driven without
or miles. Pressing the trip odometer refueling. The display will show
reset stem will also display the turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the LOW if the fuel level is low.
odometer.
beginning of the trip. The fuel range estimate is based on
To switch between metric and an average of the vehicle's fuel
English measurements, see To use the retro-active reset feature,
press and hold the set/reset button economy over recent driving history
“Units” later in this section. and the amount of fuel remaining in
for at least four seconds. The trip
Trip Odometer odometer will display the number of the fuel tank. This estimate will
kilometers (km) or miles driven since change if driving conditions change.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP For example, if driving in traffic and
displays. This display shows the the ignition was last turned on and
the vehicle was moving. Once the making frequent stops, this display
current distance traveled in either may read one number, but if the
kilometers (km) or miles since the vehicle begins moving, the trip
odometer will accumulate mileage. vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
last reset for the trip odometer. number may change even though
Pressing the trip odometer reset For example, if the vehicle was
driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is the same amount of fuel is in the
stem will also display the trip fuel tank. This is because different
odometer. started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway Timer Transmission Temperature

driving produces better fuel Press the trip/fuel button until Press the trip/fuel button until
economy than city driving. Fuel TIMER displays. This display can TRANS TEMP displays. This
range cannot be reset. be used as a timer. display shows the temperature of
Average Economy To start the timer, press the the automatic transmission fluid in
set/reset button while TIMER is either degrees Celsius (°C) or
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
ECONOMY displays. This display displayed. The display will show the
shows the approximate average amount of time that has passed Instantaneous Economy and
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) since the timer was last reset, not Active Fuel Management™
or miles per gallon (mpg). This including time the ignition is off. Indicator
number is calculated based on the Time will continue to be counted as
If the vehicle has this display, press
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded long as the ignition is on, even if
the trip/fuel button until INST ECON
since the last time this menu item another display is being shown on
V8 displays. This display shows the
was reset. To reset AVG the DIC. The timer will record
current fuel economy at a particular
ECONOMY, press and hold up to 99 hours, 59 minutes, and
moment and will change frequently
the set/reset button. 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
as driving conditions change. This
the display will return to zero.
Fuel Used display shows the instantaneous
To stop the timer, press the set/reset fuel economy in liters per
Press the trip/fuel button until button briefly while TIMER is 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles
FUEL USED displays. This display displayed. per gallon (mpg). Unlike average
shows the number of liters (L) or economy, this screen cannot be
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the To reset the timer to zero, press and
hold the set/reset button while reset.
last reset of this menu item. To reset
the fuel used information, press and TIMER is displayed.
hold the set/reset button while FUEL
USED is displayed.
An Active Fuel Management Vehicle Information Menu oil life, additional maintenance is
indicator displays on the right side Items (with DIC Buttons) recommended in the Maintenance
of the DIC, while INST ECON Schedule in this manual. See
displays on the left side. Active Fuel T (Vehicle Information): Press Scheduled Maintenance on
Management allows the engine to this button to scroll through the page 11‑2 for more information.
operate on either four or eight following menu items:
Remember, you must reset the OIL
cylinders, depending on driving Oil Life LIFE display after each oil change.
demands. When Active Fuel It will not reset itself. Also, be
Management is active, V4 will Press the vehicle information
button until OIL LIFE REMAINING careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display on the DIC. When Active display accidentally at any time
Fuel Management is inactive, displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil's remaining useful other than when the oil has just
V8 will display. See Active Fuel been changed. It cannot be reset
Management® on page 9‑40 for life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that accurately until the next oil change.
more information. To reset the engine oil life system,
means 99% of the current oil life
Blank Display remains. The engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on
will alert you to change the oil on a page 10‑12.
This display shows no information.
schedule consistent with your Units
driving conditions.
Press the vehicle information button
When the remaining oil life is low, until UNITS displays. This display
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON allows you to select between metric
message will appear on the display. or English units of measurement.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” Once in this display, press the
under Engine Oil Messages on set/reset button to select between
page 5‑44. You should change the METRIC or ENGLISH units. All
oil as soon as you can. See Engine of the vehicle information will
Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the then be displayed in the unit of
engine oil life system monitoring the measurement selected.
Tire Pressure Trailer Gain and Output Compass Zone Setting

If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure On vehicles with the Integrated This display allows for setting the
Monitor System (TPMS), the Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, compass zone. See Compass on
pressure for each tire can be viewed the trailer brake display appears page 5‑5 for more information.
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be in the DIC. Press the vehicle
shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or information button until TRAILER Compass Recalibration
pounds per square inch (psi). GAIN and OUTPUT display. This display allows for calibrating
Press the vehicle information TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer the compass. See Compass on
button until the DIC displays gain setting. This setting can be page 5‑5 for more information.
FRONT TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle Blank Display
a trailer connected or disconnected.
information button again until the This display shows no information.
DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa OUTPUT shows the power output
(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. to the trailer any time a trailer with Trip Odometer Reset Stem
electric brakes is connected. Output Menu Items (with DIC Buttons)
If a low tire pressure condition is is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
detected by the system while Use the trip odometer reset stem
may appear in the OUTPUT display. to view the odometer and trip
driving, a message advising you to
add pressure in a specific tire will To adjust trailer gain see “Integrated odometer. The Language selection
appear in the display. See Tire Trailer Brake Control System” under and Engine Hours display can also
Pressure on page 10‑63 and Tire Towing Equipment on page 9‑105 be accessed with the trip odometer
Messages on page 5‑48 for more for more information. reset stem.
information. Engine Hours Odometer
If the tire pressure display shows Press the vehicle information button Press the trip odometer reset stem
dashes instead of a value, there until ENGINE HOURS displays. This until ODOMETER displays. This
may be a problem with the vehicle. display shows the total number of display shows the distance the
If this consistently occurs, see your hours the engine has run. vehicle has been driven in either
dealer for service. kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
Trip Odometer The trip odometer will display the 3. Continue to press and hold the
Press the trip odometer reset stem number of kilometers (km) or trip odometer reset stem to scroll
until TRIP displays. This display miles (mi) driven since the ignition through all of the available
shows the current distance traveled was last turned on and the vehicle languages.
in either kilometers (km) or was moving. Once the vehicle The available selections
miles (mi) since the last reset begins moving, the trip odometer are ENGLISH (default),
for the trip odometer. will accumulate mileage. For FRANCAIS (French),
example, if the vehicle was driven ESPANOL (Spanish), and
The trip odometer can be reset to 8 km (5 miles) before it is started
zero by pressing and holding the trip NO CHANGE.
again, and then the retro-active
odometer reset stem while the trip reset feature is activated, the 4. Once the desired language is
odometer is displayed. display will show 8 km (5 miles). displayed, release the trip
The trip odometer has a feature As the vehicle begins moving, the odometer reset stem to set the
called the retro-active reset. This display will then increase to 8.2 km choice.
can be used to set the trip odometer (5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc. Engine Hours
to the number of miles (kilometers) Language
driven since the ignition was last To display the ENGINE HOURS,
turned on. This can be used if the This display allows you to select the place the ignition in LOCK/OFF or
trip odometer is not reset at the language in which the DIC ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and
beginning of the trip. messages will appear. To select a hold the trip odometer reset stem for
language: four seconds while viewing the
To use the retro-active reset feature, ODOMETER. This display shows
press and hold the trip odometer 1. Press the trip odometer reset the total number of hours the engine
reset stem for at least four seconds. stem until ODOMETER displays. has run.
2. While in the ODOMETER
display, press and hold the trip
odometer reset stem for
three seconds until the currently
set language displays.
Trip Odometer Reset 4. Once the desired language is To use the retro-active reset feature,
Stem Menu Items displayed, release the trip press and hold the trip odometer
(without DIC Buttons) odometer reset stem to set the reset stem for at least four seconds.
choice. The trip odometer will display the
Language number of kilometers (km) or
Trip Odometer miles (mi) driven since the ignition
This display allows you to select
the language in which the DIC Press the trip odometer reset stem was last turned on and the vehicle
messages will appear. To select a until TRIP displays. This display was moving. Once the vehicle
language: shows the current distance traveled begins moving, the trip odometer
in either kilometers (km) or will accumulate mileage. For
1. Press the trip odometer reset miles (mi) since the last reset example, if the vehicle was driven
stem until ODOMETER displays. for the trip odometer. 8 km (5 miles) before it is started
2. While in the ODOMETER The trip odometer can be reset to again, and then the retro-active
display, press and hold the trip zero by pressing and holding the trip reset feature is activated, the
odometer reset stem for odometer reset stem while the trip display will show 8 km (5 miles).
three seconds until the currently odometer is displayed. As the vehicle begins moving, the
set language displays. display will then increase to 8.2 km
The trip odometer has a feature (5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
3. Continue to press and hold the called the retro-active reset. This
trip odometer reset stem to scroll can be used to set the trip odometer Transmission Temperature
through all of the available to the number of miles (kilometers) Press the trip odometer reset stem
languages. driven since the ignition was last until TRANS TEMP displays. This
The available languages are turned on. This can be used if the display shows the temperature of
ENGLISH (default), trip odometer is not reset at the the automatic transmission fluid in
FRANCAIS (French), beginning of the trip. either degrees Celsius (°C) or
ESPANOL (Spanish), and degrees Fahrenheit (°F) .
NO CHANGE.
Trailer Gain and Output Compass Zone Setting When the remaining oil life is low,
On vehicles with the Integrated This display allows for setting the the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, compass zone. See Compass on message will appear on the display.
the trailer brake display appears in page 5‑5 for more information. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
the DIC. Press the trip odometer under Engine Oil Messages on
reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and Compass Recalibration page 5‑44. You should change the
OUTPUT display. This display allows for calibrating oil as soon as you can. See Engine
the compass. See Compass on Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer engine oil life system monitoring the
gain setting. This setting can be page 5‑5 for more information.
oil life, additional maintenance is
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either Oil Life recommended in the Maintenance
a trailer connected or disconnected. Schedule in this manual. See
To access this display, the vehicle
OUTPUT shows the power output to must be in P (Park). Press the trip Scheduled Maintenance on
the trailer any time a trailer with odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE page 11‑2 for more information.
electric brakes is connected. Output REMAINING displays. This display Remember, you must reset the OIL
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes shows an estimate of the oil's LIFE display after each oil change.
may appear in the OUTPUT display. remaining useful life. If you see It will not reset itself. Also, be
To adjust trailer gain see “Integrated 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
Trailer Brake Control System” under display, that means 99% of the display accidentally at any time
Towing Equipment on page 9‑105 current oil life remains. The engine other than when the oil has just
for more information. oil life system will alert you to been changed. It cannot be reset
change the oil on a schedule accurately until the next oil change.
consistent with your driving To reset the engine oil life system,
conditions. see Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑12.
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and See Charging System Light on

page 5‑24. Driving with this problem
Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages could drain the battery. Turn off all
indicate the status of the vehicle BATTERY LOW START unnecessary accessories. Have the
or some action may be needed VEHICLE electrical system checked as soon
to correct a condition. Multiple as possible. See your dealer.
messages may appear one after When the vehicle’s battery is
another. severely discharged, this message Brake System Messages
will display and four chimes
The messages that do not require
will sound. Start the vehicle SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
immediate action can be
immediately. If the vehicle is not
acknowledged and cleared by This message displays along with
started and the battery continues to
pressing V (Set/Reset) or the trip the brake system warning light if
discharge, the climate controls,
odometer reset stem. there is a problem with the brake
heated seats, and audio systems
system. See Brake System Warning
The messages that require will shut off and the vehicle may
Light on page 5‑27. If this message
immediate action cannot be cleared require a jump start. These systems
appears, stop as soon as possible
until that action is performed. will function again after the vehicle
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
is started.
All messages should be taken vehicle and check for the message
seriously and clearing the message SERVICE BATTERY on the DIC display. If the message
does not correct the problem. CHARGING SYSTEM is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the brake
The following are the possible On some vehicles, this message system needs service as soon as
messages and some information displays if there is a problem with possible. See your dealer.
about them. the battery charging system. Under
If the vehicle has a diesel certain conditions, the charging
engine, see the Duramax® diesel system light may also turn on in
supplement for more information. the instrument panel cluster.
SERVICE BRAKES SOON As soon as it is safe to do so, HOOD OPEN

carefully pull your vehicle over to
On some vehicles, this message This message displays and a
the side of the road and turn the
displays if there is a problem with chime may sound if the hood is
ignition off. Check the wiring
the brake system. If this message not fully closed. Stop and turn off
connection to the trailer and turn
appears, stop as soon as possible the vehicle, check the hood for
the ignition back on. If this message
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the obstructions, and close the hood
still displays, either your vehicle or
vehicle and check for the message again. Check to see if the message
the trailer needs service. See your
on the DIC display. If the message still appears on the DIC.
dealer.
is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the brake See “Integrated Trailer Brake LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
system needs service. See your Control System” under Towing (Crew Cab)
dealer. Equipment on page 9‑105 for This message displays and a chime
more information. may sound if the driver side rear
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
door is not fully closed and the
SYSTEM Door Ajar Messages vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
On vehicles with the Integrated Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, DRIVER DOOR OPEN the door for obstructions, and close
this message displays and a chime This message displays and a chime the door again. Check to see if the
may sound when there is a problem may sound if the driver door is message still appears on the DIC.
with the ITBC system. not fully closed and the vehicle is
When this message displays, power shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
is no longer available to the trailer off the vehicle, check the door for
brakes. obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE

This message displays and a chime Messages ENGINE
may sound if the front passenger Notice: If you drive the vehicle
door is not fully closed and the ENGINE HOT A/C (Air while the engine is overheating,
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Conditioning) TURNED OFF severe engine damage may
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check This message displays when the occur. If an overheat warning
the door for obstructions, and close engine coolant becomes hotter than appears on the instrument panel
the door again. Check to see if the the normal operating temperature. cluster and/or DIC, stop the
message still appears on the DIC. See Engine Coolant Temperature vehicle as soon as possible.
Gauge on page 5‑18. To avoid See Engine Overheating on
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN page 10‑26 for more information.
(Crew Cab) added strain on a hot engine, the
air conditioning compressor This message displays when the
This message displays and a chime automatically turns off. When the engine coolant temperature is too
may sound if the passenger side coolant temperature returns to hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
rear door is not fully closed and the normal, the air conditioning idle until it cools down. See Engine
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). compressor turns back on. You Coolant Temperature Gauge on
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check can continue to drive your vehicle. page 5‑18.
the door for obstructions, and close
If this message continues to appear, See Overheated Engine Protection
the door again. Check to see if the
have the system repaired by your Operating Mode on page 10‑28 for
message still appears on the DIC.
dealer as soon as possible to avoid information on driving to a safe
damage to the engine. place in an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP Engine Oil Messages OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Notice: If you drive the vehicle Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating, This message displays when the while the engine oil pressure is
severe engine damage may engine oil needs to be changed. low, severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning When you change the engine oil, be occur. If a low oil pressure
appears on the instrument panel sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE warning appears on the Driver
cluster and/or DIC, stop the OIL SOON message. See Engine Information Center (DIC), stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Oil Life System on page 10‑12 for vehicle as soon as possible. Do
See Engine Overheating on information on how to reset the not drive the vehicle until the
page 10‑26 for more information. message. See Engine Oil on cause of the low oil pressure is
page 10‑8 and Scheduled corrected. See Engine Oil on
This message displays and a Maintenance on page 11‑2 for
chime may sound if the engine page 10‑8 for more information.
more information.
cooling system reaches unsafe This message displays if low oil
temperatures for operation. Stop ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE pressure levels occur. Stop the
and turn off the vehicle as soon as ENGINE vehicle as soon as safely possible
it is safe to do so to avoid severe and do not operate it until the cause
This message displays when the
damage. This message clears when of the low oil pressure has been
engine oil becomes hotter than the
the engine has cooled to a safe corrected. Check the oil as soon as
normal operating temperature. Stop
operating temperature. possible and have the vehicle
and allow the vehicle to idle until it
serviced by your dealer. See Engine
cools down. See Engine Coolant
Oil on page 10‑8.
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑18.
Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN
This message displays and a chime This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY
may sound when the cooling system may sound if the fuel level is low. This message displays if a Remote
temperature gets too hot and the Refuel as soon as possible. See Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
engine further enters the engine Fuel Gauge on page 5‑16 and Fuel battery is low. The battery needs to
coolant protection mode. See on page 9‑79 for more information. be replaced in the transmitter. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑26 “Battery Replacement” under
for more information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This message also displays when This message may display along System Operation on page 2‑3.
the vehicle's engine power is with the check engine light on the
reduced. Reduced engine power instrument panel cluster if the Lamp Messages
can affect the vehicle's ability to vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened
accelerate. If this message is on, properly. See Malfunction Indicator TURN SIGNAL ON
but there is no reduction in Lamp on page 5‑24. Reinstall the This message displays and a chime
performance, proceed to your fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank sounds if a turn signal is left on for
destination. The performance may on page 9‑83. The diagnostic 1.2 km (0.75 mile). Move the turn
be reduced the next time the vehicle system can determine if the fuel signal/multifunction lever to the off
is driven. The vehicle may be driven cap has been left off or improperly position.
at a reduced speed while this installed. A loose or missing fuel
message is on, but acceleration and cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
speed may be reduced. Anytime atmosphere. A few driving trips with
this message stays on, the vehicle the cap properly installed should
should be taken to your dealer for turn this light and message off.
service as soon as possible.
Object Detection System SERVICE PARK ASSIST You should see your dealer for
service. The vehicle is safe to drive;
Messages If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
however, you do not have the
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
this message displays if there is a
OWNERS MANUAL your speed and drive accordingly.
problem with the URPA system.
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Do not use this system to help you SERVICE TRACTION
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist CONTROL
this message displays if there is on page 9‑72 for more information.
See your dealer for service. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
something interfering with the park message displays when there is a
assist system. See Ultrasonic problem with the Traction Control
Parking Assist on page 9‑72 for Ride Control System System (TCS). When this message
more information. Messages displays, the system will not limit
PARK ASSIST OFF wheel spin. Adjust your driving
SERVICE STABILITRAK accordingly. See your dealer for
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and service. See StabiliTrak® System on
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, this message displays, it means page 9‑67 for more information.
after the vehicle has been started, there may be a problem with the
this message displays to remind the StabiliTrak system. If you see this
driver that the URPA system has message, try to reset the system.
been turned off. Press the set/reset Stop; turn off the engine for at least
button or the trip odometer reset 15 seconds; then start the engine
stem to acknowledge this message again. If this message still comes
and clear it from the DIC display. on, it means there is a problem.
To turn the URPA system back on,
see Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑72.

. If the brake system warning light
STABILITRAK OFF
is on. See Brake System
Airbag System Messages
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this Warning Light on page 5‑27. SERVICE AIR BAG
message displays when you turn off
StabiliTrak, or when the stability
. If the stability system takes This message displays if there is a
control has been automatically longer than usual to complete its problem with the airbag system.
disabled. To limit wheel spin and diagnostic checks due to driving Have your dealer inspect the
realize the full benefits of the conditions. system for problems. See Airbag
stability enhancement system, you . If an engine or vehicle related Readiness Light on page 5‑20 and
should normally leave StabiliTrak problem has been detected and Airbag System on page 3‑29 for
on. However, you should turn the vehicle needs service. See more information.
StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets your dealer.
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow . If the vehicle is shifted into 4LO.
Anti-theft Alarm System
and you want to rock your vehicle Messages
to attempt to free it, or if you The message turns off as soon as
are driving in extreme off-road the conditions that caused the SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
conditions and require more wheel message to be displayed are no SYSTEM
spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on longer present.
page 9‑21. To turn the StabiliTrak This message displays when there
system on or off, see StabiliTrak® TRACTION CONTROL OFF is a problem with the theft-deterrent
System on page 9‑67. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this system. The vehicle may or may not
message displays when the Traction restart so you may want to take the
There are several conditions that vehicle to your dealer before turning
can cause this message to appear. Control System (TCS) is turned off.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See off the engine. See Immobilizer
. If the vehicle is overheating, StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑67 Operation on page 2‑12 for more
which could occur if StabiliTrak for more information. information.
activates continuously for an
extended period of time.
Starting the Vehicle If the warning comes on and stays RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR
on, there may be a problem with the (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)
Messages TPMS. See your dealer. to indicate the location of the low
FAST IDLE ON tire. The low tire pressure warning
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE light will also come on. See Tire
If your vehicle has this feature, this If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Pressure Light on page 5‑30. You
message displays when the fast idle Monitor System (TPMS), this can receive more than one tire
feature is on. See Fast Idle System message displays when the system pressure message at a time. To
on page 9‑35 for more information. is re-learning the tire positions on read the other messages that may
your vehicle. The tire positions must have been sent at the same time,
Tire Messages be re-learned after rotating the tires press the set/reset button or the trip
or after replacing a tire or sensor. odometer reset stem. If a tire
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR pressure message appears on the
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑69,
SYSTEM Tire Rotation on page 10‑70, Tire DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Pressure Monitor System on the tire pressures checked and set
Monitor System (TPMS), this page 10‑65, and Tire Pressure on to those shown on the Tire Loading
message displays if a part on the page 10‑63 for more information. Information label. See Tires on
system is not working properly. The page 10‑55, Vehicle Load Limits on
tire pressure light also flashes and TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE page 9‑22, and Tire Pressure on
then remains on during the same If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure page 10‑63. The DIC also shows
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this the tire pressure values. See Driver
Light on page 5‑30. Several message displays when the Information Center (DIC) on
conditions may cause this pressure in one or more of the page 5‑32.
message to appear. See Tire vehicle's tires is low. This message
Pressure Monitor Operation on also displays LEFT FRT (left front),
Transmission Messages TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder

ENGINE Messages
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, while the transmission fluid is CHECK TRAILER WIRING
this message may display if a overheating and the transmission On vehicles with the Integrated
problem occurs with the temperature warning is displayed Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
four-wheel-drive system. If this on the instrument panel cluster this message may display and a
message appears, stop as soon as and/or DIC, you can damage the chime may sound when one of the
possible and turn off the vehicle. transmission. This could lead to following conditions exists:
Make sure the key is in the LOCK/ costly repairs that would not be
OFF position for at least one minute
. A trailer with electric brakes
covered by the warranty. Do not
and then restart the vehicle and becomes disconnected from the
drive the vehicle with overheated
check for the message on the DIC vehicle.
transmission fluid or while the
display. If the message is still transmission temperature ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
displayed or appears again warning is displayed. the vehicle is stopped, this
when you begin driving, the message clears itself after a
four-wheel-drive system needs This message displays and a chime
short time.
service. See your dealer. may sound if the transmission fluid
in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with ‐ If the disconnect occurs while
the transmission fluid temperature the vehicle is moving, this
high can cause damage to the message stays on until the
vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it ignition is turned off.
idle to allow the transmission to . There is a short in the wiring to
cool. This message clears and the electric trailer brakes.
the chime stops when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level. When this message displays, power
is no longer available to the trailer
brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, This message clears itself after Vehicle

carefully pull the vehicle over to the several seconds. This message also
side of the road and turn the ignition clears if you acknowledge it. After Personalization
off. Check the wiring connection to this message clears, the TRAILER
the trailer and turn the ignition back GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in Vehicle Personalization
on. This message clears if the trailer the DIC.
is reconnected. This message also
(with DIC Buttons)
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”
clears if you acknowledge it. If this under Driver Information Center The vehicle may have customization
message still displays, either the (DIC) on page 5‑32 and “Integrated capabilities that allow you to
vehicle or the trailer needs service. Trailer Brake Control System” under program certain features to one
See your dealer. Towing Equipment on page 9‑105 preferred setting. Customization
See “Integrated Trailer Brake for more information. features can only be programmed to
Control System” under Towing one setting on the vehicle and
cannot be programmed to a
Equipment on page 9‑105 for Washer Fluid Messages preferred setting for two different
more information.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD drivers.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE FLUID All of the customization options
WITH CARE may not be available on the vehicle.
This message displays when the
This message displays when ice windshield washer fluid is low. Fill Only the options available
conditions are possible. the windshield washer fluid reservoir will be displayed on the DIC.
TRAILER CONNECTED as soon as possible. See Engine The default settings for the
Compartment Overview on customization features were set
On vehicles with the Integrated page 10‑6 for the location of the when the vehicle left the factory,
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, windshield washer fluid reservoir. but may have been changed from
this message displays briefly when Also, see Washer Fluid on their default state since then.
a trailer with electric brakes is first page 10‑29 for more information.
connected to the vehicle. The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
To change customization Press the customization button until ESPANOL: All messages will
preferences, use the following the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN appear in Spanish.
procedure. ENGLISH screen appears on the NO CHANGE: No change will be
Entering the Feature DIC display. Press the set/reset made to this feature. The current
Settings Menu button once to display all DIC setting will remain.
messages in English.
1. Turn the ignition on and place To select a setting, press the set/
the vehicle in P (Park). DISPLAY LANGUAGE reset button while the desired
This feature allows you to select the setting is displayed on the DIC.
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, turn the headlamps off. language in which the DIC You can also change the language
messages will appear. by pressing the trip odometer reset
2. Press the customization button stem. See “Language” under Driver
to scroll through the available Press the customization button until
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen Information Center (DIC) on
customizable options. page 5‑32 for more information.
appears on the DIC display. Press
Feature Settings Menu Items the set/reset button once to access AUTO DOOR LOCK
The following customization features the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to This feature allows you to select
allow you to program settings to the when the vehicle's doors will
vehicle: scroll through the following settings:
automatically lock. See Automatic
ENGLISH (default): All messages Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH will appear in English. information.
This feature will only display if a FRANCAIS: All messages will
language other than English has appear in French.
been set. This feature allows you to
change the language in which the
DIC messages appear to English.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the This feature allows you to turn off will unlock when the key is taken
DIC display. Press the set/reset the automatic door unlocking out of the ignition.
button once to access the settings feature. It also allows you to select ALL IN PARK (default): All of the
for this feature. Then press the which doors and when the doors will doors will unlock when the vehicle is
customization button to scroll automatically unlock. See Automatic shifted into P (Park).
through the following settings: Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more NO CHANGE: No change will be
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): information. made to this feature. The current
The doors will automatically lock Press the customization button until setting will remain.
when the vehicle is shifted out of AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
P (Park). To select a setting, press the set/
the DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button while the desired
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors button once to access the settings setting is displayed on the DIC.
will automatically lock when the for this feature. Then press the
vehicle speed is above 13 km/h customization button to scroll REMOTE DOOR LOCK
(8 mph) for three seconds. through the following settings: This feature allows you to select the
NO CHANGE: No change will be OFF: None of the doors will type of feedback received when
made to this feature. The current automatically unlock. locking the vehicle with the Remote
setting will remain. DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/ driver door will unlock when the key You will not receive feedback when
reset button while the desired is taken out of the ignition. locking the vehicle with the RKE
setting is displayed on the DIC. transmitter if the doors are open.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
door will unlock when the vehicle is System Operation on page 2‑3 for
shifted into P (Park) . more information.
Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on reset button while the desired lamps will flash when you press the
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. unlock button on the RKE
button once to access the settings transmitter.
for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be
customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the made to this feature. The current
through the following settings: type of feedback received when setting will remain.
OFF: There will be no feedback unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To select a setting, press the set/
when you press the lock button on reset button while the desired
the RKE transmitter. transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
will flash when you press the lock DELAY DOOR LOCK
the doors are open. See Remote
button on the RKE transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System On vehicles with a crew cab, this
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound Operation on page 2‑3 for more feature turns the delayed door locks
on the second press of the lock information. on or off. When locking the doors
button on the RKE transmitter. with the power door lock switch and
Press the customization button until a door is open, this feature will
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears delay locking the doors until
exterior lamps will flash when you on the DIC display. Press the set/ five seconds after the last door is
press the lock button on the RKE reset button once to access the closed. You will hear three chimes
transmitter, and the horn will sound settings for this feature. Then press to signal that the delayed locking
when the lock button is pressed the customization button to scroll feature is in use. The key must be
again within five seconds of the through the following settings: out of the ignition for this feature to
previous command. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps work. You can temporarily override
NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press the delayed locking by pressing the
made to this feature. The current unlock button on the RKE power door lock switch twice. See
setting will remain. transmitter. Delayed Locking on page 2‑8 for
more information.
Press the customization button until Press the customization button APPROACH LIGHTING
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on until EXIT LIGHTING appears on This feature allows you to select if
the DIC display. Press the set/reset the DIC display. Press the set/reset the exterior lights turn on briefly
button once to access the settings button once to access the settings during low light periods after
for this feature. Then press the for this feature. Then press the unlocking the vehicle using the
customization button to scroll customization button to scroll Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
through the following settings: through the following settings: transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not Press the customization button until
locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on. APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The the DIC display. Press the set/reset
lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for button once to access the settings
door is closed. 30 seconds. for this feature. Then press the
NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will customization button to scroll
made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute. through the following settings:
setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will OFF: The exterior lights will not
To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes. turn on when you unlock the vehicle
reset button while the desired with the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current ON (default): If it is dark enough
setting will remain. outside, the exterior lights will turn
EXIT LIGHTING on briefly when you unlock the
This feature allows you to select To select a setting, press the set/ vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
the amount of time you want the reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC. The lights will remain on for
exterior lamps to remain on when 20 seconds, until the lock button
it is dark enough outside. This on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
happens after the key is turned or until the vehicle is no longer off.
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER MIRROR: The driver
System Operation on page 2‑3 for made to this feature. The current outside mirror will be tilted down
more information. setting will remain. when the vehicle is shifted into
NO CHANGE: No change will be There is no default for chime R (Reverse).
made to this feature. The current volume. The volume will stay at the PASSENGER MIRROR: The
setting will remain. last known setting. passenger outside mirror will be
To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/ tilted down when the vehicle is
reset button while the desired reset button while the desired shifted into R (Reverse).
setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC. BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and
passenger outside mirrors will be
CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS tilted down when the vehicle is
If available, this feature allows you If the vehicle has this feature, it shifted into R (Reverse).
to select the volume level of the allows you to select if the outside NO CHANGE: No change will be
chime. mirror(s) will automatically tilt down made to this feature. The current
Press the customization button until when the vehicle is shifted into setting will remain.
CHIME VOLUME appears on the R (Reverse). See Park Tilt Mirrors
on page 2‑17 for more information. To select a setting, press the set/
DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button while the desired
button once to access the settings Press the customization button until setting is displayed on the DIC.
for this feature. Then press the PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset EASY EXIT RECALL
through the following settings: button once to access the settings If the vehicle has this feature, it
NORMAL: The chime volume will for this feature. Then press the allows you to select your preference
be set to a normal level. customization button to scroll for the automatic easy exit seat
through the following settings: feature. See “Memory Seat,
LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level. OFF (default): Neither outside Mirrors, and Pedals” in Power Seat
mirror will be tilted down when the Adjustment on page 3‑5 for more
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). information.
Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be SEAT ONLY (default): The driver
EASY EXIT RECALL appears on made to this feature. The current seat will recall.
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting will remain. NO CHANGE: No change will be
button once to access the settings To select a setting, press the set/ made to this feature. The current
for this feature. Then press the reset button while the desired setting will remain.
customization button to scroll setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings: To select a setting, press the set/
EASY EXIT SETUP reset button while the desired
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No setting is displayed on the DIC.
automatic seat exit recall will occur. If the vehicle has this feature, it
The recall will only occur after allows you to select which areas will MEMORY SEAT RECALL
pressing the easy exit seat button. recall with the automatic easy exit If the vehicle has this feature, it
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If seat feature. It also allows you to allows you to select your preference
the features are enabled through the turn off the automatic easy exit for the remote memory seat recall
EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the feature. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, feature. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,
driver seat will move back when the and Pedals” in Power Seat and Pedals” in Power Seat
key is removed from the ignition or Adjustment on page 3‑5 and “EASY Adjustment on page 3‑5 for more
the easy exit seat button is pressed. EXIT RECALL” earlier for more information.
information.
The automatic easy exit seat Press the customization button until
movement will only occur one time Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears
after the key is removed from the EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the on the DIC display. Press the set/
ignition. If the automatic movement DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button once to access the
has already occurred, and you put button once to access the settings settings for this feature. Then press
the key back in the ignition and for this feature. Then press the the customization button to scroll
remove it again, the seat will stay in menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings:
the original exit position, unless a through the following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory
memory recall took place prior to OFF: No automatic seat exit will seat recall will occur.
removing the key again. recall.
ON: The driver seat and, on some Press the customization button until Press the customization button until
vehicles, the outside mirrors will REMOTE START appears on the FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
automatically move to the stored DIC display. Press the set/reset the DIC display. Press the set/reset
driving position when the unlock button once to access the settings button once to access the settings
button on the Remote Keyless for this feature. Then press the for this feature. Then press the
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. customization button to scroll customization button to scroll
On some vehicles with the through the following settings: through the following settings:
adjustable throttle and brake OFF: The remote start feature will RESTORE ALL (default): The
pedal feature, the pedals will also be disabled. customization features will be set to
automatically move. their factory default settings.
ON (default): The remote start
NO CHANGE: No change will be feature will be enabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The
made to this feature. The current customization features will not be
setting will remain. NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/ setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC. To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
If your vehicle has this feature, it FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the
allows you to turn the remote start feature settings menu.
off or on. The remote start feature This feature allows you to set all of
allows you to start the engine from the customization features back to Press the customization button until
outside of the vehicle using the their factory default settings. PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SETTINGS appears in the DIC
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle display. Press the set/reset button
Start on page 2‑5 for more once to exit the menu.
information.
If you do not exit, pressing the Universal Remote devices such as garage door
customization button again will openers, security systems, and
return you to the beginning of the System home automation devices.
feature settings menu. Do not use this system with any
See Radio Frequency Statement on
Exiting the Feature page 13‑18 for information garage door opener that does not
Settings Menu regarding Part 15 of the Federal have the stop and reverse feature.
Communications Commission (FCC) This includes any garage door
The feature settings menu will be rules and Industry Canada opener model manufactured before
exited when any of the following Standards RSS-210/220/310. April 1, 1982.
occurs:
Read the instructions completely
. The vehicle is no longer in Universal Remote System before attempting to program the
ON/RUN. Programming transmitter. Because of the steps
. The trip/fuel or vehicle involved, it may be helpful to have
information DIC buttons are another person assist with
pressed. programming the transmitter.
. The end of the feature settings Be sure to keep the original remote
menu is reached and exited. control transmitter for use in other
vehicles, as well as for future
. A 40-second time period has programming. Only the original
elapsed with no selection made. remote control transmitter is needed
Vehicles with the Universal Remote
System will have these buttons for Fixed Code programming. The
located in the headliner. programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
This system provides a way to the lease ends. See “Erasing
replace up to three remote control Universal Home Remote Buttons” in
transmitters used to activate this section.
Park the vehicle outside of the hanging antenna wire is

garage when programming a garage attached to the motor-head unit
door. Be sure that people and and may be a colored button.
objects are clear of the garage door Press this button. After pressing
or gate that is being programmed. this button, complete the
following steps in less than
Programming Universal Home 30 seconds.
Remote — Rolling Code To program up to three devices:
3. Immediately return to the
For questions or help programming 1. From inside the vehicle, vehicle. Press and hold the
the Universal Home Remote press the two outside buttons Universal Home Remote button
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go at the same time for one to that will be used to control the
to www.learcar2u.com. two seconds, and immediately garage door until the garage
release them. door moves. The indicator light,
Most garage door openers sold
after 1996 are Rolling Code units. above the selected button,
should slowly blink. This button
Programming a garage door opener may need to be held for up to
involves time-sensitive actions, so 20 seconds.
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will 4. Immediately, within one second,
time out and the procedure will have release the button when the
to be repeated. garage door moves. The
indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
2. In the garage, locate the 5. Press and release the same
garage door opener receiver button again. The garage door
(motor-head unit). Find the should move, confirming that
“Learn” or “Smart” button. It can programming is successful and
usually be found where the complete.
To program another Rolling Code Programming a garage door opener If there is a row of dip switches
device such as an additional garage involves time-sensitive actions, so similar to the graphic above, the
door opener, a security device, read the entire procedure before garage door opener is a Fixed
or home automation device, repeat starting. Otherwise, the device will Code unit. If you do not see a
Steps 1 through 5, choosing a time out and the procedure will have row of dip switches, return
different function button in Step 3 to be repeated. to the previous section for
than what was used for the garage Programming Universal Home
door opener. Remote — Rolling Code.
If these instructions do not work, the Your hand-held transmitter can
garage door opener is probably a have between 8 to 12 dip
Fixed Code unit. Follow the switches depending on the
programming instructions that follow brand of transmitter.
for a Fixed Code garage door The garage door opener receiver
opener. (motor head unit) could also
Programming Universal Home have a row of dip switches that
Remote — Fixed Code can be used when programming
the Universal Home Remote.
For questions or help programming If the total number of switches
the Universal Home Remote on the motor head and
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or To program up to three devices: hand-held transmitter are
go to www.learcar2u.com. 1. To verify that the garage door different, or if the dip switch
Most garage door openers sold opener is a Fixed Code unit, settings are different, use the
before 1996 are Fixed Code units. remove the battery cover on the dip switch settings on the motor
hand-held transmitter supplied head unit to program the
by the manufacturer of the Universal Home Remote.
garage door opener motor.
The motor head dip switch The switch positions on the

. If a switch is set between
settings can also be used when hand-held transmitter could be the up and down position,
the original hand-held transmitter labeled as follows: write “Middle.”
is not available. . A switch in the up position The switch settings written
could be labeled as Up, down in Step 2 now
+, or On. become the button strokes
to be entered into the
. A switch in the down Universal Home Remote in
position could be labeled as Step 4. Be sure to enter the
Down, −, or Off. switch settings written down
. A switch in the middle in Step 2, in order from left
Example of Eight Dip Switches
position could be labeled as to right, into the Universal
with Two Positions Home Remote, when
Middle, 0, or Neutral.
completing Step 4.
2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch
settings from left to right as
follows:
. When a switch is in the up
position, write “Left.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches . When a switch is in the
with Three Positions down position, write “Right.”
The panel of switches might
not appear exactly as they do in
the examples above, but they
should be similar.
3. From inside your vehicle, first 4. The indicator lights will blink 6. Press and hold the button that
firmly press all three buttons slowly. Enter each switch setting will be used to control the
at the same time for about from Step 2 into your vehicle's garage door until the garage
three seconds. Release the Universal Home Remote. You door moves. The indicator light
buttons to put the Universal will have two and one-half above the selected button
Home Remote into minutes to complete Step 4. should slowly blink. This button
programming mode. Now press one button on the may need to be held for up to
Universal Home Remote for 55 seconds.
each switch setting as follows: 7. Immediately release the button
. If you wrote “Left,” press when the garage door moves.
the left button (A) in the The indicator light will blink
vehicle. rapidly until programming is
. If you wrote “Right,” press complete.
the right button (C) in the 8. Press and release the same
vehicle. button again. The garage door
. If you wrote “Middle,” press should move, confirming that
the middle button (B) in the programming is successful and
vehicle. complete.
5. After entering all of the switch To program another Fixed Code

A. Left Button (Up, +, or On) positions, once again firmly device such as an additional garage
press and release all three door opener, a security device,
B. Middle Button
buttons at the same time. The or home automation device, repeat
(Middle, 0, or Neutral)
indicator lights will turn on. Steps 1-8, choosing a different
C. Right Button button in Step 6 than what was used
(Down, −, or Off) for the garage door opener.
Universal Remote System Erasing Universal Home For help or information on the
Remote Buttons Universal Home Remote System,
Operation call the customer assistance phone
Press and hold the appropriate The programmed buttons should be number under Customer Assistance
button for at least half of a second. erased when the vehicle is sold or Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
The indicator light will come on the lease ends. page 13‑4 or Customer Assistance
while the signal is being transmitted. To erase either Rolling Code or Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Fixed Code settings on the
Reprogramming Universal Universal Home Remote device:
Home Remote Buttons
1. Press and hold the two outside
Any of the three buttons can be buttons at the same time for
reprogrammed by repeating the approximately 20 seconds, until
instructions. the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release both buttons. The
codes from all buttons will be
erased.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Lighting Features
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . 6-10
Daytime Running Battery Power Protection . . . . 6-10
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 The exterior lamps control is located
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5 on the instrument panel to the left of
Turn and Lane-Change the steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 It controls the following systems:
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Auxiliary . Headlamps
Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-7 . Taillamps
. Parking Lamps
. License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Roof Marker Lamps
(If Equipped)
6-2 Lighting
The exterior lamps control has When the vehicle is turned off
. Taillamps
four positions: and the headlamps are in AUTO, . License Plate Lamps
O (Off): Turns off the automatic the headlamps may automatically .
remain on for a set time. Roof Marker Lamps
headlamps and daytime running (If Equipped)
lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp The time of the delay can be
control to the off position again to changed using the DIC. See Driver When the headlamps are turned on
turn the automatic headlamps or Information Center (DIC) on while the vehicle is on, the
DRL back on. page 5‑32 headlamps turn off automatically
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the 10 minutes after the ignition is
For vehicles first sold in Canada, turned off. When the headlamps are
the off position will only work when parking lamps together with the
following: turned on while the vehicle is off,
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). the headlamps will stay on for
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
. Instrument Panel Lights 10 minutes before automatically
turns on the headlamps at normal . Taillamps turning off to prevent the battery
brightness, together with the from being drained. Turn the
. License Plate Lamps headlamp control to off and then
following:
.
. Roof Marker Lamps back to the headlamp on position to
Parking Lamps (If Equipped) make the headlamps stay on for an
. Instrument Panel Lights additional 10 minutes.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
. Taillamps headlamps together with the Push the turn signal/multifunction
following: lever toward the instrument panel to
. License Plate Lamps
change the headlamps from low
. Roof Marker Lamps
. Parking Lamps
beam to high beam.
(If Equipped) . Instrument Panel Lights
Lighting 6-3
Exterior Lamps Off Flash-to-Pass Daytime Running

Reminder This feature lets you use the Lamps (DRL)
For vehicles with a radio, a reminder high-beam headlamps to signal a Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
chime sounds when the headlamps driver in front of you that you want make it easier for others to see the
or parking lamps are manually to pass. It works even if the front of your vehicle during the day.
turned on, the ignition is off, and a headlamps are in the automatic Fully functional daytime running
door is open. To disable the chime, position. lamps are required on all vehicles
turn the lamp off. To use it, pull the turn signal lever first sold in Canada.
toward you, then release it. The DRL system comes on when
Headlamp High/ the following conditions are met:
If the headlamps are in the
Low-Beam Changer automatic position or on low beam, . The ignition is on.
5 3 (Headlamp High/Low‐Beam the high-beam headlamps will turn
. The exterior lamps control is
Changer): Push the lever toward on. They will stay on as long as
the instrument panel, to change the you hold the lever toward you. in AUTO.
headlamps from low to high beam. The high-beam indicator on the . The transmission is not in Park.
instrument panel cluster will come
Pull the multifunction lever toward on. Release the lever to return to
. The light sensor determines it is
you and release it, to return to normal operation. daytime.
low-beam headlamps.
When the DRL system is on,
only the DRL lamps are on.
The taillamps, sidemarker,
instrument panel lights, and other
lamps will not be on.
When the high beams are on, this
indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster will also be on.
6-4 Lighting
When it begins to get dark, the Automatic Headlamp

automatic headlamp system
switches from DRL to the
System
headlamps. When it is dark enough outside, the
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the automatic headlamp system turns
exterior lamps control to the OFF on the headlamps at the normal
position and then release. For brightness, along with the taillamps,
vehicles first sold in Canada, the sidemarker, parking lamps, and the
transmission must be in the P (Park) instrument panel lights. The radio
position before the DRL lamps can lights will also be dim. The vehicle has a light sensor
be turned off. To turn off the automatic headlamp located on the top of the instrument
system, turn the exterior lamps panel which regulates when the
switch to the off position and then automatic headlamps turn on.
release it. For vehicles first sold in Do not cover the sensor, otherwise
Canada, the transmission must be the headlamps will come on
in the P (Park) position before the whenever the ignition is on.
automatic headlamp system can be The system may also turn on the
turned off. headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or heavy overcast
weather. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition
between the daytime and nighttime
operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving
Lighting 6-5
under bridges or bright overhead The headlamps will also stay on Hazard Warning Flashers
street lights does not affect the after you exit the vehicle. This
system. The DRL and automatic feature can be programmed using
headlamp system are only affected the Driver Information Center (DIC).
when the light sensor detects a See Vehicle Personalization
change in lighting lasting longer (with DIC Buttons) on page 5‑50.
than the delay. If the vehicle is not equipped with
If the vehicle is started in a dark DIC buttons, exit lighting is
garage, the automatic headlamp automatic. When it is dark enough
system comes on immediately. outside, the exterior lamps remain
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, on for 30 seconds after the ignition
it takes approximately one minute is moved from ON/RUN to
for the automatic headlamp system LOCK/OFF.
to change to DRL if it is bright For vehicles without a radio, the
enough outside. During that delay, instrument panel light remains on for
the instrument panel cluster may not 30 seconds with the driver door | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
be as bright as usual. Make sure the closed. For vehicles with a radio, Press this button located on top of
instrument panel brightness control the instrument panel light remains the steering column, to make the
is in the full bright position. See on for 10 minutes with the driver front and rear turn signal lamps
Instrument Panel Illumination door closed. See Retained flash on and off. This warns others
Control on page 6‑8. Accessory Power (RAP) on that you are having trouble. Press
To idle the vehicle with the page 9‑36. again to turn the flashers off.
automatic headlamp system off, The regular headlamp system can When the hazard warning flashers
turn the control to the off position. be turned on when needed. are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
not work.
6-6 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change Holding the turn signal lever for Fog Lamps
more than one second will cause
Signals the turn signals to flash until you
release the lever.
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane
change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb could
be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb For vehicles with fog lamps, the
is not burned out, check the fuse. control is located next to the exterior
An arrow on the instrument panel See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
cluster flashes in the direction of the lamps control on the instrument
page 10‑48. panel, to the left of the steering
turn or lane change.
Turn Signal On Chime column.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn. If the turn signal is left on for more The ignition must be in the
than 1.2 km (0.75 miles), a chime ON/RUN position for the fog lamps
Raise or lower the lever for less to come on.
than one second until the arrow sounds at each flash of the turn
starts to flash to signal a lane signal, if the vehicle has a radio.
change. This causes the turn The message TURN SIGNAL ON
signals to automatically flash will also appear in the Driver
three times. It will flash six times Information Center (DIC). To turn
if Tow/Haul Mode is active. the chime and message off, move
the turn signal lever to the off
position.
Lighting 6-7
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the Auxiliary Roof-Mounted The emergency roof lamp circuit is
fog lamps on or off. A light will come fused at 30 amps, so the total
Lamp current draw of the attached lamps
on in the instrument panel cluster.
If the vehicle has this feature, this should be less than this value.
When the fog lamps are turned on, button includes wiring provisions for The attachment points for the roof
the parking lamps automatically a dealer or a qualified service center lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires
turn on. to install an auxiliary roof lamp. located above the overhead
When the headlamps are changed console, a dark green switched
to high beam, the fog lamps also go power wire and a black ground wire.
off. When the high-beam headlamps For more information on roof mount
are turned off, the fog lamps will emergency lamp installation, please
come on again. visit the GM Upfitter website at
Some localities have laws that www.gmupfitter.com or contact your
require the headlamps to be on with dealer.
the fog lamps. If the vehicle has this button, the
vehicle may have the snow plow
This button is located on the prep package. For further
overhead console. information, see Adding a Snow
Plow or Similar Equipment on
When the wiring is connected to page 9‑117.
an auxiliary roof‐mounted lamp,
pressing the bottom of the button
will activate the lamp and illuminate
an indicator light at the bottom of
this button. Pressing the top of the
button will turn off the roof‐mounted
lamp and indicator.
6-8 Lighting
Interior Lighting Turn the knob clockwise or Dome Lamps

counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the instrument panel lights. Turning The dome lamps are located in the
Instrument Panel the knob to the farthest clockwise overhead console.
Illumination Control position turns on the dome lamps. They come on when any door is
opened and turn off after all the
Cargo Lamp doors are closed.
The cargo lamps come on by Turn the instrument panel
turning the instrument panel brightness knob located below the
brightness control knob to the dome lamp override button,
farthest clockwise position. This clockwise to the farthest position to
knob is located on the instrument manually turn on the dome lamps.
panel and also turns on the dome The dome lamps remain on until the
lamps. knob is turned counterclockwise.
The cargo lamps can be used if Dome Lamp Override
more light is needed in the cargo
The dome lamp override button is
area of the vehicle or in the top-box
D (Instrument Panel located next to the exterior lamps
storage units.
Brightness): This feature controls control.
the brightness of the instrument
panel lights and is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
Push the knob to extend out and
then it can be turned.
Lighting 6-9
Reading Lamps Lighting Features

For vehicles with reading lamps,
they are located on the overhead Entry Lighting
console. The vehicle has an illuminated entry
To turn on the reading lamps, press feature.
the button located next to each When the doors are opened, the
lamp. To turn them off, press the dome lamps will come on if the
button again. dome override button is in the
The vehicle may also have reading extended position. If the dome
lamps in other locations. To turn the override button is pressed in, the
lamps on or off, press the button lamps will not come on.
located next to the lamp.
k (Dome Off): Press the button Exit Lighting
in and the dome lamps remain off If the vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat
when a door is opened. Press the Entertainment (RSE) system, press The interior lamps come on when
button again to return it to the the lamp lenses to turn the lamps on the key is removed from the ignition.
extended position so that the dome or off. They turn off automatically in
lamps come on when a door is The lamps are fixed and cannot be 20 seconds. The lights do not come
opened. adjusted. on if the dome override button is
pressed in.
6-10 Lighting
Battery Load This is because the generator Normally, these actions occur in
(alternator) may not be spinning steps or levels, without being
Management fast enough at idle to produce all of noticeable. In rare cases at the
The vehicle has Electric Power the power needed for very high highest levels of corrective action,
Management (EPM) that estimates electrical loads. this action may be noticeable to the
the battery's temperature and state A high electrical load occurs when driver. If so, a DIC message might
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage several of the following are on, be displayed, such as BATTERY
for best performance and extended such as: headlamps, high beams, SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
life of the battery. fog lamps, rear window defogger, VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
climate control fan at high speed, If one of these messages displays,
When the battery's state of charge
heated seats, engine cooling fans, it is recommended that the driver
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
trailer loads, and loads plugged into reduce the electrical loads as much
to quickly bring the charge back up.
accessory power outlets. as possible. See Driver Information
When the state of charge is high,
Center (DIC) on page 5‑32.
the voltage is lowered slightly to EPM works to prevent excessive
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle discharge of the battery. It does this
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage Battery Power Protection
by balancing the generator's output
display on the Driver Information and the vehicle's electrical needs. This feature shuts off the dome and
Center (DIC), you may see the It can increase engine idle speed to reading lamps, if they are left on for
voltage move up or down. This is generate more power whenever more than 10 minutes after the
normal. If there is a problem, an needed. It can temporarily reduce ignition is turned off. The cargo
alert will be displayed. the power demands of some lamp shuts off after 20 minutes.
The battery can be discharged at accessories. This prevents the battery from
idle if the electrical loads are very running down.
high. This is true for all vehicles.
Infotainment System 7-1

. Set up the tone, speaker
Infotainment Introduction adjustments, and preset radio
System Infotainment
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Determine which radio the vehicle Driving on page 9‑2.
Introduction has and read the following pages to
Notice: Contact your dealer
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 become familiar with its features.
before adding any equipment.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 { WARNING Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
Radio Taking your eyes off the road the operation of the engine, radio,
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 for extended periods could or other systems, and could
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 cause a crash resulting in injury damage them. Follow federal
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 rules covering mobile radio and
or death to you or others. Do
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-14 telephone equipment.
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14 not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving. The vehicle has Retained
Audio Players Accessory Power (RAP). With
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 RAP, the audio system can be
This system provides access to
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 played even after the ignition is
many audio and non‐audio listings.
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 turned off. See Retained Accessory
To minimize taking your eyes off the Power (RAP) on page 9‑36 for more
Rear Seat Infotainment road while driving, do the following information.
Rear Seat Entertainment while the vehicle is parked:
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
. Become familiar with the
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 operation and controls of the
audio system.
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7-2 Infotainment System
Navigation/Radio System Operation

For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
AM-FM Radio
Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3), Radio with
USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3), and Radio with CD Similar
System on page 7‑36 for more

information on the vehicle's RSE
system.
The DVD player is the top slot on
the radio faceplate. The player is
capable of reading the DTS‐
programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media. (DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.)
Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories.
Using the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3) the system on and off.
The vehicle has one of these radios are explained later in this section, Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
as its audio system. “Adjusting the Speakers to increase or decrease the volume.
Radios with CD and DVD

(Balance/Fade).” 4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD AM-FM Radio with CD): Press to
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD radio may have a Rear Seat switch the display between the radio
radio have a Bose® Surround Entertainment (RSE) system. See station frequency and the time.
Sound System. Some of its features Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
While the ignition is off, press this To activate SCV: Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
button to display the time. Press to 1. Set the radio volume to the (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM
display additional text information desired level. Radio with CD)
related to the current FM-RDS or
XM station; or CD, MP3, or WMA 2. Press the MENU button to To adjust the bass or treble:
song. If information is available display the radio setup menu.
1. Press the f knob until Bass or
during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA 3. Press the softkey under the Treble displays.
playback, the song title information AUTO VOLUM (automatic
displays on the top line of the volume) tab on the radio display. 2. To adjust the setting, do one of
display and artist information the following:
displays on the bottom line. When 4. Press the softkey under the
information is not available, “NO desired Speed Compensated . Turn the f knob.
INFO” displays. Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, . Press either ¨ SEEK,
or High) to select the level of
Speed Compensated Volume radio volume compensation. or © SEEK.
(SCV): Radios with Speed The display times out after
Compensated Volume (SCV) approximately 10 seconds. Each
. Press either \ FWD,
automatically adjust the radio higher setting allows for more or s REV.
volume to compensate for road and radio volume compensation at
wind noise as the vehicle's speed EQ (Equalization): Press this
faster vehicle speeds. button to choose bass and treble
changes while driving, so that the
volume level stays consistent. equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
MANUAL, or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the
manual bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
Setting the Tone (Bass/ 3. Adjust the setting by doing one To quickly adjust all tone and
Midrange/Treble) (All Except of the following: speaker controls to the middle
AM-FM Radio and Radio . Turn the f knob clockwise position, press the f knob for more
with CD) or counterclockwise. than two seconds until a beep
sounds.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust the bass,
. Press the ¨ SEEK, EQ (Equalization): Press this
midrange, or treble: or © SEEK. button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
1. Press the f knob until the tone . Press the \ FWD, different types of music. Selecting
control tabs display. or s REV. MANUAL, or changing bass or
2. Highlight the desired tone treble, returns the EQ to the manual
If a station's frequency is weak or if
control tab by doing one of the bass and treble settings.
there is static, decrease the treble.
following: Unique EQ settings can be saved
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
for each source.
. Press the f knob. or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey positioned under If the radio has a Bose® audio
. Press the softkey under the system, the EQ settings are either
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
desired tab. MANUAL or TALK.
more than two seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to the
middle position.
Adjusting the Speakers Adjusting the Speakers To quickly adjust all speaker and
(Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio (Balance/Fade) (All Except tone controls to the middle position,
and AM-FM Radio with CD) AM-FM Radio and Radio press the f knob for more than
To adjust the balance or fade: with CD) two seconds.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
1. Press ` or press the f knob adjust the balance or fade: turned on, the radio disables FADE
until the speaker control label and mutes the rear speakers.
displays. 1. Press the f knob until the
speaker control tabs display. Radio Messages
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
the following: 2. Highlight the desired speaker Calibration Error: The audio
control tab by doing one of the system has been calibrated for
. Turn the f knob. following: the vehicle from the factory.
. Press either ¨ SEEK, If Calibration Error displays, it
. Press the f knob. means that the radio has not been
or © SEEK. configured properly for the vehicle
. Press the softkey under the
and it must be returned to your
. Press either \ FWD, desired tab.
dealer for service.
or s REV. 3. Adjust the setting by doing one
of the following: Locked or Loc: One of these
messages will display when the
. Turn the f knob clockwise THEFTLOCK® system has locked
or counterclockwise. up the radio. Take the vehicle to
your dealer for service.
. Press the ¨ SEEK,
If any error occurs repeatedly or
or © SEEK. if an error cannot be corrected,
. Press the \ FWD, contact your dealer.
or s REV.
Radio display and artist information ¨ SEEK: Press to seek the next
displays on the bottom line. When radio station. Press and hold for a
information is not available, “NO few seconds until a beep sounds to
AM-FM Radio INFO” displays. scan for radio stations in ascending
Radio Data System (RDS) Finding a Station order; press the © SEEK button
For radios with the Radio Data again to stop scanning radio
BAND: Press to switch between stations. The radio only seeks and
System (RDS) feature, it only works AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
with FM stations that broadcast scans stations with a strong signal
RDS information. This system relies f (Tune): Turn to manually select that are in the selected band.
upon receiving specific information radio stations. For the AM-FM Radio, press and
from these stations and only works © SEEK: Press to seek the hold the ¨ SEEK for four seconds
when the information is available. previous radio station. Press until a double beep sounds to scan
While the radio is tuned to an and hold for a few seconds until a the preset stations. The station
FM-RDS station, the station name beep sounds to scan for radio frequency flashes while the radio is
or call letters will display. In rare stations in descending order; press in the scan mode.
cases, a radio station could the © SEEK button again to stop
broadcast incorrect information that scanning radio stations. The radio
s REV: Press to manually tune to
causes the radio features to work a radio station in descending order.
only seeks and scans stations with
improperly. If this happens, contact a strong signal that are in the \ FWD: Press to manually tune to
the radio station. selected band. a radio station in ascending order.
4 (Information) (RDS Features): For the AM-FM Radio, press and FAV (Favorites): Press to select
For vehicles with RDS features, different favorites pages for stored
hold the © SEEK for four seconds
press 4 to display additional text radio stations.
until a double beep sounds to scan
information related to the current the preset stations. The station
FM-RDS station. If information is frequency flashes while the radio is
available, the song title information in the scan mode.
displays on the top line of the
Storing Radio Stations Setting Preset Stations The number of favorites pages can
To store presets: be set up using the MENU button.
Drivers are encouraged to store the
To set up the number of favorites
radio station while the vehicle is 1. Tune to a radio station. pages:
parked; see Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio 2. Press and hold one of the six 1. Press the MENU button.
stations using the presets, favorites numbered pushbuttons for
three seconds until a beep 2. Press the softkey located below
button, and steering wheel controls, the FAV 1-6 tab.
if the vehicle has this feature. sounds.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store 3. Select the number of favorites
Radios that have a FAV button store pages by pressing the softkey
radio stations as favorites. Up to additional radio stations.
located below the displayed
36 stations can be programmed as Storing a Radio Station as a page numbers.
favorites using the six softkeys Favorite
below the radio station frequency 4. Press the FAV button, or let
tabs and by using the FAV button. To store a station as a favorite: the menu time out, to return to
Press the FAV button to go through 1. Tune to a radio station. the original main radio screen
up to six pages of favorites, each showing the radio station
having six favorite stations available 2. Press the FAV button to display frequency tabs and to begin
per page. Each page of favorites the page where the station will the process of programming
can contain any combination of AM, be stored. favorites.
FM, or XM, if equipped, stations. 3. Press and hold one of the six
Radios that do not have a FAV softkeys until a beep sounds.
button store radio stations as 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
presets. Up to 18 stations store additional radio stations.
(6 FM1, 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can
be programmed on the six
numbered pushbuttons.
Satellite Radio display and artist information Finding a Category (CAT)

displays on the bottom line. When Station
XM™ Satellite Radio Service information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays. To find XM channels in a category:
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States 1. Press the CAT button to display
Finding a Channel the category tabs. Continue
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of BAND: Press to switch between pressing the CAT button until the
programming and commercial-free AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped. desired category name displays.
music, coast to coast, and in f (Tune): Turn to manually select . Radios with CD and DVD
digital-quality sound. A service an XM channel. can also navigate the
fee is required to receive the XM category list by pressing
service. If the service needs to be © SEEK: Press to go to the
previous XM channel. the \ FWD or the s REV
reactivated, the radio will display buttons.
“No Subscription Please Renew ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
on channel XM1.” For more XM channel. 2. Press either of the two softkeys
information, contact XM at below the desired category tab
www.xmradio.com or
s REV: Press to go to the to immediately tune to the first
previous XM category. XM station in that category.
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
and www.xmradio.ca or \ FWD: Press to go to the next To go to the previous or next XM
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. XM category. station in the selected category,
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio FAV (Favorites): Press to select do one of the following:
Service): For vehicles with XM, different favorites pages for stored
radio stations.
. Turn the f knob.
press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current CAT (Category): The CAT button is
. Press the softkey below the
XM channel. If information is used to find XM channels when the right or left arrows in the
available, the song title information radio is in the XM mode. category tab.
displays on the top line of the . Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
3. To exit the category search Storing XM Channels 3. Press and hold one of the six
mode, press the FAV button or softkeys until a beep sounds.
Drivers are encouraged to store
BAND button to display the 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
XM channels while the vehicle is
favorites again. store additional radio stations.
parked; see Defensive Driving on
Adding and Removing Categories page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio The number of favorites pages can
stations using the presets, favorites be set up using the MENU button.
Categories cannot be added or
button, and steering wheel controls, To set up the number of favorites
removed while the vehicle is moving
if the vehicle has this feature. pages:
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Up to 36 stations can be 1. Press the MENU button.
To add or remove a category:
programmed as favorites using the
1. Press the MENU button. six softkeys below the radio station 2. Press the softkey located below
frequency tabs and by using the the FAV 1-6 tab.
2. Press the softkey located below
the XM CAT tab. FAV button. Press the FAV button 3. Select the number of favorites
to go through up to six pages of pages by pressing the softkey
3. Turn the f knob to display the favorites, each having six favorite located below the displayed
category to add or remove. stations available per page. Each page numbers.
page of favorites can contain any
4. Press the softkey located under 4. Press the FAV button, or let the
combination of AM, FM, or XM,
the Add or Remove tab. menu time out, to return to the
if equipped, stations.
To restore all removed original main radio screen
categories, press the softkey Storing an XM Channel as a showing the radio station
under the Restore All tab. Favorite frequency tabs and to begin
To store a station as a favorite: the process of programming
5. Repeat the steps to remove favorites.
more categories. 1. Tune to an XM channel.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station will
be stored.
XM Radio Messages Channel Unauth : This channel is No Subscription Please Renew:

blocked or cannot be received with The XM subscription needs to be
XL (Explicit Language
your XM subscription package. reactivated. Contact XM at
Channels): These channels,
Channel Unavail: This previously www.xmradio.com or call
or any others, can be blocked at a
assigned channel is no longer 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
customer's request, by calling
assigned. Tune to another station. www.xmradio.ca or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
If this station was one of the 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
presets, choose another station CAT Not Found: There are no
XM Updating: The encryption code
for that preset button. channels available for the selected
in the receiver is being updated, and
No Artist Info: No artist category. The system is working
no action is required. This process
information is available at this time properly.
should take no longer than
30 seconds. on this channel. The system is XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
working properly. in the vehicle could have previously
No XM Signal: The system is
No Title Info: No song title been in another vehicle. For security
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
information is available at this time purposes, XM receivers cannot be
is in a location that is blocking the
on this channel. The system is swapped between vehicles. If this
XM signal. When the vehicle is
working properly. message is received after having
moved into an open area, the signal
the vehicle serviced, check with
should return. No CAT Info: No category your dealer.
Loading XM: The audio system is information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
acquiring and processing audio and
working properly. this message alternates with the XM
text data. No action is needed. This
Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This
message should disappear shortly. No Information: No text or label is needed to activate the
Channel Off Air: This channel is informational messages are service.
not currently in service. Tune in to available at this time on this
another channel. channel. The system is working
properly.
Unknown: If this message is If there is interference or static, XM™ Satellite Radio Service
received when tuned to channel 0, unplug the item from the accessory
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
there could be a receiver fault. power outlet.
digital radio reception from coast to
Consult with your dealer.
AM coast in the 48 contiguous United
Check Antenna: If this message States, and in Canada. Just as
does not clear within a short period The range for most AM stations is with FM, tall buildings or hills can
of time, the receiver or antenna greater than for FM, especially at interfere with satellite radio signals,
could have a fault. Consult with your night. The longer range can cause causing the sound to fade in and
dealer. station frequencies to interfere out. In addition, traveling or standing
with each other. For better radio under heavy foliage, bridges,
Check XM Receivr: If this reception, most AM radio stations
message does not clear within a garages, or tunnels may cause loss
boost the power levels during the of the XM signal for a period of time.
short period of time, the receiver day, and then reduce these levels
could have a fault. Consult with your during the night. Static can also Cellular Phone Usage
dealer. occur when things like storms and
Cellular phone usage may cause
XM Not Available: If this message power lines interfere with radio
interference with the vehicle's radio.
does not clear within a short period reception. When this happens, try
This interference may occur when
of time, the receiver could have a reducing the treble on the radio.
making or receiving phone calls,
fault. Consult with your dealer. charging the phone's battery,
FM Stereo
or simply having the phone on. This
Radio Reception FM signals only reach about interference causes an increased
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although level of static while listening to the
Frequency interference and static the radio has a built-in electronic
can occur during normal radio radio. If static is received while
circuit that automatically works to listening to the radio, unplug the
reception if items such as cell phone reduce interference, some static
chargers, vehicle convenience cellular phone and turn it off.
can occur, especially around tall
accessories, and external electronic buildings or hills, causing the sound
devices are plugged into the to fade in and out.
accessory power outlet.
Fixed Mast Antenna Audio Players the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
The fixed mast antenna can and debris.
withstand most car washes without CD Player
being damaged as long as it is If an error displays, see “ CD Player
securely attached to the base. Care of the CD Player Messages” later in this section.
If the mast becomes slightly bent, Do not add any label to a CD. Care of CDs
straighten it out by hand. If the mast It could get caught in the CD. If a
is badly bent, replace it. CD is recorded on a personal If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
computer and a description label is can be reduced due to CD-R or
Occasionally check to make sure CD-RW quality, the method of
the antenna is tightened to its base. needed, try labeling the top of the
recorded CD with a marking pen. recording, the quality of the music
If tightening is required, tighten that has been recorded, and the
by hand until fully seated plus The use of CD lens cleaners is way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
one quarter turn. not advised, due to the risk of handled. Handle them carefully.
contaminating the lens of the CD Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their
Satellite Radio Antenna optics with lubricants internal to the original cases or other protective
CD player mechanism. cases and away from direct sunlight
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
located on the roof of the vehicle. Notice: If a label is added to a and dust. The CD player scans the
Keep the antenna clear of CD, more than one CD is inserted bottom surface of the disc. If the
obstructions for clear radio into the slot at a time, or an surface of a CD is damaged, such
reception. attempt is made to play scratched as cracked, broken, or scratched,
or damaged CDs, the CD player the CD does not play properly or not
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the could be damaged. While using at all. Do not touch the bottom side
performance of the XM system the CD player, use only CDs in of a CD while handling it; this could
(if equipped) may be affected if the good condition without any label, damage the surface. Pick up CDs
sunroof is open. load one CD at a time, and keep by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD Ejecting a CD

clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or partway into the slot, label side (Six-Disc CD Player)
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, up. The player pulls the CD in.
neutral detergent solution mixed Z EJECT : Press and release
To insert multiple CDs: to eject the disc that is currently
with water. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to 1. Press and hold the LOAD button playing. Remove the CD when
the edge. for two seconds. A beep sounds Remove Disc displays. If the disc is
and Load All Discs displays. not removed, after several seconds
Inserting a CD the disc is automatically pulled back
2. Wait for the message on when to into the player.
(Single CD Player)
insert the discs. The CD player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, takes up to six CDs. To eject all CDs, press and hold the
label side up. The player pulls it in Z EJECT button for two seconds.
3. Press the LOAD button again to
and the CD should begin playing.
cancel loading more CDs. Playing a CD
Inserting a CD(s) If the ignition or radio is turned off
Ejecting a CD
(Six-Disc CD Player) with a CD in the player, it stays in
(Single CD Player)
the player. When the ignition or
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into Z EJECT: Press and release to radio is turned on, the CD starts
the CD player. This CD player holds eject the disc. Remove the CD playing where it stopped, if it was
up to six CDs. when Remove Disc displays. If the the last selected audio source. The
To insert one CD: disc is not removed, after several CD is controlled by the buttons on
seconds the disc is automatically the radio faceplate or by the RSA
1. Press and release the LOAD pulled back into the player.
button. unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System on page 7‑46 for more
2. Wait for the message to insert information.
the disc.
When a CD is inserted, the CD 4 (Information): Press to display s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
symbol displays on the left side of additional text information related to and hold to reverse playback quickly
the radio display. As each new track the current song. If information is within a track.
starts to play, the track number available, the song title information
displays. displays on the top line of the
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
The CD player can play the smaller display and artist information quickly within a track.
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an displays on the bottom line. When
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the information is not available, “NO RPT (Repeat): For the AM-FM
smaller CDs are loaded in the same INFO” displays. Radio with CD, press and release
manner. the RPT button to repeat the current
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on track. Press RPT again to turn off
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to the CD that is currently playing. repeat play.
cycle between CD or Auxiliary when © SEEK: Press to go to the start of RDM (Random): Press to listen
listening to the radio. The CD icon the current track if more than
and a message showing the disc to tracks in random, rather than
10 seconds on the CD have played. sequential order. To use random,
and/or track number will display
when a CD is in the player. Press Press to go to the previous track if do one of the following:
again and the system automatically less than 10 seconds on the CD For the AM-FM Radio with CD:
searches for an auxiliary input have played.
1. Press the RDM button until the
device; see Auxiliary Devices on Press and hold, or press multiple random icon displays.
page 7‑31 for more information. times, to continue moving backward
If a portable audio player is not through the tracks on the CD. 2. Press the RDM button again
connected, “No Input Device Found” until the random icon disappears
displays.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next from the display.
track.
Press and hold, or press multiple
times, to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
For the Radio with CD (MP3) and MP3‐Supported Files CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported File
Radio with USB and CD (MP3): and Folder Structure
The Radio with CD (MP3), Radio
1. Press the softkey positioned with USB and CD (MP3), and Radio The radio supports:
under the RDM tab until Random with USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3) . Up to 50 folders.
Current Disc displays. have the capability of playing an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
. Up to 8 folders in depth.
2. Press the softkey again to turn
off random play. Format
. Up to 50 playlists.
For the Radio with USB and Radios that have the capability of
. Up to 255 files.
Six-Disc CD (MP3): playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
1. Press the softkey positioned files that were recorded onto a extension.
under the RDM tab until CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
Randomize All Discs displays be recorded with the following fixed
file extension.
to play tracks from all CDs bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
loaded in random order. 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, Root Directory
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, The root directory is treated as a
2. Press the softkey positioned 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
under the RDM tab until Random folder. Files are stored in the root
or a variable bit rate.
Current Disc displays to play directory when the disc or storage
tracks from a single CD in Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode device does not contain folders.
random order. Discs Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as
3. Press the same softkey again to The radio can play discs that
F1 ROOT.
turn off random play. contain both uncompressed CD
audio and MP3 files. If both formats Empty Folder
are on the disc, the radio reads
Folders that do not contain files are
all MP3 files first, then the
skipped, and the player advances to
uncompressed CD audio files.
the next folder that contains files.
Order of Play File System and Naming Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
Compressed audio files are The song name that displays is the file extension and are stored on a
accessed in the following order: song name that is contained in the USB device may be supported by
ID3 tag. If the song name is not the radio with a USB port.
. Playlists (Px).
present in the ID3 tag, then the Playlists can be changed by using
. Files stored in the root directory. radio displays the file name without the softkeys below the S c and
. Files stored in folders in the root the extension (such as .mp3) as the c T tabs, the f knob, the
directory. track name. © SEEK button, or the ¨ SEEK
Tracks are played in the following Track names longer than button. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
order: 32 characters or 4 pages are that has been recorded without
shortened. The display does not using file folders can be played.
. Play begins from the first track in show parts of words on the last If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more
the first playlist and continues page of text and the extension of than the maximum of 50 folders,
sequentially through all tracks in the file name is not displayed. 15 playlists, and 512 folders and
each playlist. When the last files, the player allows access and
track of the last playlist has Preprogrammed Playlists navigates up to the maximum, but
played, play continues from the CDs that have preprogrammed all items over the maximum are not
first track of the first playlist. playlists reated using WinAmp™, accessible.
. Play begins from the first track MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
in the first folder and continues software can be accessed; however,
sequentially through all tracks in there is no playlist‐editing capability
each folder. When the last track using the radio. These playlists are
of the last folder has played, treated as special folders containing
play continues from the first compressed audio song files.
track of the first folder.
Playing an MP3 \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press For the Radio with USB and
and hold to advance playback Six-Disc CD (MP3):
4 (Information): Press to display
additional text information related to quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced 1. Press the softkey positioned
the current song. If information is volume and the elapsed time of the under the RDM tab until
available, the song title information file displays. Release \ FWD to Randomize All Discs displays to
displays on the top line of the resume playing. The elapsed time of play tracks from all CDs loaded
display and artist information the file displays. in random order.
displays on the bottom line. When S c (Previous Folder): Press 2. Press the softkey positioned
information is not available, “NO under the RDM tab until Random
INFO” displays. the softkey below the S c tab to
go to the first track in the previous Current Disc displays to play
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3s on folder. tracks from a single CD in
the CD currently playing. random order.
c T (Next Folder): Press the
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
softkey below the c T tab to go to
3. Press the same softkey again to
the track, if more than 10 seconds turn off random play.
have played. Press and hold or the first track in the next folder.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
press multiple times to continue RDM (Random): Press to listen
moving backward through tracks. softkey below the h tab to play
to tracks in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random, the files in order by artist or album.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
do one of the following:
track. Press and hold or press The player scans the disc to sort the
multiple times to continue moving For the Radio with CD (MP3) and files by artist and album ID3 tag
forward through tracks. Radio with USB and CD (MP3): information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold 1. Press the softkey positioned on the number of files on the disc.
to reverse playback quickly. Sound under the RDM tab until Random The radio may begin playing while it
is heard at a reduced volume and Current Disc displays. is scanning in the background.
the elapsed time of the file displays. 2. Press the softkey again to turn
Release s REV to resume playing. off random play.
When the scan is finished, the disc 3. Press the softkey below the
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
begins playing files in order by Back tab to return to the main or upside down.
artist. The current artist playing is music navigator screen. . The air is very humid. If so, wait
shown on the second line of the The album name displays on the about an hour and try again.
display. Once all songs by that artist second line between the arrows,
are played, the player moves to the
. There was a problem while
and songs from the current album burning the CD.
next artist in alphabetical order and begin to play. Once all songs from
begins playing files by that artist. that album have played, the player
. The label is caught in the CD
To listen to files by another artist, moves to the next album in player.
press the softkey located below alphabetical order on the CD and If the CD is not playing correctly, for
either arrow tab. The disc goes begins playing MP3s from that any other reason, try a known
to the next or previous artist in album. good CD.
alphabetical order. Continue To exit music navigator mode, press If any error occurs repeatedly or
pressing either softkey below the the softkey below the Back tab to if an error cannot be corrected,
arrow tab until the desired artist return to normal MP3 playback. contact your dealer. If the radio
displays.
displays an error message, write it
To change from playback by artist to CD Player Messages down and provide it to your dealer
playback by album: CHECK DISC: If this message when reporting the problem.
1. Press the softkey located below displays and/or the CD ejects, it
the Sort By tab. could be for one of the following
reasons:
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the Album tab from the sort
. It is very hot. When the
screen. temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play.
. The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
CD should play.
CD/DVD Player If an error displays, see “CD If the surface of a disc is soiled,
Messages” later in this section. clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or
Care of the CD and DVD Player dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
Care of CDs and DVDs neutral detergent solution mixed
Do not add any label to a disc.
It could get caught in the CD or If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the with water. Make sure the wiping
DVD player. If a disc is recorded sound quality can be reduced due to process starts from the center to
on a personal computer and a CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method the edge.
description label is needed, try of recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the Audio Output
labeling the top of the recorded disc
with a marking pen. way the CD-R or CD-RW has been Only one audio source can be heard
handled. Handle them carefully. through the speakers at one time.
The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their An audio source is defined as DVD
is not advised, due to the risk of original cases or other protective slot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM, front
contaminating the lens of the optics cases and away from direct sunlight auxiliary jack, USB port, or rear
with lubricants internal to the CD and dust. The CD or DVD player auxiliary jack.
and DVD player mechanism. scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a disc is Press the O button to turn the radio
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted damaged, such as cracked, broken, on. The radio can be heard through
into the slot at a time, or an or scratched, the disc does not play all of the vehicle speakers.
attempt is made to play scratched properly or not at all. Do not touch Front seat passengers can listen to
or damaged CDs, the CD player the bottom side of a disc while the radio (AM, FM, or XM if
could be damaged. While using handling it; this could damage the equipped) by pressing the BAND
the CD player, use only CDs in surface. Pick up discs by grasping button or the DVD/CD AUX button to
good condition without any label, the outer edges or the edge of the select CD slot, DVD slot, front
load one CD at a time, and keep hole and the outer edge. auxiliary input, USB port, or rear
the CD player and the loading slot auxiliary input (if available).
free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If a playback device is plugged Ejecting a Disc Playing a CD (in Either the

into the radio’s front auxiliary input DVD or CD Slot)
jack, USB port, or the rear auxiliary
Z CD (Eject): Press and release
to eject the disc that is currently If the ignition or radio is turned off
jack, the front seat passengers
playing. The CD ejects from the with a CD in the player, it stays in
are able to listen to playback from
bottom slot. A beep sounds and the player. When the ignition or
this source through the vehicle
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the radio is turned on, the CD starts
speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
disc is ejected, Remove Disc playing where it stopped, if it was
Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on
displays. The disc can be removed. the last selected audio source. The
page 7‑31, or “Audio/Video
If the disc is not removed, after CD is controlled by the buttons on
(A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat
several seconds the disc the radio faceplate or by the RSA
Entertainment (RSE) System on
automatically pulls back into unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
the player. System on page 7‑46 for more
In some vehicles, depending on information. The DVD/CD decks
audio options, the rear speakers
Z DVD (Eject): Press and
release to eject the disc that is (the upper slot is the DVD deck and
can be muted when the RSA power the lower slot is the CD deck) of the
currently playing in the top slot.
is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio radio are compatible with most
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
(RSA) System on page 7‑46 for audio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs,
displays.
more information. and MP3s.
If loading and reading of a disc
Inserting a Disc cannot be completed, due to When a CD is inserted, the text tab
unknown format, etc., and the disc DVD or CD symbol displays on the
Insert a disc partway into either slot,
fails to eject, press and hold for left side of the radio display. As
label side up. The player pulls it in
more than five seconds to force the each new track starts to play, the
and the disc should begin playing.
disc to eject. track number displays.
(Loading a disc into the system,
depending on media type and
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a
DVD to begin playing.)
The CD player can play the smaller such as: DVD slot, CD slot, © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary the current track, if more than
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the (if available). See “Using the five seconds on the CD have
smaller CDs are loaded in the same Auxiliary Input Jack” in Auxiliary played.
manner. Devices on page 7‑31 or “Audio/
Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat Press to go to the previous track if
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to less than five seconds on the CD
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑36 for more information. have played.
when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text tab and a message If a disc is inserted into the top DVD Press and hold, or press multiple
showing the track or chapter slot, the rear seat operator can turn times, to continue moving backward
number will display when a disc is in on the video screen and use the through the tracks on the CD.
either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX remote control to navigate the CD ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
button again and the system (tracks only) through the remote track.
automatically searches for an control.
Press and hold, or press multiple
auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary 4 (Information): Press to display times, to continue moving forward
Devices on page 7‑31 for more additional text information related to through the tracks on the CD.
information. If a portable audio the current song. If information is
player is not connected, “No Aux available, the song title information
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in and hold to reverse playback quickly
displays on the top line of the
both the DVD slot and the CD slot, within a track.
display and artist information
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles displays on the bottom line. When \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
between the two sources and does information is not available, “NO and hold to advance playback
not indicate “No Aux Input Device.” INFO” displays. quickly within a track.
If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
cycles through all available options, the disc that is currently playing.
RDM (Random): Press to listen The CD player reads both The CD player supports:
to tracks in random, rather than uncompressed audio and MP3/ . Up to 512 files and folders.
sequential order. To use random: WMA files on a mixed mode disc.
Uncompressd audio is played . Up to 8 folders in depth.
1. Press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current before MP3/WMA files. Press the . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
Disc displays. CAT (category) button to toggle extension.
between uncompressed audio and
2. Press the softkey again to turn MP3/WMA files.
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
off random play. file extension.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
MP3 and WMA Supported Files and Folder Structure Root Directory
Format The DVD player supports: The root directory of the disc is
treated as a folder. If the root
The radio can play .mp3 or .wma . Up to 255 folders. directory has compressed audio
files that were recorded onto a . Up to 8 folders in depth. files, the directory displays as
CD-R or CD-RW disc. F1 ROOT on the radio.
. Up to 15 playlists.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode If a disc contains both
Discs
. Up to 40 sessions. uncompressed CD audio and
The radio plays discs that contain
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl MP3/WMA files, a folder under the
both uncompressed CD audio and extension. root directory called CD accesses
MP3/WMA files depending on . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda all of the CD audio tracks on
which slot the disc is loaded into. file extension. the disc.
The DVD player only reads Empty Folder
uncompressed audio and ignores Folders that do not contain files are
MP3/WMA files on a mixed skipped, and the player advances to
mode disc. the next folder that contains files.
No Folder Tracks are played in the following File System and Naming
When the disc contains only order: The song name that displays is the
compressed files, the files are . Play begins from the first track song name that is contained in the
located under the root folder. The in the first playlist and continues ID3 tag. If the song name is not
next and previous folder function sequentially through all tracks in present in the ID3 tag, then the
does not function on a disc that was each playlist. When the last radio displays the file name without
recorded without folders or playlists. track of the last playlist has the extension (such as .mp3) as the
When displaying the name of the played, play continues from the track name.
folder, the radio displays ROOT. first track of the first playlist. Track names longer than
When the disc contains only . Play begins from the first track in 32 characters or 4 pages are
playlists and compressed audio the first folder and continues shortened. Parts of words on the
files, but no folders, all files are sequentially through all tracks in last page of text and the extension
located under the root folder. The each folder. When the last track of the file name do not display.
folder down and the folder up of the last folder has played,
buttons search playlists first and play continues from the first Preprogrammed Playlists
then go to the root folder. When the track of the first folder. Preprogrammed playlists that
radio displays the name of the When play enters a new folder, the were created using WinAmp™,
folder, the radio displays ROOT. display does not automatically show MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
the new folder name unless the software can be accessed; however,
Order of Play they cannot be edited using the
folder mode has been chosen as
Compressed audio files are the default display. The new track radio. These playlists are treated
accessed in the following order: name displays. as special folders containing
. Playlists (Px). compressed audio song files.
. Files stored in the root directory. Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a
. Files stored in folders in the root USB device may be supported by
directory. the radio with a USB port.
Playing an MP3 or WMA (in \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The player scans the disc to sort the
Either the DVD or CD Slot) and hold to advance playback files by artist and album ID3 tag
quickly. information. It can take several
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD minutes to scan the disc depending
slot, the rear seat operator can turn S c (Previous Folder): Press on the number of files on the disc.
on the video screen and use the the softkey below the S c tab to The radio may begin playing while it
remote control to navigate the CD go to the first track in the previous is scanning in the background.
(tracks only). folder.
When the scan is finished, the disc
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA c T (Next Folder): Press the begins playing files in order by
files.
softkey below the c T tab to go to artist. The current artist playing is
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the first track in the next folder. shown on the second line of the
the track, if more than five seconds display. Once all songs by that artist
have played. Press and hold or RDM (Random): Press to listen to are played, the player moves to the
press multiple times, if less than tracks in random, rather than next artist in alphabetical order and
five seconds have played, to sequential order. begins playing files by that artist.
continue moving backward through To use random: To listen to files by another artist,
tracks. press the softkey located below
1. Press the softkey under the
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next RDM tab until Random Current either arrow tab. The disc goes to
track. Disc displays the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue
Press and hold, or press multiple 2. Press the same softkey again to
pressing either softkey below the
times, to continue moving forward turn off random play.
arrow tab until the artist displays.
through tracks.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold softkey below the h tab to play
to reverse playback quickly. files in order by artist or album.
To change from playback by artist to Using the DVD Player Inserting a Disc
playback by album:
The DVD player can be controlled Insert a disc partway into the top
1. Press the softkey below the Sort by the buttons on the remote slot, label side up. The player pulls
By tab. control, the RSA system, or by the it in and the disc should begin
2. Press one of the softkeys below buttons on the radio faceplate. See playing. “Loading Disc” shows on
the Album tab from the sort “Remote Control” under Rear Seat the radio display. At the same time,
screen. Entertainment (RSE) System on the radio displays a softkey menu of
page 7‑36 and Rear Seat Audio option(s). Some discs automatically
3. Press the softkey below the (RSA) System on page 7‑46 for play the movie while others default
Back tab to return to the main more information. to the softkey menu display,
music navigator screen. which requires the Play, Enter,
The DVD player is only compatible
The album name displays on the with DVDs of the appropriate region or Navigation softkeys to be
second line between the arrows, code printed on the jacket of pressed, either by softkey or by the
and songs from the current album most DVDs. rear seat passenger using the
begin to play. Once all songs from remote control.
that album have played, the player The DVD slot of the radio is
compatible with most audio CDs Loading a disc into the system,
moves to the next album in depending on media type and
alphabetical order on the CD and and CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds
begins playing MP3 files from that for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for
album. +R/RW media, along with MP3 and
WMA formats. a DVD.
To exit music navigator mode, press
If an error message displays on the Ejecting a Disc
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback. video screen or the radio, see “DVD Z DVD (Eject): Press and
Display Error Messages” under, release to eject the disc currently
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) playing in the top slot. A beep
System on page 7‑36, and “CD/DVD sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Player Messages” later in this
section for more information.
If loading and reading of a disc button cycles through all available A lock symbol displays next to the
cannot be completed, due to options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, clock display. The Parental Control
unknown format, etc., and the disc front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary (if feature remains on until the knob is
fails to eject, press and hold for available). See “Using the Auxiliary pressed and held for more than
more than five seconds to force the Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on two seconds again, or until the
disc to eject. page 7‑31 or “Audio/Video (A/V) driver turns the ignition off and exits
Jacks” under Rear Seat the vehicle.
Playing a DVD Entertainment (RSE) System on
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to a CD or DVD.
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
when listening to the radio. The slot, the rear seat operator can turn
© SEEK: Press to return to the start
DVD/CD text tab and a message of the current track or chapter.
on the video screen and use the Press again to go to the previous
showing the track or chapter remote control to navigate the CD
number will display when a disc track or chapter. This button might
(tracks only) through the remote not work when the DVD is playing
is in either slot. Press the DVD/ control.
CD AUX button again and the the copyright information or the
system automatically searches for O (Power): Press to turn the radio previews.
an auxiliary input device; see on or off. Turn clockwise or ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑31 for counterclockwise to increase or track or chapter. This button might
more information. If a portable audio decrease the volume. Press and not work when the DVD is playing
player is not connected, “No Aux hold for more than two seconds to the copyright information or the
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in turn off the entire radio and Rear previews.
both the DVD slot and the CD slot, Seat Entertainment (RSE) system
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles and to start the Parental Control s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to
between the two sources and does feature. Parental Control prevents quickly reverse the CD or DVD at
not indicate “No Aux Input Device.” the rear seat occupant from five times the normal speed. To
If a front auxiliary device is operating the Rear Seat Audio stop fast reversing, press again.
connected, the DVD/CD AUX (RSA) system or remote control.
This button might not work when playback mode. If the DVD screen After making a selection press this
the DVD is playing the copyright is off, press the play button to turn button. This button only operates
information or the previews. the screen on. when using a DVD.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to Some DVDs begin playing after the Nav (Navigate): Press to display
fast forward the CD or DVD at previews have finished, although directional arrows for navigating
five times the normal speed. To stop there could be a delay of up to through the menus.
fast forwarding, press again. This 30 seconds. If the DVD does q (Return): Press to exit the
button might not work when the not begin playing the movie current active menu and return to
DVD is playing the copyright automatically, press the softkey the previous menu. This button
information or the previews. located under the play/pause operates only when a DVD is
symbol tag displayed on the radio. playing and a menu is active.
Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V If the DVD still does not play, refer
(Video) to the on-screen instructions, The rear seat passenger can
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio if available. navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
display menu shows several tab menus and controls through the
options for playback. Press the
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, remote control. See “Remote
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Control” under Rear Seat
softkey located under any tab option
during DVD-V playback. r (Enter): Press to select the Entertainment (RSE) System on
choices that are highlighted in page 7‑36 for more information.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either any menu. The video screen automatically
the Play or Pause tab displayed on turns on when the DVD-V is
the radio, to toggle between pausing y (Menu): Press to access the inserted into the DVD slot, and does
or restarting playback of a DVD. DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use not automatically power on when
If the forward arrow is showing on
the softkeys located under the the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD
the display, the system is in pause slot. It must be manually turned on
mode. If the Pause tab is showing navigation arrows to navigate the
cursor through the DVD menu. by the rear seat occupant through
on the display, the system is in the remote control power button.
Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle Stopping and Resuming
(Audio) through audio stream formats Playback
Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio located on the DVD-A disc. The To stop playing a DVD without
display menu shows several tab video screen shows the audio turning off the system, press
options for playback. Press the stream changing.
the c button on the remote control,
softkey located under any tab option The rear seat passenger can or press the softkey located under
during DVD-A playback. navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
the c or the r / j tabs displayed
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either menus and controls through the
on the radio. If the radio is sourced
the play or pause icon displayed on remote control. See “Remote
Control” under Rear Seat to something other than DVD-V,
the radio, to toggle between pausing press the DVD/CD AUX button to
or restarting playback of a DVD. Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑36 for more information. make DVD-V the active source.
If the forward arrow is showing on
the display, the system is in pause The video screen automatically To resume DVD playback, press
mode. If the pause tab is showing turns on when the DVD-V is the r / j button on the remote
on the display, the system is in inserted into the DVD slot, and does control, or press the softkey located
playback mode. not automatically power on when
under the r / j tab on the radio.
the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD
q Group r : Press to cycle slot. It must be manually turned on The DVD should resume play from
through musical groupings on the by the rear seat occupant through where it last stopped if the disc has
DVD-A disc. the remote control power button. not been ejected and the stop
Nav (Navigate): Press to display button has not been pressed twice
directional arrows for navigating on the remote control. If the disc
through the menus. has been ejected or the stop button
has been pressed twice on the
remote control, the disc resumes
playing at the beginning of the disc.

. The road is very rough. When
CD/DVD Player Messages
the road becomes smoother, the
Auxiliary Devices
Disc Format Error: This message disc should play. Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, Radios with an auxiliary input jack
the disc is damaged. or upside down. located on the lower right side of the
. The air is very humid. If so, wait faceplate can connect to an external
Disc Region Error: This message audio device such as an iPod®,
displays if the disc is not from a about an hour and try again.
MP3 player, or CD player, for use as
correct region. . There was a problem while another source for audio listening.
No Disc Inserted: This message burning the disc. This input jack is not an audio
displays if no disc is present when . The label is caught in the output; do not plug headphones into
the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is CD/DVD player. the front auxiliary input jack.
pressed on the radio. If the disc is not playing correctly, for Drivers are encouraged to set up
Optical Error: This message any other reason, try a known any auxiliary device while the
displays if the disc was inserted good disc. vehicle is in P (Park). See
upside down. Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
more information on driver
Disk Read Error: This message an error cannot be corrected,
distraction.
displays if a disc was inserted with contact your dealer. If the radio
an invalid or unknown format. displays an error message, write it To use a portable audio player,
down and provide it to your dealer connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
Player Error: This message when reporting the problem. the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
displays if there are disc load or When a device is connected, press
disc eject problems. the radio CD/AUX button to begin
. It is very hot. When the playing audio from the device over
temperature returns to normal, the vehicle speakers.
the disc should play.
For optimal sound quality, increase DVD/CD AUX (DVD/CD/ Using the USB Port
the portable audio device's volume Auxiliary): Press to cycle through
Radios with a USB port can control
to the loudest level. DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when
a USB storage device or an iPod®
It is always best to power the listening to the radio. The DVD/CD
using the radio buttons and knobs.
portable audio device through its text tab and a message showing
See “Playing an MP3” in CD Player
own battery while playing. track or chapter number will display
on page 7‑14 or CD/DVD Player on
when a disc is in either slot. Press
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise page 7‑21 for information about how
again and the system automatically
or counterclockwise to increase to connect and control a USB
searches for an auxiliary input
or decrease the volume of the storage device or an iPod.
device, such as a portable audio
portable player. Additional volume player. If a portable audio player is USB Support
adjustments might have to be made not connected, “No Aux Input
from the portable device if the The USB connector is located on
Device” displays. If a disc is in both
volume is not loud or soft enough. the dashboard or in the center
the DVD slot and the CD slot, the
console, and uses the USB 2.0
BAND: Press to listen to the radio DVD/CD AUX button cycles
standard.
when a portable audio device is between the two sources and does
playing. The portable audio device not indicate “No Aux Input Device.” USB‐Supported Devices
continues playing. If a front auxiliary device is . USB flash drive
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycles through all available options, . Portable USB hard drive
play a CD when a portable audio such as: DVD slot, CD slot, front
device is playing. Press again and
. Fifth generation or later iPod
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary (if
the system begins playing audio available). See “Using the Auxiliary
. iPod nano
from the connected portable audio Input Jack” in this section, or “Audio/ . iPod touch
player. If a portable audio player is Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat
not connected, “No Input Device Entertainment (RSE) System on
. iPod classic
Found” displays. page 7‑36 for more information. Not all iPods and USB drives are
compatible with the USB port.
Make sure the iPod has the latest

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file panel. If the vehicle is on and the
firmware from Apple® for proper extension USB connection works, “OK to
operation. iPod firmware can be . AAC files stored on an iPod disconnect” and a GM logo may
updated using the latest iTunes® appear on the iPod, and iPod
application. See www.apple.com/
. FAT16 appears on the radio display. The
itunes. . FAT32 iPod music appears on the radio’s
For help with identifying the iPod, go display and begins playing.
Connecting a USB Storage
to www.apple.com/support. Device or iPod® The iPod charges while it is
Radios that have a USB port can connected to the vehicle if the
The USB port can be used to vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
play .mp3 and .wma files that are control an iPod or a USB storage
stored on a USB storage device as or ON/RUN position. When the
device. vehicle is turned off, the iPod
well as AAC files that are stored on
an iPod. To connect a USB storage device, automatically powers off and will
connect the device to the USB port not charge or draw power from the
USB‐Supported File and Folder located in the center console or on vehicle's battery.
Structure the instrument panel. If you have an older iPod model that
The radio supports: To connect an iPod, connect one is not supported, it can still be used
. Up to 700 folders end of the USB cable that came by connecting it to the auxiliary
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock input jack using a standard 3.5 mm
. Up to 8 folders in depth connector and connect the other (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the
. Up to 65,535 files. end to the USB port located in the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
center console or on the instrument information.
. Folder and file names up to
64 bytes
Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey
USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. The
The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a tab appears raised when pause
storage device or an iPod using reduced volume. Release \ FWD is being used. Press the softkey
the radio buttons and knobs, and to resume playing. The elapsed time below j again to resume playback.
display song information on the of the file displays.
radio’s display. Back: Press the softkey below the
4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main
f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the
selected track. root directory on a USB storage
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than 10 seconds Using Softkeys to Control a device.
have played. Press and hold or USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the
press multiple times to continue softkey below c to view the
moving backward through tracks. The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control the contents of the current folder on the
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next functions listed below. USB drive. To browse and select
track. Press and hold or press files:
multiple times to continue moving To use the softkeys:
forward through tracks. 1. Press the first or fifth softkey 1. Press the softkey below c.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
to reverse playback quickly. Sound display the functions listed of folders.
is heard at a reduced volume. below, or press the softkey
below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the desired
Release s REV to resume playing. currently displayed. folder. If there is more then one
The elapsed time of the file
2. Press the softkey below the tab folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
displays.
with the function on it to use that the desired folder is reached.
function.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press 4. Turn f to scroll through the
in the selected folder. the softkey below h to view and folders or files in the
select a file on an iPod, using the selected menu.
5. Press f to select the desired file
iPod's menu system. Files are 5. Press f to select the desired file
to be played.
sorted by:
To skip through large lists, the five to be played.
. Playlists
softkeys can be used to navigate in To skip through large lists, the five
the following order: . Artists softkeys can be used to navigate in
. First softkey, first item in the list. . Albums the following order:
. Second softkey, 1% through the . Genres
. First softkey, first item in the list.
list each time the softkey is . Songs
. Second softkey, 1% through the
pressed. list each time the softkey is
. Composers pressed.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed. To select files: . Third softkey, 5% through the list
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below h. each time the softkey is pressed.
list each time the softkey is . Fourth softkey, 10% through the
pressed. 2. Turn f to scroll through the list list each time the softkey is
of menus. pressed.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
3. Press f to select the . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
desired menu.
Repeat Functionality > (Shuffle Off): Press the Rear Seat

To use Repeat: softkey below 2 to turn shuffle
off. This is the default mode when a
Infotainment
Press the softkey below " or ' USB storage device or iPod is first
to select between Repeat All and connected. Rear Seat Entertainment
Repeat Track. (RSE) System
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey Songs): Press the softkey below The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
below " to repeat all tracks. The = or C to shuffle all songs on Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
tab appears lowered when Repeat the USB storage device or iPod. The RSE system works with the
All is being used. This is the default vehicle's audio system. The DVD
mode when a USB storage device
C (Shuffle Album): Press the
player is part of the front radio. The
or iPod is first connected. softkey below > to shuffle all RSE system includes a radio with a
songs in the current album on DVD player, a video display screen,
' (Repeat Track): Press the an iPod. audio/video jacks, two wireless
softkey below ' to repeat one
track. The tab appears raised when
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the headphones, and a remote control.
softkey below > to shuffle all See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑21
Repeat Track is being used. for more information on the vehicle's
songs in the current folder on a USB
Shuffle Functionality storage device. CD/DVD player.
To use Shuffle: Before Driving
Press the softkey below >, 2, The RSE is designed for rear seat
C, or = to select between passengers only. The driver cannot
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ safely view the video screen while
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, driving and should not try to do so.
or Shuffle Folder.
In severe or extreme weather The radio can be turned back on Headphones

conditions, the RSE system might with a single press of the power
not work until the temperature is button, but the RSE system will
within the operating range. The remain under Parental Control.
operating range for the RSE system To turn Parental Control off, press
is above −20°C (−4°F) or below and hold the radio power button for
60°C (140°F). If the temperature of more than two seconds. The RSE
the vehicle is outside this range, returns from where it was previously
heat or cool the vehicle until the left and the padlock icon disappears
temperature is within the operating from the radio display.
range of the RSE system.
Parental Control can also be turned
Parental Control off by inserting or ejecting any disc,
The RSE system may have a pressing the play icon on the radio
Parental Control feature, depending DVD display menu, or changing an
ignition position. A. Battery cover
on which radio the vehicle has. To
start Parental Control, press and B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
hold the radio power button for more C. Power button
than two seconds to stop all system
features such as: radio, video D. Volume control
screen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA), E. Power indicator light
DVD, and/or CD. While Parental
The RSE includes two 2-channel
Control is on, a padlock icon
wireless headphones that are
displays.
dedicated to this system. Channel 1
is dedicated to the video screen,
while Channel 2 is dedicated to
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.
These headphones can be used to Infrared transmitters are located The symbol L (Left) appears on the
listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, at the rear of the overhead outside bottom edge of the ear cup
MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliary console. The headphones shut off and should be positioned on the left
source connected to A/V jacks or automatically to save the battery ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle power if the RSE system and RSA on the outside bottom edge of the
has this feature. The wireless are shut off, or if the headphones ear cup and should be positioned on
headphones have an On/Off button, are out of range of the transmitters the right ear.
channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume for more than three minutes. If you Notice: Do not store the
control. move too far forward or step out of headphones in heat or direct
Push the power button to turn on the vehicle, the headphones lose sunlight. This could damage the
the headphones. An indicator light the audio signal. headphones and repairs will not
located on the headphones comes To adjust the volume on the be covered by the warranty.
on. If the light comes on, but there headphones, use the volume Storage in extreme cold can
is intermittent sound and/or static on control located on the right side. weaken the batteries. Keep the
the headphones, or if the indicator For optimal audio performance, the headphones stored in a cool, dry
light does not come on, the batteries headphones must be worn correctly. place.
might need to be replaced. See Headphones should be worn with If the foam ear pads attached to
“Battery Replacement” later in this the headband over the top of the the headphones become worn or
section for more information. Switch head for best audio reception. damaged, the pads can be replaced
the headphones to Off when not separately from the headphone set.
in use. To purchase replacement ear pads,
call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
zero (0), or contact your dealer.
Battery Replacement Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks Adapter connectors or cables

To change the batteries on the (not included) may be required to
headphones: connect the auxiliary device
to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
1. Turn the screw to loosen the manufacturer’s instructions for
battery door located on the left proper usage.
side of the headphones. Slide
the battery door open. Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that To use the auxiliary inputs of the
they are installed correctly, using RSE system, connect an external
the diagram on the inside of the auxiliary device to the color-coded
battery compartment. A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the video screen power
3. Replace the battery door and on. If the video screen is in the DVD
tighten the door screw. A. Yellow: Video Input player mode, pressing the AUX
If the headphones are to be stored B. White: Left Audio Input (auxiliary) button on the remote
for a long period of time, remove the C. Red: Right Audio Input control switches the video screen
batteries and keep them in a cool, from the DVD player mode to the
dry place. The A/V jacks are color coded to auxiliary device. The audio of the
match typical home entertainment connected source can be listened to
system equipment. over the speakers by sourcing the
The A/V jacks, located on the rear radio to the auxiliary device or by
of the floor console, allow audio sourcing the RSA to the Rear Aux
or video signals to be connected and listening with the wireless
from an auxiliary device such headphones on Channel 2 or
as a camcorder or a video game with the wired headphones.
unit to the RSE system.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Audio Output When a device is connected to the
Jack” under Auxiliary Devices on A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary
Audio from the DVD player or
page 7‑31 for more information input jack if the vehicle has this
auxiliary inputs can be heard
about changing the source. feature, the rear seat passengers
through the following possible
are able to hear audio from the
Changing the RSE Video Screen sources:
auxiliary device through the wireless
Settings . Wireless headphones or wired headphones. The front seat
The screen display mode (normal, . Vehicle speakers passengers are able to listen to
full, and zoom), screen brightness, playback from this device through
and setup menu language can be . Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks the vehicle speakers by selecting
changed from the on screen setup on the RSA system, if the AUX as the source on the radio.
menu. To change any feature: vehicle has this feature.
Video Screen
1. Press the z (display menu) The RSE system always transmits
the audio signal to the wireless The video screen is located in the
button on the remote control. overhead console.
headphones, if there is audio
2. Use the remote control n, q, available. See “Headphones” earlier To use the video screen:
p, o (navigation) arrows and in this section for more information.
1. Push the release button located
the r (enter) button to use the The DVD player is capable of on the overhead console.
setup menu. outputting audio to the wired
headphone jacks on the RSA 2. Move the screen to the desired
3. Press the z button again to system, if the vehicle has this position.
remove the setup menu from the feature. The DVD player can be When the video screen is not in
screen. selected as an audio source on the use, push it up into its locked
RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio position.
(RSA) System on page 7‑46 for
more information.
If a DVD is playing and the screen Remote Control Objects blocking the line of sight
is raised to its locked position, the could also affect the function of the
screen remains on. This is normal, remote control.
and the DVD continues to play If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD
through the previous audio source.
Use the remote control power button slot, the remote control O (power)
or eject the disc to turn off the button can be used to turn on the
screen. video screen display and start the
disc. The radio can also turn on the
The overhead console contains the video screen display. See Operation
infrared transmitters for the wireless on page 7‑2 for more information.
headphones and the infrared
receivers for the remote control. Notice: Storing the remote
They are located at the rear of the control in a hot area or in direct
console. sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
Notice: Avoid directly touching To use the remote control, aim it at warranty. Storage in extreme cold
the video screen, as damage may the transmitter window at the rear of can weaken the batteries. Keep
occur. See “Cleaning the Video the RSE overhead console and the remote control stored in a
Screen” later in this section for press the desired button. Direct cool, dry place.
more information. sunlight or very bright light could
affect the ability of the RSE If the remote control becomes
transmitter to receive signals from lost or damaged, a new universal
the remote control. If the remote remote control can be purchased.
control does not seem to be If this happens, make sure the
working, the batteries might universal remote control uses a
need to be replaced. See “Battery code set of Toshiba®.
Replacement” later in this section.
Remote Control Buttons n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation c (Stop): Press this button to stop
O (Power): Press this button to Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to playing, fast reversing, or fast
turn the video screen on and off. navigate through a menu. forwarding a DVD. Press this button
r (Enter): twice to return to the beginning of
P (Illumination): Press this button Press this button to
the DVD.
to turn the remote control backlight select the choice that is highlighted
on. The backlight automatically in any menu. s (Play/Pause): Press this
times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no z (Display Menu): Press this button to start playing a DVD. Press
other button is pressed while the button to adjust the brightness, this button while a DVD is playing to
backlight is on. screen display mode (normal, full, pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the DVD.
v (Title): Press this button to or zoom), and display the
return the DVD to the main menu of language menu. While the DVD is playing, the DVD
the DVD. This function could vary q (Return): Press this button to can be played slowly by pressing
for each disc. exit the current active menu and the play/pause button then pressing
the fast forward button. The DVD
y (Main Menu): Press this button return to the previous menu. This
continues playing in a slow play
to access the DVD menu. The DVD button operates only when the
display menu or a DVD menu is mode. Also, reverse can be played
menu is different on every DVD. slowly by pressing the play/pause
Use the navigation arrows to move active.
button and then pressing the fast
the cursor around the DVD menu. reverse button. To cancel slow play
After making a selection press the mode, press the play/pause button.
enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): [ (Fast Forward): Press this AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button
Press this button to return to the button to fast forward the DVD or to switch the system between the
start of the current track or chapter. CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD DVD player and an auxiliary source.
Press this button again to go to the video, press the play/pause button. 2 (Camera): Press this button to
previous track or chapter. This To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio change camera angles on DVDs
button might not work when the or CD, release the fast forward that have this feature while a DVD is
DVD is playing the copyright button. This button might not work playing. The format and content of
information or the previews. while the DVD is playing the this function vary for each disc.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press copyright information or the
previews. 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
this button to go to the beginning The numeric keypad provides the
of the next chapter or track. This e (Audio): Press this button to capability of direct chapter or track
button might not work while the change audio tracks on DVDs that number selection.
DVD is playing the copyright have this feature when the DVD is
information or the previews. playing. The format and content of \ (Clear): Press this button within
this function vary for each disc. three seconds after entering a
r (Fast Reverse): Press this numeric selection, to clear all
button to quickly reverse the DVD or { (Subtitles): Press this button to numerical inputs.
CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD turn on or off subtitles and to move
video, press the play/pause button. through subtitle options when a } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press
To stop fast reversing a DVD audio DVD is playing. The format and this button to select chapter or track
or CD, release the fast reverse content of this function vary for numbers greater than nine. Press
button. This button might not work each disc. this button before entering the
when the DVD is playing the number.
copyright information or the
previews.
Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action
batteries, do the following:
There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to
1. Slide the rear cover back on the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
remote control.
The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in
2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the
compartment. Make sure they and bottom or on both sides, or the display menu button on the remote
are installed correctly using the picture looks stretched out. control.
diagram on the inside of the
remote control. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
or scrolls. connections at both devices.
3. Replace the battery cover.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no
If the remote control is to be stored
obstruction between the remote
for a long period of time, remove the
control and the transmitter window.
batteries and keep them in a cool,
Check the batteries to make sure
dry place.
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.) DVD Display Error Messages

Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message
depends on the radio that is in the
After stopping the player, and If the stop button was pressed one vehicle. The video screen can
pushing Play, sometimes the DVD time, the DVD player resumes display one of the following:
starts where it left off and playing where the DVD was
sometimes at the beginning. stopped. If the stop button was Disc Load/Eject Error: This
pressed two times, the DVD player message displays when there are
begins to play from the beginning of disc load or eject problems.
the DVD. Disc Format Error: This message
The auxiliary source is running, but Check that the RSE video screen is displays if the disc is inserted with
there is no picture or sound. in the auxiliary source mode. the disc label wrong side up, or if
Check the auxiliary input the disc is damaged.
connections at both devices. Disc Region Error: This message
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low displays if the disc is not from a
audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and correct region.
interference from cellular telephone No Disc Inserted: This message
towers, or use a cellular telephone displays if no disc is present when
in the vehicle. EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on
Check that the headphones are on the radio.
correctly using the L (left) and
R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones See your dealer for assistance.
are lost.
The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is
picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player.
DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) The RSA functions can be used
even while the main radio is off. The
Video distortion can occur when System front audio system will display the
operating cellular phones, scanners,
Vehicles with this feature allow the headphone icon when the RSA is
CB radios, Global Position Systems
rear seat passengers to listen to on, and it will disappear from the
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax
and control any of the music display when the RSA is off.
machines, or walkie talkies.
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other Audio can be heard through wired
It might be necessary to turn off the auxiliary sources. However, the rear headphones (not included) plugged
DVD player when operating one of seat passengers can only control into the jacks on the RSA. If the
these devices in or near the vehicle. the music sources the front seat vehicle has this feature, audio can
*Excludes the OnStar® System. passengers are not listening to also be heard on Channel 2 of the
(except on some radios where dual wireless headphones.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead control is allowed). For example,
Console rear seat passengers can control Depending on the audio system, the
and listen to a CD through the rear speakers may continue to play
When cleaning the RSE overhead when the RSA audio is active
headphones, while the driver listens
console surface, use only a clean through the headphones.
to the radio through the front
cloth dampened with clean water.
speakers. The rear seat passengers To listen to an iPod or portable
Cleaning the Video Screen have control of the volume for each audio device through the RSA,
set of headphones. attach the iPod or portable audio
When cleaning the video screen,
use only a clean cloth dampened The radio functionality is controlled device to the front auxiliary input
with clean water. Use care when by both the RSA and the front radio. (if available), located on the front
directly touching or cleaning the Only one band can be tuned to at audio system. Turn the iPod on,
screen, as damage could result. one time. Changing the band on the then choose the front auxiliary input
RSA or the front radio will change with the RSA SRCE button.
the band on the other system,
if they are both sourced to the radio.
This function is inactive, with some PROG (Program): Press this

radios, if the front seat passengers button to go to the next preset radio
are listening to the radio. station or channel set on the main
Press and hold either seek arrow radio. This function is inactive, with
until the display flashes, to tune to some radios, if the front seat
an individual station. The display passengers are listening to the
stops flashing after the buttons have radio.
P (Power): Press this button to not been pushed for more than While a CD or DVD‐A disc is
turn the RSA on or off. two seconds. This function is playing, press this button to go to
Volume: Turn the volume knob to inactive, with some radios, if the the beginning of the CD or DVD‐A.
increase or decrease the volume of front seat passengers are listening This function is inactive, with some
the wired headphones. The left to the radio. radios, if the front seat passengers
knob controls the left headphones While listening to a disc, press the are listening to the CD or DVD‐A.
and the right knob controls the right left seek arrow to go back to the While a disc is playing in the CD or
headphones. start of the current track or chapter DVD changer, press this button to
SRCE (Source): Press this (if more than 10 seconds have select the next disc, if multiple discs
button to switch between the radio played). Press the right seek arrow are loaded. This function is inactive,
(AM‐FM), XM™ (if equipped), to go the next track or chapter on with some radios, if the front seat
CD, and if the vehicle has these the disc. This function is inactive, passengers are listening to the disc.
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and with some radios, if the front seat While a DVD video menu is being
rear auxiliary. passengers are listening to the disc. displayed, press the PROG button
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to While a DVD video menu is being to perform the menu function, Enter.
FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), displayed, press either seek arrow
press the seek arrows to go to the to perform a cursor up or down on
previous or to the next station or the menu. Hold either seek arrow to
channels and stay there. perform a cursor left or right on
the menu.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetooth‐capable cell phone with a
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in Hands‐Free Profile to make and
Bluetooth this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
Bluetooth capability, the system dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
can interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: address book or contact list. See system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls in and not all phones are guaranteed
a hands-free mode. for more information.
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
address book or contact list Numbers” in this section for for more information on compatible
with the vehicle. more information. phones.
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING Voice Recognition
parked: The Bluetooth system uses voice
When using a cell phone, it can recognition to interpret voice
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long commands to dial phone numbers
features of the cell phone. or too often at the screen of and name tags.
Organize the phone book and the phone or the infotainment
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking For additional information, say
duplicate or rarely used entries. your eyes off the road too long or “Help” while you are in a voice
If possible, program speed dial recognition menu.
too often could cause a crash
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
. Review the controls and Focus your attention on driving. a minimum. The system may not
operation of the infotainment recognize voice commands if there
and navigation system. is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information

sounds after the system responds . Up to five cell phones can be
Use the buttons located on the
indicating when it is waiting for a paired to the Bluetooth system.
steering wheel to operate the
voice command. Wait until the tone
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See . The pairing process is disabled
and then speak.
Steering Wheel Controls on when the vehicle is moving.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a page 5‑2 for more information.
calm and natural voice. . Pairing only needs to be
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to completed once, unless the
Audio System answer incoming calls, confirm pairing information on the cell
system information, and start phone changes or the cell phone
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth speech recognition.
system, sound comes through is deleted from the system.
the vehicle's front audio system c / x (Phone On Hook): Press . Only one paired cell phone can
speakers and overrides the audio to end a call, reject a call, or cancel be connected to the Bluetooth
system. Use the audio system an operation. system at a time.
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
Pairing . If multiple paired cell phones are
adjusted volume level remains in A Bluetooth cell phone must be within range of the system, the
memory for later calls. To prevent paired to the Bluetooth system and system connects to the first
missed calls, a minimum volume then connected to the vehicle before available paired cell phone in the
level is used if the volume is turned it can be used. See the cell phone order that they were first paired
down too low. manufacturer's user guide for to the system. To connect to a
Bluetooth functions before pairing different paired phone, see
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone “Connecting to a Different
is not connected, calls will be made Phone” later in this section.
using OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,
if equipped. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
Pairing a Phone After the PIN is successfully Deleting a Paired Phone

entered, the system prompts you
1. Press and hold b / g for to provide a name for the paired
If the phone name you want to
two seconds. delete is unknown, see “Listing All
cell phone. This name will be Paired and Connected Phones.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.” used to indicate which phones
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
are paired and connected to the 1. Press and hold b / g for
vehicle. See “Listing All Paired two seconds.
with instructions and a four‐digit and Connected Phones” later in
Personal Identification Number this section for more information. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
4. Start the pairing process on the additional phones. which phone to delete.
cell phone that you want to pair. 4. Say the name of the phone you
For help with this process, see Listing All Paired and Connected want to delete.
the cell phone manufacturer's Phones
user guide. The system can list all cell phones Connecting to a Different Phone
5. Locate the device named “Your paired to it. If a paired cell phone is To connect to a different cell phone,
Vehicle” in the list on the cell also connected to the vehicle, the the Bluetooth system looks for the
phone. Follow the instructions system responds with “is connected” next available cell phone in the
on the cell phone to enter the after that phone name. order in which all the available cell
PIN that was provided in Step 3. phones were paired. Depending on
1. Press and hold b / g for which cell phone you want to
two seconds. connect to, you may have to use
2. Say “Bluetooth.” this command several times.
3. Say “List.” 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Change phone.” Digit Store: This command allows Using the “Digit Store” Command
. If another cell phone is a phone number to be stored as a If an unwanted number is
found, the response will be name tag by entering the digits one recognized by the system, say
“<Phone name> is now at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the
connected.” Delete: This command is used to last number.
. If another cell phone is not delete individual name tags. To hear all of the numbers
found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags: This recognized by the system, say
remains connected. command deletes all stored name “Verify” at any time.
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling
Storing and Deleting Phone Directory and the OnStar 1. Press and hold b / g for
Numbers Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations two seconds.
The system can store up to Directory, if equipped. 2. Say “Digit Store.”
30 phone numbers as name tags Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
in the Hands‐Free Directory that is that you want to store. After
shared between the Bluetooth and 1. Press and hold b / g for each digit is entered, the system
OnStar systems, if equipped. two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard
The following commands are used 2. Say “Store.” followed by a tone. After the last
to delete and store phone numbers. digit has been entered, say
3. Say the phone number or group “Store,” and then follow the
Store: This command will store a of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
phone number, or a group of at once with no pauses, then save a name tag for this number.
numbers as a name tag. follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
Using the “Delete” Command Listing Stored Numbers Re‐dial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
1. Press and hold b / g for The list command will list all stored
phone.
two seconds. numbers and name tags.
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
2. Say “Delete.” Using the “List” Command
Command
3. Say the name tag you want to 1. Press and hold b / g for 1. Press and hold b / g for
delete. two seconds.
two seconds.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” 2. Say “Directory.”
Command 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
This command deletes all stored 3. Say the entire number without
4. Say “List.” pausing, or say the name tag.
name tags in the Hands‐Free
Calling Directory and the OnStar Making a Call Once connected, the person called
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, will be heard through the audio
if equipped. Calls can be made using the speakers.
following commands.
To delete all name tags: Using the “Digit Dial” Command
Dial or Call: The dial or call
1. Press and hold b / g for command can be used The digit dial command allows a
two seconds. interchangeably to dial a phone phone number to be dialed by
number or a stored name tag. entering the digits one at a time.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” After each digit is entered, the
Digit Dial: This command allows a
system repeats back the digit it
phone number to be dialed by
heard followed by a tone.
entering the digits one at a time.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
To hear all of the numbers Receiving a Call Three‐Way Calling

recognized by the system, say
When an incoming call is received, Three‐way calling must be
“Verify” at any time.
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and
1. Press and hold b / g for tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service
two seconds. carrier.
. Press b / g to answer the call.
2. Say “Digit Dial.” 1. While on a call, press b / g.
. Press c / x to ignore a call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, 2. Say “Three‐way call.”
that you want to dial. After each Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to
digit is entered, the system
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party
repeats back the digit it heard
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called.
followed by a tone. After the last
wireless service carrier.
digit has been entered, 4. Once the call is connected,
say “Dial.” . Press b / g to answer an press b / g to link all callers
Once connected, the person called incoming call when another call together.
will be heard through the audio is active. The original call is
placed on hold. Ending a Call
speakers.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command . Press b / g again to return to Press c / x to end a call.
the original call.
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
. Press c / x to disconnect the
Once connected, the person called
current call and switch to the call
will be heard through the audio
on hold.
speakers.
Muting a Call Transferring Audio from the Voice Pass-Thru

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call, all sounds from inside Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the voice recognition commands on the
person on the other end of the call vehicle: cell phone. See your cell phone
cannot hear them. manufacturer's user guide to see if
1. Press b / g. the cell phone supports this feature.
. To mute a call, press b / g, and 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
then say “Mute call.” To access contacts stored in the cell
Transferring Audio to the phone:
. To cancel mute, press b / g, Bluetooth System from
and then say “Un‐mute call.” a Cell Phone
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
Transferring a Call During a call with the audio on the
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b / g. The audio responds “Bluetooth ready,”
the Bluetooth system and the cell transfers to the vehicle. If the audio followed by a tone.
phone. does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the 3. Say “Voice.” The system
The cell phone must be paired and cell phone. See your cell phone responds “OK, accessing
connected with the Bluetooth manufacturer's user guide for more <phone name>.”
system before a call can be information. The cell phone's normal prompt
transferred. The connection process
messages will go through their cycle
can take up to two minutes after the
according to the phone's operating
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System Other Information

(DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of The Bluetooth® word mark and
The Bluetooth system can send the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the by General Motors is under license.
use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing Other trademarks and trade names
menu‐driven phone system. information. For information on how are those of their respective owners.
Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the
stored for use. previous section “Deleting a Paired
Phone” and the previous sections
Sending a Number or Name Tag on deleting name tags.
During a Call
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning)
Climate Control Systems With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
Climate Control Systems
(with Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems
(with Heater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
A. Fan Control Temperature Control: Turn

B. Temperature Control clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the
C. Air Delivery Mode Control temperature inside the vehicle.
D. Air Conditioning 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
E. Outside Air or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
F. Recirculation knob all the way counterclockwise
G. Rear Window Defogger to turn the front system off.
8-2 Climate Controls
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn - (Defog): This mode clears the : (Outside Air): Press to
clockwise or counterclockwise to windows of fog or moisture. Air is turn the outside air mode on.
change the direction of the airflow directed to the windshield, floor An indicator light comes on to show
inside the vehicle. The knob can be outlets, and side window vents. that outside air is on. In this mode
positioned between two modes to outside air circulates throughout the
select a combination of those 0 (Defrost): This mode removes vehicle. The outside air mode can
modes. fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. Air is directed to the be used with all modes, but it
Select from the following: windshield and the side window cannot be used with the
recirculation mode.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the vents, with some air directed to the
instrument panel outlets. floor vents. The system ? (Recirculation): Press to
automatically forces outside air into turn the recirculation mode on.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided the vehicle. An indicator light comes on to show
between the instrument panel and that recirculation is on.
floor outlets. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected in the defog or defrost This mode recirculates and helps to
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the mode. When either mode is quickly cool the air inside the
floor outlets, with some air directed selected, the system runs the air vehicle. It can be used to help
to the windshield and side window conditioning compressor, unless the prevent outside air and odors from
outlets. In this mode, the system outside temperature is close to entering the vehicle.
automatically selects outside air. freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected in The recirculation mode cannot
floor mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the be used with floor, defog or
windows are clear. defrost modes. If recirculation is
selected with one of these
modes, the indicator light flashes
three times and then turns off.
While in recirculation mode the Rear Window Defogger Notice: Do not use anything
windows may fog when the weather sharp on the inside of the rear
For vehicles with a rear window
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, window. If you do, you could cut
defogger, a warming grid is used to
select either the defog or defrost or damage the warming grid, and
remove fog from the rear window.
mode and increase the fan speed. the repairs would not be covered
The recirculation mode can be
1 (Rear): Press to turn the by the vehicle warranty. Do not
rear window defogger on or off. attach a temporary vehicle
turned off by pressing the outside
An indicator light on the button license, tape, a decal, or anything
air button, or by turning off the
comes on to show that the rear similar to the defogger grid.
ignition.
window defogger is on.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
The rear window defogger only
turn the air conditioning system on
works when the ignition is in
or off. An indicator light comes on to
ON/RUN. The rear window defogger
show that the air conditioning is on.
stays on for approximately
The air conditioning can be selected
10 minutes after the button is
in any mode as long as the fan
pressed, unless the ignition is
switch is on.
turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or
The air conditioning system LOCK/OFF. The defogger can also
removes moisture from the air, be turned off by turning off the
so a small amount of water might engine.
drip under the vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is
normal.
Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only) Select from the following:
With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled. H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield, side window, and
second row floor outlets. In this
mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
A. Fan Control Turn the knob all the way directed to the windshield, floor
counterclockwise to turn the front outlets, and side window vents.
B. Temperature Control
system off. 0 (Defrost): This mode removes
C. Air Delivery Mode Control fog or frost from the windshield
Air Delivery Mode Control:
Temperature Control: Turn Turn clockwise or counterclockwise more quickly. Air is directed to the
clockwise or counterclockwise to to increase or decrease the windshield and the side window
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. vents, with some air directed to the
temperature inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned floor vents. The system
between two modes to select a automatically forces outside air into
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise the vehicle.
or counterclockwise to increase combination of those modes.
or decrease the fan speed. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Dual Automatic Climate Control System O (On/Off): Press to turn the

climate control system on or off.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Outside air still enters the vehicle,
this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system and is directed to the floor. This
described later in this section. direction can be changed by
pressing the mode button.
Recirculation can be selected once
you have selected vent or bi-level
mode. The temperature can also be
adjusted using either temperature
button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted
with the system off, the display
illuminates briefly to show the
settings and then returns to off.
The system can be turned back on
by pressing either O, D, C, #, the
defrost or the AUTO button.
A. Driver and Passenger G. Air Delivery Mode Control
Temperature Controls
Driver and Passenger Side
H. Display Temperature Controls
B. Fan Control I. On/Off The driver and passenger side
C. AUTO J. Rear Window Defogger temperature buttons are used to
D. Defrost adjust the temperature of the air
K. Air Conditioning coming through the system on the
E. Recirculation L. PASS (Passenger) driver or passenger side of the
F. Outside Air vehicle. The temperature can be
adjusted even if the system is
turned off. This is possible since Automatic Operation the air inlet may automatically
outside air always flows through switch to the recirculate mode to
AUTO (Automatic): When
the system as the vehicle is help quickly cool down the air
automatic operation is active,
moving forward unless it is inside the vehicle. The light
the system controls the inside
set to recirculation mode. See on the button comes on in
temperature, the air delivery, and
“Recirculation” later in this section. recirculation.
the fan speed.
Press the + or − buttons to increase 2. Set the driver and passenger
Use the steps below to place the
or decrease the cabin temperature. temperature.
entire system in automatic mode:
The driver side or passenger side To find your comfort setting,
temperature display shows the 1. Press the AUTO button.
start with a 23°C (74°F)
temperature setting increasing or When AUTO is selected, the temperature setting and allow
decreasing. display changes to show the about 20 minutes for the system
The passenger temperature setting current temperature(s) and to regulate. Use the driver or
can be set to match the driver AUTO is lit on the display. passenger temperature buttons
temperature setting by pressing the The current air delivery mode to adjust the temperature setting
PASS button and turning off the and fan speed are also as necessary. If a temperature
PASS indicator. When the displayed for about five seconds. setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,
passenger temperature setting is When AUTO is selected, the air the system remains at the
set different than the driver setting, conditioning operation and air maximum cooling setting. If a
the indicator on the PASS button inlet are automatically controlled. temperature setting of 32°C
illuminates and both the driver side The air conditioning compressor (90°F) is chosen, the system
and passenger side temperature may run when the outside remains at the maximum heat
displays are shown. temperature is above freezing. setting. Choosing either
When in defrost mode the The air inlet will normally be set maximum setting will not cause
passenger temperature setting to outside air. If it is hot outside, the vehicle to heat or cool any
cannot be changed. faster.
Do not cover the solar sensor H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
located on the top of the instrument Press these buttons to change the floor outlets, with some to the
panel near the windshield. This direction of the airflow in the vehicle. windshield, side window outlets, and
sensor regulates air temperature Repeatedly press either button until second row floor outlets. In this
based on sun load. For more the desired mode appears on the mode, the system automatically
information on the solar sensor, see display. selects outside air.
“Sensors” later in this section.
Pressing either mode button while - (Defog): This mode clears the
To avoid blowing cold air in cold the system is off changes the air windows of fog or moisture. Air is
weather, the system delays turning delivery mode without turning the directed to the windshield, floor
the fan on until warm air is system on. outlets, and side window vents.
available. The length of delay In this mode, the system turns off
depends on the engine coolant Pressing either mode button while in
automatic control places the mode recirculation and runs the air
temperature. Pressing the fan conditioning compressor unless the
switch overrides this delay and under manual control. The air
delivery mode setting displays and outside temperature is close to
changes the fan to a selected freezing. The recirculation mode
speed. the AUTO light turns off. The fan
remains under automatic control. cannot be selected while in the
Manual Operation defrost mode.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the 0 (Defrost): This mode removes
D C (Fan Control): Press these instrument panel outlets.
fog or frost from the windshield
buttons to increase or decrease the ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
fan speed. more quickly. Air is directed to the
between the instrument panel and windshield and side window vents,
Pressing either fan button while in floor outlets. Some air is directed with some directed to the floor
automatic control places the fan toward the windshield and side vents. In this mode, the system
under manual control. The fan window outlets. automatically forces outside air into
setting remains displayed and the the vehicle and runs the air
AUTO light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains under
automatic control.
conditioning compressor unless the If this button is pressed when the @ (Recirculation): Press to
outside temperature is close to air conditioning compressor is turn the recirculation mode on.
freezing. The recirculation mode unavailable due to outside An indicator light comes on to show
cannot be selected while in the conditions, the indicator flashes that recirculation is on.
defrost mode. three times and then turns off.
If the air conditioning is on and the This mode recirculates and helps to
The passenger temperature control quickly cool the air inside the
cannot be activated while in defrost outside temperature drops below a
temperature which is too cool for air vehicle. It can be used to help
mode. If the PASS button is prevent outside air and odors from
pressed, the button indicator flashes conditioning to be effective, the air
conditioning light turns off to show entering the vehicle.
three times and will not work. If the
passenger temperature buttons are that the air conditioning mode has The recirculation mode cannot be
adjusted, the driver temperature been canceled. used with floor, defog, or defrost
indicator changes. The passenger On hot days, open the windows long modes. If recirculation is selected
temperature will not be displayed. enough to let hot inside air escape. with one of those modes, the
This helps to reduce the time it indicator light flashes three times
If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is and then turns off. The air
selected again, the climate control takes for the vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate conditioning compressor also comes
system displays the previous on when this mode is activated.
temperature settings. more efficiently.
While in recirculation mode, the
Do not drive the vehicle until all The air conditioning system windows may fog when the weather
windows are clear. removes moisture from the air, so a is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
small amount of water might drip select either the defog or defrost
# (Air Conditioning): Press to under the vehicle while idling or mode and increase the fan speed.
turn the air conditioning (A/C) after turning off the engine. This is
compressor on and off. An indicator normal. The recirculation mode can be
light comes on to show that the air turned off by pressing the outside
conditioning is on. air button, or by turning off the
ignition.
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the Notice: Do not use a razor blade Sensors
outside air mode on. An indicator or sharp object to clear the inside
light on the button comes on to rear window. Do not adhere
show that outside is on. When anything to the defogger grid
selected, air from outside the lines in the rear glass. These
vehicle circulates throughout the actions may damage the rear
vehicle. The recirculation mode defogger. Repairs would not be
cannot be used with the outside covered by your warranty.
air mode. Heated Mirror: For vehicles with
Rear Window Defogger heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost
The rear window defogger uses a from the surface of the mirror when
warming grid to remove fog from the the rear window defog button is
rear window. pressed. See Power Mirrors on
1 (Rear Window Defogger): page 2‑15. The solar sensor, located in the
For vehicles with this feature, press defrost grille in the middle of the
to turn the defogger on or off. instrument panel, monitors the solar
It automatically turns off several heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
minutes after it has been activated. or the system will not work properly.
The defogger can also be turned off
by turning the engine off. Do not
drive the vehicle until all windows
are clear.
There is also an exterior Air Vents

temperature sensor located behind
the front grille. This sensor reads Use the air outlets located in the
the outside air temperature and center and on the side of the
helps maintain the temperature instrument panel to direct the
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the airflow. Use the thumbwheels near
front of the vehicle could cause a the air outlets to open or close off
false reading in the displayed the airflow.
temperature.
Operation Tips
The climate control system uses the . Clear away any ice, snow,
information from these sensors to
or leaves from air inlets at the
maintain comfort settings by
The interior temperature sensor, base of the windshield that could
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan
located in the headliner, measures block the flow of air into the
speed, and the air delivery mode.
the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
The system may also supply cooler
vehicle. air to the side of the vehicle facing . Keep the path under the front
the sun. The recirculation mode will seats clear of objects to help
also be used as needed to maintain circulate the air inside of the
cool outlet temperatures. vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Retained Accessory
9-35 Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . .
9-36
9-36
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-63
9-64
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Brake Assist (Except With
Driving Information Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 4.3L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking (Manual Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-66
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Parking over Things Ride Control Systems
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-40 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Running the Vehicle While
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-17 Object Detection Systems
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-72
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-18 Automatic Transmission Rear Vision
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-42 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-21 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Fuel
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Truck-Camper Loading
Manual Transmission Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-48 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Starting and Operating and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-31 Drive Systems California Fuel
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-80
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-81 Driving Information

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83 WARNING (Continued)
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84 Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
Defensive driving means “always
Towing possible death. These simple
expect the unexpected.” The first
General Towing defensive driving techniques
step in driving defensively is to wear
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85 could save your life.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85 page 3‑12.
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89 Drunk Driving
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-105 { WARNING
Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-116 Assume that other road users { WARNING
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is very
Conversions and Add-Ons drivers) are going to be careless
Add-On Electrical dangerous. Your reflexes,
and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117 what they might do and be ready.
Adding a Snow Plow or judgment can be affected by even
In addition: a small amount of alcohol. You
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . 9-117
Pickup Conversion to
. Allow enough following can have a serious — or even
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121 distance between you and fatal — collision if you drive after
the driver in front of you. drinking.
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with
(Continued) a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with Medical research shows that Braking
drinking and driving is a global alcohol in a person's system
tragedy. can make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on
especially injuries to the brain, page 5‑27.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle: spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception
judgment, muscular coordination, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to
vision, and attentiveness. drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception
in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is
Police records show that being killed or permanently disabled reaction time.
almost 40 percent of all motor is higher than if the person had not
vehicle-related deaths involve been drinking. Average reaction time is about
alcohol. In most cases, these three‐fourths of a second. But that is
deaths are the result of someone only an average. It might be less
Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than The following three systems or three seconds or more with
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition,
deaths have been associated with driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and
the use of alcohol, with about accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do
250,000 people injured. driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
ask more of those control systems But even in three‐fourths of a
For persons under 21, it is against than the tires and road can provide. second, a vehicle moving at
the law in every U.S. state to drink Meaning, you can lose control of the 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
alcohol. There are good medical, vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on (66 ft). That could be a lot of
psychological, and developmental page 9‑67. distance in an emergency, so
reasons for these laws. keeping enough space between
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
The obvious way to eliminate the the vehicle and others is important.
affect vehicle performance. See
leading highway safety problem is Accessories and Modifications on
for people never to drink alcohol page 10‑3.
and then drive.
And, of course, actual stopping If the engine ever stops while the If power steering assist is lost
distances vary greatly with the vehicle is being driven, brake because the engine stops or the
surface of the road, whether it is normally but do not pump the power steering system is not
pavement or gravel; the condition brakes. If the brakes are pumped, functioning, the vehicle can be
of the road, whether it is wet, dry, the pedal could get harder to push steered but it will take more effort.
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the down. If the engine stops, there will
brakes; the weight of the vehicle; still be some power brake assist but Steering Tips
and the amount of brake force it will be used when the brake is It is important to take curves at a
applied. applied. Once the power assist is reasonable speed.
Avoid needless heavy used up, it can take longer to stop
Traction in a curve depends on the
braking. Some people drive in and the brake pedal will be harder
condition of the tires and the road
spurts — heavy acceleration to push.
surface, the angle at which the
followed by heavy braking — rather Adding non‐dealer accessories can curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
than keeping pace with traffic. This affect vehicle performance. See While in a curve, speed is the one
is a mistake. The brakes might not Accessories and Modifications on factor that can be controlled.
have time to cool between hard page 10‑3.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
stops. The brakes will wear out
do it before entering the curve, while
much faster with a lot of heavy Steering the front wheels are straight.
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic Power Steering Try to adjust the speed so you can
following distances eliminates If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the drive through the curve. Maintain a
a lot of unnecessary braking. That hybrid supplement for more reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
means better braking and longer information. accelerate until out of the curve, and
brake life. then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery

There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop
be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the
example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving.
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
The vehicle can perform very well recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
in emergencies like these. First, positions, it can be turned a full
apply the brakes. See Braking on 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as only slightly below the pavement,
much speed as possible from a to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy.
collision. Then steer around the Ease off the accelerator and
problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
then, if there is nothing in the
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency way, steer so that the vehicle
situations are always possible is a straddles the edge of the pavement.
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when

(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn, water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
until the right front tire contacts material is on the road. For safety,
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
the pavement edge. Then turn the slow down and adjust your driving to
most skids by taking reasonable
steering wheel to go straight down these conditions. It is important to
care suited to existing conditions,
the roadway. slow down on slippery surfaces
and by not overdriving those
because stopping distance is longer
conditions. But skids are always
Loss of Control possible.
and vehicle control more limited.
Let us review what driving experts While driving on a surface with
The three types of skids
say about what happens when the reduced traction, try to avoid
correspond to the vehicle's three
three control systems — brakes, sudden steering, acceleration,
control systems. In the braking skid,
steering, and acceleration — do not or braking, including reducing
the wheels are not rolling. In the
have enough friction where the tires vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
steering or cornering skid, too much
meet the road to do what the driver gear. Any sudden changes could
speed or steering in a curve causes
has asked. cause the tires to slide. You might
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
not realize the surface is slippery
In any emergency, do not give up. And in the acceleration skid, too
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
Keep trying to steer and constantly much throttle causes the driving
recognize warning clues — such as
seek an escape route or area of wheels to spin.
enough water, ice, or packed snow
less danger. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored
your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when
and quickly steer the way you you have any doubt.
want the vehicle to go. If you start
Remember: Antilock brakes help
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
avoid only the braking skid.
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.

. Be sure to read all the
Off-Road Driving Off-roading can be great fun but has
information about
some definite hazards. The greatest
Vehicles with four-wheel drive of these is the terrain itself. When four-wheel-drive vehicles
can be used for off-road driving. off-road driving, traffic lanes are not in this manual.
Vehicles without four-wheel drive marked, curves are not banked, and . Make sure all underbody
and vehicles with 20‐inch tire/wheel there are no road signs. Surfaces shields, if the vehicle has
assemblies should not be driven can be slippery, rough, uphill, them, are properly attached.
off-road except on a level, solid or downhill.
surface. . Know the local laws that apply
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt to off-roading where you will
The airbag system is designed to maneuvers. Failure to operate the be driving or check with law
work properly under a wide range of vehicle correctly off‐road could enforcement people in the area.
conditions, including off‐road usage. result in loss of vehicle control or
Always wear your safety belt and vehicle rollover.
. Be sure to get the necessary
observe safe driving speeds, permission if you will be on
especially on rough terrain. Off-roading involves some new private land.
skills. That is why it is very
Drinking and driving can be very important that you read these If you think you will need some
dangerous on any road and this is driving tips and suggestions to help more ground clearance at the front
certainly true for off-road driving. make off-road driving safer and of your vehicle, you can remove the
At the very time you need special more enjoyable. front fascia lower air dam. The air
alertness and driving skills, your dam is held in place by 2 bolts and
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment Before You Go Off-Roading 10 snaps accessible from
can be affected by even a small underneath the front fascia.
. Have all necessary maintenance
amount of alcohol. You could have a and service work done.
serious — or even fatal — accident
if you drink and drive or ride with a . Make sure there is enough fuel,
driver who has been drinking. that fluid levels are where they
should be, and that the spare
tire is fully inflated.
To remove the air dam: Loading Your Vehicle for

Off-Road Driving WARNING (Continued)
1. Remove the 2 outboard air dam
bolts.
fatally injured if the vehicle rolls
2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengage { WARNING over. Put heavy loads inside the
the snaps. . Cargo on the load floor piled cargo area, not on the roof. Keep
3. After the bolts are removed and higher than the seatbacks cargo in the cargo area as far
the snaps are disengaged, push can be thrown forward during forward and low as possible.
forward on the air dam until it a sudden stop. You or your
is free. passengers could be injured. There are some important things to
Notice: Operating your vehicle Keep cargo below the top of remember about how to load your
the seatbacks. vehicle.
for extended periods without
the front fascia lower air dam . Unsecured cargo on the . The heaviest things should be
installed can cause improper air load floor can be tossed on the floor, forward of the rear
flow to the engine. Always be about when driving over axle. Put heavier items as far
sure to replace the front fascia rough terrain. You or your forward as you can.
air dam when you are finished passengers can be struck by
. Be sure the load is properly
off-road driving. flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly. secured, so things are not
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall tossed around.
the air dam: . Heavy loads on the roof raise
the vehicle's center of gravity, You will find other important
1. Line up the snaps and push the information under Vehicle Load
air dam rearward to engage the making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or Limits on page 9‑22 and Tires on
snaps. page 10‑55.
(Continued)
2. Install the 2 outboard bolts.
Environmental Concerns
. Take extreme care with open Getting Familiar with Off-Road
fires (where permitted), camp Driving
Off-road driving can provide stoves, and lanterns.
wholesome and satisfying It is a good idea to practice in an
recreation. However, it also
. Never park your vehicle over area that is safe and close to home
raises environmental concerns. dry grass or other combustible before you go into the wilderness.
We recognize these concerns materials that could catch fire Off-roading requires some new and
and urge every off-roader to follow from the heat of the vehicle's different skills.
these basic rules for protecting the exhaust system.
Tune your senses to different
environment: Traveling to Remote Areas kinds of signals. Your eyes need to
. Always use established trails, It makes sense to plan your trip, constantly sweep the terrain for
roads, and areas that have been especially when going to a remote unexpected obstacles. Your ears
specially set aside for public area. Know the terrain and plan need to listen for unusual tire or
off-road recreational driving and your route. Get accurate maps of engine sounds. Use your arms,
obey all posted regulations. trails and terrain. Check to see if hands, feet, and body to respond to
. Avoid any driving practice there are any blocked or closed vibrations and vehicle bounce.
that could damage shrubs, roads. Controlling the vehicle is the key to
flowers, trees, or grasses or It is also a good idea to travel with successful off-road driving. One of
disturb wildlife. This includes at least one other vehicle in case the best ways to control the vehicle
wheel-spinning, breaking down something happens to one of them. is to control the speed. At higher
trees, or unnecessary driving speeds:
through streams or over soft For vehicles with a winch, be sure to
read the winch instructions. In a
. You approach things faster and
ground.
remote area, a winch can be handy have less time to react.
. Always carry a litter bag and if you get stuck but you will want to . There is less time to scan the
make sure all refuse is removed know how to use it properly. terrain for obstacles.
from any campsite before
leaving.

. The vehicle has more bounce Surface Conditions: Off-roading
. Will you have to stop suddenly
when driving over obstacles. surfaces can be hard-packed dirt, or change direction quickly?
. More braking distance is gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, When driving over obstacles or
needed, especially on an snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces rough terrain, keep a firm grip on
unpaved surface. affects the vehicle's steering, the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,
acceleration, and braking in different or other surface features can jerk
{ WARNING ways. Depending on the surface,
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
the wheel out of your hands.
delayed acceleration, poor traction, When driving over bumps, rocks,

When you are driving off-road, or other obstacles, the wheels can
bouncing and quick changes in and longer braking distances can
occur. leave the ground. If this happens,
direction can easily throw you even with one or two wheels, you
out of position. This could cause Surface Obstacles: Unseen or cannot control the vehicle as well or
you to lose control and crash. hidden obstacles can be hazardous. at all.
So, whether you are driving on A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can
startle you if you are not prepared Because you will be on an unpaved
or off the road, you and your
for them. Often these obstacles are surface, it is especially important to
passengers should wear safety avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
belts. hidden by grass, bushes, snow,
or even the rise and fall of the turns, or sudden braking.
terrain itself. Off-roading requires a different kind
Scanning the Terrain of alertness from driving on paved
Some things to consider:
Off-road driving can take you over roads and highways. There are no
many different kinds of terrain. Be
. Is the path ahead clear? road signs, posted speed limits,
familiar with the terrain and its many . Will the surface texture change or signal lights. Use good judgment
different features. abruptly up ahead? about what is safe and what is not.
. Does the travel take you uphill or
downhill?
Driving on Hills Approaching a Hill

. Is there a straight path up or
down the hill so you will not
Off-road driving often takes you up, When you approach a hill, decide have to make turning
down, or across a hill. Driving safely if it is too steep to climb, descend, maneuvers?
on hills requires good judgment or cross. Steepness can be hard to
and an understanding of what the judge. On a very small hill, for
. Are there obstructions on the hill
vehicle can and cannot do. There example, there may be a smooth, that can block your path, such
are some hills that simply cannot be constant incline with only a small as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
driven, no matter how well built the change in elevation where you can . What is beyond the hill? Is
vehicle. easily see all the way to the top. there a cliff, an embankment, a
On a large hill, the incline may get drop-off, a fence? Get out and
{ WARNING steeper as you near the top, but you
might not see this because the crest
walk the hill if you do not know.
It is the smart way to find out.
Many hills are simply too steep of the hill is hidden by bushes, . Is the hill simply too rough?
for any vehicle. If you drive up grass, or shrubs.
Steep hills often have ruts,
them, you will stall. If you drive Consider this as you approach a hill: gullies, troughs, and exposed
down them, you cannot control rocks because they are more
your speed. If you drive across
. Is there a constant incline,
or does the hill get sharply susceptible to the effects of
them, you will roll over. You could erosion.
steeper in places?
be seriously injured or killed.
If you have any doubt about the . Is there good traction on the
steepness, do not drive the hill. hillside, or will the surface cause
tire slipping?
Driving Uphill
. Ease up on the speed as you If the vehicle stalls, or is about to
approach the top of the hill. stall, and you cannot make it up
Once you decide it is safe to drive . Attach a flag to the vehicle to the hill:
up the hill:
be more visible to approaching . Push the brake pedal to stop the
. Use a low gear and get a firm traffic on trails or hills. vehicle and keep it from rolling
grip on the steering wheel. . Sound the horn as you approach backwards and apply the
. Get a smooth start up the hill the top of the hill to let opposing parking brake.
and try to maintain speed. Not traffic know you are there. . If the engine is still running, shift
using more power than needed . Use headlamps even during the the transmission to R (Reverse),
can avoid spinning the wheels or
day to make the vehicle more release the parking brake, and
sliding.
visible to oncoming traffic. slowly back down the hill in
R (Reverse).
{ WARNING { WARNING . If the engine has stopped
Turning or driving across steep running, you need to restart it.
hills can be dangerous. You could Driving to the top (crest) of a With the brake pedal pressed
lose traction, slide sideways, and hill at full speed can cause an and the parking brake still
possibly roll over. You could be accident. There could be a applied, shift the transmission to
seriously injured or killed. When drop-off, embankment, cliff, P (Park) and restart the engine.
driving up hills, always try to go or even another vehicle. You Then, shift to R (Reverse),
could be seriously injured or release the parking brake, and
straight up.
killed. As you near the top of a slowly back down the hill as
hill, slow down and stay alert. straight as possible in
. Try to drive straight up the hill if R (Reverse).
at all possible. If the path twists
and turns, you might want to find
another route.

. While backing down the hill, put . Never try to turn around if about
your left hand on the steering to stall when going up a hill. WARNING (Continued)
wheel at the 12 o'clock position If the hill is steep enough to
so you can tell if the wheels are stall the vehicle, it is steep Neutral position on the transfer
straight and can maneuver as enough to cause it to roll over. case overrides the transmission.
you back down. It is best to back If you cannot make it up the hill, You or someone else could be
down the hill with the wheels back straight down the hill. injured. If you are going to leave
straight rather than in the left or If, after stalling, you try to back your vehicle, set the parking
right direction. Turning the wheel down the hill and decide you just brake and shift the transmission
too far to the left or right will cannot do it, set the parking brake, to P (Park). But do not shift the
increase the possibility of a put your transmission in P (Park), transfer case to Neutral.
rollover. and turn off the engine. Leave the
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, vehicle and go get some help. Exit Driving Downhill
or is about to stall, when going up on the uphill side and stay clear of
a hill: the path the vehicle would take if it When off-roading takes you
rolled downhill. Do not shift the downhill, consider:
. Never attempt to prevent a stall
by shifting into N (Neutral) to transfer case to Neutral when you . How steep is the downhill?
rev-up the engine and regain leave the vehicle. Leave it in Will I be able to maintain
forward momentum. This will some gear. vehicle control?
not work. The vehicle can roll . What is the surface like?
backward very quickly and could { WARNING Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
go out of control. Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
Shifting the transfer case to
Neutral can cause your vehicle to . Are there hidden surface
roll even if the transmission is in obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
P (Park). This is because the Boulders?
(Continued)

. What is at the bottom of the hill? Things not to do when driving down Driving Across an Incline
Is there a hidden creek bank or a hill:
even a river bottom with large An off-road trail will probably go
rocks?
. When driving downhill, avoid across the incline of a hill. To decide
turns that take you across the whether to try to drive across the
If you decide you can go down a incline of the hill. A hill that is not incline, consider the following:
hill safely, try to keep the vehicle too steep to drive down might be
headed straight down. Use a low
gear so engine drag can help the
too steep to drive across. The
vehicle could roll over.
{ WARNING
brakes so they do not have to do all Driving across an incline that is
the work. Descend slowly, keeping
. Never go downhill with the
transmission in N (Neutral), too steep will make your vehicle
the vehicle under control at all
called free-wheeling. The brakes roll over. You could be seriously
times.
will have to do all the work and injured or killed. If you have any
could overheat and fade. doubt about the steepness of the
{ WARNING Vehicles are much more likely to incline, do not drive across it.
Heavy braking when going down stall when going uphill, but if it Find another route instead.
a hill can cause your brakes to happens when going downhill:
overheat and fade. This could 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the
. A hill that can be driven straight
cause loss of control and a regular brakes and apply the up or down might be too steep to
serious accident. Apply the parking brake. drive across. When going
brakes lightly when descending straight up or down a hill, the
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still length of the wheel base — the
a hill and use a low gear to keep
braking, restart the engine. distance from the front wheels to
vehicle speed under control.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the rear wheels — reduces the
the parking brake, and drive likelihood the vehicle will tumble
straight down. end over end. But when driving
across an incline, the narrower
4. If the engine will not start, get track width — the distance
out and get help.
between the left and right For these reasons, carefully Stalling on an Incline
wheels — might not prevent the consider whether to try to drive
vehicle from tilting and rolling
over. Driving across an incline
across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does
{ WARNING
puts more weight on the downhill not mean you have to drive it. The Getting out on the downhill (low)
wheels which could cause a last vehicle to try it might have side of a vehicle stopped across
downhill slide or a rollover. rolled over. an incline is dangerous. If the
. Surface conditions can be a If you feel the vehicle starting to vehicle rolls over, you could be
problem. Loose gravel, muddy slide sideways, turn downhill. This crushed or killed. Always get out
spots, or even wet grass can should help straighten out the on the uphill (high) side of the
cause the tires to slip sideways, vehicle and prevent the side vehicle and stay well clear of the
downhill. If the vehicle slips slipping. The best way to prevent rollover path.
sideways, it can hit something this is to “walk the course” first, so
that will trip it — a rock, a rut, you know what the surface is like
etc. — and roll over. before driving it. If the vehicle stalls when crossing
an incline, be sure you, and any
. Hidden obstacles can make the passengers, get out on the uphill
steepness of the incline even side, even if the door there is
worse. If you drive across a rock harder to open. If you get out on
with the uphill wheels, or if the the downhill side and the vehicle
downhill wheels drop into a rut starts to roll over, you will be right
or depression, the vehicle can tilt in its path.
even more.
If you have to walk down the slope,
stay out of the path the vehicle will
take if it does roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, difficulty accelerating. And, if the

or Ice vehicle does get moving, poor WARNING (Continued)
steering and difficult braking can
When you drive in mud, snow, cause it to slide out of control. could drown. If it is only shallow
or sand, the wheels do not get water, it can still wash away the
good traction. Acceleration is not ground from under your tires, and
as quick, turning is more difficult, { WARNING you could lose traction and roll
and braking distances are longer. the vehicle over. Do not drive
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
It is best to use a low gear when in or rivers can be dangerous. through rushing water.
mud — the deeper the mud, the Underwater springs, currents
lower the gear. In really deep mud, under the ice, or sudden thaws Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,
keep the vehicle moving so it does can weaken the ice. Your vehicle and flood waters demand extreme
not get stuck. could fall through the ice and you caution.
When driving on sand, wheel and your passengers could Find out how deep the water is
traction changes. On loosely packed drown. Drive your vehicle on before driving through it. Do not
sand, such as on beaches or sand safe surfaces only. try it if it is deep enough to cover
dunes, the tires will tend to sink the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
into the sand. This affects steering, pipe — you probably will not get
accelerating, and braking. Drive at a Driving in Water
through. Deep water can damage
reduced speed and avoid sharp the axle and other vehicle parts.
turns or abrupt maneuvers. { WARNING If the water is not too deep, drive
Hard packed snow and ice offer Driving through rushing water can slowly through it. At faster speeds,
the worst tire traction. On these be dangerous. Deep water can water splashes on the ignition
surfaces, it is very easy to lose sweep your vehicle downstream system and the vehicle can stall.
control. On wet ice, for example, the and you and your passengers
traction is so poor that you will have
(Continued)
Stalling can also occur if you get the Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)
tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is
under water, you will never be able Rain and wet roads can reduce
to start the engine. When going vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate. Flowing or rushing water creates
through water, remember that when strong forces. Driving through
the brakes get wet, it might take Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid flowing water could cause the
longer to stop. See Driving on Wet
driving through large puddles and vehicle to be carried away. If this
Roads on page 9‑17.
deep‐standing or flowing water. happens, you and other vehicle
After Off-Road Driving occupants could drown. Do not
Remove any brush or debris that { WARNING ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
has collected on the underbody,
chassis, or under the hood. These Wet brakes can cause crashes. through flowing water.
accumulations can be a fire hazard. They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning
After operation in mud or sand,
pulling to one side. You could
have the brake linings cleaned and Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
lose control of the vehicle.
checked. These substances can can build up under the vehicle's
cause glazing and uneven braking. After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the
Check the body structure, steering, puddle of water or a car/vehicle water. This can happen if the road is
suspension, wheels, tires, and wash, lightly apply the brake wet enough and you are going fast
exhaust system for damage and pedal until the brakes work enough. When the vehicle is
check the fuel lines and cooling normally. hydroplaning, it has little or no
system for any leakage. contact with the road.
(Continued)
The vehicle requires more frequent There is no hard and fast rule about
service due to off-road use. Refer to hydroplaning. The best advice is to
the Maintenance Schedule for slow down when the road is wet.
additional information.
Other Rainy Weather Tips Other driving tips include:

Besides slowing down, other wet . Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ WARNING
weather driving tips include: . Keep interior temperature cool. If you do not shift down, the
. Allow extra following distance. brakes could get so hot that they
. Keep your eyes moving — scan would not work well. You would
. Pass with caution. the road ahead and to the sides.
then have poor braking or even
. Keep windshield wiping . Check the rearview mirror and none going down a hill. You could
equipment in good shape. vehicle instruments often. crash. Shift down to let the engine
. Keep the windshield washer fluid assist the brakes on a steep
reservoir filled. Hill and Mountain Roads downhill slope.
. Have good tires with proper Driving on steep hills or through
tread depth. See Tires on mountains is different than driving
page 10‑55. on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
{ WARNING
. Turn off cruise control.
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
good shape. or with the ignition off is
Highway Hypnosis dangerous. The brakes will
. Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Always be alert and pay attention to have to do all the work of slowing
tires, cooling system, and
your surroundings while driving. down and they could get so hot
transmission.
If you become tired or sleepy, find that they would not work well. You
a safe place to park the vehicle . Shift to a lower gear when going would then have poor braking or
and rest. down steep or long hills. even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do not Wet ice can occur at about 0°C The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
swing wide or cut across the (32°F) when freezing rain begins to on page 9‑63 improves vehicle
center of the road. Drive at fall, resulting in even less traction. stability during hard stops on
speeds that let you stay in your Avoid driving on wet ice or in slippery roads, but apply the brakes
own lane. freezing rain until roads can be sooner than when on dry pavement.
. Top of hills: Be alert — treated with salt or sand. Allow greater following distance on
something could be in your Drive with caution, whatever the any slippery road and watch for
lane (stalled car, accident). condition. Accelerate gently so slippery spots. Icy patches can
. Pay attention to special road traction is not lost. Accelerating too occur on otherwise clear roads in
signs (falling rocks area, winding quickly causes the wheels to spin shaded areas. The surface of a
roads, long grades, passing or and makes the surface under the curve or an overpass can remain icy
no-passing zones) and take tires slick, so there is even less when the surrounding roads are
appropriate action. traction. clear. Avoid sudden steering
Try not to break the fragile traction. maneuvers and braking while
Winter Driving If you accelerate too fast, the drive on ice.
wheels will spin and polish the Turn off cruise control on slippery
Driving on Snow or Ice surface under the tires even more. surfaces.
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑40.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program (U.S. and
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑9. To get help and keep . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
everyone in the vehicle safe: time to be sure snow does Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
not collect there. could overcome you and kill you.
. Turn on the hazard warning
You cannot see it or smell it, so
flashers. . Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the you might not know it is in your
. Tie a red cloth to an outside vehicle. Clear away snow from
vehicle that is away from the
mirror. around the base of your vehicle,
wind to bring in fresh air.
especially any that is blocking the
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust panel.
under the vehicle. This may Run the engine for short periods
. Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm, but
cause exhaust gases to get system to a setting that
inside. Engine exhaust contains be careful.
circulates the air inside the
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which vehicle and set the fan speed To save fuel, run the engine for
cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See only short periods as needed to
cause unconsciousness and even Climate Control System in the warm the vehicle and then shut the
death. Index. engine off and close the window
(Continued) most of the way to save heat.
(Continued)
Repeat this until help arrives to free the vehicle, turn the traction For vehicles with StabiliTrak®, turn
but only when you feel really system off and use the rocking the traction control part of the
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving method. system off. Shift back and forth
about to keep warm also helps. between R (Reverse) and a forward
If it takes some time for help to { WARNING gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator If the vehicle's tires spin at high R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
pedal slightly so the engine runs speed, they can explode, and you little as possible. To prevent
faster than the idle speed. This or others could be injured. The transmission wear, wait until the
keeps the battery charged to restart vehicle can overheat, causing an wheels stop spinning before shifting
the vehicle and to signal for help engine compartment fire or other gears. Release the accelerator
with the headlamps. Do this as little damage. Spin the wheels as little pedal while shifting, and press
as possible to save fuel. as possible and avoid going lightly on the accelerator pedal
above 55 km/h (35 mph). when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
If the Vehicle Is Stuck forward and reverse directions
Slowly and cautiously spin the For information about using tire causes a rocking motion that could
wheels to free the vehicle when chains on the vehicle, see Tire free the vehicle. If that does not get
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. Chains on page 10‑78. the vehicle out after a few tries, it
See “Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It might need to be towed out.
Out” later in this section.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get Recovery hooks can be used, if the
It Out vehicle has them. If the vehicle does
If the vehicle has a traction system,
Turn the steering wheel left and need to be towed out, see Towing
it can often help to free a stuck
right to clear the area around the the Vehicle on page 10‑99.
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's
traction system in the Index. If stuck front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
too severely for the traction system vehicles, shift into Four‐Wheel High.
Recovery Hooks Vehicle Load Limits

It is very important to know how
{ WARNING much weight your vehicle can
These hooks, when used, are carry. This weight is called the
under a lot of force. Always pull vehicle capacity weight and
the vehicle straight out. Never pull includes the weight of all
on the hooks at a sideways angle. occupants, cargo, and all
The hooks could break off and nonfactory-installed options.
you or others could be injured Two labels on your vehicle show
from the chain or cable how much weight it was
snapping back. designed to carry, the Tire and
Notice: Never use recovery
Loading Information label and
hooks to tow the vehicle. Your
vehicle could be damaged and it the Certification/Tire label.
would not be covered by
warranty. { WARNING
For vehicles with recovery hooks at Do not load the vehicle any
the front of the vehicle, you can use heavier than the Gross
them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place
Vehicle Weight Rating
where you can continue driving. (GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
(Continued)
(B-pillar). With the driver door Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
WARNING (Continued) open, you will find the label the front and rear axles. See
vehicle handles. This could attached below the door lock “Certification/Tire Label” later in
cause loss of control and a post (striker). The tire and this section.
crash. Overloading can also loading information label shows Steps for Determining Correct
shorten the life of the vehicle. the number of occupant seating Load Limit
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in 1. Locate the statement
Tire and Loading Information kilograms and pounds. “The combined weight of
Label occupants and cargo should
The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or
Information label also shows the XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
size of the original equipment placard.
tires (C) and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (D). 2. Determine the combined
For more information on tires weight of the driver and
and inflation see Tires on passengers that will be
page 10‑55 and Tire Pressure riding in your vehicle.
on page 10‑63. 3. Subtract the combined
There is also important loading weight of the driver and
information on the vehicle passengers from XXX kg or
Label Example Certification/Tire label. It tells XXX lbs.
you the Gross Vehicle Weight
A vehicle specific Tire and Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle. SeeTrailer

the available amount of cargo Towing on page 9‑89 for
and luggage load capacity. important information on
For example, if the “XXX” towing a trailer, towing safety
amount equals 1400 lbs and rules and trailering tips.
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400−750 (5x150) =
650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined Example 2
weight of luggage and cargo A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
being loaded on the vehicle. Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
That weight may not safely B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
exceed the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
and luggage load capacity Example 1 (750 lbs)
calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for C. Available Cargo Weight =
6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1 = (453 kg) (1,000 lbs) 113 kg (250 lbs)
a trailer, the load from your B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
trailer will be transferred to 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
your vehicle. Consult this (300 lbs)
manual to determine how this C. Available Occupant and Cargo
reduces the available cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
and luggage load capacity of
weight of the driver, passengers, This is called Gross Vehicle

and cargo should never exceed Weight Rating (GVWR). The
your vehicle's capacity weight. GVWR includes the weight of
Certification/Tire Label
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and
Example 3 rear axles, you need to go to a
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for weigh station and weigh your
Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) vehicle. Your dealer can help
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ you with this. Be sure to spread
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg out your load equally on both
(1,000 lbs) A vehicle specific Certification/ sides of the centerline.
C. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is found on the rear Never exceed the GVWR for
0 kg (0 lbs) edge of the driver door. The your vehicle, or the GAWR for
label shows the size of your either the front or rear axle.
Refer to your vehicle's tire and
vehicle's original tires and the
loading information label for
inflation pressures needed
specific information about your
to obtain the gross weight
vehicle's capacity weight and
capacity of your vehicle.
seating positions. The combined
The Certification/Tire label also Using heavier suspension

contains important information { WARNING components to get added
about your Front Axle Reserve Do not load the vehicle any durability might not change your
Capacity. See “What is front axle heavier than the Gross weight ratings. Ask your dealer
reserve capacity, and how do I Vehicle Weight Rating to help you load your vehicle the
calculate it?” under Adding a (GVWR), or either the right way.
Snow Plow or Similar Equipment maximum front or rear Gross If you put things inside your
on page 9‑117. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). vehicle — like suitcases,
This can cause systems to tools, packages, or anything
{ WARNING break and change the way the else — they go as fast as the
In the case of a sudden stop vehicle handles. This could vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or collision, things carried in cause loss of control and a or turn quickly, or if there is a
the bed of your truck could crash. Overloading can also crash, they will keep going.
shift forward and come into shorten the life of the vehicle.
the passenger area, injuring
you and others. If you put Notice : Overloading the
things in the bed of your truck, vehicle may cause damage.
you should make sure they Repairs would not be covered
are properly secured. by the vehicle warranty. Do
not overload the vehicle.
When using this upper load

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) platform, be sure the load is
Things you put inside the securely tied down to prevent it
. When you carry something
vehicle can strike and injure from shifting. The load's center
inside the vehicle, secure of gravity should be positioned
people in a sudden stop or it whenever you can.
turn, or in a crash. in a zone over the rear axle.
. Do not leave a seat folded The zone is located in the area
. Put things in the cargo down unless you need to. between the front of each wheel
area of the vehicle. Try to well and the rear of each wheel
spread the weight evenly. well. The center of gravity height
There is also important loading
. Never stack heavier must not extend above the top
information for off-road driving in
things, like suitcases, of the pickup box flareboard.
this manual. See “Loading Your
inside the vehicle so that Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“ Any load that extends beyond
some of them are above under Off-Road Driving on the vehicle's taillamp area must
the tops of the seats. page 9‑7. be properly marked according to
. Do not leave an local laws and regulations.
Two-Tiered Loading
unsecured child Remember not to exceed
restraint in the vehicle. Depending on the model of your the Gross Axle Weight
(Continued) pick‐up, an upper load platform Rating (GAWR) of the front
can be created by positioning or rear axle.
three or four 5 cm (2 inches) by
15 cm (6 inches) wooden planks
across the width of the pickup
box. The planks must be
inserted in the pickup box
depressions.
Add-On Equipment Maximum Loading Points

When you carry removable * Equipment Weight
items, you may need to put a Ladder Rack 340 kg
limit on how many people you and Cargo (750 lbs)
carry inside your vehicle. Be
sure to weigh your vehicle Cross Toolbox 181 kg
before you buy and install the and Cargo (400 lbs)
new equipment. Side Boxes 113 kg per
Notice : Overloading the and Cargo side (250 lbs
vehicle may cause damage. per side)
Repairs would not be covered * The combined weight for all
by the vehicle warranty. Do rail‐mounted equipment should
not overload the vehicle. not exceed 454 kg (1,000 lbs). A. Primary Load Points
Remember not to exceed B. Secondary Load Areas
the Gross Axle Weight C. Cargo Management Option
Rating (GAWR) of the front Holes
or rear axle.
Structural members (A) and (B)
are included in the pick-up box
design. Additional accessories
should use these load points.
Depending on the accessory Your dealer can help make a Refer to the Truck-Camper
design, use a spacer under the good vehicle-camper match Loading Information label in
accessory at the load points to and help determine the Cargo the glove box for dimensions A
remove gap. The holes for the Weight Rating (CWR). and B as shown in the following
Cargo Management System (C)
When installing and loading a illustration.
are not intended for attachment
of aftermarket equipment. See slide-in camper, check the
www.gmupfitter.com for additional manufacturer's instructions.
pick-up box load bearing structural
information. When carrying a slide-in
camper, the total cargo load of
Truck-Camper Loading the vehicle is the weight of the
camper, plus the following:
Information
. Everything added to the
A vehicle-specific Truck‐Camper
camper after it left the factory
Loading Information label is
attached to the inside of the . Everything in the camper
vehicle's glove box. This label . All the people inside
indicates if a slide-in camper
can be carried, how much of a The CWR is the maximum Use the rear edge of the load
load the vehicle can carry, and weight of the load the vehicle floor for measurement purposes.
how to correctly spread out the can carry. It does not include the The recommended location
load. It will help to match the weight of the people inside. But, for the cargo center of gravity
right slide in camper to the use about 68 kg (150 lbs) for is at point C for the CWR. It is
vehicle. each seat. the point where the mass of
The total cargo load must not be a body is concentrated and,
more than the vehicle's CWR. if suspended at that point, would
balance the front and rear.
Here is an example of proper camper weight figure, the weight truck‐camper is loaded, drive
truck and camper match: of camper cargo, and the weight to a scale and weigh on the
of passengers in the camper. front and on the rear wheels
The total cargo load should not separately to determine axle
exceed the truck's cargo weight loads. Individual axle loads
rating, and the camper's center should not exceed either of
of gravity (A) should fall within the gross axle weight ratings
the truck's recommended center (GAWR). The total axle loads
of gravity zone (B) when should not exceed your vehicle's
installed. gross vehicle weight rating
Any accessories or other (GVWR). These ratings are
equipment that are added to the given on the vehicle certification
vehicle must be weighed. Then, label attached to the rear
subtract this extra weight from edge of the driver door. See
A. Camper Center of Gravity the CWR. This extra weight may “Certification/Tire Label” under
shorten the center of gravity Vehicle Load Limits on
B. Recommended Center of
zone of the vehicle. page 9‑22. If weight ratings are
Gravity Location Zone
exceeded, move or remove
When the truck is used to carry If the slide-in camper and its items to bring all weights below
a slide‐in camper, the total cargo load weighs less than the CWR, the ratings.
load of the truck consists of the the center of gravity zone for
your vehicle may be larger. See your dealer for more
manufacturer's camper weight
information on curb weights,
figure, the weight of installed Secure loose items to prevent cargo weights, Cargo Weight
additional camper equipment not weight shifts that could affect the Rating and the correct center of
included in the manufacturer's balance of the vehicle. When the gravity zone.
Starting and premature wear and earlier

replacement. Follow this
Operating breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
New Vehicle Break-In linings.
Notice: The vehicle does not
. Do not tow a trailer during
need an elaborate break-in. But it break-in. See Trailer Towing The control used to adjust the
will perform better in the long run on page 9‑89 for the trailer pedals is located on the instrument
if you follow these guidelines: towing capabilities of the panel below the climate control
vehicle and more system.
. Keep the vehicle speed at information.
88 km/h (55 mph) or less for Press the bottom of the control to
the first 805 km (500 miles). Following break‐in, engine move the pedals closer. Press the
speed and load can be gradually top of the control to move the
. Do not drive at any one increased. pedals away.
constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km Before you start driving, fully press
(500 miles). Do not make
Adjustable Throttle and the brake pedal to confirm the
full-throttle starts. Avoid Brake Pedal adjustment is right for you. While
downshifting to brake or driving, make only small
On vehicles with this feature, you adjustments.
slow the vehicle. can change the position of the
. Avoid making hard stops for throttle and brake pedals. The vehicle may have a memory
the first 322 km (200 miles) or function which lets pedal settings be
No adjustment to the pedals can saved and recalled. See Power
so. During this time the new be made when the vehicle is in
brake linings are not yet Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5 for
R (Reverse) or while using cruise more information.
broken in. Hard stops with control.
new linings can mean
Ignition Positions will remain active. See Retained 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
Accessory Power (RAP) on to P (Park) with an automatic
page 9‑36 for more information. transmission, or Neutral with a
This position locks the ignition. manual transmission. Turn the
It also locks the transmission on ignition to LOCK/OFF.
automatic transmission vehicles. 4. Set the parking brake. See
The key can be removed in Parking Brake on page 9‑64.
LOCK/OFF.
Do not turn the engine off when the { WARNING
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake Turning off the vehicle while
and steering systems and disable moving may cause loss of power
the airbags. assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags.
In an emergency, if the vehicle must While driving, only shut the
The ignition switch has four different be shut off while driving:
positions. vehicle off in an emergency.
1. Brake using a firm and steady
To shift out of P (Park), the pressure. Do not pump the
ignition must be in ON/RUN or brakes repeatedly. This may 5. If the vehicle must be shut off
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular deplete power assist, requiring while driving, turn the ignition to
brake pedal must be applied. increased brake pedal force. ACC/ACCESSORY.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This On vehicles with an automatic
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is can be done while the vehicle is transmission, the shift lever must be
stopped, turn the ignition switch to moving. After shifting to neutral, in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. continue to firmly apply the to LOCK/OFF.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) brakes and steer the vehicle
to a safe location.
The steering can bind with the and indicator lights. The switch Starting the Engine
wheels turned off center. If this stays in this position when the
happens, move the steering wheel engine is running. The transmission If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
from right to left while turning the is also unlocked in this position on see the Duramax diesel supplement
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this automatic transmission vehicles. for more information.
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs If you leave the key in the ACC/ If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
service. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position hybrid supplement for more
Notice: Using a tool to force the with the engine off, the battery could information.
key to turn in the ignition could be drained. You may not be able to Notice: The engine is designed to
cause damage to the switch or start the vehicle if the battery is work with the electronics in the
break the key. Use the correct allowed to drain for an extended vehicle. If you add electrical parts
key, make sure it is all the way in, period of time. or accessories, you could change
and turn it only with your hand. D (START): This is the position that the way the engine operates.
If the key cannot be turned by starts the engine. When the engine Before adding electrical
hand, see your dealer. starts, release the key. The ignition equipment, check with your
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This switch returns to ON/RUN for dealer. If you do not, the engine
position lets things like the radio driving. might not perform properly. Any
and the windshield wipers operate resulting damage would not be
If the vehicle is equipped with a covered by the vehicle warranty.
while the engine is off. Use this radio, a warning tone will sound
position if the vehicle must be when the driver door is opened, the Place the transmission in the
pushed or towed. ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or proper gear.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be LOCK/OFF and the key is in the
used to operate the electrical ignition.
accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning
Automatic Transmission warm. Do not race the engine turning the ignition switch to the
immediately after starting it. ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
Operate the engine and OFF position.
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
transmission gently to allow the When the Low Fuel warning
in any other position. To restart the
oil to warm up and lubricate all lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL
engine when the vehicle is already
moving parts. LOW message is displayed in
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
The vehicle has a the Driver Information Center
Notice: Do not try to shift to
Computer-Controlled Cranking (DIC), the Computer‐Controlled
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
System. This feature assists in Cranking System is disabled
If you do, you could damage the
starting the engine and protects to prevent possible vehicle
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
components. If the ignition key is component damage. When this
only when the vehicle is stopped.
turned to the START position, happens, hold the ignition switch
Manual Transmission and then released when the in the START position to
engine begins cranking, the continue engine cranking.
The shift lever should be in engine will continue cranking for
N (Neutral) and the parking brake Notice: Cranking the engine for
a few seconds or until the long periods of time, by returning
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal vehicle starts. If the engine does
down to the floor and start the the key to the START position
not start and the key is held in immediately after cranking has
engine. The vehicle will not start if START for many seconds,
the clutch pedal is not all the ended, can overheat and damage
cranking will be stopped after the cranking motor, and drain the
way down. 15 seconds to prevent cranking battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
Starting Procedure motor damage. To prevent gear between each try, to let the
damage, this system also cranking motor cool down.
1. With your foot off the accelerator prevents cranking if the engine
pedal, turn the ignition key to is already running. Engine 2. If the engine does not start
START. When the engine starts, cranking can be stopped by after 5‐10 seconds, especially
let go of the key. The idle speed in very cold weather (below
will go down as your engine gets −18°C or 0°F), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline. This system can be used to One of the following actions will turn
Try pushing the accelerator increase engine idle speed off the fast idle:
pedal all the way to the floor whenever the following conditions . Pressing the brake.
and holding it there as you hold are met:
the key in START for up to .
. Selecting the Cruise Control
The park brake is set. Cancel button.
15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to . The brake pedal is not pressed. . Releasing the Parking Brake.
allow the cranking motor to cool . The vehicle must not be moving
down. When the engine starts,
. The transmission shifter is
and the accelerator must not be moved out of P (Park) or
let go of the key and accelerator. pressed.
If the vehicle starts briefly but N (Neutral).
then stops again, do the same To control the fast idle: . Selecting the Cruise Control
thing. This clears the extra . To enable the Fast Idle System, On/Off button when it was
gasoline from the engine. Do not press and release the Cruise previously on.
race the engine immediately Control On/Off button and
after starting it. Operate the
. Pressing the Cruise Control Set
ensure that the switch LED is lit. switch a second time.
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
. Press and release the Cruise . Pressing the accelerator greater
lubricates all moving parts. Control Set switch. Engine than a quarter of the down.
speed will be held at
approximately 1200 RPM. . Turning the ignition switch to the
Fast Idle System LOCK/OFF position.
When the fast idle is active the
If the vehicle has this feature it is Driver Information Center (DIC) will
available only with cruise control. display “FAST IDLE ON.”
The manual fast idle switch is
operated using the cruise control
buttons located on the left hand side
of the steering wheel.
Retained Accessory Engine Coolant Heater To Use the Engine Coolant

Power (RAP) Heater
The engine heater can provide
The following vehicle accessories easier starting and better fuel 1. Turn off the engine.
can be used for up to 10 minutes economy during engine warm-up in 2. Open the hood and unwrap
after the engine is turned off: cold weather conditions at or below the electrical cord. The cord
−18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an is secured to the Engine
. Audio System engine heater should be plugged in Compartment Fuse Block
. Power Windows at least four hours before starting. with a clip. Carefully remove
.
An internal thermostat in the the wire tie which bundles the
OnStar System (if equipped) plug-end of the cord may exist electrical plug. Do not cut the
. Sunroof (if equipped) which will prevent engine coolant electrical cord.
heater operation at temperatures
These features work when 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
above −18°C (0°F).
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
ACCESSORY. Once the key is If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, see the Duramax Diesel supplement
the windows and sunroof continue for more information. { WARNING
to work up to 10 minutes until any Plugging the cord into an
door is opened. The radio continues ungrounded outlet could cause an
to work for up to 10 minutes or until
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
the driver door is opened.
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Shifting Into Park 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then
set the parking brake.
Plug the cord into a properly { WARNING See Parking Brake on page 9‑64
grounded three-prong 110-volt AC It can be dangerous to get out of
outlet. If the cord will not reach, 2. Move the shift lever into the
the vehicle if the shift lever is not P (Park) position by pulling the
use a heavy-duty three-prong fully in P (Park) with the parking
extension cord rated for at least shift lever toward you and
brake firmly set. The vehicle can moving it up as far as it will go.
15 amps. roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move 3. Be sure the transfer case is in a
4. Before starting the engine, be suddenly. You or others could be drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
sure to unplug and store the injured. To be sure the vehicle will 4. Turn the ignition key to
cord as it was before to keep it not move, even when you are on LOCK/OFF.
away from moving engine parts. fairly level ground, use the steps 5. Remove the key and take it with
If you do not, it could be that follow. With four-wheel drive, you. If you can leave the vehicle
damaged. if the transfer case is in with the ignition key in your
The length of time the heater should N (Neutral), the vehicle will be hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
remain plugged in depends on free to roll, even if the shift lever
several factors. Ask a dealer in the is in P (Park). So, be sure the
area where you will be parking the transfer case is in a drive
vehicle for the best advice on this. gear — not in N (Neutral). If you
are pulling a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips
on page 9‑85.
Leaving the Vehicle With the If you have to leave the vehicle with When you are ready to drive, move
Engine Running the engine running, be sure your the shift lever out of P (Park) before
vehicle is in P (Park) and the you release the parking brake.
parking brake is firmly set before
{ WARNING you leave it. After you move the shift
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
It can be dangerous to leave the lever into P (Park), hold the regular yours a little uphill to take some of
vehicle with the engine running. brake pedal down. Then, see if you the pressure from the parking pawl
The vehicle could move suddenly can move the shift lever away from in the transmission, then you will be
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) without first pulling it toward able to pull the shift lever out of
you. If you can, it means that the P (Park).
P (Park) with the parking brake
shift lever was not fully locked into
firmly set.
P (Park).
If you have four-wheel drive and
Shifting out of Park
the transfer case is in N (Neutral), Torque Lock This vehicle is equipped with
the vehicle will be free to roll, If you are parking on a hill and an electronic shift lock release
even if the shift lever is in you do not shift your transmission system. The shift lock release is
P (Park). So be sure the transfer into P (Park) properly, the weight designed to:
case is in a drive gear — not in of the vehicle may put too much . Prevent ignition key removal
N (Neutral). force on the parking pawl in the unless the shift lever is in
transmission. You may find it difficult P (Park) with the shift lever
And, if you leave the vehicle to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
with the engine running, it could button fully released.
This is called torque lock. To
overheat and even catch fire. You prevent torque lock, set the parking . Prevent movement of the shift
or others could be injured. Do not brake and then shift into P (Park) lever out of P (Park), unless the
leave the vehicle with the engine properly before you leave the driver ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
running unless you have to. seat. To find out how, Shifting Into ACCESSORY and the regular
Park on page 9‑37. brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always If you are still having a problem Parking over Things
functional except in the case of an shifting, then have the vehicle
uncharged or low voltage (less than serviced soon.
That Burn
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged Parking (Manual { WARNING
battery or a battery with low voltage, Transmission) Things that can burn could touch
try charging or jump starting the hot exhaust parts under the
If the vehicle has a manual
battery. See Jump Starting on vehicle and ignite. Do not park
transmission, before you get out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into over papers, leaves, dry grass,
To shift out of P (Park) use the R (Reverse), and firmly apply the or other things that can burn.
following: parking brake. Once the shift lever
1. Apply the brake pedal. has been placed into R (Reverse)
with the clutch pedal pressed in,
2. Move the shift lever to the turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
desired position. remove the key and release the
If you still are unable to shift out of clutch.
P (Park): If you are parking on a hill, or if the
1. Ease the pressure on the shift vehicle is pulling a trailer, see
lever. Driving Characteristics and Towing
Tips on page 9‑85.
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever all
the way into P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Active Fuel Management® Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Vehicles with V8 engines may have
Active Fuel Management™. This { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
system allows the engine to operate
on either all or half of its cylinders, Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or after market
depending on the driving conditions. monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
When less power is required, such
as cruising at a constant vehicle can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
speed, the system will operate in even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
the half cylinder mode, allowing the Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
vehicle to achieve better fuel . Drive it only with the windows
economy. When greater power
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
demands are required, such as
accelerating from a stop, passing, garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
or merging onto a freeway, the that may block underbody immediately.
system will maintain full-cylinder airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
operation. . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
Management™ indicator, see Driver . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
Information Center (DIC) on due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
page 5‑32 for more information on . The vehicle exhaust system
using this display. has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle

While Parked
{ WARNING { WARNING
It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out Four-wheel drive vehicles with the
engine running. But if you ever have of the vehicle if the automatic transfer case in N (Neutral) will
to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully allow the vehicle to roll, even if
in P (Park) with the parking brake the automatic transmission shift
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do lever is in P (Park). So, be sure
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the the transfer case is in a drive
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you gear — not in N (Neutral). Always
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the set the parking brake.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others Follow the proper steps to be sure
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the the vehicle will not move. See
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when Shifting Into Park on page 9‑37.
It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and If pulling a trailer, see Driving
and even death. Never run the Characteristics and Towing Tips on
engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
page 9‑85.
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑40.
Automatic { WARNING
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
hybrid supplement for more in P (Park) with the parking brake
information. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic
Vehicles with an automatic Do not leave the vehicle when the
transmission have an electronic Transmission Shown (Light Duty
6‐Speed Similar) engine is running unless you
shift position indicator within the have to. If you have left the
instrument panel cluster. This See “Range Selection Mode” under engine running, the vehicle can
display comes on when the ignition Manual Mode on page 9‑45. move suddenly. You or others
key is turned to the ON/RUN
P (Park): This position locks the could be injured. To be sure the
position.
rear wheels. It is the best position to vehicle will not move, even when
There are several different positions use when starting the engine you are on fairly level ground,
for the shift lever. because the vehicle cannot move always set the parking brake and
easily. When parked on a hill, move the shift lever to P (Park).
especially when the vehicle has a See Shifting Into Park on
heavy load, you might notice an page 9‑37. If you are pulling a
increase in the effort to shift out of trailer, see Driving Characteristics
P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under
and Towing Tips on page 9‑85.
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑37 for
more information.
Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed Automatic
Transmission
N (Neutral): In this position, the D (Drive): This position is for

{ WARNING engine does not connect with the normal driving. It provides the best
wheels. To restart when you are fuel economy. If you need more
If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the already moving, use N (Neutral) power for passing, and you are:
vehicle will be free to roll — even only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the . Going less than about 55 km/h
if the shift lever is in P (Park) — if vehicle is being towed.
the transfer case is in Neutral. So, (35 mph), push the accelerator
be sure the transfer case is in a pedal about halfway down.
drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive High
{ WARNING . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
or Four-Wheel Drive High or Shifting into a drive gear while the more, push the accelerator all
Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in engine is running at high speed is the way down.
Neutral. See Shifting Into Park dangerous. Unless your foot is By doing this, the vehicle shifts
on page 9‑37. firmly on the brake pedal, the down to the next gear and has
vehicle could move very rapidly. more power.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to You could lose control and hit D (Drive) can be used when towing
back up. people or objects. Do not shift a trailer, carrying a heavy load,
into a drive gear while the engine driving on steep hills, or for off-road
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
is running at high speed. driving. You might want to shift the
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the transmission to a lower gear
transmission. The repairs would Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) selection if the transmission shifts
not be covered by the vehicle or N (Neutral) with the engine too often.
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only running at high speed may Downshifting the transmission in
after the vehicle is stopped. damage the transmission. The slippery road conditions could result
To rock the vehicle back and forth to repairs would not be covered by in skidding. See “Skidding” under
get out of snow, ice, or sand without the vehicle warranty. Be sure the Loss of Control on page 9‑6.
damaging the transmission, see If engine is not running at high
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑21. speed when shifting the vehicle.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization performance according to how the 3 (Third): This position is also used
feature that adjusts the transmission vehicle is being used, such as with for normal driving. It reduces vehicle
shifting to the current driving a heavy load or when temperature speed more than D (Drive) without
conditions in order to reduce rapid changes. During this adaptive shift using the brakes. You might choose
upshifts and downshifts. This shift control process, shifting might feel 3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when
stabilization feature is designed to different as the transmission driving on hilly, winding roads, when
determine, before making an determines the best settings. towing a trailer, so there is less
upshift, if the engine is able to When temperatures are very cold, shifting between gears and when
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing the Allison Transmission and going down a steep hill.
things such as vehicle speed, Hydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission's 2 (Second): This position reduces
throttle position, and vehicle load. gear shifting could be delayed vehicle speed even more than
If the shift stabilization feature providing more stable shifts until 3 (Third) without using the brakes.
determines that a current vehicle the engine warms up. Shifts could You can use 2 (Second) on hills.
speed cannot be maintained, the be more noticeable with a cold It can help control vehicle speed as
transmission does not upshift and transmission. This difference in you go down steep mountain roads,
instead holds the current gear. shifting is normal. but then you would also want to use
In some cases, this could appear to the brakes off and on.
be a delayed shift, however the M (Manual Mode): This position is
transmission is operating normally. available on vehicles with the If you manually select 2 (Second) in
Allison Transmission or Hydra-Matic an automatic transmission, the
The transmission uses adaptive 6-Speed transmission. It lets transmission will start in second
shift controls. Adaptive shift controls drivers select the range of gears gear. You can use this feature for
continually compares key shift appropriate for current driving reducing the speed of the rear
parameters to pre-programmed conditions. If the vehicle has this wheels when you are trying to start
ideal shifts stored in the feature, see “Range Selection the vehicle from a stop on slippery
transmissions computer. The Mode” under Manual Mode on road surfaces.
transmission constantly makes page 9‑45.
adjustments to improve vehicle
1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic accelerator pedal may damage To use this feature, do the following:
4-Speed transmission this position the transmission. The repair will 1. Move the shift lever to
reduces vehicle speed even more not be covered by the vehicle M (Manual Mode).
than 2 (Second) without using the warranty. If you are stuck, do not
brakes. You can use it on very steep spin the tires. When stopping on 2. Press the plus/minus buttons,
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the a hill, use the brakes to hold the located on the steering column
shift lever is put in 1 (First) while vehicle in place. shift lever, to select the desired
the vehicle is moving forward, the range of gears for current driving
transmission does not shift into first Manual Mode conditions.
gear until the vehicle is going slowly When M (Manual Mode) is selected
enough. Range Selection Mode a number displays next to the M,
For an Allison Transmission or
(Allison® Transmission or indicating the current gear.
Hydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission, Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
Transmission) This number is the highest gear
this position reduces vehicle speed that can be used. However, the
without using the brakes. You can vehicle can automatically shift to
use it for major/severe downgrades lower gears as it adjusts to driving
and off-road driving where the conditions. This means that all
vehicle would otherwise accelerate gears below that number are
due to steepness of grade. When available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,
you shift to 1 (First) it provides the 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
lowest gear appropriate to current automatically shifted by the vehicle,
road speed and continues to The vehicle may have a Range but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until
downshift as the vehicle slows, Selection Mode. The Range the plus/minus button located on the
eventually downshifting to Selection Mode helps control the steering column lever is used to
1 (First) gear. vehicle's transmission and vehicle change to the gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or speed while driving down hill or
holding the vehicle in one towing a trailer by letting you select
place on a hill using only the a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is not available when Low Traction Mode the transmission shift pattern to
Range Selection Mode is active. reduce shift cycling, providing
If your vehicle has the Allison
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑46. increased performance, vehicle
Transmission, or the Hydra-Matic
While using Range Selection Mode, control, and transmission cooling
6-Speed Automatic Transmission, it
Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul when towing or hauling heavy loads.
has a Low Traction Mode that can
Mode can be used. assist in vehicle acceleration when The selector button is located on the
If the vehicle has an exhaust road conditions are slippery, such end of the shift lever. Turn the Tow/
brake, it can also be used, but will as with ice or snow. While the Haul Mode on and off by pressing
not automatically downshift the vehicle is at a stop, select the the button. When the tow/haul is on,
transmission. See Exhaust Brake in second gear range using Range a light on the instrument panel
the Duramax Diesel supplement. Selection Mode. This will limit cluster will come on.
torque to the wheels after it detects See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
Notice: Spinning the tires wheel slip, preventing the tires from
or holding the vehicle in one page 5‑29 for more information.
spinning.
place on a hill using only the Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” under
accelerator pedal may damage Tow/Haul Mode Towing Equipment on page 9‑105
the transmission. The repair will for more information.
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. If you are stuck, do not
spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place.
Vehicles with an automatic

transmission have a Tow/Haul
Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts
Tow/Haul Mode (Allison Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and Grade Braking is only active while
Transmission or Hydra-Matic off by pressing the button, located the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and
6-Speed Automatic on the end of the shift lever. When you are not in the Range Selection
Transmission) the tow/haul is on, a light on the Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed
instrument panel cluster will previously and Manual Mode on
come on. page 9‑45 for more information on
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on the Range Selection Mode. Grade
page 5‑29 for more information. Braking assists in maintaining
desired vehicle speeds when driving
Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” under on downhill grades by automatically
Towing Equipment on page 9‑105 implementing a shift schedule that
for more information. utilizes the engine and transmission
Vehicles with an Allison to slow the vehicle. This reduces
Grade Braking (Allison
Transmission or Hydra-Matic wear on the braking system and
6-Speed Automatic Transmission
Transmission or Hydra-Matic increases control of the vehicle.
have a Tow/Haul Mode. The Tow/ 6-Speed Automatic Grade Braking monitors vehicle
Haul Mode adjusts the transmission Transmission) speed, acceleration, engine torque
shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, The Grade Braking shift modes can and brake pedal usage. Using this
providing increased performance, be activated by pressing the button information, it detects when the
vehicle control, and transmission on the end of the shift control lever. truck is on a downhill grade and the
cooling when towing or hauling While in Range Selection Mode, driver desires to slow the vehicle by
heavy loads. Grade Braking is deactivated pressing the brake.
allowing the driver to select a This feature is active when the
desired range of gears. exhaust brake is enabled (if
equipped).
Also see Towing Equipment on
Cruise Grade Braking condition. If vehicle speed is above Manual Transmission

(Allison Transmission or the desired speed the transmission
Hydra-Matic 6-Speed will downshift to slow the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission) If vehicle speed is near or below
desired speed the trans will upshift,
Cruise Grade Braking assists when allowing vehicle speed to increase.
driving on a downhill grade.
It maintains vehicle speed by While in the Range Selection Mode,
automatically implementing a shift Cruise Grade Braking is not
schedule that uses the engine and available.
the transmission to slow the vehicle. This feature is active when the
Cruise Grade Braking operates exhaust brake is enabled (if
while Cruise Control is engaged equipped).
in Tow/Haul Mode to assist in See “Range Selection Mode” under
maintaining vehicle speed under
Manual Mode on page 9‑45.
loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes If the vehicle is equipped with a
vehicle acceleration and deviation manual transmission, this is the shift
from desired speed to determine pattern.
the correct gear for the operating
Here is how to operate the manual
transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you
slowly press down on the
accelerator pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when To stop, let up on the accelerator Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
you are going less than 30 km/h pedal and press the brake pedal. while the vehicle is moving
(20 mph). If you have come to a Just before the vehicle stops, press forward could damage the
complete stop and it is hard to shift the clutch pedal and the brake transmission. The repairs would
into 1 (First), put the shift lever in pedal, and shift to Neutral. not be covered by the vehicle
Neutral and let up on the clutch. Neutral: Use this position when warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
Then press the clutch pedal back you start or idle the engine. only after the vehicle is stopped.
down and shift into 1 (First). Use R (Reverse), along with the
R (Reverse): To back up, press the
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal clutch pedal. After the vehicle stops, parking brake, for parking the
as you let up on the accelerator shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let up vehicle.
pedal and shift into 2 (Second). on the clutch pedal as you press the
Then, slowly let up on the clutch Shift Speeds
accelerator pedal. If it is hard to
pedal as you press the accelerator shift, let the shift lever return to
pedal. Neutral and release the clutch { WARNING
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): pedal. Then press the clutch again If you skip a gear when you
Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and and shift into R (Reverse). Do not downshift, you could lose control
5 (Fifth) the same way you do for attempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior of the vehicle. You could injure
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the to shifting into R (Reverse). The
yourself or others. Do not shift
clutch pedal as you press the transmission has a lock out feature
down more than one gear at a
accelerator pedal. which prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear to
R (Reverse) gear shift. time when you downshift.
Drive Systems While driving on clean dry pavement Manual Transfer Case
and during tight turns, you may
experience vibration in the steering
Four-Wheel Drive system.
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®,
Drive, you can send the engine's shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low
driving power to all four wheels will turn Traction Control and
for extra traction. To get the most StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak®
satisfaction out of Four-Wheel System on page 9‑67.
Drive, you must be familiar with
its operation. Read the following Front Axle
before using Four-Wheel Drive. The front axle engages and
See the appropriate text for the disengages automatically when you
transfer case in the vehicle. shift the transfer case. Some delay
Notice: Driving on clean, dry for the axle to engage or disengage The transfer case shift lever is on
pavement in Four-Wheel Drive is normal. the floor to the right of the driver.
High or Four-Wheel Drive Low Use this lever to shift into and out of
for an extended period of time Four-Wheel Drive.
may cause premature wear on
the vehicle's powertrain. Do not
drive on clean, dry pavement
in Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low for
extended periods of time.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
2m 4m 4n N
Normal YES
A Four-Wheel Drive indicator light Severe YES
comes on when you shift into Extreme YES
four-wheel drive and the front axle
engages. See Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle in Tow* YES
Light on page 5‑29. *See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑99 or Towing the Vehicle on
Some delay between shifting and page 10‑99.
when the indicator light comes on is
normal.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This
pavement in four-wheel drive for setting also engages the front axle
an extended period of time can and delivers extra torque. You may
cause premature wear on the never need Four-Wheel Drive Low.
vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive It sends maximum power to all
on clean, dry pavement in four wheels. You might choose
Four-Wheel Drive for extended Four-Wheel Drive Low if you are
periods of time. driving off-road in deep sand, deep
mud, deep snow, and while climbing
or descending steep hills.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, You can shift from Two-Wheel

shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low WARNING (Continued) Drive High to Four-Wheel Drive
will turn Traction Control and High or Four-Wheel Drive High to
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak® before placing the transfer case in Two-Wheel Drive High while the
System on page 9‑67. N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on vehicle is moving. In extremely cold
page 9‑64. weather, it may be necessary to
stop or slow the vehicle to shift into
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting Four-Wheel Drive High.
only when the vehicle needs to be When Using the Manual
towed. See Recreational Vehicle Transfer Case
Towing on page 10‑99 or Towing the
Vehicle on page 10‑99.
. Shifts into or out of Four-Wheel
A parking brake symbol is located Drive Low or N (Neutral) should
next to the N (Neutral) symbol as a 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This be made using quick motions to
reminder to set the parking brake setting is used for driving in most avoid excessive gear grinding.
before shifting the transfer case into street and highway situations. Shifting slowly may make it more
N (Neutral). The front axle is not engaged in difficult to shift.
two-wheel drive. This setting also . You may notice that it is harder
{ WARNING provides the best fuel economy.
to shift when the vehicle is cold.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use After the vehicle warms up the
Shifting the transfer case to shifting will return to normal.
this setting when you need extra
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle traction, such as on snowy or icy
to roll even if the transmission is
. While in Four-Wheel High or
roads or in most off-road situations. Four-Wheel Drive Low you
in P (Park). You or someone else This setting also engages the front may experience reduced fuel
could be seriously injured. Be axle to help drive your vehicle. This economy.
sure to set the parking brake is the best setting to use when
(Continued) plowing snow.

. Avoid driving in Four-Wheel Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive
. While in Four-Wheel Drive High,
Drive on clean, dry pavement. High to Four-Wheel Drive High the vehicle can be driven at any
It may cause your tires to wear posted legal speed limit.
faster, make the transfer case
. Shifts between Two-Wheel Drive
harder to shift, and run noisier. High and Four-Wheel Drive High Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel
can be made at any vehicle Drive Low
. If the transfer case shifter is in speed.
the N (Neutral) position and you Notice: Shifting the transfer case
have difficulty reaching the
. Shift the transfer case lever in into Four-Wheel-Drive Low while
selected transfer case mode, one continuous motion into moving at speeds faster than
either the Four-Wheel Drive High 5 km/h (3 mph) may cause
with the engine running, shift the
transmission momentarily to or Two-Wheel Drive High premature wear to the transfer
D (Drive) and then back to position. case, and may cause the gears
N (Neutral). This will realign the to grind. To avoid causing
. Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive
premature wear, and grinding the
gear teeth in the transfer case High to Four-Wheel Drive High
and allow you to complete the gears, do not shift the transfer
while the vehicle is in motion
shift. case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low
may require that moderate force
while the vehicle is moving faster
be applied to the shift lever for a
than 5 km/h (3 mph).
few seconds before Four-Wheel
Drive High can be engaged, . Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
especially in cold weather. Low should be done, if possible,
with the vehicle at a slight roll,
. In extremely cold weather, it may
5 km/h (3 mph) or less.
be necessary to slow or stop the
vehicle to shift into Four-Wheel
Drive High.

. Shift the transmission into When this happens, make Electronic Transfer Case
N (Neutral). sure the engine is on, shift
the transmission momentarily
{ WARNING to D (Drive) and back to
N (Neutral), and then complete
Shifting the transfer case to the transfer case shift.
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle . Shift the transfer case shift lever
in one continuous motion into
in P (Park). You or someone else the Four-Wheel Drive Low
could be seriously injured. Be position.
sure to set the parking brake
before placing the transfer case in
. When in Four-Wheel Drive Low
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on do not drive faster than
page 9‑64. 72 km/h (45 mph). This will
reduce wear and extend the
life of your transfer case. The transfer case knob is located
. Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive next to the steering column.
Low with the vehicle at a stop Shifting In or Out of Neutral
Use the dial to shift into and out of
may be more difficult. You may 1. With the vehicle running and the four-wheel drive.
be unable to complete the shift engine at an idle, set the parking
to Four-Wheel Drive Low, and brake.
the transfer case will end up in
2. Place the transmission into
N (Neutral). This is normal, and
N (Neutral).
is a function of the gear teeth
aligning in the transfer case. Shift the transfer case in one
continuous motion into or out of
the N (Neutral) position.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This

Transfer Case Settings setting is used for driving in most
Driving Conditions street and highway situations.
2m 4m 4n N The front axle is not engaged in
Normal YES Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
Severe YES
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
Extreme YES the Four-Wheel Drive High position
Vehicle in Tow* YES when extra traction is needed, such
as on snowy or icy roads or in most
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑99 or Towing the Vehicle on off-road situations. This setting also
page 10‑99. engages the front axle to help drive
the vehicle. This is the best setting
to use when plowing snow.
You can choose among four driving An indicator light flashes while
settings: shifting the transfer case and 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This
remains illuminated when the shift is setting also engages the front axle
Indicator lights in the dial show
complete. If for some reason the and delivers extra torque. You may
which setting you are in. The
transfer case cannot make a never need this setting. It sends
indicator lights will come on briefly
requested shift, it will return to the maximum power to all four wheels.
when you turn on the ignition and
last chosen setting. You might choose Four-Wheel Drive
one will stay on. If the lights do not
Low while driving off-road in deep
come on, you should take the
sand, deep mud, deep snow, and
vehicle to your dealer for service.
while climbing or descending steep
hills.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive
shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low message stays on, you should Low position, the ignition must be in
will turn Traction Control and take the vehicle to your dealer for ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak® service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL stopped or moving less than 5 km/h
System on page 9‑67. DRIVE message” under (3 mph) with the transmission in
Transmission Messages on N (Neutral). The preferred method
{ WARNING page 5‑49. for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
Low is to have the vehicle moving
Shifting Into Two-Wheel 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the
Shifting the transfer case to Drive High
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
to roll even if the transmission is Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel position. You must wait for the
in P (Park). You or someone else Drive High position. This can be Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator
could be seriously injured. Be done at any speed, except when light to stop flashing and remain on
sure to set the parking brake shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. before shifting the transmission
before placing the transfer case in See “Shifting Out of Four-Wheel in gear.
Drive Low” for more information.
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on Notice: Shifting the transmission
page 9‑64. Shifting Into Four-Wheel into gear before the requested
Drive Low mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
transfer case. To help avoid
transfer case to N (Neutral) only engaged, vehicle speed should
damaging the vehicle, always
when towing the vehicle. See be kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
wait for the mode indicator lights
Recreational Vehicle Towing on Extended high-speed operation in
to stop flashing before shifting
page 10‑99 or Towing the Vehicle Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage
the transmission into gear.
on page 10‑99 for more information. or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit Shifting Out of Four-Wheel damaging the vehicle, always wait
significant engagement noise and Drive Low for the mode indicator lights to
bump when shifting between To shift from Four-Wheel Drive stop flashing before shifting the
Four-Wheel Drive Low and Low to Four-Wheel Drive High, transmission into gear.
Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or Two-Wheel Drive High, the It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit
or from transfer case N (Neutral) vehicle must be stopped or moving significant engagement noise and
with the engine running. less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the bump when shifting between
If the knob is turned to the transmission in N (Neutral) and the Four-Wheel Drive Low and
Four-Wheel Drive Low position ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or
when the vehicle is in gear and/or method for shifting out of from transfer case N (Neutral) with
moving, the Four-Wheel Drive Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have the engine running.
Low indicator light will flash for the vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h If the knob is turned to the
30 seconds and not complete the (1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to Four-Wheel Drive High,
shift unless the vehicle is moving the Four-Wheel Drive High or or Two-Wheel Drive High switch
less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the Two-Wheel Drive High position. position when the vehicle is in gear
transmission is in N (Neutral). After You must wait for the Four-Wheel and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
30 seconds the transfer case will Drive High or Two-Wheel Drive High Drive High, or Two-Wheel Drive
shift to Four-Wheel Drive indicator light to stop flashing and High indicator light will flash for
High mode. remain on before shifting the 30 seconds but will not complete the
transmission into gear. shift unless your vehicle is moving
Notice: Shifting the transmission less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
into gear before the requested transmission is in N (Neutral).
mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the
Shifting into Neutral 7. If the engine is running, verify 3. Turn the transfer case dial to
To shift the transfer case to that the transfer case is in Two-Wheel Drive High.
N (Neutral) do the following: N (Neutral) by shifting the After the transfer case has
transmission to R (Reverse) for shifted out of N (Neutral), the
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked one second, then shift the
so that it will not roll. N (Neutral) light will go out.
transmission to D (Drive) for
2. Set the parking brake and press one second. 4. Release the parking brake prior
and hold the regular brake to moving the vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/
pedal. See Parking Brake on ACCESSORY, which will turn Notice: Shifting the transmission
page 9‑64 for more information. the engine off. into gear before the requested
3. Start the vehicle or turn the mode indicator light has stopped
9. Place the transmission shift flashing could damage the
ignition to ON/RUN. lever in P (Park). transfer case. To help avoid
4. Shift the transmission to 10. Release the parking brake prior damaging the vehicle, always wait
N (Neutral). to moving the vehicle. for the mode indicator lights to
5. Shift the transfer case to 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. stop flashing before shifting the
Two-Wheel Drive High. transmission into gear.
Shifting Out of Neutral 5. Start the engine and shift the
6. Turn the transfer case dial
clockwise to N (Neutral) until it To shift the transfer case out of transmission to the desired
stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral) do the following: position.
Neutral light starts blinking. This 1. Set the parking brake and apply Excessively shifting the transfer
will take at least 10 seconds. the regular brake pedal. case into or out of the different
Then slowly release the dial modes may cause the transfer case
to the four low position. The 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off, and shift the to enter the shift protection mode.
N (Neutral) light will come on
when the transfer case shift to transmission to N (Neutral).
N (Neutral) is complete.
This will protect the transfer case You can choose among five driving AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel
from possible damage and will only settings: Drive): This setting is ideal for
allow the transfer case to respond Indicator lights in the dial show use when road surface traction
to one shift per 10 seconds. The which setting you are in. The conditions are variable. When
transfer case may stay in this mode indicator lights will come on briefly driving the vehicle in AUTO, the
for up to three minutes. when you turn on the ignition and front axle is engaged, but the
one will stay on. If the lights do not vehicle's power is sent only to the
Automatic Transfer Case front and rear wheels automatically
come on, you should take the
vehicle to your dealer for service. based on driving conditions. Driving
An indicator light will flash while in this mode results in slightly lower
shifting the transfer case. It will fuel economy than Two-Wheel
remain illuminated when the shift is Drive High.
complete. If for some reason the 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
transfer case cannot make a the Four-Wheel Drive High position
requested shift, it will return to the when extra traction is needed, such
last chosen setting. as on snowy or icy roads or in most
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This off-road situations. This setting also
setting is used for driving in most engages the front axle to help drive
street and highway situations. the vehicle. This is the best setting
The front axle is not engaged in to use when plowing snow.
The transfer case knob is located Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also
next to the steering column. provides the best fuel economy.
Use the dial to shift into and out of
Four-Wheel Drive.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's Shifting Into Two-Wheel
setting also engages the front axle transfer case to N (Neutral) only Drive High
and delivers extra torque. You may when towing the vehicle. See Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel
never need this setting. It sends Recreational Vehicle Towing on Drive High position. This can be
maximum power to all four wheels. page 10‑99 or Towing the Vehicle done at any speed, except when
You might choose Four-Wheel Drive on page 10‑99 for more information. shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Low if you are driving off-road in If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE The indicator light will flash while
deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, message stays on, you should take shifting. It will remain on when the
and while climbing or descending the vehicle to your dealer for shift is completed.
steep hills. service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL
Shifting Into Four-Wheel
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, DRIVE message” under
Drive Low
shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low Transmission Messages on
will turn Traction Control and page 5‑49. When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak® engaged, vehicle speed should be
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
System on page 9‑67. High or AUTO (Automatic Extended high-speed operation in
Four-Wheel Drive) Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage
{ WARNING Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
Shifting the transfer case to Drive High or AUTO position. This To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive
can be done at any speed, except Low position, the ignition must be in
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
when shifting from Four-Wheel ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
Drive Low. The indicator light will stopped or moving less than 5 km/h
in P (Park). You or someone else flash while shifting. It will remain on
could be seriously injured. Be (3 mph) with the transmission in
when the shift is completed. N (Neutral). The preferred method
sure to set the parking brake
before placing the transfer case in for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on Low is to have the vehicle moving
page 9‑64. 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the
knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
position. You must wait for the shift unless the vehicle is moving Notice: Shifting the transmission
Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the into gear before the requested
light to stop flashing and remain on transmission is in N (Neutral). After mode indicator light has stopped
before shifting the transmission 30 seconds the transfer case will flashing could damage the
into gear. shift to Four-Wheel Drive transfer case. To help avoid
Notice: Shifting the transmission High mode. damaging the vehicle, always
into gear before the requested wait for the mode indicator lights
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel to stop flashing before shifting
mode indicator light has stopped Drive Low
flashing could damage the the transmission into gear.
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low It is typical for the vehicle to
to Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO or exhibit significant engagement
damaging the vehicle, always
Two-Wheel Drive High, the vehicle
wait for the mode indicator lights noise and bump when shifting
must be stopped or moving less between Four-Wheel Drive Low
to stop flashing before shifting
than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges
the transmission into gear.
transmission in N (Neutral) and or from N (Neutral) with the engine
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit the ignition in ON/RUN. The
significant engagement noise and running.
preferred method for shifting
bump when shifting between out of Four-Wheel Drive Low If the knob is turned to the
Four-Wheel Drive Low and is to have the vehicle moving Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn or Two-Wheel Drive High switch
from N (Neutral) with the engine the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive position when the vehicle is in gear
running. High, AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
If the knob is turned to the High position. You must wait for the Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel
Four-Wheel Drive Low position Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO or Drive High indicator light will flash
when the vehicle is in gear and/or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light for 30 seconds but will not complete
moving, the Four-Wheel Drive to stop flashing and remain on the shift unless the vehicle is
Low indicator light will flash for before shifting the transmission moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)
30 seconds and not complete the into gear. and the transmission is in
N (Neutral).
Shifting into Neutral 6. Turn the transfer case dial 9. Place the transmission shift
To shift the transfer case to clockwise to N (Neutral) until lever in P (Park).
N (Neutral) do the following: it stops and hold it there until 10. Release the parking brake prior
the N (Neutral) light starts to moving the vehicle.
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked blinking. This will take at least
so that it will not roll. 10 seconds. Then slowly release 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the dial to the four low position. Shifting Out of Neutral
the regular brake pedal. See The N (Neutral) light will come
Parking Brake on page 9‑64 for on when the transfer case shift To shift out of N (Neutral) do the
more information. to N (Neutral) is complete. following:
3. Shifting the transfer case into 7. If the engine is running, make 1. Set the parking brake and apply
N (Neutral) can be done with or sure that the transfer case is in the regular brake pedal.
without the engine running. N (Neutral) by shifting the 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
Shifting without the engine transmission to R (Reverse) for the engine off, and shift the
running should be done with one second, then shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
the ignition in ON/RUN. transmission to D (Drive) for
one second. 3. Turn the transfer case dial to
4. Put the transmission in Two-Wheel Drive High,
N (Neutral). 8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ Four-Wheel Drive High,
ACCESSORY, which will turn or AUTO.
5. Shift the transfer case to the engine off.
Two-Wheel Drive High. After the transfer case has
shifted out of N (Neutral), the
N (Neutral) light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake prior Brakes Along with ABS, the vehicle has a
to moving the vehicle. Dynamic Rear Proportioning (DRP)
system. If there is a DRP problem,
Notice: Shifting the transmission Antilock Brake both the brake and ABS warning
into gear before the requested
mode indicator light has stopped
System (ABS) lights come on accompanied by a
flashing could damage the 10‐second chime. The lights and
This vehicle might have the Antilock
transfer case. To help avoid chime will come on each time the
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
damaging the vehicle, always wait ignition is turned on until the
electronic braking system that helps
for the mode indicator lights to problem is repaired. See your
prevent a braking skid.
stop flashing before shifting the dealer for service.
When the engine is started and the
transmission into gear. Let us say the road is wet and you
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
5. Start the engine and shift the are driving safely. Suddenly, an
checks itself. A momentary motor or
transmission to the desired animal jumps out in front of you.
clicking noise might be heard while
position. You slam on the brakes and
this test is going on. This is normal.
continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each front wheel and at
If there is a problem with ABS, this both rear wheels.
warning light stays on. See Antilock ABS can change the brake pressure
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light to each wheel, as required, faster
on page 5‑28. than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the hard and hold it down, might be the Parking Brake
computer keeps receiving updates wrong thing to do. The wheels can
on wheel speed and controls stop rolling. Once they do, the
braking pressure accordingly. vehicle cannot respond to the
Remember: ABS does not change driver's steering. Momentum will
the time needed to get a foot up to carry it in whatever direction it was
the brake pedal or always decrease headed when the wheels stopped
stopping distance. If you get too rolling. That could be off the road,
close to the vehicle in front of you, into the very thing the driver was
there will not be enough time to trying to avoid, or into traffic.
apply the brakes if that vehicle If the vehicle does not have ABS,
suddenly slows or stops. Always use a squeeze braking technique.
leave enough room up ahead to This gives maximum braking while
stop, even with ABS. maintaining steering control. Do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with
Using ABS For vehicles with a release handle,
steadily increasing pressure.
set the parking brake by holding the
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold In an emergency, you will probably regular brake pedal down, then
the brake pedal down firmly and let want to squeeze the brakes hard pushing down the parking brake
antilock work. You might feel the without locking the wheels. If you pedal.
brakes vibrate or hear some noise, hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease
but this is normal. If the ignition is on, the brake
off the brake pedal. This helps
system warning light will come on.
Braking in Emergencies retain steering control. With ABS, it
See Brake System Warning Light on
is different.
If the vehicle has ABS, it allows the page 5‑27.
driver to steer and brake at the In many emergencies, steering can
A chime sounds and the warning
same time. However, if the vehicle help more than even the very best
light flashes when the parking brake
does not have ABS, the first braking.
is applied and the vehicle is moving
reaction, to hit the brake pedal at least 8 km/h (5 mph).
To release the parking brake, hold Notice: Driving with the parking
the regular brake pedal down. Then brake on can overheat the brake
pull the bottom edge of the lever system and cause premature
with the parking brake symbol, wear or damage to brake system
located above the parking brake parts. Make sure that the parking
pedal. brake is fully released and the
If the ignition is on when the parking brake warning light is off before
brake is released, the brake system driving.
warning light goes off. To release the parking brake, hold
Notice: Driving with the parking the regular brake pedal down, then
brake on can overheat the brake push down momentarily on the
system and cause premature parking brake pedal until you feel
wear or damage to brake system For vehicles without a release the pedal release. Slowly pull your
parts. Make sure that the parking handle, set the parking brake by foot up off the park brake pedal.
brake is fully released and the holding the regular brake pedal If the parking brake is not released
brake warning light is off before down, then pushing down the when you begin to drive, the brake
driving. parking brake pedal. system warning light will flash and a
chime will sound warning you that
If you are towing a trailer and are If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on.
parking on any hill, see Driving system warning light will come on.
Characteristics and Towing Tips on See Brake System Warning Light on If you are towing a trailer and are
page 9‑85. page 5‑27. parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑85.
Brake Assist (Except The Brake Assist feature will The brakes will automatically
automatically disengage when release when the accelerator pedal
With 4.3L V6 Engine) the brake pedal is released or is applied within the two‐second
If this vehicle has StabiliTrak®, it brake pedal pressure is quickly window. If the vehicle is equipped
also has a Brake Assist feature decreased. with the Integrated Trailer Brake
designed to assist the driver in Control (ITBC) system, HSA may
stopping or decreasing vehicle Hill Start Assist (HSA) also apply the trailer brakes. It will
speed in emergency driving not activate if the vehicle is in a
conditions. This feature uses the 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with drive gear and facing downhill
stability system hydraulic brake StabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist or if the vehicle is facing uphill
control module to supplement the (HSA) feature, which may be useful and in R (Reverse). There may be
power brake system under when the vehicle is stopped on a situations on minor hills (less than
conditions where the driver has grade. This feature is designed to 5% grade) with a loaded vehicle or
quickly and forcefully applied the prevent the vehicle from rolling, while pulling a trailer where HSA will
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly either forward or rearward, during not activate.
stop or slow down the vehicle. The vehicle drive off. After the driver
stability system hydraulic brake completely stops and holds the
control module increases brake vehicle in a complete standstill on a
pressure at each corner of the grade, HSA will be automatically
vehicle until the ABS activates. activated. During the transition
Minor brake pedal pulsation or period between when the driver
pedal movement during this time is releases the brake pedal and starts
normal and the driver should to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
continue to apply the brake pedal HSA holds the braking pressure for
as the driving situation dictates. a maximum of two seconds to
ensure that there is no rolling.
Ride Control Systems system should initialize before the DIC, the vehicle should be taken in
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). for service. For more information
In some cases, it may take on the DIC messages, see Ride
StabiliTrak® System approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of Control System Messages on
The vehicle may have a vehicle driving before the system initializes. page 5‑46.
stability enhancement system called If cruise control is being used
StabiliTrak®. It is an advanced when StabiliTrak activates, the
computer-controlled system that cruise control automatically
assists the driver with directional disengages. The cruise control
control of the vehicle in difficult can be re-engaged when road
driving conditions. conditions allow. See Cruise Control
StabiliTrak activates when the on page 9‑69 for more information.
computer senses a discrepancy The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
If the system fails to turn on or
between the intended path and the instrument panel cluster when the
activate, the StabiliTrak light along
direction the vehicle is actually system is both on and activated.
with one of the following messages
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively will be displayed on the Driver The system may be heard or felt
applies braking pressure at any one Information Center (DIC): while it is working; this is normal.
of the vehicle's brakes to assist the TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
driver with keeping the vehicle on SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,
the intended path. STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
When the vehicle is started and STABILITRAK. If these DIC
begins to move, the system messages appear, make sure the
performs several diagnostic checks StabiliTrak system has not been
to insure there are no problems. turned off using the StabiliTrak on/
The system may be heard or felt off button. Then turn the vehicle off, The traction control disable button is
while it is working. This is normal wait 15 seconds, and turn it back on located on the instrument panel
and does not mean there is a again to reset the system. If any of below the climate controls.
problem with the vehicle. The these messages still appear on the
The Traction Control System (TCS) When the traction control system Traction Control Operation
part of StabiliTrak can be turned has been turned off, system noises
The traction control system is part of
off by pressing and releasing the may still be heard as a result of the
the StabiliTrak system. Traction
StabiliTrak button. To disable both brake-traction control coming on.
control limits wheel spin by reducing
TCS and StabiliTrak, press and It is recommended to leave the engine power to the wheels (engine
hold 5 until F illuminates and the system on for normal driving speed management) and by
appropriate DIC message displays. conditions, but it may be necessary applying brakes to each individual
TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned to turn the system off if the vehicle wheel (brake-traction control) as
on by pressing and releasing the is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, necessary.
StabiliTrak button if they are not and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
The traction control system is
automatically shut off for any other attempt to free it. It may also be
enabled automatically when the
reason. necessary to turn off the system
vehicle is started. It will activate and
when driving in extreme off-road
When TCS or StabiliTrak is turned the StabiliTrak light will flash if it
conditions where high wheel spin is
off, the StabiliTrak light and the senses that any of the wheels are
required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
appropriate message will be spinning or beginning to lose
on page 9‑21.
displayed on the DIC to warn the traction while driving. If traction
driver. The vehicle will still have When the transfer case is in 4LO, control is turned off, only the
brake-traction control when traction the stability system is automatically brake-traction control portion of
control is off, but will not be able to disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes traction control will work. The
use the engine speed management on, and the STABILITRAK OFF engine speed management will be
system. See “Traction Control message will appear on the DIC. disabled. In this mode, engine
Operation” next for more Both traction control and StabiliTrak power is not reduced automatically
information. are automatically disabled in this and the driven wheels can spin
condition. more freely. This can cause the
brake-traction control to activate
constantly.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle StabiliTrak may also turn off Cruise Control
is allowed to spin excessively automatically if it determines that a
while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake problem exists with the system.
warning lights, and any relevant If the problem does not clear itself { WARNING
DIC messages are displayed, the after restarting the vehicle, see your
transfer case could be damaged. dealer for service. Cruise control can be dangerous
The repairs would not be covered where you cannot drive safely at
2500 and 3500 series vehicles with a steady speed. So, do not use
by the vehicle warranty. Reduce StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway
engine power and do not spin the the cruise control on winding
Control (TSC) feature. See Trailer roads or in heavy traffic.
wheel(s) excessively while these Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑116.
lights and messages are Cruise control can be dangerous
displayed. 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with
on slippery roads. On such roads,
StabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist
The traction control system may fast changes in tire traction can
(HSA) feature. See Hill Start Assist
activate on dry or rough roads or (HSA) on page 9‑66. cause excessive wheel slip, and
under conditions such as heavy you could lose control. Do not use
acceleration while turning or Adding non‐dealer accessories can cruise control on slippery roads.
abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the affect the vehicle's performance.
transmission. When this happens, a See Accessories and Modifications
reduction in acceleration may be on page 10‑3. For vehicles with cruise control, a
noticed, or a noise or vibration may speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
be heard. This is normal. Locking Rear Axle or more can be maintained
without keeping your foot on the
If cruise control is being used when Vehicles with a locking rear axle can accelerator. Cruise control does
the system activates, the StabiliTrak give more traction on snow, mud, not work at speeds below about
light will flash and cruise control will ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a 40 km/h (25 mph).
automatically disengage. Cruise standard axle most of the time, but
control may be reengaged when When the brakes are applied, cruise
when traction is low, this feature will
road conditions allow. See Cruise control is turned off.
allow the rear wheel with the most
Control on page 9‑69. traction to move the vehicle.
For vehicles with an Allison or [ (Cancel): Press to disengage

Hydra‐Matic 6‐speed automatic cruise control without erasing the
transmission, see “Grade Braking set speed from memory.
and Cruise Grade Braking (Allison
Transmission) under Tow/Haul Setting Cruise Control
Mode on page 9‑46 for an If the cruise button is on when not in
explanation of how cruise control use, it could get bumped and go into
interacts with the Range Selection cruise when not desired. Keep the
Mode, tow/haul and grade braking cruise control switch off when cruise
systems. is not being used.
For vehicles with the StabiliTrak The cruise control light on the
system that begins to limit wheel instrument panel cluster will come
spin while you are using cruise The cruise control buttons are on after the cruise control has been
control, the cruise control will located on the left side of the set to the desired speed.
automatically disengage. See steering wheel.
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑67. 1. Press I.
When road conditions allow the I (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on or off. The indicator light 2. Get up to the desired speed.
cruise control to be safely used
again, it can be turned back on. is on when cruise control is on and 3. Press the SET− button located
turns off when cruise control is off. on the steering wheel and
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): release it.
Press briefly to resume to a 4. Take your foot off the
previously set speed, or press and accelerator.
hold to accelerate.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set
the speed and activate cruise
control or make the vehicle
decelerate.
Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using you might have to step on the
If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control accelerator pedal to maintain the
desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is vehicle speed. While going downhill,
are applied, the cruise control is already activated, you might have to brake or shift to
disengaged without erasing the set a lower gear to keep the vehicle
. Press and hold the SET– button speed down. When the brakes
speed from memory. on the steering wheel until the are applied the cruise control is
Once the vehicle speed reaches desired lower speed is reached, disengaged.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, then release it.
press the +RES button on the Ending Cruise Control
. To slow down in small amounts,
steering wheel. The vehicle returns press the SET– button on the There are three ways to end cruise
to the previous set speed and stays steering wheel briefly. Each time control:
there. this is done, the vehicle goes . To disengage cruise control;
Increasing Speed While Using about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. step lightly on the brake pedal.
Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While . Press [ on the steering wheel.
If the cruise control system is Using Cruise Control
already activated,
. To turn off the cruise control,
Use the accelerator pedal to
press I on the steering wheel.
. Press and hold the +RES button increase the vehicle speed. When
on the steering wheel until the you take your foot off the pedal, the Erasing Speed Memory
desired speed is reached, then vehicle will slow down to the
release it. previous set cruise speed. The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
. To increase vehicle speed in Using Cruise Control on Hills the I button or if the ignition is
small amounts, press the +RES
How well the cruise control will work turned off.
button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h on hills depends upon the vehicle
(1 mph) faster. speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. While going up steep hills,
Object Detection How the System Works

{ WARNING URPA comes on automatically
Systems The Ultrasonic Rear Parking when the shift lever is moved into
Assist (URPA) system does not R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
Ultrasonic Parking Assist replace driver vision. It cannot to indicate the system is working.
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: URPA operates only at speeds less
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, than 8 km/h (5 mph).
. Objects that are below the
it operates at speeds less than
bumper, under the vehicle, An obstacle is indicated by audible
8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the
or too close or far from the beeps. The interval between the
driver with parking and avoiding
vehicle. beeps becomes shorter as the
objects while in R (Reverse). The
sensors on the rear bumper are . Children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
used to detect the distance to an bicyclists, or pets. When the distance is less than
object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the 30 cm (12 in) the beeps are
If you do not use proper care continuous.
vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) before and while backing up,
off the ground. To be detected, objects must be at
vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA, least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground
and below tailgate level. Objects
always check behind the vehicle
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from
before backing up. While backing
the rear bumper. This distance may
up, be sure to look for objects and be less during warmer or humid
check the vehicle's mirrors. weather.
When the System Does Not

. The park assist sensors are
Seem to Work Properly covered by frost or ice. Frost or
ice can form around and behind
The following messages may be the sensors and may not always
displayed on the DIC: be seen; this can occur after
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this washing the vehicle in cold
message occurs, take the vehicle to weather. The message may not
The system can be disabled by clear until the frost or ice has
pressing the rear park aid disable your dealer to repair the system.
melted.
button located next to the radio. PARK ASSIST OFF: This message
occurs if the driver disables the
. A trailer was attached to the
The indicator light comes on and vehicle, or a bicycle or an object
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the system.
was hanging out of the tailgate
Driver Information Center (DIC) to PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE during the last drive cycle. Once
indicate that URPA is off; see Object OWNERS MANUAL: This the attached object is removed
Detection System Messages on message can occur under the and the tailgate is raised, URPA
page 5‑46. following conditions: will return to normal operation.
Notice: If you use URPA while the . The ultrasonic sensors are not . A tow bar is attached to the
tailgate is lowered, it may not clean. Keep the vehicle's rear vehicle.
detect an object behind your bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
vehicle, and you might back into ice, and slush. For cleaning
. The vehicle's bumper is
the object and damage your instructions, see “Washing the damaged. Take the vehicle to
vehicle. Always verify the tailgate Vehicle” under Exterior Care on your dealer to repair the system.
is closed when using URPA or page 10‑104. . Other conditions are affecting
turn off URPA when driving with system performance. Examples
the tailgate lowered. of this are vibrations from a
jackhammer or the compression
of air brakes on a very large
truck.
Rear Vision WARNING (Continued)

When the key is in the ON/RUN
position and the driver shifts the
Camera (RVC) vehicle into R (Reverse), the video
This vehicle may have a Rear Your judged distances using the image automatically appears on the
Vision Camera (RVC) system. Read screen will differ from actual inside rearview mirror. Once the
this entire section before using it. distances. driver shifts out of R (Reverse),
If you do not use proper care the video image automatically
{ WARNING before backing up, you could disappears from the inside rearview
mirror.
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) bicyclist, or pet, resulting in Turning the Rear Vision Camera
system does not replace driver vehicle damage, injury, or death. System Off or On
vision. RVC does not: Even though the vehicle has the
To turn off the RVC system, press
. Detect objects that are RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by and hold z, located on the inside
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper, checking behind and around the rearview mirror, until the left
or underneath the vehicle. vehicle. indicator light turns off. The
RVC display is now disabled.
. Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets. To turn the RVC system on again,
Vehicles without Navigation
System press and hold z until the left
Do not back the vehicle by only indicator light illuminates. The RVC
looking at the RVC screen, or use The Rear Vision Camera system is system display is now enabled and
the screen during longer, higher designed to help the driver when the display will appear in the mirror
speed backing maneuvers or backing up by displaying a view normally.
where there could be cross-traffic. of the area behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
Vehicles with Navigation There is a message on the rear

System vision camera screen that states
“Check Surroundings for Safety.”
The RVC system is designed to
help the driver when backing up by Adjusting the Brightness and
displaying a view of the area behind Contrast of the Screen
the vehicle. When the driver shifts To adjust the brightness and
the vehicle into R (Reverse), the contrast of the screen, press the
video image automatically appears MENU button while the rear vision
on the navigation screen. Once the camera image is on the display. Any
driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the adjustments made will only affect
navigation screen will go back to the the rear vision camera screen.
last screen that had been displayed,
after a delay. 4. Select the Video screen button. ] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)
When the Video screen button or – (minus) screen buttons to
Turning the Rear Vision Camera is highlighted the RVC increase or decrease the brightness
System On or Off system is on. of the screen.
To turn the RVC system on or off: The delay after shifting out of _ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)
1. Shift into P (Park). R (Reverse) is approximately or – (minus) screen buttons to
10 seconds. The delay can be increase or decrease the contrast
2. Press the MENU button to enter of the screen.
the configure menu options, then cancelled by performing one of
press the MENU hard key to the following:
select Display or touch the . Pressing a hard key on the
Display screen button. navigation system.
3. Select the Rear Camera Options . Shifting into P (Park).
screen button. The Rear Camera . Reaching a vehicle speed of
Options screen will display. 8 km/h (5 mph).
Symbols 3. Press the MENU hard key to Rear Vision Camera Location
The navigation system may have a enter the configure menu
feature that lets the driver view options, then press the MENU
symbols on the navigation screen hard key repeatedly until Display
while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic is selected or touch the Display
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system screen button.
must not be disabled to use the 4. Select the Rear Camera Options
caution symbols. If URPA has been screen button. The Rear Camera
disabled and the symbols have Options screen will display.
been turned on, the Rear Parking 5. Touch the Symbols screen
Assist Symbols Unavailable error button. The screen button
message may display. See will be highlighted when on.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑72. Rear Vision Camera Error
The symbols appear when an object Messages The rear vision camera is located in
has been detected by the URPA Service Rear Vision Camera the bezel for the tailgate handle.
system. The symbol may cover the System: This message can display The camera uses a special lens.
object when viewing the navigation when the system is not receiving The distance of the image that
screen. information it requires from other appears on the screen differs from
To turn the symbols on or off: vehicle systems. the actual distance. The area
If any other problem occurs or if a displayed by the camera is limited.
1. Make sure that URPA has not The camera does not display
been disabled. problem persists, see your dealer.
objects which are close to either
2. Shift into P (Park). corner of the bumper or under the
bumper. The area displayed on the
screen can vary according to To disconnect the camera:

vehicle orientation or road 1. Remove the license plate.
conditions.
2. Disconnect the camera
The following illustration shows the connectors from the chassis
field of view that the camera harness, located behind the
provides. license plate, by pressing on the
release tab on each connector.
A. Chassis harness connector

B. Release tab
4. Feed the wiring harness through
the pickup box, then plug the
camera connectors together to
prevent contamination.
A. View displayed by the camera 5. Remove the tailgate. See
Tailgate on page 2‑10 for more
B. Corner of the rear bumper A. Chassis harness connector information.
Disconnecting the Rear Vision B. Release tab 6. Reinstall the license plate.
Camera C. Camera connector Reverse this procedure to reinstall
The rear vision camera must be 3. Plug the two exposed chassis the rear vision camera and make
disconnected if the tailgate needs harness connectors together to sure the grommet and connection
to be removed. prevent contamination. are secure.
When the System Does Not

. The back of the vehicle is in an The fast flash conditions are
Seem to Work Properly accident. If this happens, the used to protect the video
position and mounting angle of device from high temperature
The RVC system might not work the camera can change or the conditions. Once conditions
properly or display a clear image if: camera can be affected. Be sure return to normal the device will
. The RVC is turned off. See to have the camera and its reset and the green indicator will
“Turning the Rear Camera position and mounting angle stop flashing.
System On or Off” earlier in this checked at your dealer.
During any of these fault conditions,
section. The RVC system display in the the display will be blank and the
. It is dark. rearview mirror may turn off or not indicator will continue to flash as
appear as expected due to one of long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
. The sun or the beam of the following conditions. If this or until the conditions return to
headlights is shining directly into occurs the left indicator light on the normal.
the camera lens. mirror will flash.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else Pressing and holding z when the
. A slow flash may indicate a
builds up on the camera lens. left indicator light is flashing will turn
loss of video signal, or no video
Clean the lens, rinse it with off the video display along with the
signal present during the reverse
water, and wipe it with a soft left indicator light.
cycle.
cloth.
. A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the
maximum allowable time during
a reverse cycle, or the display
has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
Fuel See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on

page 9‑81. For all other vehicles,
For diesel engine vehicles, see use only the unleaded gasoline
“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in the described under Recommended
Duramax Diesel Supplement. Fuel on page 9‑79.
For Vehicles with gasoline engines,
please read this. Recommended Fuel
Gasoline For all vehicles except those with
the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),
Use of the recommended fuel is use regular unleaded gasoline with
an important part of the proper a posted octane rating of 87 or
maintenance of this vehicle. To help higher. If the octane rating is less
keep the engine clean and maintain The eighth digit of the Vehicle than 87, an audible knocking noise,
optimum vehicle performance, we Identification Number (VIN) shows commonly referred to as spark
recommend the use of gasoline the code letter or number that knock, might be heard when driving.
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent identifies the vehicle's engine. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
Gasoline. The VIN is at the top left of the at 87 octane or higher as soon as
instrument panel. See Vehicle possible. If heavy knocking is
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
Identification Number (VIN) on heard when using gasoline rated
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
page 12‑1. at 87 octane or higher, the engine
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge needs service.
of marketers providing TOP TIER and a yellow fuel cap can use either
Detergent Gasoline can be found at unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
www.toptiergas.com. containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine Some gasolines contain an If it is determined that the condition
(VIN Code 2), use premium octane-enhancing additive called is caused by the type of fuel used,
unleaded gasoline with a posted methylcyclopentadienyl manganese repairs might not be covered by the
octane rating of 91 or higher. You tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend vehicle warranty.
can also use regular unleaded against the use of gasolines
gasoline rated at 87 octane or containing MMT. See Fuel Fuels in Foreign
higher, but the vehicle's acceleration Additives on page 9‑80 for
could be slightly reduced, and a additional information.
Countries
slight audible knocking noise, Never use leaded gasoline or any
commonly referred to as spark California Fuel other fuel not recommended in the
knock, might be heard. If the octane previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
is less than 87, you might notice a
Requirements caused by use of improper fuel
heavy knocking noise when you If the vehicle is certified to meet would not be covered by the vehicle
drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline California Emissions Standards, it is warranty.
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon designed to operate on fuels that To check the fuel availability, ask an
as possible. Otherwise, you could meet California specifications. See auto club, or contact a major oil
damage the engine. If heavy the underhood emission control company that does business in the
knocking is heard when using label. If this fuel is not available in country where you will be driving.
gasoline rated at 87 octane or states adopting California Emissions
higher, the engine needs service. Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting Fuel Additives
Gasoline Specifications federal specifications, but emission To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
control system performance might in the United States are now
(U.S. and Canada Only) be affected. The malfunction required to contain additives that
At a minimum, gasoline indicator lamp could turn on and the help prevent engine and fuel system
should meet ASTM specification vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. deposits from forming, allowing the
D 4814 in the United States or See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on emission control system to work
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. page 5‑24. If this occurs, return to properly. In most cases, nothing
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain Gasolines containing oxygenates, tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
only the minimum amount of such as ethers and ethanol, and where you buy gasoline whether the
additive required to meet U.S. reformulated gasolines might be fuel contains MMT. We recommend
Environmental Protection Agency available in your area. We against the use of such gasolines.
regulations. To help keep fuel recommend that you use these Fuels containing MMT can reduce
injectors and intake valves clean gasolines, if they comply with the spark plug life and affect emission
and avoid problems due to dirty specifications described earlier. control system performance. The
injectors or valves, look for gasoline However, E85 (85% ethanol) and malfunction indicator lamp might
that is advertised as TOP TIER other fuels containing more than turn on. If this occurs, return to your
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the 10% ethanol must not be used in dealer for service.
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to vehicles that were not designed for
ensure gasoline meets enhanced those fuels. Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
detergency standards developed by Notice: This vehicle was not
the auto companies. A list of Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
designed for fuel that contains and a yellow fuel cap can use either
marketers providing TOP TIER methanol. Do not use fuel
Detergent Gasoline can be found at unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing methanol. It can containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
www.toptiergas.com. corrode metal parts in the fuel For all other vehicles, use only the
For customers who do not use TOP system and also damage plastic unleaded gasoline described under
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and rubber parts. That damage Recommended Fuel on page 9‑79.
one bottle of GM Fuel System would not be covered under the
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel vehicle warranty. We encourage the use of E85 in
tank at every engine oil change, vehicles that are designed to use it.
Some gasolines that The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
can help clean deposits from fuel are not reformulated for low
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel fuel, meaning it is made from
emissions can contain an renewable sources such as corn
System Treatment PLUS is the only octane-enhancing additive called
gasoline additive recommended by and other crops.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
Many service stations will not have To ensure quick starts in the E85 has less energy per liter
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump wintertime, the E85 fuel must be (gallon) than gasoline, so you will
available. The U.S. Department of formulated properly for your climate need to refill the fuel tank more
Energy has an alternative fuels according to ASTM specification often when using E85 than when
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ D 5798. If you have trouble starting you are using gasoline. See Filling
locator/stations/) that can help you on E85, it could be because the E85 the Tank on page 9‑83.
find E85 fuel. Those stations that do fuel is not properly formulated for Notice: Some additives are not
have E85 should have a label your climate. If this happens, compatible with E85 fuel and can
indicating ethanol content. Do not switching to gasoline or adding harm the vehicle's fuel system.
use the fuel if the ethanol content is gasoline to the fuel tank can Do not add anything to E85.
greater than 85%. improve starting. For good starting Damage caused by additives
At a minimum, E85 should meet and heater efficiency below 0°C would not be covered by the
ASTM Specification D 5798. By (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel vehicle warranty.
definition, this means that fuel tank should contain no more than
70% ethanol. It is best not to Notice: This vehicle was not
labeled E85 will have an ethanol designed for fuel that contains
content between 70% and 85%. alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do switch methanol. Do not use fuel
Filling the fuel tank with fuel containing methanol. It can
mixtures that do not meet ASTM fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible — do corrode metal parts in the fuel
specifications can affect driveability system and also damage plastic
and could cause the malfunction not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
refueling. You should drive the and rubber parts. That damage
indicator lamp to come on. would not be covered under the
vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the vehicle warranty.
vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
Filling the Tank

{ WARNING
see the Duramax diesel supplement Fuel can spray out on you if you
for more information. open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
{ WARNING something ignites it, you could
be badly burned. This spray can
Fuel vapor burns violently and a happen if the tank is nearly full,
fuel fire can cause bad injuries. and is more likely in hot weather.
To help avoid injuries to you and Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
others, read and follow all the for any hiss noise to stop. Then
instructions on the fuel pump unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located
island. Turn off the engine when
behind a hinged fuel door on the
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank
driver side of the vehicle. Vehicles
or when refueling the vehicle. Do that have a FlexFuel badge and a chassis cab model, and it runs out
not use cellular phones. Keep yellow fuel cap can use either of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first
sparks, flames, and smoking unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel to ensure a quick restart.
materials away from fuel. Do not containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
leave the fuel pump unattended Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on top off or overfill the tank and wait a
when refueling the vehicle. This is page 9‑81. few seconds after you have finished
against the law in some places.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it pumping before removing the
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
slowly counterclockwise. nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
pumping fuel. Keep children away surfaces as soon as possible. See
from the fuel pump; never let Exterior Care on page 10‑104.
children pump fuel.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it Filling a Portable Fuel

clockwise until it clicks. It will require { WARNING Container
more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make If a fire starts while you are
sure the cap is fully installed. The refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
{ WARNING
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or shutting off the pump or by Never fill a portable fuel container
improperly installed. This would notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle. Static
allow fuel to evaporate into the Leave the area immediately. electricity discharge from the
atmosphere. See Malfunction container can ignite the fuel
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑24. Notice: If a new fuel cap is vapor. You can be badly burned
needed, be sure to get the right and the vehicle damaged if this
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
displays on the Driver Information type of cap from your dealer. The occurs. To help avoid injury to you
Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not wrong type of fuel cap might not and others:
properly installed. See Fuel System fit properly, might cause the . Dispense fuel only into
Messages on page 5‑45 for more malfunction indicator lamp to approved containers.
information. light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
. Do not fill a container while it
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on is inside a vehicle, in a
page 5‑24. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) Towing For information on towing a disabled

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑99. For information on
General Towing towing the vehicle behind another
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill Information vehicle such as a motor home, see
opening before operating the Recreational Vehicle Towing on
Only use towing equipment that has
page 10‑99.
nozzle. Contact should be been designed for the vehicle.
maintained until the filling is Contact your dealer or trailering
complete. dealer for assistance with preparing Driving Characteristics
. Do not smoke while
the vehicle for towing a trailer. and Towing Tips
pumping fuel. See the following trailer towing Pulling a Trailer
information in this section:
. Do not use a cellular phone Important points for pulling a trailer:
. For information on driving while
while pumping fuel.
towing a trailer, see “Driving
. There are many different laws,
Characteristics and including speed limit restrictions,
Towing Tips.” having to do with trailering.
Make sure the rig will be legal,
. For maximum vehicle and trailer not only where you live but also
weights, see “Trailer Towing.” where you will be driving.
. For information on equipment to A good source for this
tow a trailer, see “Towing information can be state or
Equipment.” provincial police.
. Consider using a sway control.
See “Hitches” under Towing
Equipment on page 9‑105.

. Do not tow a trailer at all during Driving with a Trailer
the first 800 km (500 miles) the WARNING (Continued)
new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle, or other parts { WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
could be damaged. or under the instrument
When towing a trailer, exhaust panel.
. During the first 800 km gases may collect at the rear of
(500 miles) that a trailer is the vehicle and enter if the
. Adjust the Climate Control
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most system to a setting that
(50 mph) and do not make starts window is open. brings in only outside air
at full throttle. This helps the and set the fan speed to the
engine and other parts of the Engine exhaust contains Carbon highest setting. See Climate
vehicle wear in at the heavier Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Control System in the Index.
loads. seen or smelled. It can cause
For more information about
unconsciousness and even death.
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
Shift the transmission to a lower To maximize safety when towing Exhaust on page 9‑40.
gear if the transmission shifts a trailer:
too often under heavy loads . Have the exhaust system Towing a trailer requires a
and/or hilly conditions. inspected for leaks and make certain amount of experience.
Important considerations that have necessary repairs before The combination you are driving is
to do with weight: starting a trip. longer and not as responsive as the
. Weight of the trailer . Never drive with the liftgate, vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
trunk/hatch, or rear-most the handling and braking of the rig
. Weight of the trailer tongue before setting out for the open road.
window open.
. Weight on the vehicle's tires (Continued)
. Weight of the trailering
combination
Before starting, check all trailer Backing Up If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
hitch parts and attachments, out, the arrows on the instrument
Hold the bottom of the steering
safety chains, electrical connectors, panel will still flash for turns. It is
wheel with one hand. To move the
lamps, tires, and mirrors. If the important to check occasionally to
trailer to the left, move that hand to
trailer has electric brakes, start the be sure the trailer bulbs are still
the left. To move the trailer to the
combination moving and then apply working.
right, move your hand to the right.
the trailer brake controller by hand
Always back up slowly and, Driving on Grades
to be sure the brakes work.
if possible, have someone
During the trip, check occasionally guide you. Reduce speed and shift to a
to be sure that the load is secure lower gear before starting down a
and the lamps and any trailer Making Turns long or steep downgrade. If the
brakes still work. transmission is not shifted down, the
Notice: Making very sharp turns
brakes might get hot and no longer
Following Distance while trailering could cause the
work well.
trailer to come in contact with the
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle. The vehicle could be Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
vehicle ahead as you would when damaged. Avoid making very the transmission to a lower gear if
driving the vehicle without a trailer. sharp turns while trailering. the transmission shifts too often
This can help to avoid heavy under heavy loads and/or hilly
When turning with a trailer, make
braking and sudden turns. conditions.
wider turns than normal. Do this
Passing so the trailer will not strike soft The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, the transmission shifts too often.
More passing distance is or other objects. Avoid jerky or See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑46.
needed when towing a trailer. sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
The combination will not accelerate advance.
as quickly and is longer so it is
necessary to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before
returning to the lane.
When towing at high altitude on

steep uphill grades, consider the WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal the vehicle and the trailer can be It can be dangerous to get out of
altitudes. If the engine is turned off damaged. When possible, always the vehicle if the shift lever is not
immediately after towing at high park the rig on a flat surface. fully in P (Park) with the parking
altitude on steep uphill grades, the brake firmly set. The vehicle
vehicle may show signs similar to If parking the rig on a hill: can roll.
engine overheating. To avoid this, If the engine has been left
let the engine run while parked, 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn running, the vehicle can move
preferably on level ground, with the suddenly. You or others could be
automatic transmission in P (Park) the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing injured. To be sure the vehicle will
for a few minutes before turning the
uphill. not move, even when on fairly
engine off. If the overheat warning
level ground, use the steps that
comes on, see Engine Overheating 2. Have someone place chocks
on page 10‑26. follow.
under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in Always put the shift lever fully in
Parking on Hills P (Park) with the parking brake
place, release the regular brakes
firmly set.
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load.
If the transfer case on a
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
Parking the vehicle on a hill apply the parking brake and shift four-wheel-drive vehicle is in
with the trailer attached can be into P (Park). N (Neutral), the vehicle will be
dangerous. If something goes free to roll, even if the shift lever
5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive,
wrong, the rig could start to move. is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
be sure the transfer case is in a
People can be injured, and both drive gear and not in N (Neutral). case is in a drive gear — not in
(Continued) N (Neutral).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all

hitch nuts and bolts are tight. WARNING (Continued)
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
damaged; the resulting repairs
2. Start the engine. Trailer Towing would not be covered by the
3. Shift into a gear. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
4. Release the parking brake. see the Duramax diesel supplement only if all the steps in this section
for more information. have been followed. Ask your
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the dealer for advice and information
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is hybrid supplement for more about towing a trailer with the
clear of the chocks. information. vehicle.
7. Stop and have someone pick up Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.
and store the chocks. See New Vehicle Break-In on Notice: Pulling a trailer
Maintenance when Trailer page 9‑31 for more information. improperly can damage the
Towing vehicle and result in costly
The vehicle needs service more { WARNING repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer
often when pulling a trailer. See this The driver can lose control when correctly, follow the advice in this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or pulling a trailer if the correct section and see your dealer for
Index for more information. Things equipment is not used or the important information about
that are especially important in towing a trailer with the vehicle.
vehicle is not driven properly. For
trailer operation are automatic
example, if the trailer is too To identify the trailering capacity of
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system, and heavy, the brakes may not work the vehicle, read the information in
brake system. It is a good idea to well or even at all. The driver and “Weight of the Trailer” later in this
inspect these before and during passengers could be seriously section.
the trip. injured. The vehicle may also be
(Continued)
Trailering is different than just Weight of the Trailer Trailer weight rating (TWR) is
driving the vehicle by itself. calculated assuming the tow vehicle
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Trailering means changes in has only the driver but all required
handling, acceleration, braking, It depends on how the rig is used. trailering equipment. Weight of
durability, and fuel economy. Speed, altitude, road grades, additional optional equipment,
Successful, safe trailering takes outside temperature, and how much passengers, and cargo in the tow
correct equipment, and it has to be the vehicle is used to pull a trailer vehicle must be subtracted from the
used properly. are all important. It can depend on trailer weight rating.
any special equipment on the
The following information has many Use the following chart to determine
vehicle, and the amount of tongue
time-tested, important trailering tips how much the vehicle can weigh,
weight the vehicle can carry. See
and safety rules. Many of these are based upon the vehicle model and
“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
important for your safety and that of options.
in this section for more information.
your passengers. So please read Weights listed apply for
this section carefully before pulling a conventional trailers and fifth-wheel
trailer. trailers unless otherwise noted.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 2 177 kg (4,800 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.3L V6 — With Automatic
3.73 2 449 kg (5,400 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
Transmission (c)
4.3L V6 — With Manual
3.73 1 860 kg (4,100 lbs) 3 938 kg (8,683 lbs)
Transmission (c)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L LMG V8 3.08 2 994 kg (6,600 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L LMG V8, K5L HD
3.08 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Cooling Pkg
5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 1 996 kg (4,400 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 3 130 kg (6,900 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling
3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
3.42 4 173 kg (9,200 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering
3.73 4 853 kg (10,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8L V8 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (LMG) 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 (LMG) K5L HD
3.08 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Cooling Pkg

3.08 3 175 kg (7,000 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Pkg (XFE)
6.2L V8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3.73 4 808 kg (10,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 2 359 kg (5,200 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.23 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 3 992 kg (8,800 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 903 kg (6,400 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (c) 3.08 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.73 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8L V8 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

6.2L V8 3.42 2 903 kg (6,400 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3.73 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3L V6 (c) 3.73 2 223 kg (4,900 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (c) 3.42 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 858 kg (6,300 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3L V8 (c) 3.08 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (c) 3.08 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 — Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
6.0L V8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 486 kg (14,300 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 — Payload Performance
3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Pkg (UB7)

2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3500 Series 2WD Regular Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Conventional Trailer
4.10 6 577 kg (14,500 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer

6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab (e)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 128kg (9,100 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box (e)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 309kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 305 kg (13,900 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer

3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 214 kg (13,700 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box (e)
6.0L V8 3.73 4 173 kg (9,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box (e)
4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
4.10 6 169 kg (13,600 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer

(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
(b) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 680 kg
(1,500 lbs) maximum.
(c) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
(d) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1 361 kg
(e) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1 587 kg
Ask your dealer for trailering Weight of the Trailer Tongue Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
information or advice, or write us at includes the curb weight of the
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
our Customer Assistance Offices. vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and
very important because it is also
See Customer Assistance Offices the people who will be riding in the
part of the vehicle weight. The
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or vehicle as well as trailer tongue
Customer Assistance Offices weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
information.
passengers and cargo in the vehicle Trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 to 15 percent and fifth-wheel or
reduce the amount of tongue weight gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailer
the vehicle can carry, which will also weight up to the maximums for vehicle series and hitch type.:
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
can tow. See “ Vehicle Load Limits” Maximum Tongue
for more information about the Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight
vehicle's maximum load capacity. 1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs)
2500HD/3500 Weight Carrying 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)
2500HD/3500 Weight Distributing 680 kg (1,500 lbs)
1500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 680 kg (1,500 lbs)
2500HD Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 134 kg (2,500 lbs)
3500 Single Rear
Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 360 kg (3,000 lbs)
Wheels
3500 Dual Rear
Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 587 kg (3,500 lbs)
Wheels
Do not exceed the maximum Trailering may be limited by the

allowable tongue weight for the vehicle's ability to carry tongue
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch weight. Tongue or kingpin weight
extension that will position the hitch cannot cause the vehicle to exceed
ball closest to the vehicle. This will the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
help reduce the effect of trailer Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
tongue weight on the rear axle.
Axle Weight Rating). See “Total Weight of the Trailering Larger trailers may require a
Weight on the Vehicle's Tires” later Combination weight-distributing hitch that
in this section for more information. uses spring bars to distribute
It is important that the combination the trailer tongue weight among
After loading the trailer, weigh of the tow vehicle and trailer
the trailer and then the tongue, the two vehicle and trailer axles.
does not exceed any of its weight Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitches
separately, to see if the weights are ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
proper. If they are not, adjustments may also be used. See “Weight of
Trailer Weight Rating, or Tongue the Trailer Tongue” under Trailer
might be made by moving some Weight. The only way to be sure
items around in the trailer. Towing on page 9‑89 for rating
it is not exceeding any of these limits with various hitch types.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle
and trailer combination, fully loaded If a step-bumper hitch will be used,
Tires for the trip, getting individual the bumper could be damaged in
Be sure the vehicle's tires are weights for each of these items. sharp turns. Make sure there
inflated to the inflation pressures is ample room when turning to
found on the Certification Tire label Towing Equipment avoid contact between the trailer
on the drivers door or see Vehicle and the bumper.
Load Limits on page 9‑22 for more Hitches Consider using sway controls
information. Make sure not to The correct hitch equipment helps with any trailer. Ask a trailering
exceed the GVWR limit for the maintain combination control. professional about sway controls or
vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the Most small-to-medium trailers can refer to the trailer manufacturer's
tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded be towed with a weight-carrying recommendations and instructions.
for the trip including the weight of hitch which simply features a
the trailer tongue. If using a coupler latched to the hitch ball.
weight-distributing hitch, make sure
not to exceed the RGAWR before
applying the weight distribution
spring bars.
Weight‐Distributing Hitch Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck There should be at least six inches
Adjustment Trailering of clearance between the top of the
pickup box and the bottom of the
Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailers trailer shelf that extends over
can be used with many pickup the box.
models. These trailers place a
larger percentage of the weight Make sure the hitch is attached to
(kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle the tow vehicle frame rails. Do not
than conventional trailers. Make use the pickup box for support.
sure this weight does not cause the Safety Chains
vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.
Always attach chains between the
Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
weight should be 15 to 25 percent of
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer weight up to the maximum
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
amount specified in the trailering
from contacting the road if it
chart for the vehicle. See “Weight of
A. Body to Ground Distance becomes separated from the hitch.
the Trailer” under Trailer Towing on
B. Front of Vehicle Instructions about safety chains
may be provided by the hitch
When using a weight-distributing The hitch should be located in the manufacturer or by the trailer
hitch, the spring bars should be pickup bed so that its centerline is manufacturer. If the trailer being
adjusted so the distance (A) is the over or slightly in front of the rear towed weighs up to 2 271 kg
same after coupling the trailer to the axle. Take care that it is not so far (5,000 lbs) with a factory-installed
tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch. forward that it will contact the back step bumper, safety chains may be
of the cab in sharp turns. This is attached to the attaching points on
especially important for short box the bumper; otherwise, safety
pickups. Trailer pin box extensions chains should be attached to holes
and sliding fifth-wheel hitch on the trailer hitch platform. Always
assemblies can help this condition.
leave just enough slack so the

. The trailer's brake system will Notice: Leaving electrical
combination can turn. Never allow use less than 0.3 cc (0.02 cubic equipment on for extended
safety chains to drag on the ground. inch) of fluid from the vehicle's periods will drain the battery.
master cylinder. Otherwise, both Always turn off electrical
Trailer Brakes braking systems will not work equipment when not in use
A loaded trailer that weighs more well or at all. and do not use equipment that
than 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs to If everything checks out this far, exceeds the maximum amperage
have its own brake system that is make the brake tap at the port on rating for the auxiliary battery
adequate for the weight of the the master cylinder that sends the provision.
trailer. Be sure to read and follow fluid to the rear brakes. Use only
the instructions for the trailer brakes
Trailer Wiring Harness
steel brake tubing to make the tap.
so they are installed, adjusted, and The vehicle is equipped with one of
maintained properly. Auxiliary Battery the following wiring harnesses for
If the vehicle is equipped with The auxiliary battery provision can towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in
StabiliTrak, the trailer cannot tap be used to supply electrical power camper.
into the vehicle's hydraulic brake to additional equipment that may be Basic Trailer Wiring
system. added, such as a slide-in camper.
If the vehicle has this provision, this All regular, extended cab and crew
The trailer brake system can tap relay will be located on the driver cab pickups have a seven‐wire
into the vehicle's hydraulic brake side of the vehicle, next to the trailer towing harness.
system only if: underhood electrical center. For vehicles not equipped with
. The trailer parts can withstand Be sure to follow the proper heavy duty trailering, the harness
20 650 kPa (3,000 psi) of installation instructions included is secured to the vehicle's frame
pressure. with any electrical equipment that behind the spare tire mount. The
is installed. harness requires the installation of a
trailer connector, which is available
through your dealer.
If towing a light‐duty trailer with

. Brown: Taillamps the vehicle system voltage and
a standard four‐way round pin . White: Ground properly charge the battery. If the
connector, an adapter is available .
trailer is too light for Tow/Haul
from your dealer. Light Green: Back-up Lamps Mode, or the vehicle is not
. Red: Battery Feed* equipped with Tow/Haul, turn on
Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness the headlamps as a second way to
Package . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
boost the vehicle system and
*The fuses for these two circuits charge the battery.
are installed in the underhood
electrical center, but the wires are Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring
not connected. They should be Package
connected by your dealer or a The seven-wire camper harness is
qualified service center. The fuse located under the front edge of the
and wire for the ITBC is factory pickup box on the driver side of the
installed and connected if the vehicle, attached to the frame
vehicle is equipped with an ITBC. bracket. A connector must be
The fuse for the battery feed is added to the wiring harness which
not required if the vehicle has an connects to the camper.
auxiliary battery. If the vehicle does
The harness contains the following
not have an auxiliary battery, have
camper/trailer circuits:
For vehicles equipped with heavy your dealer or authorized service
duty trailering, the harness is center install the required fuse. . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
connected to a bracket on the hitch If charging a remote (non-vehicle) . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
platform. The seven-wire harness battery, press the Tow/Haul Mode Signal
contains the following trailer circuits: button, if equipped, located at the . Brown: Taillamps
. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal end of the shift lever. This will boost
. White: Ground
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
Signal

. Light Green: Back-up Lamps Electric Brake Control Wiring ITBC must be disconnected. Do not
. Red: Battery Feed Provisions power both ITBC and aftermarket
.
controllers to control the trailer
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake These wiring provisions are brakes at the same time.
included with the vehicle as part of
the trailer wiring package. These Tow/Haul Mode
provisions are for an electric brake
controller. The instrument panel
contains blunt cut wires behind the
steering column for the trailer brake
controller. The harness contains the
following wires:
. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to
Trailer Connector
. Red/Black: Battery
. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
If the vehicle is equipped with the . White: Ground
“Heavy-Duty Trailering” option,
The harness should be installed by
please refer to “Heavy-Duty Trailer Pressing this button at the end of
your dealer or a qualified service
Wiring Package” earlier in this the shift lever turns on and off the
center.
section. Tow/Haul Mode.
If the vehicle is equipped with an
When the camper-wiring harness is
Integrated Trailer Brake Control
ordered without the heavy-duty
(ITBC) System, the blunt cuts exist,
trailering package, an eight-wire
but are not connected further in the
harness with a seven-pin connector
harness. If an aftermarket trailer
is located at the rear of the vehicle
brake controller is installed, the
and is tied to the vehicle's frame.

. When pulling a heavy trailer Integrated Trailer Brake
or a large or heavy load in Control System
stop-and-go traffic.
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in busy
parking lots where improved low
This indicator light on the instrument speed control of the vehicle is
panel cluster comes on when the desired.
Tow/Haul Mode is on. Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
when lightly loaded or with no trailer The vehicle may have an Integrated
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
at all will not cause damage. Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system
when pulling a heavy trailer or a
However, there is no benefit to the for electric trailer brakes.
large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul
Mode on page 9‑46 for more selection of Tow/Haul when the This symbol is located on the Trailer
information. vehicle is unloaded. Such a Brake Control Panel on vehicles
selection when unloaded may with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Tow/Haul is designed to be most result in unpleasant engine and Control system. The power output to
effective when the vehicle and transmission driving characteristics the trailer brakes is based on the
trailer combined weight is at least and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ amount of brake pressure being
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Haul is recommended only when applied by the vehicle’s brake
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). pulling a heavy trailer or a large or system. This available power output
See “Weight of the Trailer” under heavy load. to the trailer brakes can be adjusted
Trailer Towing on page 9‑89.
to a wide range of trailering
Tow/Haul is most useful under
situations.
the following driving conditions:
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load through
rolling terrain.
The ITBC system is integrated The ITBC system is powered

with the vehicle’s brake, antilock through the vehicle's electrical WARNING (Continued)
brake, and StabiliTrak (if equipped) system. Turning the ignition off will
systems. In trailering conditions that also turn off the ITBC system. The the availability of controllers,
cause the vehicle’s antilock brake or ITBC system is fully functional only check with your trailer
StabiliTrak systems to activate, when the ignition is in ON or manufacturer or dealer.
power sent to the trailer's brakes in RUN.
will be automatically adjusted to The ITBC system can only be used When trailering, make sure of the
minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This with trailers with electric brakes. following:
does not imply that the trailer has
StabiliTrak.
. The ITBC system is used only
2500 and 3500 series vehicles with
{ WARNING with trailers that are equipped
with electric brakes.
StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Connecting a trailer that is not
Control (TSC) feature. See Trailer
. All applicable local and federal
compatible with the ITBC system
Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑116. laws and regulations are
may result in reduced or complete followed.
2500 and 3500 series vehicles with loss of trailer braking. There
. All electrical and mechanical
StabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist may be an increase in stopping
(HSA) feature. See Hill Start Assist distance or trailer instability which connections to the trailer are
(HSA) on page 9‑66. could result in personal injury or made correctly.
If the vehicle’s brake, antilock damage to the vehicle, trailer, . The trailer’s brakes are in proper
brake, or StabiliTrak systems are or other property. An aftermarket working condition.
not functioning properly, the ITBC controller may be available for . The trailer and vehicle are
system may not be fully functional use with trailers with surge, air, properly loaded for the towing
or may not function at all. Make or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailer condition.
sure all of these systems are brake systems. To determine the
fully operational to ensure full type of brakes on the trailer and
functionality of the ITBC system. (Continued)
The ITBC system is a column. See Instrument Panel The Trailer Brake Display Page can
factory-installed item. Out‐of‐factory (Base/Uplevel Version) on page 1‑2 be displayed by performing any of
installation of this system should not or Instrument Panel (Premium the following actions:
be attempted. GM is not responsible Version) on page 1‑6 for more . Scrolling through the DIC menu
for warranty or performance of the information. The control panel pages using the odometer trip
system resulting from out‐of‐factory allows adjustment to the amount of stem or the DIC Vehicle
installation. output, referred to as trailer gain, Information button (if equipped).
available to the electric trailer
Trailer Brake Control Panel brakes and allows manual . Pressing a Trailer Gain
application of the trailer brakes. button—If the Trailer Brake
The Trailer Brake Control Panel is Display Page is not currently
used along with the Trailer Brake displayed, pressing a Trailer
Display Page on the DIC to adjust Gain button will first recall the
and display power output to the current Trailer Gain setting. After
trailer brakes. the Trailer Brake Display Page
is displayed, each press and
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page release of the gain buttons will
The ITBC system displays then cause the Trailer Gain
messages on the vehicle’s Driver setting to change.
Information Center (DIC). See . Activating the Manual Trailer
Driver Information Center (DIC) on Brake Apply lever.
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply . Connecting a trailer equipped
The display page indicates Trailer with electric trailer brakes.
Lever
Gain setting, power output to the
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons electric trailer brakes, trailer All DIC warning and service
connection, and system operational messages must first be
The ITBC system has a control acknowledged by the driver by
panel located on the instrument status.
pressing the odometer trip stem or
panel to the left of the steering
the DIC Vehicle Information button the amount of vehicle braking

. There is a fault present in the
(if equipped) before the Trailer present and relative to the Trailer wiring to the electric trailer
Brake Display Page can be Gain setting. Output is displayed brakes (a CHECK TRAILER
displayed and Trailer Gain can from 0 to 10 bars for each gain WIRING message will also be
be adjusted. setting. displayed on the DIC)
TRAILER GAIN: This setting is On vehicles with Trailer Sway
. There is a fault in the ITBC
displayed any time the Trailer Brake Control (TSC) or Hill Start Assist system (a SERVICE TRAILER
Display Page is active. This setting (HSA), output to the electric trailer BRAKE SYSTEM message will
can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 brakes may be displayed when the also be displayed in the DIC)
with either a trailer connected or systems are active. See Trailer Manual Trailer Brake Apply
disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑116
Gain, press one of the Trailer Gain and Hill Start Assist (HSA) on The Manual Trailer Brake Apply
adjustment buttons located on the page 9‑66. Lever is located on the Trailer Brake
Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press Control Panel and is used to apply
The Trailer Output will indicate the trailer’s electric brakes
and hold a gain button to cause the “- - - - - -” on the Trailer Brake
Trailer Gain to continuously adjust. independent of the vehicle’s brakes.
Display Page whenever the This lever is used in the Trailer Gain
To turn the output to the trailer off, following occur:
adjust the Trailer Gain setting to Adjustment Procedure to properly
0.0 (zero). . No trailer is connected adjust the power output to the trailer
brakes. Sliding the lever to the left
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default . A trailer without electric brakes
will apply only the trailer brakes.
setting. To properly adjust trailer is connected (no DIC message
The power output to the trailer is
gain, see “Trailer Gain Adjustment is displayed)
indicated in the Trailer Brake
Procedure” later in this section. . A trailer with electric brakes Display Page on the DIC. If the
TRAILER OUTPUT: This is has become disconnected vehicle’s service brakes are applied
displayed any time a trailer with (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING while using the Manual Trailer Brake
electric brakes is connected. Output message will also be displayed Apply Lever, the trailer output power
to the electric brakes is based on on the DIC) will be the greater of the two.
The trailer's and the vehicle's brake Use the following procedure to
. In the Trailer Output display
lamps will come on when either correctly adjust Trailer Gain for on the DIC, “- - - - - -” will
vehicle braking or manual trailer each towing condition: disappear if there is no
brakes are applied. error present. Connecting a
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are trailer without electric
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure in proper working condition. brakes will not clear the six
Trailer Gain should be set for a 2. Connect a properly loaded dashed lines.
specific trailering condition and trailer to the vehicle and make 4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using
must be adjusted any time vehicle all necessary mechanical and the gain adjustment (+ / -)
loading, trailer loading, or road electrical connections. See buttons on the Trailer Brake
surface conditions change. Vehicle Load Limits on Control Panel.
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is 5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer
needed for the best trailer stopping 3. After the electrical connection is attached on a level road surface
performance. A trailer that is made to a trailer equipped with representative of the towing
over-gained may result in locked electric brakes: condition and free of traffic at
trailer brakes. A trailer that is . A TRAILER CONNECTED about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
under-gained may result in not message will be briefly 25 mph) and fully apply the
enough trailer braking. Both of displayed on the DIC. Manual Trailer Brake Apply
these conditions may result in Lever.
poorer stopping and stability of
. The Trailer Brake Display
the vehicle and trailer. Page will appear on the Adjusting trailer gain at speeds
DIC showing TRAILER lower than 32 to 40 km/h
GAIN and TRAILER (20 to 25 mph) may result in
OUTPUT. an incorrect gain setting.
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just TRAILER CONNECTED: This If the disconnect occurs while
below the point of trailer wheel message will be briefly displayed the vehicle is moving, this
lock-up, indicated by trailer when a trailer with electric brakes is message will continue until
wheel squeal or tire smoke first connected to the vehicle. This the ignition is turned off. This
when a trailer wheel locks. message will automatically turn off message will also turn off if
Trailer wheel lock-up may not in about 10 seconds. The driver can the driver acknowledges this
occur if towing a heavily loaded also acknowledge this message message or if the trailer harness
trailer. In this case, adjust the before it automatically turns off. is re-connected.
Trailer Gain to the highest CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This 2. There is an electrical fault in
allowable setting for the towing message will be displayed if: the wiring to the electric trailer
condition. 1. The ITBC system first brakes. This message will
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time determines connection to a continue as long as there is an
vehicle loading, trailer loading or trailer with electric brakes and electrical fault in the trailer
road surface conditions change then the trailer harness becomes wiring. This message will also
or if trailer wheel lock-up is disconnected from the vehicle. turn off if the driver
noticed at any time while towing. acknowledges this message.
If the disconnect occurs while
the vehicle is stationary, this To determine if the electrical fault is
Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages on the vehicle side or trailer side of
message will automatically turn
In addition to displaying TRAILER off in about 30 seconds. This the trailer wiring harness
GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT message will also turn off if connection, do the following:
through the DIC, trailer connection the driver acknowledges this 1. Disconnect the trailer wiring
and ITBC system status are message or if the trailer harness harness from the vehicle.
displayed on the DIC. is re-connected. 2. Turn the ignition off.
3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the
ignition back to RUN.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING If either the CHECK TRAILER Trailer Sway
message re-appears, the WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER
electrical fault is on the BRAKE SYSTEM message is
Control (TSC)
vehicle side. displayed while driving the vehicle, Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING power is no longer available to the
trailer brakes. When traffic 2500 and 3500 series vehicles with
message only re-appears when StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway
connecting the trailer wiring conditions allow, carefully pull the
vehicle over to the side of the road Control (TSC) feature. If the vehicle
harness to the vehicle, the is towing a trailer and the system
electrical fault is on the and turn the ignition off. Check the
wiring connection to the trailer and detects that the trailer is swaying,
trailer side. the vehicle's brakes are applied
turn the ignition back on. If either of
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE these messages continues, either without the driver pressing the brake
SYSTEM: This message will be the vehicle or trailer needs service. pedal. If the vehicle is equipped with
displayed when there is a problem the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
with the ITBC system. If this An authorized GM dealer may (ITBC) system, StabiliTrak may also
message persists over multiple be able to diagnose and repair apply the trailer brakes. The TCS/
ignition cycles, there is a problem problems with the trailer. However, StabiliTrak warning light will flash on
with the ITBC system. Take the any diagnosis and repair of the the instrument panel cluster to notify
vehicle to an authorized GM dealer trailer is not covered under the the driver to reduce speed. If the
to have the ITBC system diagnosed vehicle warranty. Please contact trailer continues to sway, StabiliTrak
and repaired. your trailer dealer for assistance will reduce engine torque to help
with trailer repairs and trailer slow the vehicle.
warranty information.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3 for more information.
Conversions and Adding a Snow Plow or Some vehicles are built with a
special snow plow prep package,
Add-Ons Similar Equipment called RPO VYU. If the vehicle has
Before installing a snow plow on the this option, you can add a plow to it,
Add-On Electrical vehicle, here are some things you provided certain weights, such
need to know: as the weights on the vehicle's
Equipment axles and the Gross Vehicle
Notice: If the vehicle does not
Notice: Do not add anything Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.
have the snow plow prep
electrical to the vehicle unless The plow the vehicle can carry
package, adding a plow can
you check with your dealer first. depends on many things, such as:
damage the vehicle, and the
Some electrical equipment can
repairs would not be covered by . The options the vehicle came
damage the vehicle and the
warranty. Unless the vehicle was with, and the weight of those
damage would not be covered
built to carry a snow plow, do options.
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
not add one to the vehicle. If the
add-on electrical equipment can . The weight and number of
vehicle has the snow plow prep
keep other components from passengers intended to be
package, called RPO VYU, then
working as they should. carried.
the payload the vehicle can carry
Add-on equipment can drain the will be reduced when a snow . The weight of items added
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if plow is installed. The vehicle can to the vehicle, like a tool box or
the vehicle is not operating. be damaged if either the front or truck cap.
The vehicle has an airbag system. rear axle ratings or the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) are
. The total weight of any
Before attempting to add anything additional cargo intended
electrical to the vehicle, see exceeded.
to be carried.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑44 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑45.
Say, for example, you have a 318 kg

. Follow the snow plow . The total vehicle must not
(700 lb) snow plow. The total weight manufacturer's exceed the GVW rating.
of all occupants and cargo inside recommendations regarding Front axle reserve capacity is the
the cab should not exceed 135 kg rear ballast. Rear ballast may be difference between the Gross Axle
(300 lb). This means that you may required to ensure a proper front Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front
only be able to carry one passenger. and rear weight distribution ratio, axle weight of the vehicle with full
But, even this may be too much if even though the actual weight at fuel and passengers. Basically, it is
there is other equipment already the front axle may be less than the amount of weight that can be
adding to the weight of the vehicle. the front axle rating. added to the front axle before
Here are some guidelines for safely
. The snow plow manufacturer or reaching the front GAWR.
carrying a snow plow on the vehicle: installer can assist you in The front axle reserve capacity
determining the amount of rear for the vehicle can be found
. Make sure the weight on the ballast required, to help make
front and rear axles does not in the lower right corner of the
sure the snowplow/vehicle Certification/Tire label, as shown.
exceed the axle rating for each. combination does not exceed
. For the front axle, if more cargo the GVW rating, the front and
or passengers must be carried, rear axle ratings, and the front
appropriate counter ballast must and rear weight distribution ratio.
be installed rear of the rear axle.
Counter ballast must be properly
secured so it will not move
during driving.
In order to calculate the amount of For example, adding a 318 kg

weight any front accessory, such as (700 lb) snow plow actually adds
a snow plow, is adding to the front more than 318 kg (700 lb) to the
axle, use the following formula: front axle. Using the formula, if the
snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of
the front axle and the wheel base is
305 cm (10 ft), then:
W = 318 kg (700 lb)
A = 122 cm (4 ft)
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. =
(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg
United States (980 lbs)
So, if the front axle reserve capacity
is more than 445 kg (980 lbs), the
snow plow could be added without
exceeding the front GAWR.
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the
accessory is adding to the Heavier equipment can be added on
front axle. the front of the vehicle if it is
compensated for by carrying fewer
Where: passengers, less cargo, or by
W = Weight of added accessory positioning cargo toward the rear.
A = Distance that the accessory
is in front of the front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
Canada
This has the effect of reducing the Keep in mind that reserve capacity
load on the front. However, the front WARNING (Continued) numbers are intended as a guide
GAWR, rear GAWR, and the Gross when selecting the amount of
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must weight may be less than the equipment or cargo the truck can
never be exceeded. front GAWR, and the total vehicle carry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,
weight is less than the gross rear, or total weight, go to a weigh
vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
{ WARNING Maintaining a proper front and
station and weigh the vehicle. Your
dealer can also help with this.
On some vehicles that have rear weight distribution ratio is
The total vehicle reserve
certain front mounted equipment, necessary to provide proper
capacity for the vehicle can
such as a snow plow, it may be braking performance.
be found in the lower right corner
possible to load the front axle to of the Certification/Tire label as
the front gross axle weight rating Total vehicle reserve capacity is the shown previously.
(GAWR) but not have enough difference between the GVWR and See your dealer for additional
weight on the rear axle to have the weight of the truck with full fuel advice and information about using
proper braking performance. and passengers. It is the amount of a snow plow on the vehicle. Also,
If the brakes cannot work weight that can be added to the see Vehicle Load Limits on
properly, you could have a crash. vehicle before reaching the GVWR. page 9‑22.
To help the brakes work properly
when a snow plow is installed,
always follow the snow plow
manufacturer or installer's
recommendation for rear ballast
to ensure a proper front and
rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual front
(Continued)
Emergency Roof Lamp Pickup Conversion to

Provisions Chassis Cab
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow We are aware that some vehicle
plow prep package also have an owners might consider having the
emergency roof lamp provision pickup box removed and a
package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the commercial or recreational body
emergency roof lamp is provided installed. Owners should be aware
above the overhead console. See that, as manufactured, there are
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on differences between a chassis cab
page 6‑7 for switch location. and a pickup with the box removed
which could affect vehicle safety.
The components necessary to adapt
a pickup to permit its safe use with
a specialized body should be
installed by the body builder.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Park Brake and P (Park)

Vehicle Care Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-40
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Wiper Blade
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-20 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
General Information Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-41
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
California Proposition Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-26 Headlamp Aiming
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Overheated Engine Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
California Perchlorate Protection
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Bulb Replacement
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Accessories and Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-29 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Vehicle Checks Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Pick-Up Box Identification
Doing Your Own Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 and Fender Marker
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Taillamps (Chassis Cab
Engine Compartment Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12 Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-37 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Automatic Transmission Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-38 Center High-Mounted
Fluid (4-Speed Automatic Transmission Shift Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Lock Control Function Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Automatic Transmission Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-46
Fluid (6-Speed Ignition Transmission Lock Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
10-2 Vehicle Care
Electrical System When It Is Time for New General Information

Electrical System Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 For service and parts needs,
Fuses and Circuit Different Size Tires and visit your dealer. You will receive
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Engine Compartment Fuse Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people.
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Genuine GM parts have one of
Instrument Panel Fuse Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks:
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-77
Wheels and Tires Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-56 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-93
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Jump Starting
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-99
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Recreational Vehicle
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Appearance Care
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to

complement and function with other
65 Warning Modifications systems on the vehicle. Your GM
Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories or dealer can accessorize the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals making modifications to the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories.
known to the State of California to can affect vehicle performance and When you go to your GM dealer
cause cancer and birth defects or safety, including such things as and ask for GM Accessories, you
other reproductive harm. Engine airbags, braking, stability, ride will know that GM-trained and
exhaust, many parts and systems, and handling, emissions systems, supported service technicians will
many fluids, and some component aerodynamics, durability, and perform the work using genuine
wear by-products contain and/or electronic systems like antilock GM Accessories.
emit these chemicals. brakes, traction control, and stability Also, see Adding Equipment to the
control. These accessories or Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
California Perchlorate modifications could even cause page 3‑45.
malfunction or damage not covered
Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty.
Certain types of automotive
Damage to vehicle components
applications, such as airbag
resulting from modifications or the
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
installation or use of non‐GM
and lithium batteries contained in
certified parts, including control
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
module or software modifications,
may contain perchlorate materials.
is not covered under the terms of
Special handling may be necessary.
the vehicle warranty and may affect
For additional information, see
remaining warranty coverage for
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
affected parts.
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks WARNING (Continued)

This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Doing Your Own Check on page 3‑46.
. Be sure to use the proper
Service Work nuts, bolts, and other Keep a record with all parts receipts
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the fasteners. Metric and and list the mileage and the date of
hybrid supplement for more English fasteners can any service work performed. See
information. be easily confused. If the Maintenance Records on
wrong fasteners are used, page 11‑12.
{ WARNING parts can later break or fall
off. You could be hurt.
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
If doing some of your own service
try to do service work on a vehicle
work, use the proper service
without knowing enough about it.
manual. It tells you much more
. Be sure you have sufficient about how to service the vehicle
knowledge, experience, than this manual can. To order the
the proper replacement proper service manual, see Service
parts, and tools before Publications Ordering Information
attempting any vehicle on page 13‑14.
maintenance task.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood 3. Push the secondary hood

release to the right.
To open the hood:
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then bring the hood from full
open to within 152 mm (6 in)
from the closed position, pause,
and push the front center of the
1. Pull the handle with this symbol hood with a swift, firm motion to
on it. It is located inside the fully close the hood.
vehicle to the left of the brake
pedal. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle
and locate the secondary hood
release. This is located under
the hood, near the center of the
grille.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
5.3 L V8 Engine Shown (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine, 6.0 L V8 Engine, and 6.2 L V8 Engine Similar)
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When L. Engine Compartment Fuse
page 10‑20. to Add Engine Oil” under Block on page 10‑48.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Engine Oil on page 10‑8. M. Windshield Washer Fluid
Pressure Cap. See Cooling H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
System on page 10‑21. View). See “Checking Engine Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
C. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Oil” under Engine Oil on page 10‑29.
Starting on page 10‑94. page 10‑8. If the vehicle has a diesel engine
D. Battery on page 10‑33. I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of and/or an Allison Transmission, see
View). See Cooling System on the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal page 10‑21.
(Out of View). See Jump
Starting on page 10‑94. J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid on
F. Automatic Transmission page 10‑29.
Dipstick (Out of View). See
“Checking the Fluid Level” K. Brake Master Cylinder
under Automatic Transmission Reservoir. See Brake Fluid on
Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) page 10‑31.
on page 10‑13 or Automatic
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) on page 10‑16.
10-8 Vehicle Care

. Change the engine oil at the
Engine Oil appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential:
For diesel engine vehicles, see Life System on page 10‑12.
“Engine Oil” in the Duramax Diesel 1. If the engine has been running
. Always dispose of engine oil recently, turn off the engine and
Supplement.
properly. See “What to Do with allow several minutes for the oil
To ensure proper engine Used Oil” in this section. to drain back into the oil pan.
performance and long life, careful Checking the oil level too soon
attention must be paid to engine oil. Checking Engine Oil
after engine shutoff will not
Following these simple, but It is a good idea to check the engine provide an accurate oil level
important steps will help protect oil level at each fuel fill. In order to reading.
your investment: get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
. Always use engine oil approved
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow with a paper towel or cloth, then
to the proper specification and of push it back in all the way.
the proper viscosity grade. See loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for the Remove it again, keeping the
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” tip down, and check the level.
in this section. location of the engine oil dipstick.
. Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
Vehicle Care 10-9
When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. See Engine Compartment Overview
Oil levels above or below the on page 10‑6 for the location of the
acceptable operating range engine oil fill cap.
shown on the dipstick are harmful Add enough oil to put the level
to the engine. If you find that somewhere in the proper operating
you have an oil level above the range. Push the dipstick all the way
operating range, i.e., the engine back in when through.
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
area at the tip of the dipstick, add operating range, the engine could
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil be damaged. You should drain
and then recheck the level. See out the excess oil or limit driving
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in of the vehicle and seek a service
this section for an explanation of professional to remove the
what kind of oil to use. For engine excess amount of oil.
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Notice: Use only engine oil Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
that is approved to the dexos dexos is unavailable: In the event
Selecting the right engine oil
specification or an equivalent that dexos‐approved engine oil is
depends on both the proper oil
engine oil of the appropriate not available at an oil change or for
specification and viscosity grade:
viscosity grade. Engine oils maintaining proper oil level, you
Specification approved to the dexos may use substitute engine oil
specification will show the dexos displaying the API Starburst symbol
Use and ask for engine oils with the
symbol on the container. Failure and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
dexos™ certification mark. Oils
to use the recommended engine Use of oils that do not meet the
meeting the requirements of the
oil or equivalent can result in dexos specification, however, may
vehicle should have the dexos
engine damage not covered by result in reduced performance under
certification mark on the container.
the vehicle warranty. If you certain circumstances.
This certification mark indicates that
are unsure whether the oil is
the oil has been approved to the Viscosity Grade
approved to the dexos
dexos specification.
specification, ask your SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
service provider. grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
This vehicle was filled at the factory

with dexos‐approved engine oil.
Vehicle Care 10-11
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should What to Do with Used Oil

be used. An oil of this viscosity
Used engine oil contains certain
grade will provide easier cold
elements that can be unhealthy for
starting for the engine at extremely
your skin and could even cause
low temperatures. When selecting
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
your skin for very long. Clean your
grade, be sure to always select
skin and nails with soap and water,
an oil that meets the required
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
specification, dexos. See
properly dispose of clothing or rags
“Specification” earlier in this
containing used engine oil. See the
section for more information.
manufacturer's warnings about the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine use and disposal of oil products.
Oil Flushes Used oil can be a threat to the
Do not add anything to the oil. The environment. If you change your
recommended oils with the dexos own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
specification and displaying the from the filter before disposal. Never
dexos certification mark are all that dispose of oil by putting it in the
is needed for good performance and trash or pouring it on the ground,
engine protection. into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
Engine oil system flushes are not it to a place that collects used oil.
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
10-12 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System might indicate that an oil change How to Reset the Engine Oil
is not necessary for up to a year. Life System
When to Change Engine Oil The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and, Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer system engine oil is changed so that the
that indicates when to change the at this time, the system must be
reset. For vehicles without the system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based engine oil change. Always reset the
on a combination of factors which CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message, an oil change is engine oil life to 100% after every oil
include engine revolutions, engine change. It will not reset itself. To
temperature, and miles driven. needed when the OIL LIFE
REMAINING percentage is near reset the system on most vehicles:
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is 0%. Your dealer has trained service 1. Display the OIL LIFE
indicated can vary considerably. For people who will perform this work REMAINING on the DIC. If the
the oil life system to work properly, and reset the system. It is also vehicle does not have DIC
the system must be reset every time important to check the oil regularly buttons, the vehicle must be in
the oil is changed. over the course of an oil drain P (Park) to access this display.
interval and keep it at the proper See Driver Information Center
On some vehicles, when the system level. (DIC) on page 5‑32.
has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE If the system is ever reset 2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
OIL SOON message comes on to accidentally, the oil must be button on the DIC, or the trip
indicate that an oil change is changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) odometer reset stem if the
necessary. See Engine Oil since the last oil change. vehicle does not have DIC
Messages on page 5‑44. Change Remember to reset the oil buttons, for more than
the oil as soon as possible within life system whenever the oil is five seconds. The oil life
the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is changed. will change to 100%.
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
Vehicle Care 10-13
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Automatic Transmission Notice: Too much or too
System can be reset as follows: little fluid can damage the
Fluid (4-Speed transmission. Too much can
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with Transmission)
the engine off. mean that some of the fluid could
come out and fall on hot engine
2. Fully press the accelerator When to Check and Change parts or exhaust system parts,
pedal slowly three times within Automatic Transmission Fluid starting a fire. Too little fluid
five seconds. A good time to check the automatic could cause the transmission to
3. Display the OIL LIFE transmission fluid level is when the overheat. Be sure to get an
REMAINING on the DIC. If the engine oil is changed. accurate reading if checking the
display shows 100%, the system transmission fluid.
Change the fluid and filter at the
is reset. See Driver Information intervals listed in Scheduled Wait at least 30 minutes before
Center (DIC) on page 5‑32. Maintenance on page 11‑2 and be checking the transmission fluid level
If the vehicle has a CHANGE sure to use the transmission fluid if you have been driving:
ENGINE OIL SOON message and listed in Recommended Fluids and . When outside temperatures are
it comes back on when the vehicle Lubricants on page 11‑8. above 32°C (90°F).
is started and/or the OIL LIFE
REMAINING is near 0%, the engine
How to Check Automatic . At high speed for quite a while.
oil life system has not been reset. Transmission Fluid . In heavy traffic — especially in
Repeat the procedure. Because this operation can be a hot weather.
little difficult, it may be best to have . While pulling a trailer.
this done at the dealer service
department. To get the right reading, the fluid
should be at normal operating
If not taken to the dealer, be sure to temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
follow all the instructions here or a (180°F to 200°F).
false reading on the dipstick could
result.
10-14 Vehicle Care
Get the vehicle warmed up by Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the
driving about 24 km (15 miles) when Prepare the vehicle as follows: engine, follow these steps:
outside temperatures are above
10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C 1. Park the vehicle on a level
(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third) place. Keep the engine running.
until the engine temperature gauge 2. With the parking brake applied,
moves and then remains steady for place the shift lever in P (Park).
10 minutes.
3. With your foot on the brake
A cold fluid check can be made pedal, move the shift lever
after the vehicle has been sitting for 1. Locate the transmission dipstick
through each gear range, handle with this graphic which is
eight hours or more with the engine pausing for about three seconds
off, but this is used only as a located at the rear of the engine
in each range. Then, position compartment, on the passenger
reference. Let the engine run the shift lever in P (Park).
at idle for five minutes if outside side of the vehicle.
temperatures are 10°C (50°F) or 4. Let the engine run at idle for See Engine Compartment
more. If it is colder than 10°C three minutes or more. Overview on page 10‑6 for more
(50°F), the engine may have to idle information on location.
longer. Should the fluid level be low
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
during this cold check, the fluid must
the dipstick and wipe it with a
be checked when hot before adding
clean rag or paper towel.
fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give
you a more accurate reading of the 3. Push it back in all the way, wait
fluid level. three seconds and then pull it
back out again.
Vehicle Care 10-15
Consistency of Readings Notice: Use of the incorrect

Always check the fluid level at least automatic transmission fluid may
twice using the procedure described damage the vehicle, and the
previously. Consistency (repeatable damages may not be covered by
readings) is important to maintaining the vehicle warranty. Always use
proper fluid level. If readings are still the automatic transmission fluid
inconsistent, contact the dealer. listed in Recommended Fluids
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and Lubricants on page 11‑8.
and read the lower level. The How to Add Automatic
fluid level must be in the COLD . After adding fluid, recheck the
area, below the cross-hatched Transmission Fluid fluid level as described under
area, for a cold check or in the Refer to Recommended Fluids “How to Check Automatic
HOT or cross-hatched area for a and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to Transmission Fluid,” earlier in
hot check. Be sure to keep the determine what kind of transmission this section.
dipstick pointed down to get an fluid to use. . When the correct fluid level is
accurate reading. Using a funnel, add fluid down the obtained, push the dipstick back
5. If the fluid level is in the transmission dipstick tube only in all the way; then flip the
acceptable range, push the after checking the transmission handle down to lock the dipstick
dipstick back in all the way; then fluid while it is hot. A cold check in place.
flip the handle down to lock the is used only as a reference. If the
dipstick in place. fluid level is low, add only enough
of the proper fluid to bring the
level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It does not take much fluid,
generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint).
Do not overfill.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission Change the fluid and filter at the Before checking the fluid level,
scheduled maintenance intervals prepare the vehicle as follows:
Fluid (6-Speed listed in Scheduled Maintenance on
Transmission) 1. Start the engine and park the
page 11‑2. Be sure to use the vehicle on a level surface. Keep
transmission fluid listed in the engine running.
When to Check and Change Recommended Fluids and
Automatic Transmission Fluid Lubricants on page 11‑8. 2. Apply the parking brake and
It is usually not necessary to place the shift lever in P (Park).
check the transmission fluid level.
How to Check Automatic
3. With your foot on the brake
The only reason for fluid loss is a Transmission Fluid
pedal, move the shift lever
transmission leak or overheated Notice: Too much or too through each gear range,
transmission. If a small leak is little fluid can damage the pausing for about three seconds
suspected, then use the following transmission. Too much can in each range. Then, move the
checking procedures to check the mean that some of the fluid could shift lever back to P (Park).
fluid level. However, if there is a come out and fall on hot engine
large leak, then it may be necessary 4. Allow the engine to idle
parts or exhaust system parts,
to have the vehicle towed to a (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
starting a fire. Too little fluid
dealer service department and have 1 minute. Slowly release the
could cause the transmission to
it repaired before driving the vehicle brake pedal.
overheat. Be sure to get an
further. accurate reading if checking the 5. Keep the engine running and
Notice: Use of the incorrect transmission fluid. press the Trip/Fuel button or
automatic transmission fluid trip odometer reset stem until
may damage the vehicle, and the TRANS TEMP (Transmission
damages may not be covered by Temperature) displays on the
the vehicle warranty. Always use Driver Information Center (DIC).
the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑8.
Vehicle Care 10-17
6. Using the TRANS TEMP

reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check
procedure. If the TRANS TEMP
reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the
vehicle to cool, or operate the 1. Locate the transmission
vehicle until the appropriate dipstick at the rear of the 5. If the fluid level is below the
transmission fluid temperature is engine compartment, on the COLD check band, add only
reached. passenger side of the vehicle. enough fluid as necessary to
bring the level into the COLD
Cold Check Procedure See Engine Compartment band. It does not take much
Overview on page 10‑6 for fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter
Use this procedure only as a
more information. (1 Pint). Do not overfill.
reference to determine if the
transmission has enough fluid to be 2. Flip the handle up, then pull out 6. Perform a hot check at
operated safely until a hot check the dipstick and wipe it with a the first opportunity after the
procedure can be made. The hot clean rag or paper towel. transmission reaches a normal
check procedure is the most 3. Install the dipstick by pushing operating temperature between
accurate method to check the it back in all the way; wait 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).
fluid level. Perform the hot check three seconds, and then pull it 7. If the fluid level is in the
procedure at the first opportunity. back out again. acceptable range, push the
Use this cold check procedure to
4. Check both sides of the dipstick dipstick back in all the way, then
check fluid level when the
and read the lower level. Repeat flip the handle down to lock the
transmission temperature is
the check procedure to verify the dipstick in place.
between 27°C and 32°C
(80°F and 90°F). reading.
10-18 Vehicle Care
Hot Check Procedure See Engine Compartment between 71°C and 93°C
Use this procedure to check Overview on page 10‑6 for more (160°F and 200°F), add or
the transmission fluid level when information. drain fluid as necessary to bring
the transmission fluid temperature 2. Flip the handle up, then pull out the level into the HOT band.
is between 71°C and 93°C the dipstick and wipe it with a If the fluid level is low, add only
(160°F and 200°F). clean rag or paper towel. enough fluid to bring the level
into the HOT band. It does not
The hot check is the most accurate 3. Install the dipstick by pushing take much fluid, generally less
method to check the fluid level. The it back in all the way; wait than 0.5 L (1 pint). Do not
hot check should be performed at three seconds, and then pull overfill.
the first opportunity in order to verify it back out again.
the cold check. The fluid level rises 6. If the fluid level is in the
4. Check both sides of the dipstick acceptable range, push the
as fluid temperature increases, and read the lower level. Repeat
so it is important to ensure the dipstick back in all the way, then
the check procedure to verify the flip the handle down to lock the
transmission temperature is within reading.
range. dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least
twice using the procedure described
previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If readings are still
1. Locate the transmission dipstick 5. Safe operating level is within the inconsistent, contact the dealer.
at the rear of the engine HOT cross hatch band on the
compartment, on the passenger dipstick. If the fluid level is not
side of the vehicle. within the HOT band, and the
transmission temperature is
Vehicle Care 10-19
Manual Transmission When to Check and What How to Check and Add Fluid
Fluid to Use Visually check the brake/clutch
fluid reservoir to make sure the fluid
It is not necessary to check the
level is at the MIN (minimum) line
manual transmission fluid level.
on the side of the reservoir. The
A transmission fluid leak is the
brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
should be closed and sealed.
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer service department and Do not remove the cap to check
have it repaired as soon as the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid
The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid level. Remove the cap only when
possible. See Recommended
reservoir cap has this symbol on it. necessary to add the proper fluid
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑8
The common hydraulic clutch and until the level reaches the MIN line.
for the proper fluid to use.
brake master cylinder fluid reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
Hydraulic Clutch indicated on the reservoir cap. See
It is not necessary to regularly Engine Compartment Overview on
check brake/clutch fluid unless you page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
suspect there is a leak in the
system. Adding fluid will not correct
a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
10-20 Vehicle Care
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter Cleaner/Filter
see “Pickup Models” under “Engine Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
Air Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramax® scheduled maintenance intervals remove the engine air cleaner/filter
Diesel Supplement for the correct and replace it at the first oil change from the vehicle by following
inspection and replacement after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi) Steps 1 through 6. When the engine
procedures. interval. See Scheduled air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more shake it to release loose dust and
See Engine Compartment Overview
information. If driving on dusty/dirty dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
conditions, inspect the filter at each remains covered with dirt, a new
engine air cleaner/filter.
engine oil change. filter is required. Never use
compressed air to clean the filter.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Replacing the Engine 5. Inspect or replace the engine air

Air Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten
the screws.
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/ backfires. Use caution when
filter from the housing. Take care working on the engine and do not
to dislodge as little dirt as drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter possible.
assembly. See Engine
Compartment Overview on 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/
filter sealing surfaces and the Cooling System
page 10‑6.
housing. If the vehicle has the Duramax®
2. Loosen the four screws on the diesel engine, see the Duramax
cover of the housing and lift up diesel supplement for more
the cover. information.
10-22 Vehicle Care
The cooling system allows the Notice: Using coolant other than
engine to maintain the correct { WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature
working temperature. engine, heater core, or radiator
An electric engine cooling fan can corrosion. In addition, the engine
start even when the engine is not coolant could require changing
running. To avoid injury, always sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
keep hands, clothing, and tools or 24 months, whichever occurs
away from any engine first. Any repairs would not be
cooling fan. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant
other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle is
5.3 L V8 Engine Shown hot. Do not touch them. If you do, filled with DEX-COOL® engine
(4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine, you can be burned. coolant. This coolant is designed to
6.0 L V8 Engine, and Do not run the engine if there remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
6.2 L V8 Engine Similar) 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
is a leak. If you run the engine, it
occurs first.
A. Coolant Surge Tank could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling
B. Coolant Surge Tank system and how to check and add
could be burned. Get any leak
Pressure Cap coolant when it is low. If there is a
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
C. Engine Cooling Fan problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑26.
Vehicle Care 10-23
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or
drinkable water and DEX-COOL additives are used in the vehicle
{ WARNING coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper
Adding only plain water or some This mixture: mixture of the engine coolant
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down listed in this manual for the
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside cooling system. See
and other liquids, can boil before temperature Recommended Fluids and
the proper coolant mixture will. Lubricants on page 11‑8 for
. Gives boiling protection up to more information.
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature Never dispose of engine coolant
With plain water or the wrong by putting it in the trash, pouring
mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and it on the ground, or into sewers,
hot but you would not get the corrosion streams, or bodies of water.
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts Have the coolant changed by an
could catch fire and you or authorized service center, familiar
. Helps keep the proper engine with legal requirements regarding
others could be burned. Use a temperature
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable used coolant disposal. This will help
Notice: If an improper coolant protect the environment and your
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
mixture is used, the engine could health.
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
Checking Coolant
covered by the vehicle warranty. The coolant surge tank is located in
Too much water in the mixture the engine compartment on the
can freeze and crack the engine, passenger side of the vehicle. See
radiator, heater core, and other Engine Compartment Overview on
parts. page 10‑6 for more information on
location.
10-24 Vehicle Care
The vehicle must be on a level

surface when checking the coolant { WARNING
level.
You can be burned if you spill
Check to see if coolant is visible in coolant on hot engine parts.
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant Coolant contains ethylene glycol
inside the coolant surge tank is and it will burn if the engine parts
boiling, do not do anything else until are hot enough. Do not spill
it cools down. If coolant is visible coolant on a hot engine.
but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Notice: This vehicle has a
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the specific coolant fill procedure.
coolant surge tank, but be sure the The coolant level should be at or Failure to follow this procedure
cooling system is cool before this above the FULL COLD mark. If it is could cause the engine to
is done. not, there may be a leak in the overheat and be severely
cooling system. damaged.
How to Add Coolant to the { WARNING

Coolant Surge Tank for
Gasoline Engines An electric engine cooling fan
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, under the hood can start up even
see “Cooling System” in the when the engine is not running
Duramax Diesel Supplement for and can cause injury. Keep
the proper coolant fill procedure. hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 10-25
If no coolant is visible in the surge

{ WARNING tank, add coolant as follows:
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
turn the cap when the cooling pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. surge tank pressure cap and
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
Wait for the cooling system and upper radiator hose, is no
the proper mixture to the FULL
coolant surge tank pressure cap longer hot.
COLD mark.
to cool if you ever have to turn Turn the pressure cap slowly
the pressure cap. 4. With the coolant surge tank
counterclockwise about one full
pressure cap off, start the
turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for
engine and let it run until the
that to stop. A hiss means there
engine coolant temperature
is still some pressure left.
gauge indicates approximately
2. Keep turning the pressure cap 90°C (195°F).
slowly, and remove it.
10-26 Vehicle Care
By this time, the coolant level The vehicle has several indicators Then check to see if the engine
inside the coolant surge tank to warn of engine overheating. cooling fans are running. If the
may be lower. If the level is There is a coolant temperature engine is overheating, both fans
lower, add more of the proper gauge on the vehicle's instrument should be running. If they are not,
mixture to the coolant surge tank panel. See Engine Coolant do not continue to run the engine
until the level reaches the FULL Temperature Gauge on page 5‑18. and have the vehicle serviced.
COLD mark. Notice: Engine damage from
In addition, there are ENGINE
5. Replace the pressure cap. OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, running your engine without
Be sure the pressure cap is ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE coolant is not covered by the
hand-tight and fully seated. ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS vehicle warranty. See Overheated
6. Verify coolant level after the REDUCED messages in the Driver Engine Protection Operating
engine is shut off and the Information Center (DIC) on the Mode for information on driving
coolant is cold. If necessary, instrument panel. See Engine to a safe place in an emergency.
repeat coolant fill procedure Cooling System Messages on Notice: If the engine catches fire
Steps 1 through 6. page 5‑43 and Engine Power while driving with no coolant, the
Notice: If the pressure cap is Messages on page 5‑45. vehicle can be badly damaged.
not tightly installed, coolant loss If the decision is made not to lift the The costly repairs would not be
and possible engine damage may hood when this warning appears, covered by the vehicle warranty.
occur. Be sure the cap is properly get service help right away. See See Overheated Engine
and tightly secured. Roadside Assistance Program Protection Operating Mode on
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or page 10‑28 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
Engine Overheating Roadside Assistance Program
emergency.
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
If the vehicle has the Duramax®
Diesel engine, see the Duramax If the decision is made to lift the
Diesel Supplement for more hood, make sure the vehicle is
information. parked on a level surface.
Vehicle Care 10-27
If Steam is Coming from the

. Idles for long periods in traffic
Engine Compartment WARNING (Continued) . Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing
See Overheated Engine on page 9‑89.
{ WARNING Protection Operating Mode on If the ENGINE OVERHEATED
page 10‑28 for information on STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE
Steam from an overheated engine OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
driving to a safe place in an
can burn you badly, even if you message appears with no sign of
emergency.
just open the hood. Stay away steam, try this for a minute or so:
from the engine if you see or hear
If No Steam is Coming from 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
steam coming from it. Turn it off
and get everyone away from the the Engine Compartment 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
vehicle until it cools down. Wait temperature and to the highest
The ENGINE OVERHEATED
until there is no sign of steam or fan speed. Open the windows as
STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE
coolant before you open necessary.
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
the hood. message, along with a low coolant 3. If stopped in a traffic jam, apply
If you keep driving when the condition, can indicate a serious the brake, shift to N (Neutral);
vehicles engine is overheated, problem. otherwise, shift to the highest
the liquids in it can catch fire. You gear while driving — D (Drive) or
If there is an engine overheat
3 (Third).
or others could be badly burned. warning, but no steam is seen or
Stop the engine if it overheats, heard, the problem may not be too If the temperature overheat gauge
and get out of the vehicle until the serious. Sometimes the engine can is no longer in the overheat zone
engine is cool. get a little too hot when the vehicle: or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
(Continued) . Climbs a long hill on a hot day
. Stops after high-speed driving
10-28 Vehicle Care
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly In this mode, a loss in power and improves fuel economy and reduces
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe engine performance will be noticed. fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
vehicle distance from the vehicle in This operating mode allows the loading, trailer towing, and/or high
front. If the warning does not come vehicle to be driven to a safe outside temperatures, the fan speed
back on, continue to drive normally. place in an emergency. Driving increases as the clutch more fully
If the warning continues, pull extended km (mi) and/or towing a engages, so an increase in fan
over, stop, and park the vehicle trailer in the overheat protection noise may be heard. This is normal
right away. mode should be avoided. and should not be mistaken as the
Notice: After driving in the transmission slipping or making
If there is no sign of steam, idle extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
the engine for five minutes while overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine system functioning properly. The fan
parked. If the warning is still will slow down when additional
displayed, turn off the engine until it damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair. cooling is not required and the
cools down. Also, see “Overheated clutch disengages.
Engine Protection Operating Mode” The engine oil will be severely
later in this section. degraded. Repair the cause of This fan noise may also be heard
coolant loss, change the oil and when starting the engine. It will go
reset the oil life system. See away as the fan clutch partially
Overheated Engine Engine Oil on page 10‑8. disengages.
Protection If the vehicle has electric cooling
Operating Mode Engine Fan fans, the fans may be heard
If an overheated engine condition If the vehicle has a clutched engine spinning at low speed during most
exists and the ENGINE POWER IS cooling fan, when the clutch is everyday driving. The fans may
REDUCED message displays, an engaged, the fan spins faster to turn off if no cooling is required.
overheat protection mode which provide more air to cool the engine. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
alternates firing groups of cylinders In most everyday driving conditions, towing, high outside temperatures,
helps to prevent engine damage. the fan is spinning slower and the or operation of the air conditioning
clutch is not fully engaged. This system, the fans may change to
high speed and an increase in fan
Vehicle Care 10-29
noise may be heard. This is normal How to Check Power Steering Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
and indicates that the cooling Fluid may damage the vehicle and the
system is functioning properly. The damages may not be covered by
fans will change to low speed when To check the power steering fluid: the vehicle's warranty. Always
additional cooling is no longer 1. Turn the key off and let the use the correct fluid listed in
required. engine compartment cool down. Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑8.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
Power Steering Fluid reservoir clean.
Washer Fluid
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag. What to Use
4. Replace the cap and completely When windshield washer fluid needs
tighten it. to be added, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
5. Remove the cap again and look
use. Use a fluid that has sufficient
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
See Engine Compartment Overview protection against freezing in an
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. The level should be at the FULL area where the temperature may fall
COLD mark. If necessary, add only below freezing.
When to Check Power Steering enough fluid to bring the level up to
Fluid the mark.
It is not necessary to regularly What to Use
check power steering fluid unless
To determine what kind of fluid to
there is a leak suspected in the
use, see Recommended Fluids and
system or an unusual noise is
Lubricants on page 11‑8. Always
heard. A fluid loss in this system
use the proper fluid.
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Adding Washer Fluid Notice Brakes

The vehicle has a low washer . When using concentrated This vehicle has front disc brakes
fluid message on the DIC that washer fluid, follow the and could have rear drum brakes or
comes on when the washer fluid is manufacturer's instructions rear disc brakes.
low. The message is displayed for for adding water.
15 seconds at the start of each Disc brake pads have built-in wear
. Do not mix water with indicators that make a high-pitched
ignition cycle. When the WASHER ready-to-use washer fluid.
FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message warning sound when the brake pads
Water can cause the solution are worn and new pads are needed.
displays, washer fluid will need to to freeze and damage the
be added to the windshield washer The sound can come and go or be
washer fluid tank and other heard all the time the vehicle is
fluid reservoir. parts of the washer system. moving, except when applying the
Also, water does not clean as brake pedal firmly.
well as washer fluid.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
{ WARNING
very cold. This allows for The brake wear warning sound
fluid expansion if freezing means that soon the brakes will
occurs, which could not work well. That could lead to
Open the cap with the washer damage the tank if it is a crash. When the brake wear
symbol on it. Add washer fluid completely full.
until the tank is full. See Engine warning sound is heard, have the
Compartment Overview on . Do not use engine coolant vehicle serviced.
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. (antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the Notice: Continuing to drive with
windshield washer system worn-out brake pads could result
and paint. in costly brake repair.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Some driving conditions or climates Brake linings should always be If this is not done, the brakes might
can cause a brake squeal when the replaced as complete axle sets. not work properly. For example,
brakes are first applied or lightly installing disc brake pads that are
applied. This does not mean Brake Pedal Travel wrong for the vehicle, can change
something is wrong with the brakes. See your dealer if the brake pedal the balance between the front and
Properly torqued wheel nuts are does not return to normal height, rear brakes — for the worse. The
necessary to help prevent brake or if there is a rapid increase in braking performance expected can
pulsation. When tires are rotated, pedal travel. This could be a sign change in many other ways if the
inspect brake pads for wear and that brake service might be wrong replacement brake parts are
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the required. installed.
proper sequence to torque Brake Adjustment
specifications in Capacities and Brake Fluid
Specifications on page 12‑2. Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, the brakes adjust for wear.
they do not have wear indicators,
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is Replacing Brake System Parts
heard, have the rear brake linings The braking system on a vehicle is
inspected immediately. Rear brake complex. Its many parts have to be
drums should be removed and of top quality and work well together
inspected each time the tires are The brake master cylinder reservoir
if the vehicle is to have really good is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See
removed for rotation or changing. braking. The vehicle was designed
Drum brakes have an inspection Engine Compartment Overview on
and tested with top-quality brake page 10‑6 for the location of the
hole to inspect lining wear during parts. When parts of the braking
scheduled maintenance. When the reservoir.
system are replaced, be sure to get
front brake pads are replaced, have new, approved replacement parts.
the rear brakes inspected, too.
10-32 Vehicle Care
There are only two reasons why the

brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING
might go down:
If too much brake fluid is added, it
. The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn,
because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and
installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged.
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is
. A fluid leak in the brake done on the brake hydraulic
hydraulic system can also system. See “Checking Brake
cause a low fluid level. Have the Fluid” in this section.
brake hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner The fluid level should be above
or later the brakes will not When the brake fluid falls to a low MIN. If it is not, have the brake
work well. level, the brake warning light comes hydraulic system checked to see if
on. See Brake System Warning there is a leak.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Light on page 5‑27.
Adding fluid does not correct a After work is done on the brake
leak. If fluid is added when the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule hydraulic system, make sure the
linings are worn, there will be too to determine when to check the level is above the MIN but not over
much fluid when new brake linings brake fluid. See Scheduled the MAX mark.
are installed. Add or remove brake Maintenance on page 11‑2.
What to Add
fluid, as necessary, only when work Checking Brake Fluid
is done on the brake hydraulic Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
system. Check brake fluid by looking at the from a sealed container. See
brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Recommended Fluids and
Compartment Overview on Lubricants on page 11‑8.
page 10‑6.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Always clean the brake fluid

. If brake fluid is spilled on the
reservoir cap and the area around vehicle's painted surfaces, DANGER (Continued)
the cap before removing it. This the paint finish can be
helps keep dirt from entering the damaged. Be careful not to known to the State of California to
reservoir. spill brake fluid on the cause cancer and reproductive
vehicle. If you do, wash it off harm. Wash hands after handling.
immediately.
{ WARNING
Vehicle Storage
With the wrong kind of fluid in Battery
the brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
If the vehicle is a Hybrid, see the
Hybrid Supplement for more
{ WARNING
could cause a crash. Always use information. Batteries have acid that can burn
the proper brake fluid. you and gas that can explode.
This vehicle has a maintenance free
battery (or batteries). Refer to the You can be badly hurt if you are
Notice replacement number on the original not careful. See Jump Starting on
battery label when a new battery is page 10‑94 for tips on working
. Using the wrong fluid around a battery without
can badly damage brake needed. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for battery getting hurt.
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of location.
mineral-based oil, such as Infrequent Usage: Remove the
engine oil, in the brake { DANGER black, negative (−) cable from the
hydraulic system can battery to keep the battery from
damage brake hydraulic Battery posts, terminals, and running down.
system parts so badly that related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals Extended Storage: Remove the
they will have to be replaced. black, negative (−) cable from the
Do not let someone put in (Continued) battery or use a battery trickle
the wrong kind of fluid. charger.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 to determine when to
check the lubricant.
How to Check Lubricant
Manual Shift Transfer Case Active Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
If the level is below the bottom of
the fill plug hole, located on the
Electric Shift Transfer Case transfer case, some lubricant will
need to be added. Add enough
A. Fill Plug lubricant to raise the level to the
B. Drain Plug bottom of the fill plug hole. Use care
not to overtighten the plug.
Vehicle Care 10-35
When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 to determine how often to
change the lubricant.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
Front Axle
1500 Series All Except 1500 Series
When to Check and Change
Lubricant A. Fill Plug A. Fill Plug
It is not necessary to regularly B. Drain Plug B. Drain Plug
check front axle fluid unless a leak . When the differential is cold, add
is suspected, or an unusual noise is enough lubricant to raise the
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm
problem. Have it inspected and (1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.
repaired. . When the differential is at
How to Check Lubricant operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the
To get an accurate reading, the
level to the bottom of the fill
vehicle should be on a level
plug hole.
surface.
10-36 Vehicle Care
What to Use out along the axle tubes and has

Refer to Recommended Fluids and not drained back to the sump
Lubricants on page 11‑8 to area. Therefore, a reading taken
determine what kind of lubricant five minutes after the vehicle has
to use. been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or
Rear Axle two. Remember that the rear axle
When to Check Lubricant assembly must be supported to get
a true reading.
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless a leak is How to Check Lubricant
suspected or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a All Other Series and Engines
problem. Have it inspected and To get an accurate reading, the
repaired. vehicle should be on a level
All axle assemblies are filled by surface.
volume of fluid during production. . For all 4.3 L, 4.8 L and 5.3 L
They are not filled to reach a certain 1500 Series applications, the
level. When checking the fluid level proper level is 1.0 mm to
on any axle, variations in the 19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in)
readings can be caused by factory below the bottom of the fill hole,
fill differences between the minimum located on the rear axle. Add
and the maximum fluid volume. only enough fluid to reach the
Also, if a vehicle has just been 2500HD with 6.0 L proper level.
driven before checking the fluid
level, it may appear lower than
normal because fluid has traveled
Vehicle Care 10-37

. For all 6.0 L and 6.2 L 1500 What to Use Federal law prohibits the following
Series applications, the proper acts or the causing thereof:
level is from 15 mm to 40 mm Refer to Recommended Fluids
(0.6 in to 1.6 in) below the and Lubricants on page 11‑8 to 1. The removal or rendering
bottom of the fill plug hole, determine what kind of lubricant inoperative by any person,
located on the rear axle. Add to use. other than for purposes of
only enough fluid to reach the maintenance, repair or
proper level. Noise Control System replacement, of any device or
element of design incorporated
. For all 6.0 L 2500HD Series The following information relates into any new vehicle for the
applications, the proper level is to compliance with federal noise purpose of noise control, prior to
from 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in) emission standards for vehicles its sale or delivery to the ultimate
below the bottom of the fill plug with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating purchaser or while it is in use; or
hole, located on the rear axle. (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg
Add only enough fluid to reach (10,000 lbs). The Scheduled 2. The use of the vehicle after
the proper level. Maintenance on page 11‑2 provides such device or element of
information on maintaining the design has been removed or
. For all 6.6 L Duramax Diesel rendered inoperative by any
2500HD Series applications and noise control system to minimize
degradation of the noise emission person.
all 3500 Series applications, the
proper level is from 17 mm to control system during the life of your Among those acts presumed to
21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) below vehicle. The noise control system constitute tampering are the acts
the bottom of the fill plug hole, warranty is given in your warranty listed below.
located on the rear axle. Add booklet.
Insulation:
only enough fluid to reach the These standards apply only to
proper level. vehicles sold in the United States. Removal of the noise shields or any
underhood insulation.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Engine: Starter Switch Check 3. For automatic transmission

Removal or rendering engine speed vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle
governor, if the vehicle has one,
inoperative so as to allow engine
{ WARNING should start only in P (Park) or
speed to exceed manufacturer When you are doing this N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
specifications. in any other position, contact
inspection, the vehicle could
your dealer for service.
move suddenly. If the vehicle
Fan and Drive: For manual transmission
moves, you or others could be
. Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicles, put the shift lever in
injured.
vehicle has one, or rendering Neutral, push the clutch pedal
clutch inoperative. down halfway, and try to start
1. Before starting this check, be the engine. The vehicle should
. Removal of the fan shroud, if the sure there is enough room
vehicle has one. start only when the clutch pedal
around the vehicle. is pushed down all the way to
Air Intake: 2. Firmly apply both the parking the floor. If the vehicle starts
. Removal of the air cleaner brake and the regular brake. when the clutch pedal is not
silencer. See Parking Brake on pushed all the way down,
page 9‑64. contact your dealer for service.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
Do not use the accelerator
Exhaust: pedal, and be ready to turn off
. Removal of the muffler and/or the engine immediately if it
resonator. starts.
. Removal of the exhaust pipes
and exhaust pipe clamps.
Vehicle Care 10-39
Automatic Transmission 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Ignition Transmission

See Parking Brake on
Shift Lock Control page 9‑64.
Lock Check
Function Check Be ready to apply the regular While parked, and with the parking
brake immediately if the vehicle brake set, try to turn the ignition to
{ WARNING begins to move. LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
When you are doing this 3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
. For automatic transmission
inspection, the vehicle could vehicles, the ignition should turn
move suddenly. If the vehicle engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the to LOCK/OFF only when the
moves, you or others could be shift lever is in P (Park).
injured. shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever . For manual transmission
moves out of P (Park), contact vehicles, the ignition should turn
1. Before starting this check, be your dealer for service. to LOCK/OFF only when you
sure there is enough room press the key release button.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface. On all vehicles, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set Windshield wiper blades should
the parking brake. be inspected for wear or cracking.
{ WARNING . To check the parking brake's
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for more information on
When you are doing this check, holding ability: With the engine wiper blade inspection.
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot Replacement blades come in
You or others could be injured different types and are removed in
pressure from the regular brake
and property could be damaged. different ways. To remove the wiper
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front blade:
held by the parking brake only.
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park) 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
mechanism's holding ability: connector away from the
brake at once should the vehicle
With the engine running, shift to windshield.
begin to move.
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on

each side of the blade, and turn
the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should:

. Be placed so the headlamps
The vehicle has a visual optical
are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a
headlamp aiming system. The aim
light‐colored wall.
of the headlamps has been preset
. Have all four tires on a level
at the factory and should need no
further adjustment. surface which is level all the
3. Install the new blade onto the way to the wall.
arm connector and make sure However, if the vehicle is damaged
the grooved areas are fully set in in a crash, the aim of the headlamps . Be placed so it is perpendicular
the locked position. may be affected and adjustment to the wall.
may be necessary. . Not have any snow, ice, or mud
For the proper type and size, see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on If oncoming vehicles flash their high on it.
page 11‑11. beams at you, this may mean the . Be fully assembled and all other
vertical aim of the headlamps needs work stopped while headlamp
Glass Replacement to be adjusted. aiming is being performed.
It is recommended that the vehicle . Be loaded with a full tank of
If the windshield or front side glass
be taken to your dealer for service if fuel and one person or 75 kg
must be replaced, see your dealer
the headlamps need to be adjusted. (160 lbs) sitting on the
to determine the correct
It is possible, however, to re-aim the driver seat.
replacement glass.
headlamps as described.
. Have the tires properly inflated.
. Have the spare tire in its proper
location in the vehicle.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Headlamp aiming is done with the 6. Turn on the low-beam

vehicle's low-beam headlamps. headlamps and place a piece
The high-beam headlamps will be of cardboard or equivalent in
correctly aimed if the low-beam front of the headlamp not being
headlamps are aimed properly. adjusted. This allows only the
To adjust the vertical aim: beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
1. Open the hood. See Hood on flat surface.
page 10‑5
4. At a wall, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the 7. Locate the vertical headlamp
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of aiming screws, which are under
the low‐beam headlamp. headlamp.
the hood near each headlamp
3. Record the distance from the assembly.
ground to the aim dot on the The adjustment screw can be
low‐beam headlamp. turned with an E8 Torx® socket.
Vehicle Care 10-43
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw Bulb Replacement Headlamps

until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape For the proper type of replacement
line. Turn it clockwise or bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
counterclockwise to raise or page 10‑47.
lower the angle of the beam. For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you A. Park/Turn Signal/
drop or scratch the bulb. You or Sidemarker Lamp
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the others could be injured. Be sure B. Low‐Beam Headlamp
bottom edge of the horizontal to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package. C. High‐Beam Headlamp
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
headlamp aim. The lamp on the page 10‑5
right (B) shows the incorrect 2. If you are replacing the bulb on
headlamp aim. the passenger side, remove the
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for Engine Air Cleaner cover. See
the opposite headlamp. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
10-44 Vehicle Care
3. Reach in and access the bulb Pick-Up Box Identification Taillamps (Chassis
sockets from inside the engine
compartment.
and Fender Marker Cab Models)
4. Turn the bulb socket
Lamps
counterclockwise to remove it The pick-up box identification lamps
from the headlamp assembly are LEDs. For replacement of the
and pull it straight out. LED lighting assembly contact your
dealer.
5. Unplug the electrical connector
from the old bulb by releasing To replace a pickup box fender
the clips on the bulb socket. marker lamp bulb:
6. Replace it with a new bulb. 1. Press the tab from the back to
remove the lamp.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
2. Turn the bulb socket
8. Reinstall the new bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove
into the headlamp assembly and
from the lamp assembly. A. Backup Lamp
turn it clockwise to secure.
3. Gently pry the bulb from the B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
socket. Signal Lamp
4. Install the new bulb in socket. To replace one of these bulbs:
5. Reinstall socket into lamp 1. Remove the four screws.
assembly.
2. Lift the lens off the lamp
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly. assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-45
3. Turn the old bulb

counterclockwise and pull the it
straight out from the socket.
4. Install a new bulb into the
socket, turn it clockwise, and
press it in until it is tight.
5. Reinstall the lens and the four
screws.
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps 2. Remove the two rear lamp A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
assembly screws near the Signal Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
tailgate latch strikerpost and pull B. Back-up Lamp
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate rearward until disengaging the
on page 2‑10 for more two outer pins on the taillamp 3. Turn the bulb socket
information. assembly from the vehicle. counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out
from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket
and turn the socket clockwise
into the taillamp assembly.
6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Center High-Mounted 2. On the reverse side of the lamp License Plate Lamp
assembly, remove the bulb
Stoplamp (CHMSL) and socket by turning it one quarter To replace one of these bulbs:
Cargo Lamp turn counterclockwise and pull it 1. Reach under the rear bumper for
To replace one of these bulbs: straight out. the bulb socket.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of the socket.
4. Install the bulb by pushing the
bulb straight into the socket.
5. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp asembly by turning it
one quarter turn clockwise. 2. Turn the bulb socket
1. Remove the two screws and lift
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and counterclockwise and pull the
off the lamp assembly.
tighten the screws. bulb socket out of the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out
from the bulb socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to
reinstall the bulb socket.
A. Cargo Lamp
B. Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) Bulb
Vehicle Care 10-47
Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Electrical System

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Number Low-Beam Electrical System
H11
Back-up Lamp 921LL Headlamp Overload
Back-up Lamp* 1156 License The vehicle has fuses and circuit
168
Plate Lamp breakers to protect against an
Cargo Lamp and electrical system overload.
Center Sidemarker Lamp/
High-Mounted 912LL Stoplamp/Taillamp/ 3047K When the current electrical load is
Stoplamp Turn Signal Lamp too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
(CHMSL) and closes, protecting the circuit
Stoplamp/Turn
until the current load returns to
Fender Marker Signal Lamp/ 1157
W5WLL normal or the problem is fixed. This
Lamp (If Equipped) Taillamp*
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
High-Beam * Chassis Cab Models overload and fire caused by
9005 electrical problems.
Headlamp
For replacement bulbs not listed Fuses and circuit breakers protect
here, contact your dealer. power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
10-48 Vehicle Care
If there is a problem on the road If the overload is caused by an If you ever have a problem on the
and a fuse needs to be replaced, electrical problem and not snow road and don't have a spare fuse,
the same amperage fuse can be or ice, be sure to get it fixed. you can borrow one that has the
borrowed. Choose some feature of same amperage. Just pick some
the vehicle that is not needed to use Fuses and Circuit feature of your vehicle that you can
and replace it as soon as possible. get along without – like the radio or
Breakers cigarette lighter – and use its fuse,
Headlamp Wiring If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the if it is the correct amperage.
An electrical overload may cause hybrid supplement for more Replace it as soon as you can.
the lamps to go on and off, or in information.
some cases to remain off. Have the The wiring circuits in the vehicle Engine Compartment
headlamp wiring checked right away are protected from short circuits by Fuse Block
if the lamps go on and off or a combination of fuses, circuit
remain off. breakers and fusible thermal links. If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
This greatly reduces the chance of see the Duramax Diesel supplement
Windshield Wipers for more information.
fires caused by electrical problems.
If the wiper motor overheats due to If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
heavy snow or ice, the windshield Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken hybrid supplement for more
wipers will stop until the motor cools information.
and will then restart. or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new The Engine Compartment Fuse
Although the circuit is protected one of the identical size and rating. Block is located in the engine
from electrical overload, overload compartment, on the driver side
due to heavy snow or ice may of the vehicle.
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using
the windshield wipers.
Vehicle Care 10-49
Lift the cover to access the fuse

block.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component. Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
To remove fuses, hold the end of Right Trailer Stop/ 4 Engine Controls
the fuse between your thumb and 1
Turn Lamp Engine Control Module,
index finger and pull straight out. 5
Electronic Suspension Throttle Control
2 Control, Automatic 6 Trailer Brake Controller
Level Control Exhaust
7 Front Washer
Left Trailer Stop/
3 8 Oxygen Sensor
Turn Lamp
10-50 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Antilock Brakes Fuel System Control 34 Sunroof
9 21
System 2 Module
Key Ignition System,
35
10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 22 Not Used Theft Deterrent System
Driver Side Low-Beam 23 Not Used 36 Windshield Wiper
11
Headlamp
Fuel Injectors, Ignition SEO B2 Upfitter Usage
24 37
Engine Control Module Coils (Left Side) (Battery)
12
(Battery)
25 Trailer Park Lamps Electric Adjustable
38
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Pedals
13 26 Driver Side Park Lamps
Coils (Right Side)
Climate Controls
Passenger Side Park 39
Transmission Control 27 (Battery)
14 Lamps
Module (Battery)
40 Airbag System (Ignition)
28 Fog Lamps
15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps
41 Amplifier
29 Horn
Passenger Side
16 42 Audio System
Low-Beam Headlamp Passenger Side
30
High-Beam Headlamp Miscellaneous (Ignition),
Air Conditioning 43
17 Cruise Control
Compressor Daytime Running
31
Lamps (DRL) 44 Not Used
18 Oxygen Sensors
Driver Side High-Beam 45 Airbag System (Battery)
Transmission Controls 32
19 Headlamp
(Ignition) Instrument Panel
46
Daytime Running Cluster
20 Fuel Pump 33
Lamps 2
47 Power Take-Off
Vehicle Care 10-51
Fuses Usage J-Case Usage J-Case Usage

Fuses Fuses
Auxiliary Climate
48
Control (Ignition) Heavy Duty Antilock 71 Not Used
59
Brake System
Center High-Mounted Left Bussed Electrical
49 72
Stoplamp (CHMSL) 60 Cooling Fan 2 Center 2
50 Rear Defogger Antilock Brake
61 Relays Usage
System 1
51 Heated Mirrors
62 Starter Cooling Fan High
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage FAN HI
52 Speed
(Battery) 63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Cooling Fan Low
Cigarette Lighter, Left Bussed Electrical FAN LO
53 64 Speed
Auxiliary Power Outlet Center 1
Cooling Fan
54 SEO Upfitter Usage 65 Not Used FAN CNTRL
Control
Climate Controls Heated Windshield HDLP Low-Beam
55 66
(Ignition) Washer System LO/HID Headlamp
Engine Control Module, 67 Transfer Case FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps
56 Secondary Fuel Pump
Stud 1 (Trailer A/C Air Conditioning
(Ignition)
Connector Battery CMPRSR Compressor
68
Power) (Optional - 40A
J-Case Usage Fuse Required) STRTR Starter
Fuses
Mid-Bussed Electrical PWR/TRN Powertrain
57 Cooling Fan 1 69
Center 1 FUEL PMP Fuel Pump
58 Not Used 70 Climate Control Blower PRK LAMP Parking Lamps
10-52 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage
REAR
Rear Defogger
DEFOG
RUN/CRNK Switched Power
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. Steering Wheel
3
Controls Backlight
Fuses Usage
The instrument panel fuse block 4 Driver Door Module
access door is located on the driver 1 Rear Seats
side edge of the instrument panel. Dome Lamps, Driver
Rear Accessory 5
2 Side Turn Signal
Pull off the cover to access the fuse Power Outlet
block.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Circuit

Usage
Breaker
Driver Side Turn 17 Interior Lamps
6
Signal, Stoplamp Driver Side Power
Power Door Lock 1
18 LT DR Window Circuit
Instrument Panel (Unlock Feature)
7 Breaker
Back Lighting
Rear Seat
19
Passenger Side Turn Entertainment Harness
8
Signal, Stoplamp Connector Usage
Ultrasonic Rear
Passenger Door 20 Parking Assist, Power Driver Door
9
Module, Driver Unlock Liftgate LT DR Harness
Power Door Lock 2 Power Door Lock 1 Connection
10 21
(Unlock Feature) (Lock Feature) BODY Harness Connector
Power Door Lock 2 Driver Information BODY Harness Connector
11 22
(Lock Feature) Center (DIC)
Stoplamps, Center 23 Rear Wiper Center Instrument Panel Fuse
12 High‐ Mounted Block
24 Cooled Seats
Stoplamp
Driver Seat Module, The center instrument panel fuse
13 Rear Climate Controls block is located underneath the
25 Remote Keyless Entry
14 Power Mirror System instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Body Control Driver Power Door
15 26
Module (BCM) Lock (Unlock Feature)
Accessory Power
16
Outlets
10-54 Vehicle Care
Top View Harness Circuit

Connector Usage Breaker Usage
HEADLINER Headliner Harness Passenger Side
3 Connector 3 CB1 Power Window Circuit
Breaker
HEADLINER Headliner Harness
2 Connector 2 Passenger Seat
CB2
Circuit Breaker
HEADLINER Headliner Harness
1 Connector 1 Driver Seat Circuit
CB3
Breaker
Special Equipment
SEO/
Option Upfitter CB4 Rear Sliding Window
UPFITTER
Harness Connector
Harness
Connector Usage
Body Harness
BODY 2
Connector 2
Body Harness
BODY 1
Connector 1
Body Harness
BODY 3
Connector 3
Vehicle Care 10-55
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
See the warranty manual for maintain the recommended the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure. See Tire Pressure for
. Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
High-Speed Operation on
. Worn or old tires can cause a
dangerous. page 10‑64 for inflation pressure
crash. If the tread is badly adjustment for high speed
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
driving.
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc.
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22. (Continued)
(Continued)
10-56 Vehicle Care
20‐Inch Tires when coming into contact

If the vehicle has 20‐inch with road hazards like,
P275/55R20 size tires, they potholes, or sharp edged
are classified as touring tires objects, or when sliding into
and are designed for on road a curb. The warranty does
use. The low‐profile, wide tread not cover this type of damage.
design is not recommended for Keep tires set to the correct
“off‐road” driving or commercial inflation pressure and, when
uses such as snow plowing. See possible, avoid contact with
Off-Road Driving on page 9‑7 curbs, potholes, and other
and Adding a Snow Plow or road hazards.
Similar Equipment on Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
page 9‑117 for additional Tire Sidewall Labeling
(A) Tire Size: The tire size
information. Useful information about a tire code is a combination of letters
Notice: Low‐profile tires is molded into the sidewall. and numbers used to define a
are more susceptible to The examples show a typical particular tire's width, height,
damage from road hazards passenger and light truck tire aspect ratio, construction type,
or curb impact than standard sidewall. and service description. See the
profile tires. Tire and/or wheel “Tire Size” illustration later in this
assembly damage can occur section for more detail.
Vehicle Care 10-57
(B) TPC Spec (Tire manufactured. The TIN is

Performance Criteria molded onto both sides of the
Specification): Original tire, although only one side may
equipment tires designed to have the date of manufacture.
GM's specific tire performance (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
criteria have a TPC specification of cord and number of plies in
code molded onto the sidewall. the sidewall and under the tread.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
(C) DOT (Department of grade tires based on three
Transportation): The Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
performance factors: treadwear,
Department of Transportation traction, and temperature (A) Tire Size: The tire size
(DOT) code indicates that resistance. For more code is a combination of letters
the tire is in compliance information, see Uniform Tire and numbers used to define a
with the U.S. Department Quality Grading on page 10‑75. particular tire's width, height,
of Transportation Motor aspect ratio, construction type,
Vehicle Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation and service description. See the
Load Limit: Maximum load “Tire Size” illustration later in this
(D) Tire Identification Number that can be carried and the
(TIN): The letters and numbers section for more detail.
maximum pressure needed
following the DOT code are to support that load. For
the Tire Identification Number information on recommended
(TIN). The TIN shows the tire pressure see Tire Pressure
manufacturer and plant code, on page 10‑63 and Vehicle Load
tire size, and date the tire was Limits on page 9‑22.
10-58 Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (Tire (D) DOT (Department of (F) Tire Ply Material : The type
Performance Criteria Transportation): The of cord and number of plies in
Specification): Original Department of Transportation the sidewall and under the tread.
equipment tires designed to (DOT) code indicates that (G) Single Tire Maximum
GM's specific tire performance the tire is in compliance Load: Maximum load that can
criteria have a TPC specification with the U.S. Department of be carried and the maximum
code molded onto the sidewall. Transportation Motor Vehicle pressure needed to support that
GM's TPC specifications meet or Safety Standards. load when used as a single. For
exceed all federal safety (E) Tire Identification Number information on recommended
guidelines. (TIN): The letters and numbers tire pressure see Tire Pressure
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: following the DOT code are the on page 10‑63 and Vehicle Load
Maximum load that can be Tire Identification Number Limits on page 9‑22.
carried and the maximum (TIN). The TIN shows the
pressure needed to support manufacturer and plant code,
that load when used in a dual tire size, and date the tire was
configuration. For information on manufactured. The TIN is
recommended tire pressure see molded onto both sides of the
Tire Pressure on page 10‑63 tire, although only one side may
andVehicle Load Limits on have the date of manufacture.
page 9‑22.
Vehicle Care 10-59
Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit (F) Service Description: These
number that indicates the tire characters represent the load
Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. index and speed rating of the
The examples show a typical For example, if the tire size tire. The load index represents
passenger vehicle and light aspect ratio is 75, as shown in the load carrying capacity a tire
truck tire size. item C of the tire illustration, is certified to carry. The speed
it would mean that the tire's rating is the maximum speed a
sidewall is 75 percent as high tire is certified to carry a load.
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire the tire. The letter R means
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The ply construction; and the letter B (A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)
letter P as the first character in means belted‐bias ply Tire: The United States version
the tire size means a passenger construction. of a metric tire sizing system.
vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of The letters LT as the first two
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. characters in the tire size mean
and Rim Association. a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
and Rim Association.
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
10-60 Vehicle Care
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of Accessory Weight: The
number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches. combined weight of optional
width in millimeters from (F) Load Range : Load Range. accessories. Some examples
sidewall to sidewall. of optional accessories are
(G) Service Description: The automatic transmission, power
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit service description indicates the
number that indicates the tire steering, power brakes, power
load index and speed rating of a windows, power seats, and air
height‐to‐width measurements. tire. If two numbers are given as
For example, if the tire size conditioning.
in the example, 120/116, then
aspect ratio is 75, as shown this represents the load index for Aspect Ratio: The relationship
in item C of the light truck single versus dual wheel usage of a tire's height to its width.
(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, it (single/dual). The speed rating is Belt: A rubber coated layer of
would mean that the tire's the maximum speed a tire is cords that is located between
sidewall is 75 percent as high certified to carry a load. the plies and the tread. Cords
as it is wide. may be made from steel or other
(D) Construction Code: A Tire Terminology and reinforcing materials.
letter code is used to indicate Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains
the type of ply construction in steel wires wrapped by steel
the tire. The letter R means Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto
radial ply construction; the the rim.
letter D means diagonal or outward on each square inch
bias ply construction; and the of the tire. Air pressure is
letter B means belted‐bias ply expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
construction. or psi (pounds per square inch).
Vehicle Care 10-61
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
in which the plies are laid at Number (TIN), an alphanumeric tire used on light duty trucks and
alternate angles less than designator which can also some multipurpose passenger
90 degrees to the centerline of identify the tire manufacturer, vehicles.
the tread. production plant, brand, and Load Index: An assigned
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. number ranging from 1 to 279
amount of air pressure in a tire, GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight that corresponds to the load
measured in kPa (kilopascal) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits carrying capacity of a tire.
or psi (pounds per square inch) on page 9‑22. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight The maximum air pressure to
from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See which a cold tire can be inflated.
on page 10‑63. Vehicle Load Limits on The maximum air pressure is
Curb Weight: The weight of a page 9‑22. molded onto the sidewall.
motor vehicle with standard and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: The
optional equipment including the Rating for the rear axle. See load rating for a tire at the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation
and coolant, but without page 9‑22. pressure for that tire.
passengers and cargo.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle
DOT Markings: A code molded The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
into the sidewall of a tire that must always face outward weight, accessory weight,
signifying that the tire is in when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and
compliance with the U.S. production options weight.
Department of Transportation Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety unit for air pressure.
Standards. The DOT code
10-62 Vehicle Care
Normal Occupant Weight: The Recommended Inflation Traction: The friction between
number of occupants a vehicle Pressure: Vehicle the tire and the road surface.
is designed to seat multiplied by manufacturer's recommended The amount of grip provided.
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle tire inflation pressure as shown Tread: The portion of a tire
Load Limits on page 9‑22. on the tire placard. See Tire that comes into contact with
Occupant Distribution : Pressure on page 10‑63 the road.
Designated seating positions. andVehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
Outward Facing Sidewall: The bands, sometimes called wear
side of an asymmetrical tire that Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic bars, that show across the tread
has a particular side that faces tire in which the ply cords that of a tire when only 1.6 mm
outward when mounted on a extend to the beads are laid at (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
vehicle. The side of the tire that 90 degrees to the centerline of When It Is Time for New Tires
contains a whitewall, bears the tread. on page 10‑73.
white lettering, or bears Rim: A metal support for a tire UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
manufacturer, brand, and/or and upon which the tire beads Grading Standards): A tire
model name molding that is are seated. information system that provides
higher or deeper than the same Sidewall: The portion of a tire consumers with ratings for a
moldings on the other sidewall between the tread and the bead. tire's traction, temperature,
of the tire. and treadwear. Ratings
Speed Rating: An
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A alphanumeric code assigned are determined by tire
tire used on passenger cars and to a tire indicating the maximum manufacturers using
some light duty trucks and speed at which a tire can government testing
multipurpose vehicles. operate. procedures.
Vehicle Care 10-63
The ratings are molded into the Tire Pressure Overinflated tires, or tires that
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform have too much air, can
Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount result in:
page 10‑75. of air pressure to operate
effectively. . Unusual wear.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The . Poor handling.
number of designated seating Notice: Neither tire
positions multiplied by underinflation nor . Rough ride.
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
. Needless damage from
cargo load. See Vehicle Load road hazards.
Limits on page 9‑22. that do not have enough air,
can result in: The Tire and Loading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Information label on the vehicle
Tire: Load on an individual tire
. Tire overloading and
overheating which could indicates the original equipment
due to curb weight, accessory tires and the correct cold
weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout.
tire inflation pressures. The
cargo weight. . Premature or recommended pressure is the
Vehicle Placard: A label irregular wear. minimum air pressure needed to
permanently attached to a . Poor handling. support the vehicle's maximum
vehicle showing the vehicle load carrying capacity.
. Reduced fuel economy.
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22.
10-64 Vehicle Care
For additional information How to Check Re-check the tire pressure with
regarding how much weight Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge.
the vehicle can carry, and an gauge to check tire pressure. Return the valve caps on the
example of the Tire and Loading Proper tire inflation cannot be valve stems to prevent leaks
Information label, see Vehicle determined by looking at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
Load Limits on page 9‑22. How Check the tire inflation pressure
the vehicle is loaded affects when the tires are cold, meaning Tire Pressure for
vehicle handling and ride the vehicle has not been driven
comfort. Never load the vehicle High-Speed Operation
for at least three hours or no
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). { WARNING
Remove the valve cap from the
When to Check Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
tire valve stem. Press the tire
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
Check the tires once a month gauge firmly onto the valve to
additional strain on tires.
or more. get a pressure measurement. Sustained high-speed driving
If the cold tire inflation pressure causes excessive heat buildup
Do not forget the spare tire,
matches the recommended and can cause sudden tire failure.
if the vehicle has one.
pressure on the Tire and You could have a crash and you
SeeFull-Size Spare Tire on
Loading Information label, no or others could be killed. Some
page 10‑93 for additional
further adjustment is necessary. high-speed rated tires require
information.
If the inflation pressure is low, inflation pressure adjustment for
add air until the recommended high-speed operation. When
pressure is reached. If the speed limits and road conditions
inflation pressure is high, press are such that a vehicle can be
on the metal stem in the center driven at high speeds, make sure
of the tire valve to release air. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-65
WARNING (Continued)
Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
System tire pressure monitoring system
the tires are rated for high-speed The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
operation, in excellent condition, (TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale when one or
and set to the correct cold tire technology to check tire pressure more of your tires is significantly
inflation pressure for the levels. The TPMS sensors monitor under‐inflated.
vehicle load. the air pressure in your tires and Accordingly, when the low tire
transmit tire pressure readings to a pressure telltale illuminates, you
Vehicles with P265/70R17 or P275/ receiver located in the vehicle. should stop and check your tires as
55R20 size tires require inflation Each tire, including the spare soon as possible, and inflate them
pressure adjustment when driving (if provided), should be checked to the proper pressure. Driving on a
the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h monthly when cold and inflated to significantly under‐inflated tire
(100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire the inflation pressure recommended causes the tire to overheat and can
inflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi) by the vehicle manufacturer on the lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
above the recommended cold tire vehicle placard or tire inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
pressure shown on the Tire and pressure label. (If your vehicle has tread life, and may affect the
Loading Information label. tires of a different size than the size vehicle's handling and stopping
Return the tires to the indicated on the vehicle placard or ability.
recommended cold tire inflation tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is
pressure when high-speed driving should determine the proper tire not a substitute for proper tire
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits inflation pressure for those tires.) maintenance, and it is the driver's
on page 9‑22 and Tire Pressure on responsibility to maintain correct tire
page 10‑63. pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction Tire Pressure Monitor
equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Operation
system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or This vehicle may have a Tire
The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
combined with the low tire pressure TPMS to continue to function The TPMS is designed to warn the
telltale. When the system detects a properly. driver when a low tire pressure
malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor condition exists. TPMS sensors are
approximately one minute and then Operation on page 10‑66 for mounted onto each tire and wheel
remain continuously illuminated. additional information. assembly, excluding the spare tire
This sequence will continue upon and wheel assembly. The TPMS
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications sensors monitor the air pressure in
long as the malfunction exists. Commission (FCC) and the tires and transmit the tire
When the malfunction indicator is Industry Canada pressure readings to a receiver
illuminated, the system may not be located in the vehicle.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
able to detect or signal low tire page 13‑18 for information
pressure as intended. TPMS regarding Part 15 of the Federal
malfunctions may occur for a variety Communications Commission (FCC)
of reasons, including the installation rules and Industry Canada
of replacement or alternate tires or Standards RSS-210/220/310.
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster.
Vehicle Care 10-67
If the warning light comes on, stop A Tire and Loading Information label TPMS Malfunction Light and
as soon as possible and inflate the shows the size of the original Message
tires to the recommended pressure equipment tires and the correct
shown on the Tire and Loading inflation pressure for the tires when The TPMS will not function properly
Information label. See Vehicle Load they are cold. See Vehicle Load if one or more of the TPMS sensors
Limits on page 9‑22. Limits on page 9‑22, for an example are missing or inoperable. When the
of the Tire and Loading Information system detects a malfunction, the
A message to check the pressure in low tire pressure warning light
a specific tire displays in the Driver label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10‑63. flashes for about one minute and
Information Center (DIC). The low then stays on for the remainder of
tire pressure warning light and the The TPMS can warn about a the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
DIC warning message come on at low tire pressure condition but it message also displays. The
each ignition cycle until the tires are does not replace normal tire malfunction light and DIC warning
inflated to the correct inflation maintenance. See Tire Inspection message come on at each ignition
pressure. If the vehicle has DIC on page 10‑69, Tire Rotation on cycle until the problem is corrected.
buttons, tire pressure levels can be page 10‑70 and Tires on Some of the conditions that can
viewed. For additional information page 10‑55. cause these to come on are:
and details about the DIC operation Notice: Tire sealant materials are
and displays, see Driver Information
. One of the road tires has been
not all the same. A non-approved replaced with the spare tire. The
Center (DIC) on page 5‑32 and Tire tire sealant could damage the
Messages on page 5‑48. spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor TPMS sensor. The malfunction
The low tire pressure warning light damage caused by using an light and the DIC message
may come on in cool weather when incorrect tire sealant is not should go off after the road tire
the vehicle is first started, and then covered by the vehicle is replaced and the sensor
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This warranty. Always use only the matching process is performed
could be an early indicator that the GM-approved tire sealant successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
air pressure is getting low and available through your dealer or Matching Process" later in this
needs to be inflated to the proper included in the vehicle. section.
pressure.
10-68 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire,
completed successfully wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
after rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool.
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
sensor matching process. See There are two minutes to match
low tire condition. See your dealer the first tire/wheel position, and
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
Process" later in this section. five minutes overall to match all
light and DIC message come on four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
. One or more TPMS sensors and stay on. longer, the matching process stops
are missing or damaged. The and must be restarted.
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
message should go off when the Process The TPMS sensor matching
TPMS sensors are installed and process is:
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake.
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off.
. Replacement tires or wheels do vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. Also, 3. Press the Remote Keyless
not match the original equipment
the TPMS sensor matching process Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
should be performed after replacing and UNLOCK buttons at the
other than those recommended
a spare tire with a road tire same time for approximately
could prevent the TPMS from
containing the TPMS sensor. The five seconds. The horn sounds
functioning properly. See Buying
malfunction light and the DIC twice to signal the receiver
New Tires on page 10‑74.
message should go off at the next is in relearn mode and TIRE
ignition cycle. The sensors are LEARNING ACTIVE message
matched to the tire/wheel positions, displays on the DIC screen.
Vehicle Care 10-69
If the vehicle does not have 5. Place the relearn tool against 9. Turn the ignition switch to
RKE, press the Driver the tire sidewall, near the valve LOCK/OFF.
Information Center (DIC) vehicle stem. Then press the button to 10. Set all four tires to the
information button until the activate the TPMS sensor. recommended air pressure
PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE A horn chirp confirms that the level as indicated on the Tire
POSITIONS message displays. sensor identification code has and Loading Information label.
The horn sounds twice to signal been matched to this tire and
the receiver is in relearn mode wheel position.
Tire Inspection
and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE 6. Proceed to the passenger
message displays on the DIC side front tire, and repeat the We recommend that the tires,
screen. procedure in Step 5. including the spare tire, if the
If the vehicle does not have RKE vehicle has one, be inspected
7. Proceed to the passenger
or DIC buttons, press the trip side rear tire, and repeat the for signs of wear or damage at
odometer reset stem located on procedure in Step 5. least once a month.
the instrument panel cluster until Replace the tire if:
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
the PRESS V TO RELEARN tire, and repeat the procedure in
TIRE POSITIONS message
. The indicators at three or
Step 5. The horn sounds two more places around the tire
displays. The horn sounds times to indicate the sensor
twice to signal the receiver identification code has been
can be seen.
is in relearn mode and TIRE matched to the driver side rear . There is cord or fabric
LEARNING ACTIVE message tire, and the TPMS sensor showing through the tire's
displays on the DIC screen. matching process is no longer rubber.
4. Start with the driver side active. The TIRE LEARNING
front tire. ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
10-70 Vehicle Care

. The tread or sidewall is Tires are rotated to achieve
cracked, cut, or snagged a uniform wear for all tires.
deep enough to show cord or The first rotation is the most
fabric. important.
. The tire has a bump, bulge, Any time unusual wear is
or split. noticed, rotate the tires as
. The tire has a puncture, cut, soon as possible and check the
or other damage that cannot wheel alignment. Also check for
be repaired well because of damaged tires or wheels. See
the size or location of the When It Is Time for New Tires
damage. on page 10‑73 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑77. Use this rotation pattern when
Tire Rotation If your vehicle has dual rear rotating the tires if the vehicle
wheels, also see Dual Tire has single rear wheels and the
Tires should be rotated every tread design for the front tires is
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Rotation on page 10‑72.
the same as the rear tires.
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
Vehicle Care 10-71
Dual tires are rotated as a pair,

and the inside rear tires become
the outside rear tires.
When installing dual wheels,
check that the vent holes in the
inner and outer wheels on each
side are lined up.
Adjust the front and rear tires to
the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
Use this rotation pattern when Loading Information label after
Use this rotation pattern when the tires have been rotated. See
rotating the tires if the vehicle rotating the tires if the vehicle
has dual rear wheels and the Tire Pressure on page 10‑63
has dual rear wheels and the and Vehicle Load Limits on
tread design for the front tires is tread design for the front tires is
different from the dual rear tires. page 9‑22.
the same as the rear tires.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Check that all wheel nuts are Lightly coat the center of the Dual Tire Rotation
properly tightened. See “Wheel wheel hub with wheel bearing
When the vehicle is new,
Nut Torque” under Capacities grease after a wheel change or or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,
and Specifications on tire rotation to prevent corrosion or wheel nut is replaced, check
page 12‑2. or rust build-up. Do not get the wheel nut torque after
grease on the flat wheel 160, 1 600, and 10 000 km
{ WARNING mounting surface or on the (100, 1,000, and 6,000 mi) of
wheel nuts or bolts. driving. For proper torque and
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the wheel nut tightening information,
parts to which it is fastened, can Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor see “Removing the Spare Tire and
make wheel nuts become loose System (TPMS), if the vehicle Tools” under Tire Changing on
after time. The wheel could come has one. See Tire Pressure page 10‑81.
off and cause an accident. When Monitor Operation on
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup
changing a wheel, remove any page 10‑66. generally wears faster than the
rust or dirt from places where the Check that the spare tire, if inner tire. Tires last longer and wear
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In the vehicle has one, is stored more evenly if they are rotated. See
an emergency, a cloth or a paper properly. Push, pull, and then Tire Inspection on page 10‑69 and
towel can be used; however, use Tire Rotation on page 10‑70. Also
try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
a scraper or wire brush later to see Scheduled Maintenance on
moves, tighten the cable. See
remove all rust or dirt. page 11‑2.
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools” underTire Changing on
page 10‑81.
Vehicle Care 10-73
including temperatures, loading

{ WARNING conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
If the vehicle is operated with a takes place. Tires will typically need
tire that is underinflated, the tire to be replaced due to wear before
can overheat. An overheated tire they may need to be replaced
can lose air suddenly or catch due to age. Consult the tire
fire. You or others could be manufacturer for more information
injured. Properly inflate all tires, on when tires should be replaced.
including the spare.
Vehicle Storage
See Tire Pressure on page 10‑63, Tires age when stored normally
for information on proper tire mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
Treadwear indicators are one way to
inflation. a vehicle that will be stored for at
tell when it is time for new tires.
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
Treadwear indicators appear when
When It Is Time for New area away from direct sunlight to
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
slow aging. This area should be
Tires or less of tread remaining. Some
free of grease, gasoline or other
commercial truck tires may not
Factors, such as maintenance, substances that can deteriorate
have treadwear indicators. See Tire
temperatures, driving speeds, rubber.
Inspection on page 10‑69 and Tire
vehicle loading, and road conditions Rotation on page 10‑70 for Parking for an extended period can
affect the wear rate of the tires. additional information. cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
The rubber in tires ages over time.
driving. When storing a vehicle
This also applies to the spare tire,
for at least a month, remove the
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
tires or raise the vehicle to reduce
never used. Multiple conditions
the weight from the tires.
10-74 Vehicle Care
Buying New Tires GM recommends replacing all the

tires at the same time. Uniform { WARNING
GM has developed and matched tread depth on all tires will help to
specific tires for the vehicle. The maintain the performance of the Mixing tires of different sizes,
original equipment tires installed vehicle. Braking and handling brands, or types may cause loss
were designed to meet General performance may be adversely of control of the vehicle, resulting
Motors Tire Performance Criteria affected if all the tires are not in a crash or other vehicle
Specification (TPC Spec) system replaced at the same time. See Tire damage. Use the correct size,
rating. When replacement tires are Inspection on page 10‑69 and Tire brand, and type of tires on all
needed, GM strongly recommends Rotation on page 10‑70 for wheels.
buying tires with the same TPC information on proper tire rotation.
Spec rating. This vehicle may have a different
size spare than the road tires
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system { WARNING originally installed on the vehicle.
considers over a dozen critical When new, the vehicle included a
specifications that impact the Tires could explode during
spare tire and wheel assembly
overall performance of the improper service. Attempting to
with a similar overall diameter as
vehicle, including brake system mount or dismount a tire could
the road tires and wheels, so it is
performance, ride and handling, cause injury or death. Only your
traction control, and tire pressure all right to drive on it. The spare
dealer or authorized tire service
monitoring performance. GM's TPC tire was developed for use on this
center should mount or dismount
Spec number is molded onto the vehicle and will not affect vehicle
the tires.
tire's sidewall near the tire size. handling.
If the tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 10‑56 for additional
information.
Vehicle Care 10-75
The Tire and Loading Information

{ WARNING label indicates the original { WARNING
equipment tires on the vehicle. See
Using bias-ply tires on the Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22 If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle may cause the wheel for the label location and more there may not be an acceptable
rim flanges to develop cracks information about the Tire and level of performance and safety if
after many miles of driving. Loading Information label. tires not recommended for those
A tire and/or wheel could fail wheels are selected. This
suddenly and cause a crash. Different Size Tires and increases the chance of a crash
Use only radial-ply tires with and serious injury. Only use GM
Wheels specific wheel and tire systems
the wheels on the vehicle.
If wheels or tires are installed that developed for the vehicle, and
are a different size than the original have them properly installed by a
If the vehicle tires must be replaced equipment wheels and tires, vehicle GM certified technician.
with a tire that does not have a TPC performance, including its braking,
Spec number, make sure they are ride and handling characteristics,
the same size, load range, speed stability, and resistance to rollover See Buying New Tires on
rating, and construction (radial) as may be affected. If the vehicle has page 10‑74 and Accessories and
the original tires. electronic systems such as antilock Modifications on page 10‑3 for
brakes, rollover airbags, traction additional information.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give an control, and electronic stability
inaccurate low‐pressure warning if control, the performance of these
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are systems can also be affected.
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑65.
10-76 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality use spare tires, tires with government test course. For
Grading nominal rim diameters of example, a tire graded
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), 150 would wear one and a half
Quality grades can be found or to some limited-production (1½) times as well on the
where applicable on the tire tires. government course as a tire
sidewall between tread shoulder graded 100. The relative
and maximum section width. While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars performance of tires depends
For example: upon the actual conditions of
and light trucks may vary with
Treadwear 200 Traction AA respect to these grades, they their use, however, and may
Temperature A must also conform to federal depart significantly from the
safety requirements and norm due to variations in driving
The following information relates habits, service practices and
to the system developed by the additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) differences in road
United States National Highway characteristics and climate.
Traffic Safety Administration standards.
(NHTSA), which grades tires by All Passenger Car Tires Must Traction – AA, A, B, C
treadwear, traction, and Conform to Federal Safety The traction grades, from
temperature performance. This Requirements In Addition To highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
applies only to vehicles sold in These Grades. and C. Those grades represent
the United States. The grades the tire's ability to stop on wet
are molded on the sidewalls of Treadwear
pavement as measured under
most passenger car tires. The The treadwear grade is a controlled conditions on
Uniform Tire Quality Grading comparative rating based on specified government test
(UTQG) system does not apply the wear rate of the tire when surfaces of asphalt and
to deep tread, winter-type snow tested under controlled concrete. A tire marked C may
tires, space-saver, or temporary conditions on a specified have poor traction performance.
Vehicle Care 10-77
Warning: The traction grade under the Federal Motor Safety wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
assigned to this tire is based on Standard No. 109. Grades B and one side or the other. If the vehicle
straight-ahead braking traction A represent higher levels of vibrates when driving on a smooth
tests, and does not include performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
acceleration, cornering, test wheel than the minimum
dealer for proper diagnosis.
hydroplaning, or peak traction required by law. Warning: The
characteristics. temperature grade for this tire Wheel Replacement
is established for a tire that is
Temperature – A, B, C Replace any wheel that is bent,
properly inflated and not
The temperature grades are overloaded. Excessive speed, cracked, or badly rusted or
A (the highest), B, and C, underinflation, or excessive corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
representing the tire's resistance loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
loading, either separately or in wheel nuts should be replaced.
to the generation of heat and combination, can cause heat If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
its ability to dissipate heat buildup and possible tire failure. Some aluminum wheels can be
when tested under controlled repaired. See your dealer if any of
conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire these conditions exist.
laboratory test wheel. Sustained Balance Your dealer will know the kind of
high temperature can cause the wheel that is needed.
material of the tire to degenerate The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to Each new wheel should have the
and reduce tire life, and provide the longest tire life and best same load-carrying capacity,
excessive temperature can overall performance. Adjustments to diameter, width, offset and be
lead to sudden tire failure. The wheel alignment and tire balancing mounted the same way as the one
grade C corresponds to a will not be necessary on a regular it replaces.
level of performance which all basis. However, check the
passenger car tires must meet alignment if there is unusual tire
10-78 Vehicle Care
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel Notice: The wrong wheel can Used Replacement Wheels
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor also cause problems with bearing
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
{ WARNING
headlamp aim, bumper height, Replacing a wheel with a used
{ WARNING vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
Using the wrong replacement body and chassis. driven may be unknown. It could
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, fail suddenly and cause a crash.
nuts can be dangerous. It could or wheel nut is replaced on a dual When replacing wheels, use a
affect the braking and handling of wheel setup, check the wheel nut new GM original equipment
the vehicle. Tires can lose air, torque after 160, 1 600 and wheel.
and cause loss of control, causing 10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi)
a crash. Always use the correct of driving. For proper torque, see
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel “Wheel Nut Torque” under Tire Chains
nuts for replacement. Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2. { WARNING
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
If the vehicle has dual wheels or
P265/65R18, P275/55R20,
LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18,
LT265/60R20, P285/50R20,
P285/45R22 or 285/45R22 size
tires, do not use tire chains. They
can damage the vehicle because
there is not enough clearance.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-79
WARNING (Continued)
Notice: If the vehicle does not If a Tire Goes Flat
have dual wheels and has a tire
size other than P265/65R18, P275/ It is unusual for a tire to blowout
Tire chains used on a vehicle 55R20, LT265/70R17, LT265/ while driving, especially if the tires
without the proper amount of 70R18, LT265/60R20, P285/50R20, are maintained properly. If air goes
clearance can cause damage to P285/45R22, or 285/45R22, use out of a tire, it is much more likely to
the brakes, suspension, or other tire chains only where legal and leak out slowly. But if there ever is a
vehicle parts. The area damaged only when you must. Use chains blowout, here are a few tips about
by the tire chains could cause you that are the proper size for the what to expect and what to do:
to lose control of the vehicle and tires. Install them on the tires of If a front tire fails, the flat tire
you or others may be injured in a the rear axle. Do not use chains creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
crash. on the tires of the front axle. toward that side. Take your foot off
Tighten them as tightly as the accelerator pedal and grip the
Use another type of traction
possible with the ends securely steering wheel firmly. Steer to
device only if its manufacturer
fastened. Drive slowly and follow maintain lane position, and then
recommends it for use on the the chain manufacturer's gently brake to a stop, well off the
vehicle and tire size combination instructions. If you can hear the road, if possible.
and road conditions. Follow that chains contacting the vehicle,
manufacturer's instructions. To stop and retighten them. If the A rear blowout, particularly on a
help avoid damage to the vehicle, contact continues, slow down curve, acts much like a skid and
drive slowly, readjust, or remove until it stops. Driving too fast or may require the same correction
the device if it is contacting the spinning the wheels with chains as used in a skid. Stop pressing
vehicle, and do not spin the on will damage the vehicle. the accelerator pedal and steer to
vehicle's wheels. straighten the vehicle.
If you do find traction devices that

will fit, install them on the rear
tires.
10-80 Vehicle Care
It may be very bumpy and noisy.

Gently brake to a stop, well off the { WARNING { WARNING
road, if possible.
Lifting a vehicle and getting Changing a tire can be
under it to do maintenance or dangerous. The vehicle can slip
{ WARNING repairs is dangerous without the off the jack and roll over or fall
Driving on a flat tire will cause appropriate safety equipment and causing injury or death. Find a
permanent damage to the tire. training. If a jack is provided with level place to change the tire. To
Re-inflating a tire after it has been the vehicle, it is designed only for help prevent the vehicle from
driven on while severely changing a flat tire. If it is used for moving:
underinflated or flat may cause a anything else, you or others could 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
blowout and a serious crash. be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 2. Put an automatic
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire transmission in P (Park)
that has been driven on while is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire. or a manual transmission in
severely underinflated or flat. 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or 3. For four-wheel-drive
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
replace the flat tire as soon as vehicles, be sure the
and wheel damage by driving slowly
transfer case is in a drive
possible. to a level place, well off the road,
gear – not in N (Neutral).
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard (Continued)
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
Vehicle Care 10-81
WARNING (Continued)
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
4. Turn off the engine and do Tools
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
6. Place wheel blocks on both A. Wheel Block
sides of the tire at the B. Flat Tire
opposite corner of the tire The following information explains
being changed. how to use the jack and change
a tire.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of Crew Cab
the wheel blocks (A). A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
B. Tool Kit
C. Wheel Blocks
D. Jack
E. Jack Knob
F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
Blocks
10-82 Vehicle Care
For regular cab models, the

equipment you will need is behind
the passenger seat. For extended
and crew cab models, the
equipment is on the shelf behind
the passenger side second
row seat.
1. Turn the knob on the jack
counterclockwise to lower the
jack head to release the jack
from its holder.
2. Remove the wheel blocks and
Regular Cab Extended Cab
the wheel block retainer by
A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit turning the wing nut
B. Tool Kit B. Tool Kit counterclockwise.
C. Wheel Blocks C. Wheel Blocks 3. Remove the wing nut used to
retain the storage bag and tools
D. Jack D. Jack by turning it counterclockwise.
E. Jack Knob E. Jack Knob You will use the jack handle
F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel extensions and the wheel wrench to
Blocks remove the underbody-mounted
spare tire.
Vehicle Care 10-83
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock (If equipped)
1. Open the spare tire lock cover
on the bumper and use the
ignition key to remove the spare
tire lock (J). To remove the spare
tire lock, insert the ignition key
turn and pull straight out.
A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem 3. Insert the hoist end (open

Pointed Down) end) (F) of the extension through
B. Hoist Assembly the hole (G) in the rear bumper.
C. Hoist Cable Do not use the chiseled end of
the wheel wrench.
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
Be sure the hoist end of the
E. Hoist Shaft extension (F) connects to the
F. Hoist End of Extension Tool hoist shaft (E). The ribbed
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole square end of the extension is
used to lower the spare tire.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) 4. Turn the wheel wrench (H)
and the two jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
extensions (I) as shown. spare tire to the ground.
10-84 Vehicle Care
Continue to turn the wheel Removing the Flat Tire and

wrench until the spare tire can Installing the Spare Tire
be pulled out from under the
vehicle. Use the following pictures and
instructions to remove the flat tire
5. Pull the spare tire out from under and raise the vehicle.
the vehicle.
2. If your vehicle has wheel nut

caps, loosen them by turning the
wheel wrench counterclockwise.
If the vehicle has a center cap
with wheel nut caps, the wheel
nut caps are designed to stay
The tools you will be using include with the center cap after they are
6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B), loosened. Remove the entire
with some slack in the cable to the jack handle (C), the jack handle center cap.
access the tire/wheel retainer. extensions (D), and the wheel
Tilt the retainer and pull it wrench (E).
through the center of the wheel 1. Do a safety check before
along with the cable and spring. proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
7. Put the spare tire near the Flat on page 10‑79 for more
flat tire. information.
Vehicle Care 10-85
If the wheel has a smooth center 3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it Front Position - 1500 Models
cap, place the chisel end of the counterclockwise to loosen the 4. Position the jack under the
wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel nuts. Do not remove the vehicle as shown. If the flat tire
wheel, and gently pry it out. wheel nuts yet. is on the front of the vehicle
(1500 Model vehicles), position
the jack under the bracket
attached to the vehicle's frame,
behind the flat tire.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Front Position - All Other Models Rear Position – 1500 Models Rear Position – All Other Models
Position the jack under the 5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for For all other models, position the
vehicle as shown. If the flat tire 1500 models position the jack jack under the rear axle between
is on the front of the vehicle (all under the rear axle about the spring anchor and the shock
other models), position the jack 2 inches (5 cm) inboard of the absorber bracket.
on the frame behind the flat tire. shock absorber bracket.
Vehicle Care 10-87
If you have added a snow plow

to the front of your vehicle, lower { WARNING
the snow plow fully before
raising the vehicle. Raising the vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
Make sure that the jack head is damage the vehicle and even
positioned so that the rear axle make the vehicle fall. To help
is resting securely between the avoid personal injury and vehicle
grooves that are on the damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
jack head.
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is 6. Turn the wheel wrench 7. Remove all the wheel nuts and
jacked up is dangerous. If the clockwise to raise the vehicle. take off the flat tire.
vehicle slips off the jack, you Raise the vehicle far enough off
could be badly injured or killed. the ground so there is enough
Never get under a vehicle when it room for the spare tire to fit
is supported only by a jack. under the wheel well.
10-88 Vehicle Care
11. Tighten each wheel nut by

{ WARNING hand. Then use the wheel
wrench to tighten the nuts until
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the the wheel is held against
parts to which it is fastened, can the hub.
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come 12. Turn the wheel wrench
off and cause an accident. When counterclockwise to lower the
changing a wheel, remove any vehicle. Lower the jack
completely.
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper { WARNING
towel can be used; however, use
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the If wheel studs are damaged, they
a scraper or wire brush later to
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, can break. If all the studs on a
remove all rust or dirt. and spare wheel. wheel broke, the wheel could
9. Install the spare tire. come off and cause a crash.
If any stud is damaged because
of a loose-running wheel, it could
{ WARNING be that all of the studs are
Never use oil or grease on bolts damaged. To be sure, replace all
or nuts because the nuts might studs on the wheel. If the stud
come loose. The vehicle's wheel holes in a wheel have become
could fall off, causing a crash. larger, the wheel could collapse in
operation. Replace any wheel if
its stud holes have become larger
10. Put the wheel nuts back on or distorted in any way. Inspect
with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-89
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

hubs and hub‐piloted wheels after replacing. Follow the torque
for damage. Because of loose specification supplied by the
running wheels, piloting pad aftermarket manufacturer when
damage may occur and require using accessory locking wheel
replacement of the entire hub, for nuts. See Capacities and
proper centering of the wheels. Specifications on page 12‑2 for
When replacing studs, hubs, original equipment wheel nut
wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to torque specifications.
use GM original equipment parts.
Notice: Improperly tightened 13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a
wheel nuts can lead to brake crisscross sequence as shown
{ WARNING pulsation and rotor damage. To by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise.
avoid expensive brake repairs,
Wheel nuts that are improperly or evenly tighten the wheel nuts in For vehicles with dual wheels, have
incorrectly tightened can cause the proper sequence and to the a technician check the wheel nut
the wheels to become loose or proper torque specification. See tightness of all wheels with a torque
come off. The wheel nuts should Capacities and Specifications on wrench after the first 100 miles
be tightened with a torque wrench page 12‑2 for the wheel nut (160 km) and then 1,000 miles
to the proper torque specification torque specification. (1600 km) after that. Repeat this
(Continued) service whenever you have a
tire removed or serviced. See
Capacities and Specifications on
10-90 Vehicle Care
When you reinstall the regular Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

wheel and tire, you must also and Tools
reinstall either the center cap,
or bolt-on hub cap, depending on
what your vehicle is equipped with.
{ WARNING
For center caps, place the cap on Storing a jack, a tire, or other
the wheel and tap it into place until equipment in the passenger
it seats flush with the wheel. The compartment of the vehicle could
cap only goes on one way. Be sure cause injury. In a sudden stop or
to line up the tab on the center cap
collision, loose equipment could
with the indentation on the wheel.
strike someone. Store all these in
For bolt-on hub caps, align the
plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts the proper place.
A. Flat or Spare Tire (Valve Stem
and then tighten by hand. Then use Pointed Down)
the wheel wrench to tighten. Notice: Storing an aluminum
wheel with a flat tire under your B. Hoist Assembly
vehicle for an extended period of C. Hoist Cable
time or with the valve stem
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel E. Hoist Shaft
with the valve stem pointing F. Hoist End of Extension Tool
down and have the wheel/tire
repaired as soon as possible. G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
Store the tire under the rear of the
vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
Vehicle Care 10-91
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the
rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
2. Pull the cable and spring
through the center of the wheel.
Tilt the wheel retainer plate
down and through the center
wheel. 3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and 4. Insert the hoist end (F) through
extensions (I) together, as the hole (G) in the rear bumper
Make sure the retainer is fully
shown. and onto the hoist shaft.
seated across the underside of
the wheel. Do not use the chiseled end of
the wheel wrench.
5. Raise the tire part way upward.
Make sure the retainer is seated
in the wheel opening.
10-92 Vehicle Care
6. Raise the tire fully against the To store the jack and jack tools: G. Jack
underside of the vehicle by H. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks
turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear two 1. Put the tools (D) in the tool
clicks or feel it skip twice. You bag (E) and place them in the
cannot overtighten the cable. retaining bracket (C).
2. Tighten down the wing nut (C).
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B)
and jack (G) together with the
wing nut (A) and retaining
bolt (H).
4. Position the jack (G) in the
mounting bracket (F). Position
A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel the holes in the base of the
Blocks jack (G) onto the pin in the
mounting bracket (F).
B. Wheel Blocks
5. Return them to their original
C. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit location in the vehicle. For more
7. Make sure the tire is stored D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions information, refer to “Removing
securely. Push, pull (A), and then the Spare Tire and Tools” for
E. Tool Bag
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire more information.
moves, use the wheel wrench to F. Jack Mounting Bracket
tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock,
if the vehicle has one.
Vehicle Care 10-93
Full-Size Spare Tire Notice: If the vehicle has After installing the spare tire on your
four-wheel drive and a different vehicle, you should stop as soon as
Your vehicle, when new, had a size spare tire is installed, do not possible and make sure the spare
fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire drive in four-wheel drive until tire is correctly inflated. Have the
may lose air over time, so check its the flat tire is repaired and/or damaged or flat road tire repaired or
inflation pressure regularly. See Tire replaced. The vehicle could be replaced as soon as you can and
Pressure on page 10‑63 and damaged and the repairs would installed back onto your vehicle.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22 not be covered by the warranty. This way, the spare tire will be
for information regarding proper tire Never use four-wheel drive when available in case you need it again.
inflation and loading your vehicle. a different size spare tire is
For instruction on how to remove, Do not mix tires and wheels of
installed on the vehicle. different sizes, because they will
install or store a spare tire, see
“Removing the Flat Tire and Your vehicle may have a different not fit. Keep your spare tire and its
Installing the Spare” and “Storing a size spare tire than the road tires wheel together. If your vehicle has a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” under originally installed on your vehicle. spare tire that does not match your
Tire Changing on page 10‑81. This spare tire was developed for vehicle's original road tires and
use on your vehicle, so it is all right wheels in size and type, do not
to drive on it. If your vehicle has include the spare in the tire rotation.
four-wheel drive and the different
size spare tire is installed, keep the
vehicle in two-wheel drive.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting 2. If you have a vehicle with a

WARNING (Continued) diesel engine with two batteries,
For more information about the you should know before you
vehicle battery, see Battery on If you do not follow these steps begin that, especially in cold
page 10‑33. exactly, some or all of these weather, you may not be able to
things can hurt you. get enough power from a single
hybrid supplement for more battery in another vehicle to start
information. Notice: Ignoring these steps your diesel engine. If your
could result in costly damage to vehicle has more than one
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) the vehicle that would not be battery, using the battery that is
has run down, you may want to use covered by the warranty. closer to the starter will reduce
another vehicle and some jumper electrical resistance. This is
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure Trying to start the vehicle by located on the passenger side,
to use the following steps to do it pushing or pulling it will not in the rear of the engine
safely. work, and it could damage the compartment.
vehicle.
3. Get the vehicles close enough
{ WARNING 1. Check the other vehicle. It must so the jumper cables can reach,
have a 12-volt battery with a but be sure the vehicles are not
Batteries can hurt you. They can negative ground system. touching each other. If they are,
be dangerous because:
Notice: Only use a vehicle it could cause an unwanted
. They contain acid that can that has a 12-volt system with ground connection. You would
burn you. a negative ground for jump not be able to start your vehicle,
. They contain gas that can starting. If the other vehicle does and the bad grounding could
explode or ignite. not have a 12-volt system with a damage the electrical systems.
negative ground, both vehicles
. They contain enough can be damaged.
electricity to burn you.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-95
To avoid the possibility of the 4. Turn off the ignition on both

vehicles rolling, set the parking vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
brake firmly on both vehicles accessories plugged into the
involved in the jump start cigarette lighter or the accessory
procedure. Put the automatic power outlets. Turn off the radio
transmission in P (Park) or a and all the lamps that are not
manual transmission in Neutral needed. This will avoid sparks
before setting the parking brake. and help save both batteries.
If you have a four-wheel-drive And it could save the radio!
vehicle, be sure the transfer 5. Open the hood on the other
case is in a drive gear, not in vehicle and locate the
Neutral. positive (+) and negative (−)
Notice: If the radio or other terminal locations on that If your vehicle has a gasoline
accessories are left on during the vehicle. engine, the remote negative (-)
jump starting procedure, they The positive (+) terminal, is terminal is a stud located on the
could be damaged. The repairs located under a red plastic cover right front of the engine, where
would not be covered by the at the positive battery post. To the negative battery cable
warranty. Always turn off the uncover the positive (+) terminal, attaches.
radio and other accessories when open the red plastic cover.
jump starting the vehicle.
10-96 Vehicle Care
If your vehicle has a diesel

engine, the remote negative (-) { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
terminal is the negative (-) post
on the auxiliary battery on the Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to Battery fluid contains acid that
driver side of the engine can burn you. Do not get it on
compartment. explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been you. If you accidentally get it in
For more information on the blinded. Use a flashlight if you your eyes or on your skin, flush
location of the remote need more light. the place with water and get
positive (+) and remote medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminals, see Be sure the battery has enough
Engine Compartment Overview water. You do not need to add
on page 10‑6 water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery { WARNING
{ WARNING has filler caps, be sure the right
Fans or other moving engine
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that parts can injure you badly. Keep
when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive gas your hands away from moving
and can injure you. Keep hands, could be present. parts once the engine is running.
clothing and tools away from any (Continued)
underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 10-97
6. Check that the jumper cables 8. Do not let the other end touch
do not have loose or missing metal. Connect it to the
insulation. If they do, you could positive (+) terminal of the
get a shock. The vehicles could good battery. Use a remote
be damaged too. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
Before you connect the cables, has one.
here are some basic things you 9. Now connect the black
should know. Positive (+) will go negative (−) cable to the
to positive (+) or to a remote negative (−) terminal of the
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle good battery. Use a remote
has one. Negative (−) will go to a negative (−) terminal if the
heavy, unpainted metal engine vehicle has one.
part or to a remote negative (−) 5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L, 6.2L
Do not let the other end touch
terminal if the vehicle has one. and 6.6L similar) anything until the next step.
Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Connect the red positive (+) 10. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) or you will get a cable to the positive (+) terminal negative (−) cable to a heavy,
short that would damage the of the vehicle with the dead unpainted metal engine part or
battery and maybe other parts battery. to the remote negative (−)
too. And do not connect the terminal, on the vehicle with
negative (−) cable to the the dead battery.
negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can
cause sparks.
10-98 Vehicle Care
11. Start the vehicle with the good To disconnect the jumper cables
battery and run the engine for a from both vehicles do the following:
while. 1. Disconnect the black
12. Try to start the vehicle that had negative (−) cable from the
the dead battery. If it will not vehicle that had the bad battery.
start after a few tries, it 2. Disconnect the black
probably needs service. negative (−) cable from the
Notice: If the jumper cables are vehicle with the good battery.
connected or removed in the 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
wrong order, electrical shorting cable from the vehicle with the
may occur and damage the good battery.
vehicle. The repairs would not be
Jumper Cable Removal 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine cable from the other vehicle.
jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) 5. Return the positive (+) terminal
order, making sure that the Terminal cover, to its original position.
cables do not touch each other or B. Good Battery or Remote
other metal. Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-99

. What is the distance that will be
Towing Recreational Vehicle travelled? Some vehicles have
Towing restrictions on how far and how
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means long they can tow.
Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment
disabled vehicle should be towed vehicle, such as a motor home. going to be used? See your
with all four wheels off the The two most common types of dealer or trailering professional
ground. Care must be taken recreational vehicle towing are for additional advice and
with vehicles that have low known as dinghy towing and dolly equipment recommendations.
ground clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
. Is the vehicle ready to be
equipment. Always flatbed on a
ground. Dolly towing is towing the towed? Just as preparing the
car carrier.
vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make sure
Consult your dealer or a the vehicle is prepared to be
ground and two wheels up on a
professional towing service if the towed.
device known as a dolly.
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program Here are some important things to
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or consider before recreational vehicle
Roadside Assistance Program towing:
(Mexico) on page 13‑9. . What is the towing capacity
To tow the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle? Be sure
vehicle for recreational purposes, to read the tow vehicle
such as behind a motorhome, see manufacturer's
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this recommendations.
section.
10-100 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing transmissions have no provisions 3. Securely attach the vehicle

for internal lubrication while being being towed to the tow vehicle.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles towed.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles { WARNING
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
vehicle's transfer case into
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
in P (Park). The driver or others
could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before
the transfer case is shifted to
N (Neutral).
Notice: If the vehicle is 4. Shift the transfer case to

towed with all four wheels N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
on the ground, the drivetrain Use the following procedure to Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive
components could be damaged. dinghy tow a four-wheel-drive on page 9‑50 for the proper
The repairs would not be covered vehicle: procedure to select the Neutral
by the vehicle warranty. Do not 1. Position the vehicle being towed position for the vehicle.
tow the vehicle with all four behind the tow vehicle and shift
wheels on the ground. the transmission to P (Park).
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should 2. Turn the engine off and firmly set
not be towed with all four wheels the parking brake.
on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
Vehicle Care 10-101
5. Release the parking brake only Dolly Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not
after the vehicle being towed is be towed with the rear wheels on
firmly attached to the towing Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the ground. Two-wheel-drive
vehicle. the Ground) – Two-Wheel-Drive transmissions have no provisions
Vehicles for internal lubrication while being
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and remove the key — the towed.
steering wheel will still turn. To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive
After towing, see “Shifting Out of vehicle, the vehicle must be towed
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on with the rear wheels on the dolly.
page 9‑50 for the proper procedure See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
to take the vehicle out of the Neutral the Ground)” later in this section for
position. more information.
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive
vehicle is towed with the rear
wheels on the ground, the
transmission could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Never
tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels on the ground.
10-102 Vehicle Care
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off 3. Shift the transmission to 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
the Ground) – Four-Wheel-Drive P (Park). following the manufacturer's
Vehicles 4. Firmly set the parking brake. instructions.
7. Shift the transfer case to
{ WARNING N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive
Shifting a four-wheel-drive on page 9‑50 for the proper
vehicle's transfer case into procedure to select the neutral
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle position for the vehicle.
to roll even if the transmission is 8. Release the parking brake only
in P (Park). The driver or others after the vehicle being towed is
could be injured. Make sure the firmly attached to the towing
parking brake is firmly set before vehicle.
the transfer case is shifted to 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
N (Neutral).
After towing, see “Shifting Out of
Use the following procedure to dolly Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on
tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from 5. Use an adequate clamping page 9‑50.
the front: device designed for towing to
1. Attach the dolly to the tow ensure that the front wheels are
vehicle following the dolly locked into the straight position.
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-103
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the Four‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
the Ground) dolly. Use the following procedure to dolly
Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles 3. Firmly set the parking brake. tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from
See Parking Brake on the rear:
page 9‑64. 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). vehicle following the dolly
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
following the manufacturer's 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
instructions. dolly.
6. Use an adequate clamping 3. Firmly set the parking brake.
device designed for towing to See Parking Brake on
ensure that the front wheels are page 9‑64.
locked into the straight position. 4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
Use the following procedure to dolly
instructions.
tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from
the rear: 6. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
ensure that the front wheels are
vehicle following the dolly
locked into the straight position.
manufacturer's instructions.
10-104 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING Appearance Care Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
Shifting a four-wheel-drive Exterior Care petroleum based or that contain
vehicle's transfer case into acid or abrasives, as they can
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle make them last longer, seal better, damage the paint, metal or plastic
to roll even if the transmission is and not stick or squeak. Apply on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
in P (Park). The driver or others silicone grease with a clean cloth. products can be obtained from your
could be injured. Make sure the During very cold, damp weather dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
parking brake is firmly set before frequent application may be directions regarding correct
the transfer case is shifted to required. See Recommended Fluids product usage, necessary safety
N (Neutral). and Lubricants on page 11‑8. precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
Washing the Vehicle product.
7. Shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into The best way to preserve the Rinse the vehicle well, before
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by washing and after to remove all
on page 9‑50 for the proper washing it often. cleaning agents completely. If they
procedure to select the neutral Notice: Certain cleaners contain are allowed to dry on the surface,
position for the vehicle. chemicals that can damage the they could stain.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. emblems or nameplates on the Dry the finish with a soft, clean
vehicle. Check the cleaning chamois or an all-cotton towel to
After towing, see “Shifting Out of product label. If it states that it avoid surface scratches and water
Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on should not be used on plastic spotting.
page 9‑50. parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Vehicle Care 10-105
High pressure car washes may If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are
cause water to enter the vehicle. clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and
Avoid using high pressure washes gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To help
surface of the vehicle. Use of power waxes and polishes that are keep the paint finish looking new,
washers exceeding 8 274 kPa non-abrasive and made for a keep the vehicle garaged or
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. covered whenever possible.
removal of paint and decals. Notice: Machine compounding Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Cleaning Exterior or aggressive polishing on a Parts
Lamps/Lenses basecoat/clearcoat paint
Bright metal parts should be
finish may damage it. Use only
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a cleaned regularly to keep their
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
soft cloth and a car washing soap to luster. Washing with water is all that
that are made for a basecoat/
clean exterior lamps and lenses. is usually needed. However, chrome
clearcoat paint finish on the
Follow instructions under “Washing polish may be used on chrome or
vehicle.
the Vehicle”. stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Foreign materials such as calcium
Finish Care Use special care with aluminum
chloride and other salts, ice melting
trim. To avoid damaging protective
Occasional waxing or mild polishing agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
trim, never use auto or chrome
of the vehicle by hand may be bird droppings, chemicals from
polish, steam or caustic soap to
necessary to remove residue from industrial chimneys, etc., can
clean aluminum. A coating of
the paint finish. Approved cleaning damage the vehicle's finish if they
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
products can be obtained from your remain on painted surfaces. Wash
recommended for all bright metal
dealer. the vehicle as soon as possible.
parts.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
10-106 Vehicle Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades Aluminum or Chrome-Plated damage the surface of the
Wheels and Trim wheel(s). The repairs would
Clean the outside of the windshield
not be covered by the vehicle
with glass cleaner. The vehicle may have either warranty. Use only approved
Clean the rubber blades using a lint aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. cleaners on aluminum or
free cloth or paper towel soaked Keep the wheels clean using a soft chrome-plated wheels.
with windshield washer fluid or a clean cloth with mild soap and The surface of these wheels is
mild detergent. Wash the windshield water. Rinse with clean water. After similar to the painted surface of the
thoroughly when cleaning the rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap clean towel. A wax may then be chemicals, abrasive polishes,
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax applied. abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
treatments may cause wiper
Notice: Chrome wheels and other acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
streaking. Replace the wiper
chrome trim may be damaged if on them because they could
blades if they are worn or damaged.
the vehicle is not washed after damage the surface. Do not use
Wipers can be damaged by: driving on roads that have been chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
. Extreme dusty conditions sprayed with magnesium, calcium Notice: Using chrome polish on
or sodium chloride. These aluminum wheels could damage
. Sand and salt chlorides are used on roads for the wheels. The repairs would
. Heat and sun conditions such as ice and dust. not be covered by the vehicle
.
Always wash the vehicle's warranty. Use chrome polish
Snow and ice, without proper chrome with soap and water
removal on chrome wheels only.
after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on
Notice: Using strong soaps, chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
chemicals, abrasive polishes, any painted surface of the wheel,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners and buff off immediately after
that contain acid on aluminum application.
or chrome-plated wheels, could
Vehicle Care 10-107
Notice: Driving the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage Chemicals used for ice and snow
through an automatic car wash removal and dust control can collect
If the vehicle is damaged and
that has silicone carbide tire on the underbody. If these are not
requires sheet metal repair or
cleaning brushes, could damage removed, corrosion and rust can
replacement, make sure the body
the aluminum or chrome-plated develop on the underbody parts
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
wheels. The repairs would not be such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
material to parts repaired or
covered by the vehicle warranty. and exhaust system even though
replaced to restore corrosion
Never drive a vehicle that has they have corrosion protection.
protection.
aluminum or chrome-plated At least every spring, flush these
wheels through an automatic car Original manufacturer replacement
materials from the underbody with
wash that uses silicone carbide parts will provide the corrosion
plain water. Clean any areas where
tire cleaning brushes. protection while maintaining the
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
vehicle warranty.
Tires packed in close areas of the frame
Finish Damage should be loosened before being
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush flushed. Your dealer or an
with tire cleaner. Any stone chips, fractures or deep underbody car washing system
scratches in the finish should be can do this.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
repaired right away. Bare metal will
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
corrode quickly and may develop Steering, Suspension, and
into major repair expense. Chassis Components
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off Minor chips and scratches can be Visually inspect front and rear
any overspray from all painted repaired with touch-up materials suspension and steering system
surfaces on the vehicle. available from your dealer. Larger for damaged, loose, or missing
areas of finish damage can be parts or signs of wear. Inspect
corrected in your dealer's body power steering lines and hoses for
and paint shop. proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
10-108 Vehicle Care
cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check loosened before being flushed. Your the carpet, fabric, leather, and
constant velocity joints, rubber dealer or an underbody car washing plastic surfaces. Stains should be
boots, and axle seals for leaks. system can do this. removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Lubricate Body Components Chemical Paint Spotting
Lighter colored interiors may
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning.
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can
steel fuel door hinge unless the fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings
components are plastic. Applying upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the
silicone grease on weatherstrips the vehicle. This damage can take interior.
with a clean cloth will make them two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
last longer, seal better, and not stick discolorations, and small, irregular Remove dust from small buttons
or squeak. dark spots etched into the paint and knobs with a small brush with
surface. soft bristles.
Underbody Maintenance
Although no defect in the paint job Your dealer has products for
Chemicals used for ice and snow causes this, we will repair, at no cleaning the interior. When cleaning
removal and dust control can collect charge to the owner, the surfaces of the interior, only use cleaners
on the underbody. If these are not new vehicles damaged by this specifically designed for the
removed, corrosion and rust can fallout condition within 12 months or surfaces that are being cleaned.
develop on the underbody parts 20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase, Permanent damage can result from
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, whichever occurs first. using cleaners on surfaces for
and exhaust system even though which they were not intended. Apply
they have corrosion protection. the cleaner directly to the cleaning
Interior Care
Flush these materials from the cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove
The interior will continue to look any accidental over-spray from
underbody with plain water. Clean
its best if it is cleaned often. Dust other surfaces immediately.
any areas where mud and debris
can collect. Dirt packed in close and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
areas of the frame should be
Vehicle Care 10-109
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners

. Never apply heavy pressure or always try to remove them first with
when cleaning glass surfaces on rub aggressively with a cleaning plain water or club soda. Before
the vehicle, could scratch the cloth. Use of heavy pressure can cleaning, gently remove as much of
glass and/or cause damage to the damage the interior and does the soil as possible using one of the
rear window defogger. When not improve the effectiveness of following techniques:
cleaning the glass on the vehicle, soil removal. . For liquids: gently blot the
use only a soft cloth and glass . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. remaining soil with a paper
cleaner. Avoid laundry detergents or towel. Allow the soil to absorb
Cleaners can contain solvents that dishwashing soaps with into the paper towel until no
can become concentrated in the degreasers. Using too much more can be removed.
interior. Before using cleaners, read soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
. For solid dry soils: remove as
and adhere to all safety instructions much as possible and then
on the label. While cleaning the For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of vacuum.
interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening the doors water is a good guide. To clean:
and windows. . Do not heavily saturate the 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
Do not clean the interior using the upholstery while cleaning. cloth with water or club soda.
following cleaners or techniques: . Cleaners that contain solvents 2. Remove excess moisture.
. Never use a knife or any other can damage the interior.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
sharp object to remove a soil Fabric/Carpet soil and gently rub toward the
from any interior surface. center. Continue cleaning, using
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft a clean area of the cloth each
. Never use a stiff brush. It can brush attachment to remove dust
cause damage to the interior time it becomes soiled.
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
surfaces. with a beater bar in the nozzle may 4. Continue to gently rub the
only be used on floor carpet and soiled area.
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
10-110 Vehicle Care
5. If the soil is not completely To remove dust, a soft cloth Instrument Panel, Vinyl and
removed, use a mild soap dampened with water can be used. other Plastic Surfaces
solution and repeat the cleaning If a more thorough cleaning is
process that was used with plain necessary, a soft cloth dampened To remove dust, a soft cloth
water. with a mild soap solution can be dampened with water can be used.
used. Your dealer has a GM If a more thorough cleaning is
If any of the soil remains, a necessary, a clean soft cloth
commercial fabric cleaner or spot approved leather cleaner available
that provides superior cleaning dampened with a mild soap solution
lifter may be necessary. Test a small can be used to gently remove dust
hidden area for colorfastness before performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers. and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
using a commercial upholstery removers on plastic surfaces.
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do
not use heat, steam, spot lifters or Many commercial cleaners and
cleaned area gives any impression coatings that are sold to preserve
that a ring formation may result, spot removers, or shoe polish on
leather. Many commercial leather and protect soft plastic surfaces
clean the entire surface. may permanently change the
cleaners and coatings that are sold
A paper towel can be used to blot to preserve and protect leather appearance and feel of the interior
excess moisture from the fabric or may permanently change the and are not recommended. Do not
carpet after the cleaning process. appearance and feel of the leather use silicone or wax-based products,
and are not recommended. Do not or those containing organic solvents
Leather/Leatherette use silicone or wax-based products, to clean the interior because they
Leather, and lighter colored leather or those containing organic solvents can alter the appearance by
in particular, will need more frequent to clean the interior because they increasing the gloss in a
cleaning to prevent the buildup of can alter the appearance by non-uniform manner.
dust, dirt, and colors transferred increasing the gloss in a Some commercial products may
from other items so that these do non-uniform manner. increase gloss on the instrument
not become permanent stains. panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
Vehicle Care 10-111
windshield and even make it difficult Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
to see through the windshield under proper floor mat usage.
certain conditions.
Notice: Air fresheners contain
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for the
solvents that may cause damage If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need
to plastics and painted surfaces. is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
Follow the manufacturer’s interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be
instructions when using air pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
fresheners in the vehicle. If air Interference with the pedals can may not fit properly and may
freshener comes in contact with cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
paint or a plastic surface, blot and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
immediately with a soft cloth. distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
Damage caused by using air and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals.
fresheners would not be covered mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
by the vehicle warranty. correct side up. Do not turn
accelerator or brake pedal.
Care of Safety Belts it over.
Keep belts clean and dry.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
{ WARNING . Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. . Do not place one floor mat on
It may severely weaken them. In
top of another.
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
10-112 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
Maintenance This maintenance section applies to
vehicles with a gasoline engine.
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
For diesel engine vehicles, see the Please read the information under
General Information maintenance schedule section in Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 the Duramax Diesel Supplement. the vehicle in good condition, see
Notice: Maintenance intervals, your dealer.
Scheduled Maintenance checks, inspections, The maintenance schedule is for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 recommended fluids, and vehicles that:
Recommended Fluids, lubricants are necessary to keep . Carry passengers and cargo
Lubricants, and Parts this vehicle in good working
within recommended limits on
Recommended Fluids and condition. Damage caused by
the Tire and Loading Information
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 failure to follow scheduled
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
Maintenance Replacement maintenance might not be
on page 9‑22.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 covered by the vehicle warranty.
. Are driven on reasonable road
As the vehicle owner, you are
Maintenance Records responsible for the scheduled
surfaces within legal driving
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-12 limits.
maintenance in this section.
We recommend having your . Are driven off-road in the
dealer perform these services. recommended manner. See
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to Off-Road Driving on page 9‑7.
keep the vehicle in good working . Use the recommended fuel.
condition, improves fuel economy, See Recommended Fuel on
and reduces vehicle emissions for page 9‑79.
better air quality.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work can
listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance
Lubricants on page 11‑8 and
be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑11. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter.
have the required know-how and See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
An Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
have a qualified technician do the performance of the vehicle, it is When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation SOON message displays in the
Service Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed. Driver Information Center (DIC),
Tires should be rotated every service is required for the vehicle as
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire soon as possible, within the next
At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 10‑70. 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under
that you will receive the highest the best conditions, the engine oil
level of service available. life system might not indicate the
Your dealer has specially trained need for vehicle service for more
service technicians, uses genuine than a year. The engine oil and filter
replacement parts, as well as, must be changed at least once a
up‐to‐date tools and equipment year and the oil life system must be
to ensure fast and accurate reset. Your dealer has trained
diagnostics. service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is reset

. Windshield washer fluid level . Fluids visual leak check
accidentally, service the vehicle check. See Washer Fluid on (or every 12 months, whichever
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since page 10‑29. occurs first). A leak in any
the last service. Reset the oil life . Windshield wiper blade system must be repaired and
system whenever the oil is changed. inspection for wear, cracking, the fluid level checked.
See Engine Oil Life System on or contamination and windshield . Engine air cleaner filter
page 10‑12. and wiper blade cleaning, inspection. See Engine Air
if contaminated. See Exterior Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑20.
Every Engine Oil Change
Care on page 10‑104. Worn or . Brake system inspection
. Change engine oil and filter. damaged wiper blade (or every 12 months, whichever
Reset oil life system. See replacement. See Wiper Blade occurs first).
Engine Oil on page 10‑8 and Replacement on page 10‑40.
Engine Oil Life System on . For vehicles with Allison
. Tire inflation pressures check. Transmission® only: At the first
page 10‑12. An Emission
See Tire Pressure on engine oil change only, replace
Control Service.
page 10‑63. external transmission filter.
. Engine coolant level check. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire . Steering and suspension
See Engine Coolant on
Inspection on page 10‑69. inspection. Visual inspection for
page 10‑22.
. Rotate tires if necessary. damaged, loose, or missing
. Engine cooling system
See Tire Rotation on parts or signs of wear.
inspection. Visual inspection of
page 10‑70.
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.

. Lubricate the front suspension, Applying silicone grease on Additional Required Services
steering linkage, and parking weatherstrips with a clean cloth
brake cable guides. Control arm makes them last longer, seal At the First 160 km/100 Miles,
ball joints on 2500/3500 series better, and not stick or squeak. 1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and
vehicles require lubrication but 10 000 km/6,000 Miles
. Restraint system component
should not be lubricated unless . For vehicles with dual wheels:
their temperature is −12°C check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑28. Check dual wheel nut torque.
(10°F) or higher, or they could For proper torque, see
be damaged. Control arm ball . Fuel system inspection for Capacities and Specifications on
joints on 1500 series vehicles damage or leaks. page 12‑2.
are maintenance‐free. Vehicles . Exhaust system and nearby heat Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
used under severe commercial
shields inspection for loose or
operating conditions require . Rotate tires. Tires should be
damaged components.
lubrication on a regular basis rotated every 12 000 km/
every 5 000 km/3,000 miles. . Vehicles with diesel engine or 7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation
GVWR above 4 536 kg on page 10‑70.
. Body hinges and latches, key
(10,000 lbs) only: Shields
lock cylinders, folding seat At Each Fuel Stop
inspection for damage or
hardware, and tailgate hinges,
looseness. Adjust or replace . Engine oil level check.
linkage, and handle pivot points
as required. This is a Noise See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
lubrication. See Recommended
Emission Control Service.
Fluids and Lubricants on . Engine coolant level check.
Applicable to vehicles sold in the
page 11‑8. More frequent See Engine Coolant on
United States and recommended
lubrication may be required page 10‑22.
for vehicles sold in Canada.
when the vehicle is exposed
to a corrosive environment.
. Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑29.
Once a Month
. See Ignition Transmission Lock First Engine Oil Change After
Check on page 10‑39. Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
. Tire inflation pressures check.
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
See Tire Pressure on . Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer
page 10‑63. Mechanism Check on case fluid change (extreme duty
page 10‑40. service) for vehicles mainly
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑69.
. Accelerator pedal check for driven off‐road in four‐wheel
damage, high effort, or binding. drive. Vehicles used for farming,
. Sunroof track and seal Replace if needed. mining, forestry, Department of
inspection, if equipped. Natural Resources (DNR), and
See Sunroof (Extended Cab) on
. Underbody flushing service. snow plowing occupations meet
page 2‑20 or Sunroof (Crew . Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass this definition. Check vent hose
Cab) on page 2‑21. Support Gas Strut Service: at transfer case for kinks and
Once a Year Visually inspect gas strut, proper installation. Check to be
if equipped, for signs of wear, sure vent hose is unobstructed,
. See Starter Switch Check on cracks, or other damage. Check clear, and free of debris. During
page 10‑38. the hold open ability of the gas any maintenance, if a power
. See Automatic Transmission strut. Contact your dealer if washer is used to clean mud
Shift Lock Control Function service is required. and dirt from the underbody,
Check on page 10‑39. care should be taken to not
directly spray the transfer case
output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
First Engine Oil Change After

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer . Evaporative control system
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles case fluid change (severe inspection. Check all fuel and
service) for vehicles mainly vapor lines and hoses for proper
. Engine air cleaner filter driven when frequently towing a hook‐up, routing, and condition.
replacement. See Engine Air trailer, or used for taxi, police, Check that the purge valve,
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑20. or delivery service. Check vent if the vehicle has one, works
. Automatic transmission fluid hose at transfer case for properly. Replace as needed.
change (severe service) for kinks and proper installation. An Emission Control Service.
vehicles with Gross Vehicle Check to be sure vent hose is The U.S. Environmental
Weight Rating (GVWR) over unobstructed, clear, and free of Protection Agency or the
3 901 kg (8,600 lbs) or mainly debris. During any maintenance, California Air Resources Board
driven in heavy city traffic in hot if a power washer is used to has determined that the failure
weather, in hilly or mountainous clean mud and dirt from the to perform this maintenance item
terrain, when frequently towing a underbody, care should be taken will not nullify the emission
trailer, or used for taxi, police, to not directly spray the transfer warranty or limit recall liability
or delivery service. See case output seals. High pressure prior to the completion of
Automatic Transmission Fluid water can overcome the seals the vehicle's useful life.
(4-Speed Transmission) on and contaminate the transfer We, however, urge that all
page 10‑13 or Automatic case fluid. Contaminated fluid recommended maintenance
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed will decrease the life of the services be performed at the
Transmission) on page 10‑16. transfer case and should be indicated intervals and the
replaced. maintenance be recorded.
First Engine Oil Change After care should be taken to not First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles directly spray the transfer case Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
. Automatic transmission fluid output seals. High pressure . Engine cooling system drain,
change (normal service). water can overcome the seals flush, and refill (or every
See Automatic Transmission and contaminate the transfer five years, whichever occurs
Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on case fluid. Contaminated fluid first). See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑13 or Automatic will decrease the life of the page 10‑22. An Emission
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed transfer case and should be Control Service.
Transmission) on page 10‑16. replaced.
. Engine drive belts inspection
. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer
. Spark plug replacement and for fraying, excessive cracks,
case fluid change (normal spark plug wires inspection. or obvious damage (or every
service). Check vent hose at An Emission Control Service. 10 years, whichever occurs
transfer case for kinks and first). Replace, if needed.
proper installation. Check to be . Manual transmission fluid
sure vent hose is unobstructed, change.
clear, and free of debris. During
any maintenance, if a power
washer is used to clean mud
and dirt from the underbody,
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an
Allison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑22.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967,
Hydraulic Brake System
in Canada 89021320).
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967,
Hydraulic Clutch System
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
®
Automatic Transmission DEXRON -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349,
Manual Transmission
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Key Lock Cylinders
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Floor Shift Linkage
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle (1500 Series) SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671,
Four‐Wheel Drive in Canada 89021672).
Front Axle (1500, 2500 HD, and SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,
3500 HD Series) in Canada 89021678).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,
Rear Axle
Transfer Case (Four‐Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or
One-Piece Propshaft Spline Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879,
(Two-Wheel Drive with in Canada 10953511).
4‐Speed Auto. Trans.)
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Rear Driveline Center Spline
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Hinges
Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate
Hinge and Linkage, Folding Seats,
and Fuel Door Hinge
Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
Latch Bolt, and Linkage in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287,
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C
Oil Filter
4.3L V6 25010792 PF47
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 12568387 41-101
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 12621258 41-110
Wiper Blades – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-6 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
. Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be . Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑8 for more information.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
4.3L V6 1500 Series 15.6 L 16.5 qt
4.8L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt
5.3L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt
6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 15.5 L 16.4 qt
6.2L V8 1500 Series 15.9 L 16.8 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box 98.4 L 26.0 gal
1500 Series Long Box 128.7 L 34.0 gal
2500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
3500 Series Chassis Cab 240.4 L 63.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped) 151.4 L 40.0 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
12-4 Technical Data
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid - Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 4.7 L 5.0 qt
6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E 6.0 L 6.3 qt
6-Speed Transmission Allison 7.0 L 7.4 qt
Transmission Fluid - Manual (Drain and Refill)
1500 Series 4.4 L 4.6 qt
3500 Series 3.5 L 3.7 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6 (LU3) X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in)
4.8L V8 (L20) A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 0 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Iron Block) (LMG)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 3 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Aluminum Block) (LC9)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (LC8) B Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96) G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.2L V8 FlexFuel
2 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Aluminum Block) (L9H)
12-6 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the Duramax diesel supplement
information.
Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-11 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 can occur. If your concern has not
Text Telephone (TTY) Users
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-17 If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Program Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service,
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18 or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency of your dealership or the general
Appointments Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 manager.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
Center at 1-800-222-1020. Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Line
In Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Program using the toll-free
Canada Customer Communication sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, the following address:
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other
be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre,
Limited wants you to be aware of 1-800-263-3777 (English),
its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French),
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited The Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Centre Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
may include an informal hearing See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is Your inquiry should be accompanied
Customer Assistance
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). Procedure
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
decision, should be completed in very important to your dealer and
about 70 days. We believe our General Motors.
impartial program offers advantages Normally, any problem with the
over courts in most jurisdictions transaction, sale, or usage of the
because it is informal, quick, and vehicle must be handled by your
free of charge. dealer sales or service departments.
However, we recognize that despite STEP THREE See Customer Assistance Offices
the good intentions of all parties If your case is not resolved in a (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or
involved, sometimes a reasonable amount of time by your Customer Assistance Offices
misunderstanding may occur. dealer, please call the General (Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
If you have a problem that has not Motors Customer Assistance information.
been satisfactorily handled through Center (CAC) and provide the
the normal means, we suggest the following information: Customer Assistance
following steps: . Name Offices (U.S. and Canada)
STEP ONE . Address Chevrolet encourages customers
Explain your case to your dealer to call the toll-free number for
. Phone number
service agent, service manager, assistance. However, if a customer
dealer sales agent, or sales
. Model year wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
manager, depending on your case. . Brand the letter should be addressed to:
Make sure that they have all . Vehicle Identification United States
necessary information. They are Number (VIN) Chevrolet Motor Division
interested in your continual . Mileage Chevrolet Customer Assistance
satisfaction.
Center
. Delivery date
STEP TWO P.O. Box 33170
If you are not satisfied, please
. Description of the problem Detroit, MI 48232-5170
contact the general manager or your . Dealership name www.Chevrolet.com
dealership owner to ask for their 1-800-222-1020
help. If they are not able to resolve
. Dealership address
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
your case, ask them to contact the Telephone Devices (TTYs))
right people at General Motors for Roadside Assistance:
support, if needed. 1-800-243-8872
From Puerto Rico: Mexico, Central America, and Mexico

1-800-496-9992 (English) Caribbean Islands/Countries From Mexico City
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) 5329-0811
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
General Motors de Mexico, S. de From Other Mexico Locations
1-800-496-9994
R.L. de C.V. 01-800-466-0811
Canada Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 United States and Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited Col. Granada
Customer Communication Centre, 1-866-466-8190
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Costa Rica
1908 Colonel Sam Drive 01-800-466-0800
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 00-800-052-1005
www.gm.ca
Customer Assistance Guatemala
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French) Offices (Mexico) 1-800-999-5252
1-800-263-3830 (For Text To contact the Customer Assistance Panama
Telephone devices (TTYs)) Center (CAC), use the phone
Roadside Assistance: 00-800-052-0001
numbers listed in this section.
1-800-268-6800 Customer assistance is available Dominican Republic
Overseas Monday through Friday, 08:00 to 1-888-751-5301
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
Please contact the local General 08:00 to 15:00 hours. El Salvador
Motors Business Unit.
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 800-6273
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com. Honduras
800-0122-6101

. Chevrolet dealer locator for
Customer Assistance for service nationwide.
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
Text Telephone (TTY) . access to:
Exclusive privileges and offers.
Users (U.S. and Canada) . My Showroom: Find and save
. Recall notices for your specific
To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle. information on vehicles and
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired current offers in your area.
and who use Text Telephones
. OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries. . My Dealers: Save details such
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
as address and phone number
equipment available at its Customer Other Helpful Links for each of your preferred
Assistance Center. Any TTY user
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com GM dealers.
in the U.S. can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: Chevrolet Merchandise — . My Driveway: Access quick links
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in www.chevymall.com to parts and service estimates,
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. check trade-in values,
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ or schedule a service
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do appointment by adding the
Online Owner Center . FAQ vehicles you own to your
Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.) driveway profile.
. Contact Us
www.chevyownercenter.com . My Preferences: Manage your
Information and services My GM Canada www.gm.ca profile and use tools and forms
customized for your specific My GM Canada is a with greater ease.
vehicle — all in one convenient password-protected section of
place. To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
www.gm.ca where you can save section within www.gm.ca.
. Digital owner manual, warranty information on GM vehicles, get
information, and more. personalized offers, and use handy
. tools and forms with greater ease.
Storage for online service and
maintenance records.

. Odometer reading, Vehicle
GM Mobility Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
Reimbursement Program Program (U.S. and delivery date of the vehicle.
(U.S. and Canada) Canada) . Description of the problem.
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, Coverage
call 1‐800‐243‐8872;
Services are provided up to
(Text Telephone (TTY):
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),
1‐888‐889‐2438).
whichever comes first.
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, In the U.S., anyone driving the
call 1-800-268-6800. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost Service is available 24 hours a day, person driving the vehicle without
reimbursement of eligible 365 days a year. permission from the owner is not
covered.
aftermarket adaptive equipment Calling for Assistance
required for the vehicle, such as Roadside Assistance is not a part of
When calling Roadside Assistance, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
hand controls or a wheelchair/ have the following information
scooter lift for the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
ready: Canada Limited reserve the right to
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
. Your name, home address, and make any changes or discontinue
call the GM Mobility Assistance home telephone number. the Roadside Assistance program at
Center at 1-800-323-9935. any time without notification.
. Telephone number of your
Text Telephone (TTY) users, location. Chevrolet and General Motors of
call 1-800-833-9935. Canada Limited reserve the right to
. Location of the vehicle. limit services or payment to an
General Motors of Canada
also has a Mobility Program.
. Model, year, color, and license owner or driver if they decide the
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) plate number of the vehicle. claims are made too often, or the
for details. TTY users call same type of claim is made many
1-800-263-3830. times.
Services Provided
. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Delivery of enough fuel for the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
vehicle to get to the nearest properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
service station. responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
unlock the vehicle if you are covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
locked out. A remote unlock may this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
be available if you have OnStar. jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
For security reasons, the driver registration is required.
must present identification Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
before this service is given. Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are
. Emergency Tow From a Public . Impound towing caused by provided when requested
Road or Highway: Tow to the violation of any laws. either with the most direct route
nearest Chevrolet dealer for . Legal fines. or the most scenic route.
warranty service, or if the vehicle There is a limit of six requests
was in a crash and cannot be . Mounting, dismounting, per year. Additional travel
driven. Assistance is also given or changing of snow tires, information is also available.
when the vehicle is stuck in the chains, or other traction devices. Allow three weeks for delivery.
sand, mud, or snow. . Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
250 kilometers from where Program (Mexico) Appointments
your trip was started to Roadside Assistance is available (U.S. and Canada)
qualify. General Motors of 24 hours a day, 365 days of
Canada Limited requires When the vehicle requires
the year. warranty service, contact your
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy For detailed information about dealer and request an appointment.
of the repair orders. Once Roadside Assistance, please see By scheduling a service
authorization has been received, the brochure provided with your new appointment and advising the
the Roadside Assistance advisor vehicle or visit our website at: service consultant of your
will help to make arrangements www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigate transportation needs, your dealer
and explain how to receive the site and click on “Asistencia en can help minimize your
payment. el Camino.” E-mail correspondence inconvenience.
should be sent to: If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
. Alternative Service: asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com.
If assistance cannot be provided into the service department
right away, the Roadside To contact Roadside Assistance by immediately, keep driving it until it
Assistance advisor may give phone, use the following numbers: can be scheduled for service,
permission to get local unless, of course, the problem is
Mexico safety related. If it is, please call
emergency road service.
You will receive payment, up to 01-800-466-0800 your dealership, let them know this,
$100, after sending the original and ask for instructions.
United States
receipt to Roadside Assistance. If your dealer requests you to bring
Mechanical failures may be 1-866-466-8901 the vehicle for service, you are
covered, however any cost for Canada urged to do so as early in the work
parts and labor for repairs not day as possible to allow for the
covered by the warranty are the 1-800-268-6800 same day-repair.
owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be
Canada) completed while you wait. However, If the vehicle requires overnight
if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public
To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by transportation is used instead of
experience, we and our participating providing several transportation your dealer's shuttle service, the
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the expense must be supported by
Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can original receipts and can only be up
program for vehicles with the offer one of the following: to the maximum amount allowed by
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty GM for shuttle service. In addition,
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service for U.S. customers, should you
extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred arrange transportation through
hybrid‐specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy a friend or relative, limited
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable
Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your fuel expenses may be available.
options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption Claim amounts should reflect actual
reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes costs and be supported by original
warranty repairs are required. one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service receipts. See your dealer for
within reasonable time and distance information regarding the allowance
Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area. amounts for reimbursement of fuel
part of the New Vehicle Limited or other transportation costs.
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair

Your dealer may arrange to provide Information (U.S. and Canada)
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle If the vehicle is involved in a
service, may not be available at collision and it is damaged, have the
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your
for an overnight warranty repair. damage repaired by a qualified
dealer for specific information technician using the proper
Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
Transportation arrangements will be parts. Poorly performed collision
receipts. This requires that you sign administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement repairs diminish the vehicle resale
personnel. value, and safety performance can
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the be compromised in subsequent
Requirements vary and may include right to unilaterally modify, collisions.
minimum age requirements, change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to Collision Parts
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel resolve all questions of claim Genuine GM Collision parts are new
usage charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and parts made with the same materials
responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its and construction methods as the
fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion. parts with which the vehicle was
usage beyond the completion of the originally built. Genuine GM
repair. Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
It may not be possible to provide a appearance, durability, and safety
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts covered by the GM New Vehicle Many insurance policies provide
may also be used for repair. These Limited Warranty, and any vehicle reduced protection to the GM
parts are typically removed from failure related to such parts is not vehicle by limiting compensation
vehicles that were total losses in covered by that warranty. for damage repairs by using
prior crashes. In most cases, the aftermarket collision parts. Some
parts being recycled are from Repair Facility insurance companies will not
undamaged sections of the vehicle. GM also recommends that you specify aftermarket collision parts.
A recycled original equipment GM choose a collision repair facility that When purchasing insurance, we
part may be an acceptable choice to meets your needs before you ever recommend that you ensure that the
maintain the vehicle's originally need collision repairs. Your dealer vehicle will be repaired with GM
designed appearance and safety may have a collision repair center original equipment collision parts.
performance; however, the history of with GM-trained technicians and If such insurance coverage is not
these parts is not known. Such parts state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be available from your current
are not covered by the GM New able to recommend a collision insurance carrier, consider switching
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any repair center that has GM-trained to another insurance carrier.
related failures are not covered by technicians and comparable If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
that warranty. equipment. company may require you to have
Aftermarket collision parts are also Insuring The Vehicle insurance that ensures repairs with
available. These are made by Genuine GM Original Equipment
companies other than GM and may Protect your investment in the Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
not have been tested for the vehicle. GM vehicle with comprehensive Genuine Manufacturer replacement
As a result, these parts may fit and collision insurance coverage. parts. Read the lease carefully, as
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ There are significant differences in you may be charged at the end of
corrosion problems, and may not the quality of coverage afforded by the lease for poor quality repairs.
perform properly in subsequent various insurance policy terms.
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
If a Crash Occurs
. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember,
Number (VIN). recycled parts will not be covered by
If there has been an injury, call . Insurance company and policy the GM vehicle warranty.
emergency services for help. Do not
number. Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the but you must live with the repair.
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle. Depending on your policy limits,
puts you in danger, or you are Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
instructed to move it by a police that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
officer. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
Give only the necessary information section. the repair professional, and insist on
to police and other parties involved Genuine GM parts. Remember,
If the airbag has inflated, see What if the vehicle is leased, you may be
in the crash. Will You See after an Airbag obligated to have the vehicle
For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 3‑35. repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Roadside Assistance Program even if your insurance coverage
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or Managing the Vehicle Damage
does not pay the full cost.
Roadside Assistance Program Repair Process
(Mexico) on page 13‑9. If another party's insurance
In the event that the vehicle requires
company is paying for the repairs,
Gather the following information: damage repairs, GM recommends
you are not obligated to accept a
. Driver name, address, and that you take an active role in its
repair valuation based on that
telephone number. repair. If you have a pre-determined
insurance company's collision policy
repair facility of choice, take the
. Driver license number. repair limits, as you have no
vehicle there, or have it towed there.
. contractual limits with that company.
Owner name, address, and Specify to the facility that any
In such cases, you can have control
telephone number. required replacement collision parts
of the repair and parts choices as
. Vehicle license plate number. be original equipment parts, either
long as the cost stays within
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
. Vehicle make, model, and reasonable limits.
model year.
Service Publications Owner Information Current and Past Models

Ordering Information Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
Service Manuals to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the ORDER TOLL FREE:
and repair information on the 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
engines, transmission, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
steering, body, etc. For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Booklet.
Service Bulletins give additional Or write to:
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
needed to knowledgeably service
shipping fees. P.O. Box 07130
General Motors cars and trucks.
Detroit, MI 48207
Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only. Prices are subject to change
service of the vehicle. without notice and without incurring
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
obligation. Allow ample time for
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
delivery.
shipping fees.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in
U.S. funds.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may
to the United States call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
a crash or could cause injury or write to: Transport Canada
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Road Safety Branch
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. 2780 Sheffield Road
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that
information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how a
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, the vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed.
Center computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record data
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 The EDR in this vehicle is designed
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Customer Communication Centre, data to help your dealer technician
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, . How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the
in which crashes and injuries occur. consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with
if the vehicle is leased, with the an active OnStar system, that
Important: EDR data is recorded system may also record data in
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or crash or near crash‐like situations.
crash situation occurs; no data is The OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM in the OnStar glove box kit,
and crash location) is recorded. at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such as collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
law enforcement, could combine
be made available to others for pressing the Q button and
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely research purposes, where a need is speaking to an advisor.
acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. Navigation System
To read data recorded by an EDR, If the vehicle has a navigation
special equipment is required, and system, use of the system may
access to the vehicle or the EDR is result in the storage of destinations,
needed. In addition to the vehicle addresses, telephone numbers, and
manufacturer, other parties, such as other trip information. Refer to the
law enforcement, that have the navigation system operating manual
special equipment, can read the for information on stored data and
information if they have access to for deletion instructions.
the vehicle or the EDR.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) Statement
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
connection with conveniences rules and with Industry Canada
such as key fobs for remote door Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
locking/unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
personal information or link with any interference.
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake

What Makes an Airbag System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
What Will You See after an Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-40
When Should an Airbag Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
Add-On Electrical
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-31 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Adding a Snow Plow or
Airbags Assistance Program,
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117
On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
Adjustable Throttle and
On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-23 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Adjustments
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-20
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Airbag
Alarm System Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-46
Adding Equipment to the
Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Automatic
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Antenna Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Airbag System
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Anti-theft
How Does an Airbag
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-47
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-42 Brake Bulb Replacement (cont.)

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13, 10-16 Pedal and Adjustable Pick-up Box Identification
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45 Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 and Fender Marker
Shift Lock Control Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-27 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Auxiliary Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66 Stoplamps, and
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 C
B Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 California
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94 Center High-Mounted Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-80
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Perchlorate Materials
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Voltage and Charging Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-40 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Capacities and
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-46 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
INDEX i-3
Carbon Monoxide Child Restraints Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Infants and Young Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Lower Anchors and Coolant
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-56 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Cautions, Danger, and Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47 Engine Temperature
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65, 3-67 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Courtesy Transportation
Center High-Mounted Cleaning Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Climate Control Systems . . . 8-1, 8-4 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4, 13-5
Check Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4 Text Telephone (TTY)
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Ignition Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Customer Information
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-39 Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Service Publications
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-11 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
i-4 INDEX
D Driving E
Characteristics and
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-11 E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
Danger, Warnings, and Electrical Equipment,
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16 Electrical System
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-34
Daytime Running Engine Compartment
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-18
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuses and Circuit
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-21
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Instrument Panel Fuse
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Door Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Engine
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Check and Service Engine
Dual Automatic Climate
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Dual Tire
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-6 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Driver Information Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
DVD
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Coolant Temperature
Rear Seat Entertainment
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
INDEX i-5
Engine (cont.) F Fog Lamps

Cooling System Messages . . .5-43 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fan
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-34, 9-50
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-29
Features
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Overheated Protection Front Fog Lamp
Filter,
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Front Seats
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-41 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-80
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Engine Oil E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-81
Fluid
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Filling a Portable Fuel
Automatic
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84
Transmission . . . . . . . 10-13, 10-16
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-83
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-80
Four-Wheel Drive
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-80
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-31
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-3
i-6 INDEX
Fuel (cont.) Gauges (cont.) H

Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Requirements, California . . . . .9-80 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuel Economy Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuses Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Engine Compartment Warning Lights and
Daytime Running
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuses and Circuit General Information
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Instrument Panel Fuse Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
G Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Heater
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Heating and Air
Gasoline Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-80 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Gauges High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-64
Engine Coolant Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
INDEX i-7
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-18 J Lamps (cont.)

Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-66 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-24
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Pick-up Box Identification
How to Wear Safety Belts K and Fender Marker . . . . . . . . 10-44
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-45 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Keyless Entry Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
I Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Idle System LATCH System
Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 L Replacing Parts after a
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-56 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Lamps Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Auxiliary Roof Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Infants and Young Children, Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Lighting
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Instrument Panel Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Lights
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Exterior Lamps Off Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
i-8 INDEX
Lights (cont.) Locks (cont.) Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Antilock Brake System Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-27 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-31 Messages
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Lower Anchors and Tethers Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-31 for Children (LATCH Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-47
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Battery Voltage and
Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3 M Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-43
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Maintenance Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-20 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Maintenance Schedule Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-30 Recommended Fluids and Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2 Object Detection System . . . . .5-46
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Locks Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-24 Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
INDEX i-9
Messages (cont.) O Overheated Engine

Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Protection
Object Detection System
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Mirrors Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Automatic Dimming
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 P
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Park
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Oil
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72
Engine Oil Pressure
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Brake and P (Park)
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Monitor System, Tire Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-40
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-39
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-47
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Passenger Airbag Status
N OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Navigation Operation, Infotainment Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-40
Vehicle Data Recording System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Perchlorate Materials
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Ordering Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-14 Personalization
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-37 Outlets Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
i-10 INDEX
Phone R Rearview Mirror

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Radio Frequency
Pick-up Box Identification Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18
and Fender Marker Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Recommended
Radios
Pickup Conversion to Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-79
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121 Recommended Fluids and
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Power Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Records
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Recreational Vehicle
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-36 Reimbursement Program,
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Remote Keyless Entry
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Rear Seat Entertainment
Pregnancy, Using Safety Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Replacement
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-46
Privacy Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 3-12
Radio Frequency Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-74
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18 Replacement Parts
Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Program Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Proposition 65 Warning, Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-47
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
INDEX i-11
Replacing LATCH System S Seats

Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Replacing Safety Belt Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-29 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Reporting Safety Defects Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
How to Wear Safety Belts
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 3-12
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Restraints Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54 Securing Child
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-29
Retained Accessory Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65, 3-67
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-27
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Security
Safety Defects Reporting
Ride Control Systems Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Roads Service
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Accessories and
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Roadside Assistance Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Roof Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-21 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-12
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-9
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Maintenance, General
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-6 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
i-12 INDEX
Service (cont.) Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66 Switches

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Publications Ordering Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 System
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-9 Starting the Vehicle Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Shift Lock Control Function Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Check, Automatic Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 T
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Shifting Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Signals, Turn and Storage Areas Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Specifications and Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Tires
StabiliTrak Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-21 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
INDEX i-13
Tires (cont.) Towing Truck-Camper Loading

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-85 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105 Turn and Lane-Change
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-85 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-99 Turn Signal
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-66 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-89 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Trailer Sway
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-116 U
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-72
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Trailer Uniform Tire Quality
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-65 Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . .9-116 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-58
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63
Terminology and Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Transmission Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Uniform Tire Quality Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-13, 10-16
Wheel Alignment and Tire Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 V
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Vehicle
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-77 Transportation Program, Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
When It Is Time for New Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Identification
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
i-14 INDEX
Vehicle (cont.) W When It Is Time for New

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Warning
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-54
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Vehicle Care Windshield
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Vehicle Identification Winter
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-50
Service Parts Identification Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Wheels
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-40
Alignment and Tire
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2011 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart " : Charging System : : Oil Pressure

In Brief Sensing System for

Instrument Panel (Premium Version)

Initial Drive See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote

The engine will continue to run for Door Locks Windows

See Remote Vehicle Start on K: Press to unlock the doors.

On vehicles with a power sliding

To adjust a power seat, if equipped: To adjust the power lumbar support,

To recline a manual seatback:

Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Storing Memory Positions

See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Heated Seats Head Restraint

Safety Belts Sensing System for The passenger airbag status

Mirror Adjustment See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑14 or Interior Mirror

Dome Lamp Override Reading Lamps Exterior Lighting

6: Turn the band up for more Climate Controls

A. Fan Control E. Outside Air

Climate Control System (With Heater Only)

A. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems (with

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

The Range Selection Mode switch,

Press the plus/minus buttons, Four-Wheel Drive Manual Transfer Case

This transfer case shift lever is on

Electronic Transfer Case Automatic Transfer Case AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel

Vehicle Features 4: Press to switch the display

Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls b g : Press to silence the vehicle

The compass and outside air Vehicle Customization

Rear Vision Ultrasonic Parking Assist Power Outlets

Universal Remote System Sunroof Open: From the vent position,

Crew Cab Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To Performance and

Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar® How OnStar Service Works

OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle,

Leaving children in a vehicle with Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

Once two remote starts, or a single Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Doors The rear access door must be

Open the rear doors to access the

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Tailgate Open the tailgate by lifting up on its To remove the tailgate:

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

Reverse this procedure to reinstall If a locked driver door is opened

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

The theft-deterrent system will not Testing the Alarm Immobilizer

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows